Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card
User Guide
Issue 49
Date 2022-01-24
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://e.huawei.com
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

User Guide About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the appearances and features of the redundant array of
independent disks (RAID) controller cards, how to configure RAID arrays, and how
to install drivers. The RAID controller cards include the LSI SAS2208, LSI SAS2308,
LSI SAS3008IR, LSI SAS3008IT, LSI SAS3108, LSI SoftRAID, PM8060, and PM8068.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Technical support engineers

● Maintenance engineers
The server maintenance personnel must have adequate knowledge about the
server products and service skills to avoid injury to human body or damage to
devices during maintenance.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Symbol Description
Supplements the important information in the main text.

NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all changes made in previous issues.
Issue Date Description
49 2022-01-24 ● Modified section

"Importing or
Clearing a Foreign
Configuration" for
each RAID controller
card.
● Changed the table
remark format.
48 2021-10-21 ● Added the

expandarray
parameter and its
description for RAID
array capacity
expansion.
● Optimized the LSI
SAS3108 RAID
controller card.
● Optimized the
description of the
drive strip size.
47 2021-08-28 Modified 4.7.5 RAID

Controller Card Not
Healthy in Device
Manager.
46 2021-08-13 Added precautions for

capacity expansion by
adding drives.
45 2021-07-27 Optimized the "Common

Commands" section for
card.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

44 2021-07-01 Optimized the

description of
parameters related to
RAID array configuration.
43 2021-06-21 Modified 4.5.8

Discarding Preserved
Cache.
42 2021-05-31 Added the description

about the Mini-SAS port
on some RAID controller
cards.
41 2021-04-06 Modified 8.2.17 Drive

Passthrough.
40 2021-02-02 ● Added the description

of buzzer support to
RAID controller cards.
● Added the description
of the default strip
size of each RAID
controller card.
39 2020-11-27 Added a new structure

diagram to "Overview"
section of LSI SAS3108
RAID controller card.
38 2020-08-24 Added 7.3.2.1 Setting

Boot Devices for a RAID
Controller Card.
37 2020-04-29 ● Modified 8.2.1 RAID

0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and
60.
● Modified 8.11.1
Downloading and
Installing StorCLI.
● Added restrictions on
adding drives to a
RAID array for
capacity expansion.
36 2019-10-30 Added 4.6.8 Creating

Multiple Virtual Drives
and 8.6.11 Creating
Multiple Virtual Drives.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

35 2019-08-17 Modified description

about the methods for
logging in to the
Configuration Utility of
card.
34 2019-08-06 ● Modified 5.10.1

Downloading and
Installing SAS2IRCU.
● Modified 2 Technical
Specifications.
● Modified 6.7.1 Drive
Fault.
33 2019-05-21 Modified 8.4.1 Logging

In to the Management
Screen.
32 2019-04-09 Modified 2 Technical

Specifications.
31 2019-03-20 Modified 4.2.1 RAID 0,

1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60
and 8.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5,
6, 10, 50, and 60.
30 2019-01-31 Updated the document.
29 2019-01-10 Added 8.5.8 Managing

the Security Key and
8.6.10 Managing the
Security Key.
28 2018-12-30 Modified 4.4.6 Creating

RAID 10, 4.4.7 Creating
RAID 50, and 4.4.8
Creating RAID 60.
27 2018-12-07 The description of the

RAID controller card
property screen of the
LSI SAS3108 is
optimized.
26 2018-10-30 Optimized the method

of deleting the preserved
cache in Legacy mode on
LSI SAS3108.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

25 2018-08-28 Modified the "Drive

Faults" section for each
type of RAID controller
card.
24 2018-08-21 Added the overview and

configuration about LSI
SAS3008IT.
23 2018-07-20 Added the description of

indicators on RAID
controller cards.
22 2018-06-26 Added operations for

restoring drives to the
Frn-bad state for the LSI
SAS3108.
21 2018-05-23 Deleted the chapter

"Environmental
Specifications".
20 2018-04-20 ● Optimized the

document structure.
● Updated GUI
screenshots for the
LSI SAS3108 to match
firmware
4.660.00-8102 or
later, and added new
parameters.
19 2018-01-25 Added the meaning of

suffixes in RAID
controller card names.
18 2018-01-10 Added MegaRAID

Storage Manager
description for the LSI
SAS2208 and LSI
SAS3108.
17 2017-12-22 Added RAID controller

card features.
16 2017-10-16 Optimized the document

structure.
15 2017-08-01 This issue is the fifteenth

official release.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

14 2017-05-20 This issue is the

fourteenth official
release
13 2016-10-27 This issue is the

thirteenth official
release.
12 2016-03-28 Added the PM8060 and

PM8068.
11 2016-01-30 Deleted the JBOD

information about LSI
SAS3108.
10 2015-10-28 Added the note about

authentication
mechanism.
09 2015-09-15 Optimized the document

structure.
08 2014-12-23 This issue is the eighth

official release.
07 2014-09-18 This issue is the seventh

official release.
06 2014-03-03 Added the restriction on

the number of drives
supported by the LSI
SAS2308.
05 2013-06-30 Added the introduction

to and configuration of
SoftRAID.
04 2013-04-19 Added sections

"Identifying RAID
Controller Card Models"
and "Expanding RAID
Array Capacity", and
corrected some format
errors. Updated the
supported RAID
controller card types.
03 2012-08-30 Added drive parameters

for each RAID controller
card.
02 2012-06-15 Added the appendix.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

01 2012-04-20 This issue is the first

official release.
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

User Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 RAID Controller Cards.............................................................................................................1
2 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 5
3 RAID Features......................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Drive Group and Virtual Drive.......................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2 Fault Tolerance.......................................................................................................................................................................14
3.3 Consistency Check................................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.4 Hot Spares............................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.5 RAID Rebuild...........................................................................................................................................................................15
3.6 Drive States............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
3.7 Virtual Drive Read and Write Policies............................................................................................................................ 19
3.8 Power Failure Protection.................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.9 Drive Striping.......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.10 Drive Mirroring.................................................................................................................................................................... 22
3.11 Foreign Configuration....................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.12 Drive Power Saving............................................................................................................................................................ 23
3.13 Drive Passthrough.............................................................................................................................................................. 23
4 LSI SAS2208............................................................................................................................ 25
4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
4.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.......................................................................................................................................30
4.2.2 Drive Hot Spares................................................................................................................................................................ 31
4.2.3 Drive Hot Swap.................................................................................................................................................................. 32
4.2.4 Copyback.............................................................................................................................................................................. 33
4.2.5 Drive Striping...................................................................................................................................................................... 33
4.2.6 RAID Level Migration....................................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.7 Initialization......................................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.2.8 Capacity Expansion........................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.2.9 Secure Data Erasure......................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.2.10 Consistency Check...........................................................................................................................................................36
4.2.11 Cache Data Read/Write................................................................................................................................................ 36
4.2.12 Power Failure Protection.............................................................................................................................................. 37
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

User Guide Contents
4.2.13 Patrol Read........................................................................................................................................................................ 37

4.2.14 Automatic SMART Scanning....................................................................................................................................... 37
4.2.15 Drive Power Saving........................................................................................................................................................ 38
4.2.16 Drive Roaming................................................................................................................................................................. 38
4.2.17 Importing a Foreign Configuration........................................................................................................................... 38
4.2.18 Maintaining Drive Failure History............................................................................................................................. 38
4.3 Initial Configuration (Legacy/Dual Mode)................................................................................................................... 39
4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility..................................................................................................................... 39
4.3.2 Manually Creating a RAID 0 Array.............................................................................................................................. 43
4.3.6 Manually Creating a RAID 10 Array......................................................................................................................... 102
4.3.9 Automatically Creating a RAID Array.......................................................................................................................153
4.3.10 Setting Boot Device......................................................................................................................................................159
4.4 Initial Configuration (EFI/UEFI Mode)........................................................................................................................ 161
4.4.1 Logging In to the Management Screen.................................................................................................................. 162
4.4.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 164
4.4.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 170
4.4.4 Creating RAID 5............................................................................................................................................................... 177
4.4.5 Creating RAID 6............................................................................................................................................................... 184
4.4.6 Creating RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................. 191
4.4.7 Creating RAID 50............................................................................................................................................................. 199
4.4.8 Creating RAID 60............................................................................................................................................................. 207
4.4.9 Setting Boot Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 215
4.5 Common Tasks (Legacy/Dual Mode).......................................................................................................................... 215
4.5.1 Managing Spare Drives................................................................................................................................................. 215
4.5.1.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive................................................................................................................. 216
4.5.1.2 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive...........................................................................................................218
4.5.1.3 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive...................................................................................................................................... 221
4.5.2 Adding a Drive to a RAID Array................................................................................................................................. 223
4.5.3 Increasing Available RAID Space............................................................................................................................... 227
4.5.4 Migrating the RAID Level............................................................................................................................................. 230
4.5.5 Viewing the Status of a Virtual or Physical Drive................................................................................................ 233
4.5.6 Importing Foreign Configurations............................................................................................................................. 237
4.5.7 Clearing a Foreign Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 239
4.5.8 Discarding Preserved Cache........................................................................................................................................ 240
4.5.9 Performing a Consistency Check............................................................................................................................... 241
4.5.10 Deleting a RAID Array................................................................................................................................................. 243
4.6 Common Tasks (EFI/UEFI Mode).................................................................................................................................. 245
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

User Guide Contents

4.6.3 Expanding the Available Space of a Virtual Drive............................................................................................... 252
4.6.4 Deleting a RAID Array................................................................................................................................................... 255
4.6.5 Rebuilding RAID...............................................................................................................................................................256
4.6.6 Viewing RAID Controller Card Properties............................................................................................................... 258
4.6.7 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration.................................................................................................... 261
4.6.8 Creating Multiple Virtual Drives................................................................................................................................ 265
4.7 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................. 273
4.7.1 Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................................................... 273
4.7.2 RAID Controller Card Fault.......................................................................................................................................... 276
4.7.3 Battery or Capacitor Fault............................................................................................................................................ 276
4.7.4 Failed to Clear Preserved Cache.................................................................................................................................278
4.7.5 RAID Controller Card Not Healthy in Device Manager......................................................................................281
4.7.5.1 Some configured disks have been removed from your system/All of the disks from your previous
configuration are gone............................................................................................................................................................ 282
4.7.5.2 preserved cache............................................................................................................................................................ 284
4.7.5.3 VDs have missing disks.............................................................................................................................................. 288
4.8 Management Screens (Legacy/Dual Mode)............................................................................................................. 289
4.8.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility................................................................................................................... 289
4.8.2 Advanced Software Options........................................................................................................................................ 293
4.8.3 Controller Selection........................................................................................................................................................ 293
4.8.4 Controller Properties...................................................................................................................................................... 294
4.8.5 Scan Devices..................................................................................................................................................................... 311
4.8.6 Virtual Drives.................................................................................................................................................................... 311
4.8.7 Drives...................................................................................................................................................................................316
4.8.8 Configuration Wizard.................................................................................................................................................... 318
4.8.8.1 Clear Configuration..................................................................................................................................................... 319
4.8.8.2 New Configuration...................................................................................................................................................... 319
4.8.8.3 Add Configuration....................................................................................................................................................... 335
4.8.9 Logical/Physical View.....................................................................................................................................................336
4.8.9.1 Drive Group................................................................................................................................................................... 340
4.8.9.2 Virtual Drives.................................................................................................................................................................341
4.8.9.3 Drives............................................................................................................................................................................... 349
4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares.................................................................................................................................. 353
4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives................................................................................................................................................... 356
4.8.10 Events................................................................................................................................................................................361
4.8.11 Exit..................................................................................................................................................................................... 364
4.9 Configuration Utility (EFI/UEFI Mode)....................................................................................................................... 364
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

User Guide Contents
4.9.2 Configuration Management........................................................................................................................................ 366

4.9.2.1 Create Virtual Drive.................................................................................................................................................... 367
4.9.2.2 Create Profile Based Virtual Drive......................................................................................................................... 374
4.9.2.3 View Drive Group Properties................................................................................................................................... 376
4.9.2.4 Manage Foreign Configuration...............................................................................................................................377
4.9.3 Controller Management............................................................................................................................................... 379
4.9.3.1 Advanced Controller Management....................................................................................................................... 381
4.9.3.2 Advanced Controller Properties.............................................................................................................................. 386
4.9.4 Virtual Drive Management.......................................................................................................................................... 396
4.9.4.1 View Associated Drives.............................................................................................................................................. 399
4.9.4.2 Advanced........................................................................................................................................................................ 402
4.9.5 Drive Management.........................................................................................................................................................404
4.9.6 Hardware Components................................................................................................................................................. 408
4.9.7 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................409
4.10 Downloading MegaRAID Storage Manager........................................................................................................... 410
4.11 OS Command-Line Tool................................................................................................................................................. 410
4.11.1 Downloading and Installing StorCLI...................................................................................................................... 411
4.11.2 Common Commands...................................................................................................................................................411
4.11.2.1 Querying and Setting Spinup Parameters........................................................................................................ 412
4.11.2.2 Setting Drive PowerSave Parameters................................................................................................................. 413
4.11.2.3 Setting the Initialization Function for a Physical Drive and Viewing the Initialization Progress.. 414
4.11.2.4 Setting the Data Erasing Mode for a Drive and Viewing the Erasing Progress...................................415
4.11.2.5 Setting Background Task Resource Usage........................................................................................................417
4.11.2.6 Setting the BIOS Stop on Error Function.......................................................................................................... 418
4.11.2.7 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array...................................................................................................................419
4.11.2.8 Setting the cache read and write properties for a RAID array.................................................................. 423
4.11.2.9 Setting a RAID Access Policy................................................................................................................................. 424
4.11.2.10 Setting RAID Foreground Initialization............................................................................................................425
4.11.2.11 Setting RAID Background Initialization and Viewing the Initialization Progress..............................426
4.11.2.12 Setting Boot Device................................................................................................................................................ 427
4.11.2.13 Setting the Emergency Hot Spare Function.................................................................................................. 428
4.11.2.14 Setting the Hot Spare Drive Status.................................................................................................................. 429
4.11.2.15 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild, Copyback, and Patrolread Functions........................................430
4.11.2.16 Setting a SMART Scan Interval.......................................................................................................................... 431
4.11.2.17 Increasing Member Drive Available Space to Expand RAID.................................................................... 432
4.11.2.18 Expanding RAID Capacity by Adding New Drives and Changing the RAID Level............................ 433
4.11.2.19 Querying and Clearing PreservedCache Data...............................................................................................435
4.11.2.20 Setting Consistency Check Parameters........................................................................................................... 435
4.11.2.21 Querying and Setting Patrolread Parameters............................................................................................... 437
4.11.2.22 Querying and Setting CacheFlush Parameters............................................................................................. 438
4.11.2.23 Setting Drive Status............................................................................................................................................... 439
4.11.2.24 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator...................................................................................................441
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

User Guide Contents
4.11.2.25 Querying RAID Controller Card, RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information......................................442
4.11.2.26 Restoring Frn-Bad Drives..................................................................................................................................... 448
4.11.2.27 Query Supercapacitor Information................................................................................................................... 449
4.11.2.28 Upgrading the Drive Firmware.......................................................................................................................... 451
4.11.2.29 Rebuilding the RAID Array Manually............................................................................................................... 452
4.11.2.30 Setting the Cache Status of a Drive................................................................................................................. 454
4.11.2.31 Viewing, Importing, and Deleting Foreign Configurations.......................................................................455
5 LSI SAS2308.......................................................................................................................... 457

5.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 457
5.2 Functions............................................................................................................................................................................... 461
5.2.1 High-Speed Interfaces................................................................................................................................................... 461
5.2.2 Support for SAS/SATA/SSD Drives............................................................................................................................. 461
5.2.4 Automatic Fault Recovery............................................................................................................................................ 462
5.2.5 Drive Hot Spares............................................................................................................................................................. 462
5.2.6 Drive Passthrough........................................................................................................................................................... 462
5.2.7 Low-Level Formatting....................................................................................................................................................463
5.2.9 Drive Hot Swap................................................................................................................................................................ 463
5.2.10 RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E...................................................................................................................................................463
5.3 Initial Configuration (Legacy/Dual Mode)................................................................................................................ 464
5.3.2 Creating a RAID 0 Array............................................................................................................................................... 469
5.3.3 Creating a RAID 1 Array............................................................................................................................................... 473
5.3.4 Creating a RAID 1E or 10 Array................................................................................................................................. 476
5.4.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 483
5.4.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 487
5.4.4 Creating RAID 1E............................................................................................................................................................. 491
5.4.5 Creating RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................. 495
5.5.1 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive................................................................................................................................... 499
5.5.2 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive..........................................................................................................................................501
5.5.3 Activating a RAID Configuration............................................................................................................................... 503
5.5.4 Viewing Virtual Drive Information............................................................................................................................ 505
5.5.5 Viewing Physical Drive Information..........................................................................................................................508
5.5.7 Checking Consistency.................................................................................................................................................... 510
5.5.8 Viewing the Topology.................................................................................................................................................... 512
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

User Guide Contents

5.7.1 Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................................................... 522
5.8.2 RAID Properties................................................................................................................................................................ 529
5.8.2.1 Viewing Existing Volume........................................................................................................................................... 530
5.8.2.2 Creating RAID 1 Volume........................................................................................................................................... 535
5.8.2.3 Creating RAID 1E/10 Volume.................................................................................................................................. 537
5.8.2.4 Creating RAID 0 Volume........................................................................................................................................... 539
5.8.3 SAS Topology.................................................................................................................................................................... 541
5.8.4 Advanced Adapter Properties..................................................................................................................................... 544
5.8.5 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................547
5.9.2.1 Viewing Controller Properties..................................................................................................................................550
5.9.2.2 Changing Controller Properties.............................................................................................................................. 552
5.9.2.3 Creating Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 553
5.9.2.4 Managing Foreign Configurations......................................................................................................................... 556
5.9.2.5 Clearing Configurations............................................................................................................................................. 557
5.9.2.6 Saving Controller Events........................................................................................................................................... 558
5.9.3 Virtual Disk Management............................................................................................................................................ 560
5.9.3.1 Managing Virtual Disk Properties.......................................................................................................................... 560
5.9.3.2 Selecting Virtual Disk Operations.......................................................................................................................... 566
5.9.4 Physical Disk Management......................................................................................................................................... 568
5.9.4.1 Viewing Physical Disk Properties............................................................................................................................568
5.9.4.2 Selecting Physical Disk Operations........................................................................................................................570
5.9.5 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................571
5.10.1 Downloading and Installing SAS2IRCU................................................................................................................. 572
5.10.2 Common Commands...................................................................................................................................................573
5.10.2.1 Viewing All Controllers............................................................................................................................................ 573
5.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information.................................................................................................................................. 574
5.10.2.4 Deleting a RAID Array............................................................................................................................................. 577
5.10.2.5 Simulating a Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................... 577
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

User Guide Contents
5.10.2.6 Creating and Deleting a Hot Spare Drive......................................................................................................... 578

5.10.2.7 Viewing Virtual Drive Status................................................................................................................................. 579
5.10.2.8 Checking Consistency...............................................................................................................................................580
5.10.2.9 Activating a RAID Array.......................................................................................................................................... 581
5.10.2.10 Turning On Drive Indicators................................................................................................................................ 582
5.10.2.11 Collecting and Clearing RAID Array Event Logs...........................................................................................582
5.10.2.12 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Primary Boot Device.................................................................... 583
5.10.2.13 Setting a Specified Drive as the Primary Boot Device............................................................................... 584
5.10.2.14 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Alternate Boot Device................................................................. 585
5.10.2.15 Setting a Specified Drive as the Alternate Boot Device............................................................................ 585
6 LSI SAS3008IR...................................................................................................................... 587

6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 587
6.2 Functions............................................................................................................................................................................... 591
6.2.1 High-Speed Ports and Modules................................................................................................................................. 591
6.2.2 Support for Multiple Extended Devices................................................................................................................... 592
6.2.3 SAS/SATA/SSD Drives Supported............................................................................................................................... 592
6.2.6 Hot Spares......................................................................................................................................................................... 592
6.2.10 Drive Hot Swap............................................................................................................................................................. 594
6.2.11 RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E...................................................................................................................................................594
6.3.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 600
6.3.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 604
6.3.4 Creating RAID 1E or 10................................................................................................................................................. 607
6.3.5 Setting the Boot Device................................................................................................................................................ 610
6.4.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 614
6.4.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 618
6.4.4 Creating RAID 1E............................................................................................................................................................. 622
6.4.5 Creating RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................. 626
6.4.6 Configuring Boot Options............................................................................................................................................ 629
6.5.3 Activating a RAID Configuration............................................................................................................................... 635
6.5.4 Viewing Virtual Drive Information............................................................................................................................ 637
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

User Guide Contents
6.5.5 Viewing Physical Drive Information..........................................................................................................................639

6.5.7 Checking Consistency.................................................................................................................................................... 642
6.5.8 Viewing the Topology.................................................................................................................................................... 644
6.7.1 Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................................................... 658
6.8.2 RAID Properties................................................................................................................................................................ 665
6.8.2.1 View Existing Volume................................................................................................................................................. 666
6.8.2.2 Create RAID 1 Volume............................................................................................................................................... 671
6.8.2.3 Create RAID 1E/10 Volume...................................................................................................................................... 673
6.8.2.4 Create RAID 0 Volume............................................................................................................................................... 675
6.8.3 SAS Topology.................................................................................................................................................................... 677
6.8.5 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................685
6.9.2.1 View Controller Properties........................................................................................................................................ 689
6.9.2.2 Change Controller Properties.................................................................................................................................. 690
6.9.2.3 Create Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 691
6.9.2.4 Clear Configuration..................................................................................................................................................... 694
6.9.2.5 Manage Foreign Configuration...............................................................................................................................695
6.9.2.6 Save Controller Events............................................................................................................................................... 699
6.9.3 Virtual Disk Management............................................................................................................................................ 700
6.9.3.1 Manage Virtual Disk Properties.............................................................................................................................. 700
6.9.3.2 Select Virtual Disk Operations................................................................................................................................ 706
6.9.4.1 View Physical Disk Properties.................................................................................................................................. 708
6.9.4.2 Select Physical Disk Operations.............................................................................................................................. 710
6.9.5 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................711
6.10.1 Downloading and Installing SAS3IRCU................................................................................................................. 712
6.10.2 Common Commands...................................................................................................................................................712
6.10.2.1 Viewing All Controllers............................................................................................................................................ 713
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

User Guide Contents
6.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information.................................................................................................................................. 713

6.10.2.4 Deleting a Specified RAID Array.......................................................................................................................... 717
6.10.2.5 Simulating a Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................... 717
6.10.2.6 Creating and Deleting a Hot Spare Drive......................................................................................................... 718
6.10.2.7 Viewing Virtual Drive Status................................................................................................................................. 719
6.10.2.8 Performing a Consistency Check..........................................................................................................................720
6.10.2.9 Activating a RAID Array.......................................................................................................................................... 721
6.10.2.10 Turning On a Drive UID Indicator..................................................................................................................... 722
6.10.2.11 Collecting and Clearing RAID Array Event Logs...........................................................................................722
6.10.2.12 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Primary Boot Device.................................................................... 723
6.10.2.13 Setting a Specified Drive as the Primary Boot Device............................................................................... 724
6.10.2.14 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Second Boot Device..................................................................... 725
6.10.2.15 Setting a Specified Drive as the Second Boot Device.................................................................................725
7 LSI SAS3008IT.......................................................................................................................727
7.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 727
7.2 Functions............................................................................................................................................................................... 729
7.2.1 High-Speed Ports and Modules................................................................................................................................. 729
7.2.2 Support for Multiple Extended Devices................................................................................................................... 729
7.2.7 Drive Hot Swap................................................................................................................................................................ 730
7.3.2.1 Setting Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card............................................................................................. 736
7.3.2.2 Setting Boot Devices for a Server.......................................................................................................................... 738
7.4.2.1 Setting Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card............................................................................................. 740
7.4.2.2 Setting Boot Devices for a Server.......................................................................................................................... 740
7.5.1 Drive Fault......................................................................................................................................................................... 741
7.6.1 SAS Topology.................................................................................................................................................................... 742
7.6.3 Exit........................................................................................................................................................................................747
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

User Guide Contents

7.7.1.1 View Controller Properties........................................................................................................................................ 748
7.7.1.2 Change Controller Properties.................................................................................................................................. 750
7.7.2.1 View Physical Disk Properties.................................................................................................................................. 752
7.7.2.2 Select Physical Disk Operations.............................................................................................................................. 754
7.8 OS Command-Line Tool................................................................................................................................................... 755
7.8.1 Downloading and Installing SAS3IRCU................................................................................................................... 755
7.8.2 Common Commands..................................................................................................................................................... 756
7.8.2.1 Viewing All Controllers.............................................................................................................................................. 756
7.8.2.2 Viewing RAID Controller Card and Physical Drive Information...................................................................756
7.8.2.3 Simulating a Drive Fault........................................................................................................................................... 758
7.8.2.4 Turning On a Drive UID Indicator.......................................................................................................................... 758
8 LSI SAS3108.......................................................................................................................... 760

8.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 760
8.2 Functions............................................................................................................................................................................... 768
8.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.................................................................................................................................... 768
8.2.2 Hot Spares......................................................................................................................................................................... 769
8.2.3 Drive Hot Swap................................................................................................................................................................ 770
8.2.4 Copyback............................................................................................................................................................................ 771
8.2.5 Drive Striping.................................................................................................................................................................... 771
8.2.6 RAID Level Migration..................................................................................................................................................... 772
8.2.7 Initialization...................................................................................................................................................................... 773
8.2.8 Capacity Expansion......................................................................................................................................................... 774
8.2.9 Secure Data Erasure....................................................................................................................................................... 774
8.2.10 Write Hole Protection................................................................................................................................................. 775
8.2.11 Cache Data Read/Write.............................................................................................................................................. 775
8.2.12 Power Failure Protection............................................................................................................................................ 775
8.2.13 CacheCade.......................................................................................................................................................................776
8.2.14 Patrol Read..................................................................................................................................................................... 776
8.2.15 Automatic SMART Scanning..................................................................................................................................... 777
8.2.16 Drive Power Saving...................................................................................................................................................... 777
8.2.17 Drive Passthrough........................................................................................................................................................ 777
8.2.18 Drive Roaming............................................................................................................................................................... 778
8.2.19 Importing a Foreign Configuration.........................................................................................................................778
8.2.20 Maintaining Drive Failure History........................................................................................................................... 778
8.3.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 781
8.3.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 788
8.3.4 Creating RAID 5............................................................................................................................................................... 796
8.3.5 Creating RAID 6............................................................................................................................................................... 804
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii

User Guide Contents
8.3.6 Creating RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................. 812

8.3.7 Creating RAID 50............................................................................................................................................................. 820
8.3.8 Creating RAID 60............................................................................................................................................................. 828
8.4.2 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................... 839
8.4.3 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................... 846
8.4.4 Creating RAID 5............................................................................................................................................................... 853
8.4.5 Creating RAID 6............................................................................................................................................................... 860
8.4.6 Creating RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................. 867
8.4.7 Creating RAID 50............................................................................................................................................................. 875
8.4.8 Creating RAID 60............................................................................................................................................................. 884
8.4.9 Configuring Boot Options............................................................................................................................................ 892
8.5.6 Discarding Preserved Cache........................................................................................................................................ 904
8.5.7 Managing CacheCade.................................................................................................................................................... 906
8.5.7.1 Creating a CacheCade Virtual Drive......................................................................................................................906
8.5.7.2 Enabling SSD Caching for a Common Virtual Drive........................................................................................908
8.5.7.3 Deleting a CacheCade Virtual Drive......................................................................................................................909
8.5.8 Managing the Security Key..........................................................................................................................................911
8.5.8.1 Enabling the Encryption Function..........................................................................................................................911
8.5.8.2 Disabling the Encryption Function........................................................................................................................ 913
8.5.8.3 Changing the Password............................................................................................................................................. 914
8.5.8.4 Encrypting a JBOD Disk............................................................................................................................................. 916
8.5.8.5 Encrypting a RAID Array........................................................................................................................................... 917
8.6.1 Managing Hot Spare Drives........................................................................................................................................ 919
8.6.4 Migrating the RAID Level............................................................................................................................................. 930
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

User Guide Contents

8.6.6 Rebuilding RAID...............................................................................................................................................................937
8.6.9 Managing CacheCade.................................................................................................................................................... 946
8.6.9.1 Creating a CacheCade Virtual Drive......................................................................................................................946
8.6.9.2 Enabling SSD Caching for a Common Virtual Drive........................................................................................948
8.6.9.3 Deleting a CacheCade Virtual Drive......................................................................................................................950
8.6.10 Managing the Security Key....................................................................................................................................... 953
8.6.10.1 Enabling the Encryption Function....................................................................................................................... 953
8.6.10.2 Disabling the Encryption Function...................................................................................................................... 955
8.6.10.3 Changing the Password...........................................................................................................................................957
8.6.10.4 Encrypting a JBOD Disk.......................................................................................................................................... 962
8.6.10.5 Encrypting a RAID Array......................................................................................................................................... 963
8.6.11 Creating Multiple Virtual Drives.............................................................................................................................. 965
8.7.1 Drive Faults....................................................................................................................................................................... 973
8.7.1.1 Drive Fault...................................................................................................................................................................... 973
8.7.1.2 Fail or Prefail Drive..................................................................................................................................................... 976
8.7.1.3 Restoring a Drive in Frn-Bad State........................................................................................................................ 977
8.7.1.3.1 Legacy Mode..............................................................................................................................................................977
8.7.1.3.2 EFI/UEFI Mode...........................................................................................................................................................978
8.7.3 Supercapacitor Fault...................................................................................................................................................... 981
8.7.4 RAID Controller Card Not Healthy in Device Manager......................................................................................982
8.7.4.1 Error Message: "Some Configured Disks Have Been Removed from Your System/All of the Disks
from Your Previous Configuration Are Gone".................................................................................................................. 984
8.7.4.2 Offline or Missing Virtual Drive Fault...................................................................................................................985
8.7.4.3 Missing Disk Fault....................................................................................................................................................... 989
8.7.4.4 Cache Loss...................................................................................................................................................................... 990
8.7.5 Some RAID Controller Card Functions Became Unavailable After Personality Mode Is Set to JBOD-
Mode.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 990
8.8.2 VD Mgmt........................................................................................................................................................................... 993
8.8.2.1 SAS3108.......................................................................................................................................................................... 994
8.8.2.2 Drive Group................................................................................................................................................................... 997
8.8.2.3 Virtual Drive................................................................................................................................................................ 1004
8.8.2.4 Drives............................................................................................................................................................................. 1012
8.8.3 PD Mgmt......................................................................................................................................................................... 1014
8.8.4 Ctrl Mgmt........................................................................................................................................................................ 1021
8.8.5 Properties.........................................................................................................................................................................1027
8.8.6 Foreign View................................................................................................................................................................... 1028
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx

User Guide Contents
8.8.7 Exit..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1029

8.9 Configuration Utility (EFI/UEFI Mode)..................................................................................................................... 1030
8.9.1 Logging In to the Management Screen................................................................................................................ 1030
8.9.2 Main Menu..................................................................................................................................................................... 1031
8.9.2.1 Configuration Management.................................................................................................................................. 1032
8.9.2.2 Controller Management......................................................................................................................................... 1044
8.9.2.3 Virtual Drive Management.................................................................................................................................... 1051
8.9.2.4 Drive Management................................................................................................................................................... 1059
8.9.2.5 Hardware Components........................................................................................................................................... 1067
8.9.3 View Server Profile....................................................................................................................................................... 1070
8.9.4 View Foreign Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 1071
8.9.5 Configure......................................................................................................................................................................... 1072
8.9.6 Set Factory Defaults.................................................................................................................................................... 1073
8.9.7 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options............................................................................................. 1074
8.9.8 Exit..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1075
8.10 Downloading MegaRAID Storage Manager......................................................................................................... 1076
8.11 OS Command-Line Tool.............................................................................................................................................. 1076
8.11.1 Downloading and Installing StorCLI.................................................................................................................... 1077
8.11.2 Common StorCLI Commands................................................................................................................................. 1078
8.11.2.1 Querying the RAID Controller Card ID............................................................................................................ 1078
8.11.2.2 Querying and Setting Spinup Parameters...................................................................................................... 1079
8.11.2.3 Setting Drive PowerSave Parameters...............................................................................................................1080
8.11.2.4 Setting the Initialization Function for a Physical Drive and Viewing the Initialization Progress 1081
8.11.2.5 Setting the Data Erasing Mode for a Drive and Viewing the Erasing Progress................................ 1082
8.11.2.6 Setting Background Task Resource Usage..................................................................................................... 1084
8.11.2.7 Configuring the BIOS Function: Stop on Error..............................................................................................1085
8.11.2.8 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array................................................................................................................ 1086
8.11.2.9 Setting the Cache Read and Write Policies of a RAID Array................................................................... 1090
8.11.2.10 Setting an I/O Policy for a RAID Array..........................................................................................................1091
8.11.2.11 Setting a RAID Access Policy............................................................................................................................ 1093
8.11.2.12 Setting RAID Foreground Initialization......................................................................................................... 1094
8.11.2.13 Setting RAID Background Initialization and Viewing the Initialization Progress........................... 1095
8.11.2.14 Setting Boot Device............................................................................................................................................. 1096
8.11.2.15 Setting the Emergency Hot Spare Function................................................................................................ 1097
8.11.2.16 Setting the Hot Spare Drive Status................................................................................................................ 1098
8.11.2.17 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild.............................................................................................................. 1099
8.11.2.18 Querying and Setting Copyback..................................................................................................................... 1100
8.11.2.19 Setting a SMART Scan Interval........................................................................................................................ 1102
8.11.2.20 Increasing Member Drive Available Space to Expand RAID.................................................................. 1103
8.11.2.21 Adding Drives to a RAID Array or Migrating RAID Level After Expansion....................................... 1104
8.11.2.22 Querying and Clearing PreservedCache Data............................................................................................ 1106
8.11.2.23 Setting Consistency Check Parameters......................................................................................................... 1107
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

User Guide Contents
8.11.2.24 Querying and Setting Patrolread Parameters............................................................................................ 1108

8.11.2.25 Querying and Setting CacheFlush Parameters...........................................................................................1110
8.11.2.26 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function.........................................................................................1111
8.11.2.27 Setting Drive Status............................................................................................................................................. 1112
8.11.2.28 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator................................................................................................ 1115
8.11.2.29 Querying RAID Controller Card, RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information................................... 1116
8.11.2.30 Creating a CacheCade Virtual Drive.............................................................................................................. 1123
8.11.2.31 Restoring Frn-Bad Drives................................................................................................................................... 1124
8.11.2.32 Query Supercapacitor Information.................................................................................................................1125
8.11.2.33 Upgrading the Drive Firmware........................................................................................................................ 1127
8.11.2.34 Managing the Security Key............................................................................................................................... 1128
8.11.2.35 Rebuilding the RAID Array Manually............................................................................................................ 1130
8.11.2.36 Setting Auto-Restore of Hot Spare Drives................................................................................................... 1132
8.11.2.37 Setting the Cache Status of a Drive............................................................................................................... 1133
8.11.2.38 Viewing, Importing, and Deleting Foreign Configurations.................................................................... 1134
9 SoftRAID.............................................................................................................................. 1136
9.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................. 1136
9.2 Functions............................................................................................................................................................................. 1137
9.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10..................................................................................................................................................... 1137
9.2.2 Initialization.................................................................................................................................................................... 1138
9.2.3 Consistency Check........................................................................................................................................................ 1138
9.2.4 RAID Rebuild.................................................................................................................................................................. 1139
9.2.5 Mixed Use of Drives..................................................................................................................................................... 1139
9.2.6 Drive Hot Spares........................................................................................................................................................... 1139
9.2.7 Drive Hot Swap............................................................................................................................................................. 1139
9.3 Initial Configurations...................................................................................................................................................... 1140
9.3.1 Configuration process................................................................................................................................................. 1140
9.3.2 Logging In to the Configuration Utility................................................................................................................ 1140
9.3.3 Creating RAID 0............................................................................................................................................................. 1143
9.3.4 Creating RAID 1............................................................................................................................................................. 1149
9.3.5 Creating RAID 5............................................................................................................................................................. 1155
9.3.6 Creating RAID 10.......................................................................................................................................................... 1161
9.3.7 Setting Boot Device......................................................................................................................................................1167
9.4 Common Tasks.................................................................................................................................................................. 1168
9.4.1 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive.................................................................................................................................1168
9.4.2 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive....................................................................................................................................... 1171
9.4.3 Configuring Controller Properties........................................................................................................................... 1173
9.4.4 Configuring RAID Properties..................................................................................................................................... 1175
9.4.5 Configuring Drive Properties.................................................................................................................................... 1178
9.4.6 Rebuilding RAID............................................................................................................................................................ 1179
9.4.7 Checking Consistency.................................................................................................................................................. 1181
9.4.8 Clearing a RAID Array................................................................................................................................................. 1183
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii

User Guide Contents
9.5 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................................ 1184

9.5.1 Drive Fault....................................................................................................................................................................... 1184
9.6 Configuration Utility....................................................................................................................................................... 1185
9.6.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility................................................................................................................ 1185
9.6.2 Configure......................................................................................................................................................................... 1187
9.6.2.1 Easy Configuration.................................................................................................................................................... 1188
9.6.2.2 New Configuration................................................................................................................................................... 1191
9.6.2.3 View/Add Configuration......................................................................................................................................... 1196
9.6.2.4 Clear Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 1196
9.6.2.5 Set Boot Drive............................................................................................................................................................ 1196
9.6.3 Initialize............................................................................................................................................................................ 1197
9.6.4 Objects..............................................................................................................................................................................1199
9.6.4.1 Adapter......................................................................................................................................................................... 1199
9.6.4.2 Virtual Drive................................................................................................................................................................ 1201
9.6.4.3 Physical Drive..............................................................................................................................................................1205
9.6.5 Rebuild..............................................................................................................................................................................1208
9.6.6 Check Consistency........................................................................................................................................................ 1210
9.7.1 Downloading and Installing the MagaCLI Tool..................................................................................................1211
9.7.2 Common Commands...................................................................................................................................................1211
9.7.2.1 Querying RAID Array Information....................................................................................................................... 1211
9.7.2.2 Querying Drive Information.................................................................................................................................. 1213
9.7.2.3 Creating a RAID Array............................................................................................................................................. 1216
9.7.2.4 Creating a RAID 10 Array....................................................................................................................................... 1217
9.7.2.5 Deleting a RAID Array............................................................................................................................................. 1217
9.7.2.6 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator..................................................................................................... 1218
9.7.2.7 Configuring or Deleting a Global Hot Spare Drive........................................................................................1219
10 PM8060............................................................................................................................. 1220
10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................................... 1220
10.2 Functions.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1224
10.2.1 Support for Multiple RAID Levels......................................................................................................................... 1224
10.2.2 Drive Hot Spares.........................................................................................................................................................1225
10.2.3 Drive Hot Swap........................................................................................................................................................... 1225
10.2.4 Rebuild and Copyback.............................................................................................................................................. 1226
10.2.5 Drive Striping............................................................................................................................................................... 1226
10.2.6 Drive Passthrough...................................................................................................................................................... 1226
10.2.7 Initialization................................................................................................................................................................. 1227
10.2.8 Capacity Expansion.................................................................................................................................................... 1227
10.2.9 Cache Data Read/Write........................................................................................................................................... 1227
10.2.10 Power Failure Protection....................................................................................................................................... 1228
10.2.11 Import of Foreign Configurations...................................................................................................................... 1228
10.3 Initial Configuration (Legacy/Dual Mode)............................................................................................................1228
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii

User Guide Contents
10.3.1 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................... 1228

10.3.2 Logging In to the Configuration Utility.............................................................................................................. 1229
10.3.3 Creating a Volume..................................................................................................................................................... 1231
10.3.4 Creating RAID 0.......................................................................................................................................................... 1237
10.3.5 Creating RAID 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 1243
10.3.6 Creating RAID 5.......................................................................................................................................................... 1249
10.3.7 Creating RAID 6.......................................................................................................................................................... 1255
10.3.8 Creating RAID 10........................................................................................................................................................ 1261
10.3.9 Creating RAID 50........................................................................................................................................................ 1267
10.3.10 Creating RAID 60..................................................................................................................................................... 1273
10.3.11 Setting the Boot Device......................................................................................................................................... 1279
10.4 Initial Configuration (EFI/UEFI Mode)................................................................................................................... 1281
10.4.1 Logging In to the Management Screen..............................................................................................................1281
10.4.2 Creating SIMPLE_VOL............................................................................................................................................... 1284
10.4.3 Creating RAID 0.......................................................................................................................................................... 1292
10.4.4 Creating RAID 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 1300
10.4.5 Creating RAID 5.......................................................................................................................................................... 1308
10.4.6 Creating RAID 6.......................................................................................................................................................... 1316
10.4.7 Creating RAID 10........................................................................................................................................................ 1324
10.4.8 Creating RAID 50........................................................................................................................................................ 1332
10.4.9 Creating RAID 60........................................................................................................................................................ 1340
10.4.10 Setting Boot Devices............................................................................................................................................... 1348
10.5 Common Tasks (Legacy/Dual Mode)..................................................................................................................... 1348
10.5.1 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive.............................................................................................................................. 1348
10.5.2 Checking the Status of a Hot Spare Drive......................................................................................................... 1349
10.5.3 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive..................................................................................................................................... 1350
10.5.3.1 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive on the Configuration Utility......................................................................... 1350
10.5.3.2 Using the CLI............................................................................................................................................................ 1350
10.5.4 Configuring Boot Drives........................................................................................................................................... 1351
10.5.5 Expanding Array Capacity....................................................................................................................................... 1354
10.5.6 Deleting an Array....................................................................................................................................................... 1356
10.5.7 Viewing Supercapacitor Properties...................................................................................................................... 1358
10.6 Common Tasks (EFI/UEFI Mode)............................................................................................................................. 1360
10.6.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive................................................................................................................ 1360
10.6.2 Deleting a Global Hot Spare Drive...................................................................................................................... 1363
10.6.3 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive......................................................................................................... 1366
10.6.4 Deleting a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive................................................................................................................1370
10.7 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................. 1375
10.7.1 Drive Fault.................................................................................................................................................................... 1375
10.7.2 RAID Controller Card Fault..................................................................................................................................... 1376
10.7.3 Supercapacitor Fault................................................................................................................................................. 1376
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiv

User Guide Contents
10.8 Management Screens (Legacy/Dual Mode).........................................................................................................1377

10.8.2 Logical Device Configuration................................................................................................................................. 1379
10.8.2.1 Manage Arrays.........................................................................................................................................................1380
10.8.2.2 Create Array.............................................................................................................................................................. 1382
10.8.2.3 Initialize Drives........................................................................................................................................................ 1384
10.8.2.4 Secure Erase.............................................................................................................................................................. 1386
10.8.2.5 Uninitialize Drives................................................................................................................................................... 1387
10.8.2.6 Select Boot Device.................................................................................................................................................. 1389
10.8.3 Controller Settings..................................................................................................................................................... 1390
10.8.3.1 Controller Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 1391
10.8.3.2 Advanced Configuration....................................................................................................................................... 1394
10.8.3.3 Backup Unit Status................................................................................................................................................. 1396
10.8.4 Disk Utilities................................................................................................................................................................. 1397
10.8.5 Exit................................................................................................................................................................................... 1398
10.9 Management Sscreen (EFI/UEFI Mode)................................................................................................................ 1399
10.9.2 Logical Device Configuration................................................................................................................................. 1402
10.9.2.1 Manage Arrays.........................................................................................................................................................1404
10.9.2.2 Create Array.............................................................................................................................................................. 1408
10.9.2.3 Global Hotspares.................................................................................................................................................... 1411
10.9.3.1 Controller Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 1413
10.9.3.2 Advanced Configuration....................................................................................................................................... 1417
10.9.3.3 Bettery Backup Information................................................................................................................................ 1419
10.9.4 Disk Utilities................................................................................................................................................................. 1420
10.9.5 Administration............................................................................................................................................................. 1423
10.9.6 Exit................................................................................................................................................................................... 1425
10.10 OS Command-Line Tool............................................................................................................................................ 1425
10.10.1 Downloading and Installing ARCCONF............................................................................................................ 1425
10.10.2 Common Commands.............................................................................................................................................. 1426
10.10.2.1 Querying RAID Controller Card Hard Disk Information..........................................................................1426
10.10.2.2 Setting Spinup Parameters................................................................................................................................1427
10.10.2.3 Setting Drive Power Saving Parameters....................................................................................................... 1428
10.10.2.4 Setting the Device Initialization Function.................................................................................................... 1429
10.10.2.5 Setting the Task Priority..................................................................................................................................... 1431
10.10.2.6 Querying and Setting the Performance Mode of a RAID Controller Card....................................... 1431
10.10.2.7 Setting the Working Mode for a RAID Controller Card.......................................................................... 1433
10.10.2.8 Setting a SATA Password................................................................................................................................... 1435
10.10.2.9 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array.............................................................................................................. 1436
10.10.2.10 Setting the Cache Read and Write Properties for a RAID Array........................................................1438
10.10.2.11 Setting a Hot Spare Drive............................................................................................................................... 1439
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv

User Guide Contents
10.10.2.12 Changing the RAID Strip Size, Capacity, and Level................................................................................ 1440
10.10.2.13 Setting Consistency Check Parameters.......................................................................................................1441
10.10.2.14 Setting the Enable Status of NCQ................................................................................................................1442
10.10.2.15 Setting a Drive as a Pass-Through Drive....................................................................................................1443
10.10.2.16 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator.............................................................................................. 1443
10.10.2.17 Querying Device Information........................................................................................................................ 1444
10.10.2.18 Querying the Status of a Drive..................................................................................................................... 1445
11 PM8068............................................................................................................................. 1447
11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................................... 1447
11.2 Functions.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1450
11.2.1 Support for Multiple RAID Levels......................................................................................................................... 1450
11.2.2 Drive Hot Spares.........................................................................................................................................................1451
11.2.3 Rebuild and Copyback.............................................................................................................................................. 1451
11.2.4 Drive Striping............................................................................................................................................................... 1451
11.2.5 Drive Passthrough...................................................................................................................................................... 1452
11.2.6 Capacity Expansion.................................................................................................................................................... 1452
11.2.7 Import of Foreign Configurations......................................................................................................................... 1452
11.3 Initial Configuration (Legacy/Dual Mode)............................................................................................................1453
11.3.1 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................... 1453
11.3.3 Creating RAID 0.......................................................................................................................................................... 1455
11.3.4 Creating RAID 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 1459
11.3.5 Creating RAID 5.......................................................................................................................................................... 1463
11.3.6 Creating RAID 10........................................................................................................................................................ 1467
11.3.7 Configuring a Logical Drive as the Boot Device.............................................................................................. 1471
11.4 Initial Configuration (EFI/UEFI Mode)................................................................................................................... 1473
11.4.2 Creating RAID 0.......................................................................................................................................................... 1474
11.4.3 Creating RAID 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 1481
11.4.4 Creating RAID 5.......................................................................................................................................................... 1487
11.4.5 Creating RAID 10........................................................................................................................................................ 1493
11.4.6 Setting Boot Devices................................................................................................................................................. 1499
11.5 Common Tasks (Legacy/Dual Mode)..................................................................................................................... 1499
11.5.3 Configuring Boot Drives........................................................................................................................................... 1504
11.5.4 Adding logical drives to an Array......................................................................................................................... 1506
11.6 Common Tasks (EFI/UEFI Mode)............................................................................................................................. 1511
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvi

User Guide Contents
11.7 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................. 1519

11.7.1 Drive Fault.................................................................................................................................................................... 1519
11.7.2 RAID Controller Card Fault..................................................................................................................................... 1520
11.8 Configuration Utility (Legacy/Dual mode)........................................................................................................... 1521
11.8.2 Logical Device Configurations............................................................................................................................... 1522
11.8.2.1 Managing Arrays..................................................................................................................................................... 1523
11.8.2.2 Creating Arrays........................................................................................................................................................ 1528
11.8.2.3 Selecting Boot Devices.......................................................................................................................................... 1530
11.8.3.1 Configuring the Controller...................................................................................................................................1531
11.8.3.2 Setting Controller Port Mode............................................................................................................................. 1533
11.8.3.3 Setting Advanced Controller Properties.......................................................................................................... 1534
11.8.3.4 Clearing Controller Configurations................................................................................................................... 1536
11.8.4 Disk Utilities................................................................................................................................................................. 1537
11.8.5 Exit................................................................................................................................................................................... 1539
11.9 Configuration Utility (EFI/UEFI Mode)...................................................................................................................1539
11.9.2 Controller Information..............................................................................................................................................1541
11.9.3 Controller Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 1542
11.9.3.1 Setting Controller Properties.............................................................................................................................. 1543
11.9.3.2 Clearing Controller Configurations................................................................................................................... 1544
11.9.4 Array Configuration................................................................................................................................................... 1546
11.9.4.1 Selecting Drives and Creating Arrays...............................................................................................................1546
11.9.4.2 Managing Array LD................................................................................................................................................ 1550
11.9.4.2.1 List of Logical Drives.......................................................................................................................................... 1551
11.9.4.2.2 Management of Hot Spare Drives.................................................................................................................1553
11.9.5 Disk Utilities................................................................................................................................................................. 1554
11.9.6 Administration............................................................................................................................................................. 1556
11.9.7 Exit................................................................................................................................................................................... 1557
11.10 OS Command-Line Tool............................................................................................................................................ 1557
11.10.1 ARCCONF Download and Installation.............................................................................................................. 1557
11.10.2 Common Commands.............................................................................................................................................. 1558
11.10.2.1 Setting Spinup Parameters................................................................................................................................1558
11.10.2.2 Setting Drive Power Saving Parameters....................................................................................................... 1559
11.10.2.3 Setting the Device Initialization Function.................................................................................................... 1559
11.10.2.4 Setting the Task Priority..................................................................................................................................... 1561
11.10.2.5 Querying and Setting the Performance Mode of a RAID Controller Card....................................... 1561
11.10.2.6 Setting the Working Mode for a RAID Controller Card.......................................................................... 1563
11.10.2.7 Setting a SATA Password................................................................................................................................... 1565
11.10.2.8 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array.............................................................................................................. 1566
11.10.2.9 Setting a Cache Read and Write Policy........................................................................................................ 1568
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii

User Guide Contents
11.10.2.10 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive...................................................................................................................... 1569

11.10.2.11 Changing the RAID Strip Size, Capacity, and Level................................................................................ 1570
11.10.2.12 Setting Consistency Check Parameters.......................................................................................................1571
11.10.2.13 Setting the Enable Status of NCQ................................................................................................................1571
11.10.2.14 Setting a Drive as a Pass-Through Drive....................................................................................................1572
11.10.2.15 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator.............................................................................................. 1573
11.10.2.16 Querying Device Information........................................................................................................................ 1573
11.10.2.17 Querying the Status of a Drive..................................................................................................................... 1574
A Appendix.............................................................................................................................1576
A.1 Common Tasks................................................................................................................................................................. 1576
A.1.1 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management Screen in EFI/UEFI Mode (Brickland Platform)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1576
A.1.2 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management Screen in EFI/UEFI Mode (Grantley Platform)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1577
A.1.3 Setting the Legacy Mode...........................................................................................................................................1580
A.1.4 Setting the EFI/UEFI Mode........................................................................................................................................1583
A.1.5 Downloading and Installing the RAID Controller Card Driver......................................................................1586
A.1.6 Managing the RAID Controller Card Through the iBMC................................................................................ 1588
A.2 RAID Levels........................................................................................................................................................................ 1588
A.2.1 RAID 0.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1588
A.2.2 RAID 1.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1589
A.2.3 RAID 5.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1590
A.2.4 RAID 6.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1590
A.2.5 RAID 10............................................................................................................................................................................ 1591
A.2.6 RAID 1E............................................................................................................................................................................ 1592
A.2.7 RAID 50............................................................................................................................................................................ 1593
A.2.8 RAID 60............................................................................................................................................................................ 1593
A.2.9 Fault Tolerance Capabilities...................................................................................................................................... 1594
A.2.10 I/O Performance......................................................................................................................................................... 1595
A.2.11 Storage Capacity........................................................................................................................................................ 1596
A.3 Common Boot Error Messages for RAID Controller Cards................................................................................ 1597
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxviii

User Guide 1 RAID Controller Cards
1 RAID Controller Cards
This section describes RAID controller card types and naming rules.
Table 1-1 describes the controller cards supported by Huawei servers.
Various RAID controller cards support different types of servers and OSs. Obtain
details from Computing Product Compatibility Checker.
Table 1-1 RAID controller card types and basic parameters

Chip Code RAID Description
Key
Require
d
LSI 02310QN Yes RU320BC,LSI 2208 RAID

SAS2208 M Card,RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60,512MB,
16HDD,Board ID 0X22,Support Battery and
SuperCap
02310QN Yes RU320BC,LSI 2208 RAID

K Card,RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60,1GB,
16HDD,Board ID 0X2b,Support Battery and
SuperCap
02310QN Yes SR320BC Server Raid Controller - LSI 2208

L - SAS/SATA 6G - RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60 -
512MB - 16 HDD - Board ID 0X22-Support
Battery and SuperCap
02310QN Yes SR320BC,LSI 2208 RAID

J Card,RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60,1GB,16
HDD,Board ID 0X2b,Support Battery and
SuperCap
02310SR Yes SR420BC,LSI 2208 RAID

U Card,RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60,1GB,32
HDD,Board ID 0X2b,Support Battery and
SuperCap,All
Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1


Key
Require
d
02310NK Yes SR520C,LSI 2208 RAID

T Card,RAID0,1,10,5,50,6,60,1GB,32
HDD,CacheCade2.0,Board ID 0X2b,Only
Support SuperCap,All
LSI 03021EN No SR120 SAS/SATA RAID Card,RAID0,1,1E,

SAS2308 L 10,0 Cache(LSI2308),Board ID 0X21,2*2
03021FT No RU120 SAS/SATA RAID Card,RAID0,1,10,1E,

X 0 Cache(LSI2308),Board ID 0X21,2*2
LSI 03022CD No SR130 SAS/SATA RAID Card,RAID0,1,10,1E,

SAS3008 E 0 Cache(LSI3008),Board ID 0X2C,2*2
03022QK No RU130 SAS/SATA RAID Card,RAID0,1,10,1E,

U 0 Cache(LSI3008),Board ID 0X2C,2*2
03023QG No RH2288 V3,BC61ESMNA,SR130-

H M(LSI3008),SAS/SATA HBA Card,Unsupport
RAID,Board ID 0X29,IT work pattern,
Support Out-of-Band Management,2*2
03024JXJ No SR130 SAS/SATA RAID Card,RAID0,1,10,1E,

0 Cache(LSI3008)-Board ID
0X27,customraid-2*2
03023YL No E9000,BC01ESMNB,RU130-iMR SAS/SATA

D HBA Card,Sideband Management
Supported,0 Cache(LSI3008),Board ID
0X2E,2*2
LSI 02310UU Yes SR430C 1GB,BC1M05ESMQ,LSI 3108 RAID

SAS3108 B Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
32HDD,Board ID 0X24,Support SuperCap
02310UU Yes SR430C 2GB,BC1M05ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

A Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
32HDD,Board ID 0X2D,Support SuperCap
02311GS Yes SR630C 1GB,BC1M10ESMQ,LSI3108 RAID

F card-Board ID 0X24-RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60-
Support SuperCap(greater than 32 HDDs
Chassis)
02311GS Yes SR630C 2GB,BC1M10ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

G CARD-Board ID 0X2d-RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60-
Support SuperCap(greater than 32 HDDs
Chassis)


Key
Require
d
02311DN Yes RU430C 1GB,IT1M01ESMQ,LSI 3108 RAID

Y Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
02311DP Yes RU430C 2GB,IT1M01ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

A Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
02311NL Yes SR530C 1GB,BC1M12ESMQ,LSI 3108 RAID

C Card,Cachecade
Key,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
02311NH Yes SR530C 2GB,BC1M05ESMM,LSI 3108 RAID

K Card,Cachecade
Key,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
02311PT Yes RU530C 1GB,IT1M07ESMQ,LSI 3108 RAID

X Card,CacheCade,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
02311PT Yes RU530C 2GB,IT1M08ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

Y Card,CacheCade,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
02311PCJ Yes SR430C-M 1G,BC1M15ESMQ,LSI 3108

RAID Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
32HDD,Support SuperCap and Out-of-
Band Management,Board ID 0X24
02311PC Yes SR430C-M 2G,BC1M16ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

H Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
32HDD,Support SuperCap and Out-of-
Band Management,Board ID 0X2D
02311RS Yes SR630C 1GB,BC1M10ESMQ,LSI3108 RAID

T card-Board ID 0X24-RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60-
Support SuperCap and Sideband
Management(greater than 32 HDDs
Chassis)
02311RS Yes SR630C 2GB,BC1M10ESML,LSI 3108 RAID

U CARD-Board ID 0X2d-
RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60-2GB-Support
SuperCap and Sideband
Management(greater than 32 HDDs
Chassis)


Key
Require
d
02311RS Yes SR530C 1GB,BC1M12ESMQ,LSI 3108 RAID

W Card,Cachecade,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,1GB,
and Sideband Management
02311RS Yes SR530C 2GB,BC1M05ESMM,LSI 3108 RAID

X Card,Cachecade,RAID0,1,5,6,10,50,60,2GB,
and Sideband Management
LSI 0520044 No Embedded OS,Embedded MegaRAID

SoftRAID 9 Software RAID for BIOS,Paper LABEL,Intel
Grantley,Embedded RAID label optionROM,
support RAID0/1/10
PM8060 03022JW No SR425C SAS/SATA RAID

U Card,RAID0,1,5,6,10,1E,50,60,1G
Cache,Support SuperCap,Board ID 0X23,2*2
03023K No RH2288 V3,CN21ITRA,SP435(PMC 8060

WH PCIE Raid Card),2GB Cache,SuperCap,PCIE
3.0 X8-Vendor ID 9005-Device ID
028D-1,1*2
PM8068 03023DL No RH2288 V3,BC11ESMS,SR130 SAS/SATA

X HBA RAID (PMC 8068) PCIE x8 FASTENING
CARD, NONE CACHE, SUPPORTING
RAID0,1,10,5,Board ID 0X20,2*2
Table 1-2 describes the meanings of suffixes in RAID controller card names.
Table 1-2 Meanings of suffixes in RAID controller card names

Suffix Support for Support for Support for Support for
RAID Arrays Out-of-Band Supercapacit Cache
Management or/Battery
IT No Yes No No
IR Yes No No No
iMR Yes Yes No No
MR Yes Yes Yes Yes

User Guide 2 Technical Specifications
2 Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of RAID controller cards.

Table 2-1 describes the basic parameters of RAID controller cards.
Table 2-1 Basic parameters

Param LSI LSI LSI LSI LSI LSI PM806 PM806
eter SAS22 SAS23 SAS30 SAS SAS31 SoftRA 0 8
08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
Port 6 6 12 12 12 6 12 12
rate (Only
(Gbit/s SATA
) drives
are
suppor
ted.)
Numbe 64 2 2 N/A 64 8 64 64
r of
suppor
ted
RAID
arrays
Maxim 16/32 10 10 N/A 32/240 6 128 128

um b a
numbe
r of
drives
per
RAID
array


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
Maxim 16/32 14 14 N/A 32/240 6 240 240

um b a
numbe
r of
drives
in all
RAID
arraysd
JBOD Not Suppor Suppor Sup Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

suppo ted ted por ted suppor ted ted
rted ted ted
Numbe N/A 1000 1000 100 32/240 N/A 240 240

r of 0 a
drives
suppor
ted in
JBOD
mode
Maxim 16/32 1000 1000 100 32/240 6 240 240

um b 0 a
numbe
r of
drives
suppor
ted
CacheC Not Not Not Not Suppor Not Not Not

ade suppo suppor suppor sup tede suppor suppor suppor
rted ted ted por ted ted ted
ted
Cache N/A N/A N/A N/A Not N/A N/A N/A

read/ suppor
write ted
ratio
adjusta
ble


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
Maxim N/A N/A N/A N/A 32 N/A N/A N/A

um
numbe
r of
SSDs
suppor
ted by
CacheC
ade
Maxim N/A N/A N/A N/A 512 GB N/A N/A N/A

um
CacheC
ade
capacit
y
RAID N/A N/A N/A N/A 0/1 N/A N/A N/A

levels
suppor
ted by
CacheC
ade
Hot N/A N/A N/A N/A Suppor N/A N/A N/A

sparing ted
suppor
ted by
CacheC
ade
FastPat Suppo Not Suppor Sup Suppor Not Not Not

h rted suppor ted por ted suppor suppor suppor
(only ted ted ted ted ted
107 or
later
versio
ns)
4K Suppo Suppor Suppor Sup Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

drives rted ted ted por ted suppor ted ted
ted ted


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
RAID 0/1/10 0/1/10/ 0/1/10/ N/A 0/1/10/ RAID 0/1/10/ 0/1/10/

levels / 1E 1E 5/50/6/ 0/1/10/ 5/50/6/ 5
suppor 5/50/6 60 5 60
ted /60 (RAID
5 is
suppor
ted
only
with a
license.
)
Strip Suppo Not Not N/A Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

size rted suppor suppor ted (64 suppor ted (64 ted (8
configu (8 KB, ted (64 ted (64 KB, ted (64 KB, KB, 16
ration 16 KB, KB by KB by 128 KB by 128 KB, 32
32 KB, default default KB, default KB, KB, 64
64 KB, ) ) 256 ) 256 KB,
128 KB, KB, 128
KB, 512 512 KB,
256 KB, KB, 256
KB, and and KB,
512 1024 1024 512
KB, KB The KB The KB,
and default default and
1024 value value 1024
KB. is 256 is 256 KB The
The KB.) KB.) default
defaul value
t is 256
value KB.)
is 256
KB.)


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
Power Suppo Not Not Not Not Not Not Not

failure rted suppor suppor sup suppor suppor suppor suppor
protect (Cach ted ted por ted ted ted ted
ion by e ted
iBBU protec
tion
time is
24
hours
by
defaul
t and
varies
the
batter
y
worki
ng
mode.
)
Power Suppo Not Not Not Suppor Not Suppor Not

failure rted suppor suppor sup ted suppor ted suppor
protect ted ted por ted ted
ion by ted
superc
apacito
r
Global Suppo Suppor Suppor N/A Suppor Suppor Suppor Suppor

hot rted ted ted ted ted ted ted
spare
Dedica Suppo Not Not N/A Suppor Suppor Suppor Suppor

ted hot rted suppor suppor ted ted ted ted
spare ted ted
Emerg Suppo Not Not N/A Suppor N/A N/A N/A

ency rted suppor suppor ted
hot ted ted
spare
Numbe 16/32 2 2 N/A 32/240 6 2 2

r of b a
suppor
ted hot
spare
drives


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
Online Suppo Not Not Not Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

RAID rted suppor suppor sup ted suppor ted ted
level ted ted por ted
migrati ted
on
Online Suppo Not Not Not Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

capacit rted suppor suppor sup ted suppor ted ted
y ted ted por ted
expans ted
ion
Autom Suppo Suppor Suppor Sup Suppor Not Suppor Suppor

atic rted ted ted por ted suppor ted ted
SMART ted ted
scan
Patrol Suppo Suppor Suppor Not Suppor Suppor Suppor Suppor

read rted ted ted sup ted ted ted ted
por
ted
Consist Suppo Suppor Suppor Not Suppor Suppor Suppor Suppor

ency rted ted ted sup ted ted ted ted
check por
ted
Crypto Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not

encrypt suppo suppor suppor sup suppor suppor suppor suppor
ion rted ted ted por ted ted ted ted
ted
Out- Not Not Not Sup Suppor Not Not Suppor

of- suppo suppor suppor por tedc suppor suppor ted
band rted ted ted ted ted ted
manag
ement
Cache Suppo Not Not N/A Suppor Not Not Not

rted suppor suppor ted (1 suppor suppor suppor
ted ted GB/2 ted ted ted
GB/4
GB)
Buzzer Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not

suppo suppor suppor sup suppor suppor suppor suppor
rted ted ted por ted ted ted ted
ted


08 08 08IR 300 08 ID
8IT
a: The LSI SAS3108 supports two types of RAID keys, which support 32 and 240
drives respectively. For details, see Table 8-4 in 8.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50,
and 60.
b: The LSI SAS2208 supports two types of RAID keys, which support 16 and 32
drives respectively. For details, see Table 4-3 in 4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50,
and 60.
c: The LSI SAS3108 PCB version .B and later support out-of-band management.
The LSI SAS3108 PCB version .A does not support out-of-band management.
d: Maximum number of drives in all RAID arrays (for an LSI SAS2308 or LSI
SAS3008 RAID controller card) = Number of hot spare drives + Number of drives
in RAID arrays
Maximum number of drives in all RAID arrays (for other RAID controller cards)
= Number of hot spare drives + Number of idle drives (drives in Unconfigured
Good state) + Number of drives in RAID arrays
e: To obtain the code of the RAID controller card that supports the CacheCade,
use Computing Product Compatibility Checker.
NOTE
The "N/A" in the table stands for not applicable.
Table 2-2 lists the reliability, read/write performance, and drive utilization of RAID
levels supported by RAID controller cards.
Table 2-2 RAID level comparison
RAID Level Reliability Read Write Drive

Performance Performance Utilization
RAID 0 Low High High 100%
RAID 1 High High Medium 50%
RAID 5 Medium High Medium (N – 1)/N
RAID 6 Medium High Medium (N – 2)/N
RAID 10 High High Medium 50%
RAID 1E High Medium Medium 50%
RAID 50 High High Relatively (N – M)/N

high
RAID 60 High High Relatively (N – M x 2)/N

high

RAID Level Reliability Read Write Drive

Performance Performance Utilization
Not supported: N indicates the number of member drives in a RAID array. M

indicates the number of spans of a RAID array.
Table 2-3 lists the interface types of drives supported by each RAID controller
card.
Table 2-3 Supported interface types of drives
Interface SAS SATA SAS SSD SATA NVMe M.2

Type HDD HDD SSD PCIe SSD SATA
SSD
LSI Support Supporte Supporte Supporte Not Not

SAS2208 ed d d d supporte supporte
d d

d d

SAS3008I ed d d d supporte supporte
R d d

SAS3008IT ed d d d supporte supporte
d d

d d
LSI Not Supporte Not Supporte Not Not

Softraid support d supporte d supporte supporte
ed d d d
PM8060 Support Supporte Supporte Supporte Not Not

ed d d d supporte supporte
d d
PM8068 Support Supporte Supporte Supporte Not Not

ed d d d supporte supporte
d d
NOTE
For details about the drive models supported by each RAID controller card, see the
compatibility list. For details, use Computing Product Compatibility Checker.

User Guide 3 RAID Features
3 RAID Features
3.1 Drive Group and Virtual Drive

3.2 Fault Tolerance
3.3 Consistency Check
3.4 Hot Spares
3.5 RAID Rebuild
3.6 Drive States
3.7 Virtual Drive Read and Write Policies
3.8 Power Failure Protection
3.9 Drive Striping
3.10 Drive Mirroring
3.11 Foreign Configuration
3.12 Drive Power Saving
3.13 Drive Passthrough
3.1 Drive Group and Virtual Drive

With the increasing traffic volume of modern data centers, more data needs to
run on a single server. When a physical drive is insufficient to support system
services in terms of capacity and security, multiple drives need to be combined in
a way to serve as a visible drive for external entities to meet service requirements.
A drive group is a group of physical drives combined as a whole for external
entities. Drive groups are the basis for virtual drives.
A virtual drive is a continuous data storage unit divided from a drive group. A
virtual drive can be considered an independent drive. After configured, a virtual
drive can provide higher capacity, security, and data redundancy than a physical
drive.
A virtual drive can be:

● A complete drive group.

● Multiple complete drive groups.
● Part of a drive group.
● Parts of multiple drive groups (a part is divided from every drive group, and
these parts form a virtual drive).
Related conventions:
● A drive group (DG for short) also refers to an array or RAID array.
● A virtual drive also refers to a virtual disk (VD for short), volume, or a logical
device (LD for short).
3.2 Fault Tolerance

Fault tolerance is the capability to ensure data integrity and data processing
performance when a drive error or fault occurs in a subsystem. The RAID
controller card uses redundant drive arrays to implement fault tolerance for RAID
1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
In RAID 1, data images are stored on a pair of drives, and errors or faults on one
of the drives do not cause data loss. Employing the same working principle, RAID
5 allows one faulty drive, and RAID 6 allows two faulty drives.
Consisting of multiple spans, RAID 10 and RAID 50 allow the number of faulty
drives to be the same as the number of spans but require each span to contain
only one faulty drive. RAID 60 allows the number of faulty drives to be twice that
of spans and requires each span to contain a maximum of two faulty drives.
NOTE
RAID 0 does not support fault tolerance. When a drive in RAID 0 becomes faulty, the RAID
array fails and data gets lost.
The fault tolerance feature improves the system availability. When a drive
becomes faulty, the system can still work properly. Fault tolerance is of great
importance for fault recovering.
3.3 Consistency Check

For RAID arrays with redundancy (RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60), the RAID
controller card can check data consistency for the drives in a RAID array. It can
also verify and compute drive data, and compare the drive data and its redundant
data. If any inconsistency is found, the RAID controller card automatically
attempts to recover data and saves error information.
For RAID arrays without redundancy (RAID 0), consistency checks are not
supported.
NOTE
Monthly (at least) consistency checks are recommended.

3.4 Hot Spares

The RAID controller card supports two types of hot spares: hot spare and
emergency spare.
Hot Spare Drives

A hot spare drive is an independent drive in a drive system. When a member drive
of a RAID array is faulty, the hot spare drive automatically replaces the faulty
drive to serve as the new member drive and reconstructs the data of the faulty
drive on the new member drive.
On RAID controller card management screens or command-line interface (CLI),
you can specify an idle drive as the hot spare drive of the RAID array. The idle
drive must have at least the capacity of the member drive and is of the same
medium type and interface as those of the member drive.
The RAID controller card supports two types of hot spare drives:
● Global hot spare drive: shared by all RAID arrays of a RAID controller card,
which can be configured with one or more global hot spare drives. A global
hot spare drive automatically replaces a faulty drive in any RAID array.
● Dedicated hot spare drive: replaces a failed drive only in a specified RAID
array, which can be configured with one or more dedicated hot spare drives.
The dedicated hot spare drive automatically takes over services of a faulty
member drive in the specified RAID array.
Hot spare drives feature the following:
● They are applicable only to RAID arrays with redundancy, for example, RAID 1,
5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
● They can replace only failed drives that are managed by the same RAID
controller card as themselves.
Emergency Spare
If no hot spare drive is specified for a RAID array with redundancy, emergency
spare allows an idle drive managed by the RAID controller card to automatically
replace a failed member drive and rebuild data to avoid data loss.
The idle drive used for emergency spare must be of the same medium type as that
of the failed member drive and have at least the capacity of the failed member
drive.
3.5 RAID Rebuild

If a faulty drive occurs on a RAID array, you can use the data rebuild function of
the RAID controller card to rebuild data on a new drive for the faulty drive. The
data rebuild function applies only to RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 with redundancy.
The RAID controller card provides the function of automatically rebuilding data on
a hot spare drive for a faulty member drive. If the RAID array is configured with

an available hot spare drive, and one of its member drives becomes faulty, the hot
spare drive automatically replaces the faulty drive and rebuilds data. If the RAID
array has no available hot spare drive, data can be rebuilt only after the faulty
drive is replaced with a new drive. When the hot spare drive starts rebuilding data,
the faulty member drive enters the removable state. If the system is powered off
during the data rebuild, the RAID controller card continues the data rebuild task
after the system restart.
The data rebuild rate indicates the proportion of CPU resources occupied by a data
rebuild task to the overall CPU resources. The data rebuild rate can be set to 0%–
100%. The value 0% indicates that the RAID controller card starts the data rebuild
task only when no other task is running in the system. The value 100% indicates
that the data rebuild task occupies all CPU resources. You can customize the data
rebuild rate. It is recommended that you set it to an appropriate value based on
the site requirements.
3.6 Drive States

Table 3-1 describes the states of physical drives managed by the RAID controller
card.
Table 3-1 Physical drive states
State Description
Available (AVL) The physical drive may not be ready, and is not suitable
for use in a logical drive or hot spare pool.
Cfgincompat Drive configuration is incompatible.
Copyback/ The new drive is replacing the hot spare drive.

Copybacking
Diagnosing The drive is being diagnosed.
Degraded (DGD) The physical drive is a part of the logical drive and is in
the degraded state.
Erase In Progress The drive is being erased.
Failed (FLD) If an unrecoverable error occurs on a drive in the Online

or Hot Spare state, the drive enters the Failed state.
Fault The drive is faulty.
Foreign The drive contains a foreign configuration.
Hot Spare (HSP) The drive is configured as a hot spare drive.
Inactive The drive is a member of an inactive logical drive and

can be used only after the logical drive is activated.
JBOD Drive works in passthrough mode.
Missing (MIS) When a drive in the Online state is removed, the drive
enters the Missing state.

State Description
Offline The drive is a member drive of a virtual drive. It cannot

work properly and is offline.
Online (ONL) The drive is a member drive of a virtual drive. It is online

and is working properly.
Optimal The physical drive is in the normal state and is a part of

the logical drive.
Out of Sync (OSY) As a part of the IR logical drive, the physical drive is not
synchronized with other physical drives in the IR logical
drive.
Predictive Failure The drive is about to Failed. You need to back up the
data on the drive and replace the drive.
Raw (Pass Through) Pass-through drive in HBA mode.
Raw Drive The drive is used as a raw drive.
Ready (RDY) This state applies to the RAID/Mixed mode of the RAID
controller card. The drives can be used to configure a
RAID array. In RAID mode, the drives in the Ready state
are not reported to the operating system (OS). In Mixed
mode, the drives in the Ready state are reported to the
OS.
Rebuild/Rebuilding Data is being reconstructed on the drive to ensure data

(RBLD) redundancy and integrity of the virtual drive. In this
case, the performance of the virtual drive is affected to a
certain extent.
Reconstructing Data is being reconstructed on the drive to ensure data

redundancy and integrity of the virtual drive. In this
case, the performance of the virtual drive is affected to a
certain extent.
Spare The drive is a hot spare drive and is in the normal state.
Shield State This is a temporary state when a physical drive is being

diagnosed.
Standby (SBY) The device is not a drive.
Unconfigured Good The drive is in a normal state but is not a member drive
(ugood/ucfggood) of a virtual drive or hot spare drive.
Unconfigured Bad If an unrecoverable error occurs on a drive in the

(ubad) Unconfigured Good or uninitialized state, the drive
enters the Unconfigured Bad state.
Unknown The drive state is unknown.
Unsupport The specifications of drives exceed the specifications of

the RAID controller card.

Table 3-2 describes the states of virtual drives created under the RAID controller
card.
Table 3-2 Virtual drive states

State Description
Degrade/ The virtual drive is available but abnormal, and certain member
Degraded drives are faulty or offline. User data is not protected.
(DGD)
Delete fail Deletion failed.
Deleting The virtual drive is being deleted.
Failed (FLD) The virtual drive is faulty.
Fault The virtual drive is faulty.
Formatting The virtual drive is being formatted.
Inactive The virtual drive is inactive and can be used only after being
activated.
Inc RAID The virtual drive does not support the SMART or SATA expansion
command.
Initializing The virtual drive is being initialized.

(INIT)
Initialize fail Initialization failed.
Interim The RAID array is degraded because it contains faulty drives. As

Recovery a result, the running performance of the RAID array deteriorates
and data may be lost. To solve this problem, check whether the
drive is correctly connected to the device or replace the faulty
drive.
Max Dsks The number of drives in the RAID array has reached the upper
limit. The drive cannot be added to the RAID array.
Missing The virtual drive is lost.

(MIS)
Not The drive is not formatted.

formatted
Not Syncd The data on the physical drive is not synchronized with the data
on other physical drives in the logical drive.
Normal The virtual drive is in the normal state, and all member drives
are online.

State Description
Offline If the number of faulty or offline physical drives in a RAID array

exceeds the maximum number of faulty drives supported by the
RAID array, the RAID array will be displayed as offline.
Online The virtual drive is online.

(ONL)
Optimal The virtual drive is in a sound state, and all member drives are
online.
Okay (OKY) The virtual drive is active and the physical drives are running
properly. If the current RAID level provides data protection, user
data is protected.
Partial If the number of faulty or offline physical drives in a RAID array

Degraded does not exceed the maximum number of faulty drives allowed
by the RAID array, the RAID array will be displayed as partially
degraded.
Primary The drive is the primary drive in RAID 1 and is in normal state.
Ready for The array is ready for rebuilding.

Rebuild
Sanitizing Data on the virtual drive is being erased.
Secondary The drive is the secondary drive in RAID 1 and is in normal state.
Tool Small The drive capacity is insufficient and cannot be used as the hot
spare of the current RAID array.
Wrg Intfc The drive interface is different from that in the current RAID
array.
Wrg Type The drive cannot be used as a member drive of the RAID array.
The drive may be incompatible or faulty.
Write The virtual drive is write-protected.

protect
3.7 Virtual Drive Read and Write Policies

When creating a virtual drive, you need to define its data read and write policies
to standardize subsequent data read and write operations on it.
Data Read Policy

Generally, this parameter is displayed as Read Policy on the configuration screen.
The RAID controller card supports the following data read policies:
● Read-ahead policy: This policy is usually specified as Always Read Ahead,

Read Ahead, or Ahead on the configuration screen. If this policy is used, the

RAID controller card caches the data that follows the data being read for
faster access. This policy reduces drive seeks and shortens read time.
The read-ahead policy is applicable only when the RAID controller card
supports power failure protection for data. If the supercapacitor of the RAID
controller that adopts the read-ahead policy is abnormal, data may get lost.
● Non-read-ahead policy: If this policy is used, the RAID controller card does not
read data ahead. Instead, it reads data from a virtual drive only when it
receives a data read command.
Data Write Policy

Generally, this parameter is displayed as Write Policy on the configuration screen.
The RAID controller card supports the following write policies:
● Write-back: This policy is usually specified as Write Back on the configuration
screen. If this policy is used, data is directly written to the cache. The RAID
controller card then updates accumulated cache data to drives in batches. The
overall data write speed is higher since writing to the cache is faster than
writing to the drive. When the cache receives all data, the RAID controller
card signals the host that the data transmission is complete.
The write-back policy is applicable only when the RAID controller card
supports power failure protection for data. If the supercapacitor of the RAID
controller that adopts the write-back policy is abnormal, data may get lost.
● Write-through: This policy is usually specified as Write Through on the
configuration screen. If this policy is used, the RAID controller card writes data
directly into a virtual drive, without passing through the cache. When the
drive subsystem receives all data that needs to be transmitted, the RAID
controller card signals the host that the data transmission is complete.
This mode does not require the RAID controller card to support power failure
protection. Even if the supercapacitor is faulty, services are not affected. The
disadvantage of this write policy is that the write speed is low.
● BBU-related write-back: This policy is usually specified as Write Back with
BBU on the configuration screen. This policy involves two scenarios: If the
BBU of the RAID controller card is present and normal, the write operation
from the RAID controller card to a virtual drive will go through the cache
(write-back mode). If the BBU of the RAID controller card is absent or faulty,
the write operation from the RAID controller card to a virtual drive does not
go through the cache (write-through mode).
● Forcible write back: This policy is usually specified as Write Back Enforce or
Always Write Back are displayed on the configuration screen. If the RAID
controller card has no supercapacitor or the supercapacitor is damaged, the
Write Back mode is forcibly used.
If a server is powered off unexpectedly and the supercapacitor is not installed
or is being charged, the data written to the DDR cache of the RAID controller
card will be lost. This mode is not recommended.

3.8 Power Failure Protection

Working Principle
The write speed on a high-speed cache of a RAID controller card is faster than
that on hard drives. Therefore, a large number of write operations use the high-
speed cache to improve system performance.
● Whenever write pressure lowers or cache is nearly full, data is migrated from
the high-speed cache to hard drives.
● However, caching increases the risk of data loss. For example, data gets lost if
the server is powered off unexpectedly.
To improve data read/write performance and high-speed cache data security, you
can configure a supercapacitor for the RAID controller card. If a power failure
occurs, the supercapacitor supplies power and cache data is permanently written
to the NAND flash of the supercapacitor protection module.
Supercapacitor Power Calibration

Data protection requires supercapacitors. The automatic power calibration mode is
enabled by default for RAID controller cards to record supercapacitor discharge
curves to monitor supercapacitor status, such as maximum and minimum
voltages, and extend supercapacitor lifespans.
RAID controller cards calibrate power in the following process to ensure power
stability:
1. RAID controller cards charge supercapacitors with maximum power.
2. The calibration process automatically starts and fully discharges the
supercapacitors.
3. RAID controller cards charge the supercapacitors again to their maximum
power.
During the calibration process, the write policy of a RAID controller card is
automatically changed to Write Through to ensure data integrity, and the RAID
controller card performance decreases accordingly. The power calibration duration
depends on the supercapacitor discharge speed.
3.9 Drive Striping

Multiple processes accessing a drive at the same time may cause drive conflicts.
Most drives are specified with thresholds for the access count (I/O operations per
second) and data transmission rate (data volume transmitted per second). If the
thresholds are reached, new access requests will be suspended.
Striping technology evenly distributes I/O loads across multiple physical drives. It
divides continuous data into multiple blocks and saves them to different drives.
This allows multiple processes to access these data blocks concurrently without
causing any drive conflicts. Striping also optimizes concurrent processing
performance in sequential access to data.

Drive striping is to divide the space of a drive into multiple strips based on the
specified strip size. When data is written into the drive, the data is divided into
data blocks based on the strip size.
For example, RAID 0 consists of four member drives. The first data block is written
into the first member drive, the second data block is written into the second
member drive, and so on, as shown in Figure 3-1. In this way, multiple drives are
concurrently written, significantly improving system performance. However, data
redundancy is not guaranteed by drive striping.
Figure 3-1 Drive striping example
Drive striping involves the following concepts:

● Strip width: indicates the number of drives in a drive group used for striping.
For example, for a drive group consisting of four member drives, the strip
width is 4.
● Strip size of a drive group: indicates the total size of data blocks that the RAID
controller card concurrently writes into all drives in a drive group.
● Strip size of a drive: indicates the size of the data block written by the RAID
controller card to each drive.
For example, if a 1 MB data strip is written into a drive group, a 64 KB data block
is allocated to each member drive. Then, the strip size of the drive group is 1 MB,
and the strip size of a drive is 64 KB.
3.10 Drive Mirroring

Applicable to RAID 1 and RAID 10, drive mirroring is to write the same data
simultaneously into two drives to achieve 100% data redundancy. Since the same
data is read and written into two drives at the same time, the data does not get
lost and the data flow is not interrupted if one drive becomes faulty.
However, drive mirroring is expensive because it requires a backup drive for each
drive, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Drive mirroring example
3.11 Foreign Configuration

Foreign configuration is different from the configuration of the current RAID
controller card and is specified as Foreign Configuration on the configuration
screen.
Generally, foreign configuration is involved in the following scenarios:
● If RAID configuration exists on a physical drive newly installed on a server, the

RAID controller card identifies the RAID configuration as foreign
configuration.
● After the RAID controller card of a server is replaced, the new RAID controller
card identifies the existing RAID configuration as foreign configuration.
● After the hot swap of a member drive in a RAID array, the member drive is
identified as containing foreign configuration.
You can process detected foreign configuration as required. For example, if the
RAID configuration existing on the newly installed drive does not meet
requirements, you can delete it. If you want to use the RAID configuration of a
RAID controller card that has been replaced, you can import the RAID
configuration and make it take effect on the new RAID controller card.
3.12 Drive Power Saving

RAID controller cards provide the power saving feature for drives. This feature
allows drives to be stopped based on drive configurations and I/O activities. All
SAS and SATA HDDs support this function.
Enabling this feature puts drives in the idle state and idle hot spare drives into the
power saving state. Operations, such as RAID array creation, hot spare drive
creation, dynamic capacity expansion, and rebuild, will wake the drives from
power saving.
3.13 Drive Passthrough

Drive passthrough (JBOD), also called instruction-based transparent transmission,
allows data to be transmitted without being processed by the transmission
devices. It is a data transmission method used to ensure the transmission quality
only.

With this function, the RAID controller card allows user commands to be directly
transmitted to connected drives, facilitating drive access and control by upper-
layer services or management software.
For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted to a RAID controller
card. But if the RAID controller card does not support the passthrough feature, you
can install the OS only on the virtual drives configured under the RAID controller
card.

User Guide 4 LSI SAS2208
4 LSI SAS2208
About This Chapter

This topic describes the appearance, features, and configuration methods of LSI
SAS2208 controller card.
4.1 Overview
4.2 Functions
4.3 Initial Configuration (Legacy/Dual Mode)
4.4 Initial Configuration (EFI/UEFI Mode)
4.5 Common Tasks (Legacy/Dual Mode)
4.6 Common Tasks (EFI/UEFI Mode)
4.7 Troubleshooting
4.8 Management Screens (Legacy/Dual Mode)
4.9 Configuration Utility (EFI/UEFI Mode)
4.10 Downloading MegaRAID Storage Manager
4.11 OS Command-Line Tool
4.1 Overview
The LSI SAS2208 controller card is a 6 Gbit/s SAS controller with the MegaRAID
architecture. Equipped with PCIe 3.0 x8 ports and a powerful I/O storage engine,
the controller card handles data protection, verification, and restoration.
In addition to better system performance, the controller card supports fault-
tolerant data storage in multiple drive partitions and read/write operations on
multiple drives at the same time. This makes accessing data on drives faster.
The LSI SAS2208 supports boot and configuration in legacy and UEFI modes.
The built-in cache improves performance as follows:
● Data is directly written to the cache. The RAID controller card updates data to
drives after data is accumulated to some extent in the cache. This implements

data writing in batches. In addition, the cache improves the overall data write
speed due to its higher speed than a drive.
● Data is directly read from the cache, reducing the response time from 6 ms to
less than 1 ms.
NOTE
● The supercapacitor or integrated battery backup unit (iBBU) connected to the controller
card provides power failure protection for the cache. For details about the
supercapacitor or iBBU, see the maintenance guide or troubleshooting guide of the
server.
● The supercapacitor must be used with a trans flash module (TFM). Table 4-1 describes
the indicators on the TFM.
The LSI SAS2208 has two structures to provide ease of connection in different
servers:
● LSI SAS2208 for a rack server or X8000/X6800 server

The LSI SAS2208 connects to the mainboard through an XCede connector and
connects to the drive backplane by using two mini-SAS cables, as shown in
Figure 4-1.
NOTE
The LSI SAS2208 for the DH320 V2 node does not provide the mini-SAS ports.
● LSI SAS2208 for a blade server or X6000 server
The LSI SAS2208 connects to the mainboard through two XCede connectors,
as shown in Figure 4-2.
NOTE
The LSI SAS2208 can also be integrated into the mainboard of a server, as in the XH321 V2
and DH321 V2 nodes.
Figure 4-1 LSI SAS2208 for a rack server or X8000/X6800 server

Figure 4-2 LSI SAS2208 for a blade server or X6000 server
1 TFM fault indicator 2 TFM status indicator
3 TFM power indicator 4 TFM (for supercapacitor)
5 Supercapacitor port 6 iBBU port
7 Supercapacitor 8 RAID controller card
9 XCede connector 10 Mini-SAS (SFF-8087)
Table 4-1 TFM indicators

Indicator Color Description
TFM power Green ● On: The supercapacitor is

indicator (PWR) activated and powering the cache.
● Off: The supercapacitor does not
provide power.
TFM status Blue ● On: Data is being read from or

indicator (STAT) written to the cache.
● Off: No read/write operation is
executed on the cache.
TFM fault indicator Orange ● On: The supercapacitor is faulty.

(FLT) ● Off: The supercapacitor is working
properly.
Indicators
Table 4-2 describes the indicators on the LSI SAS2208.

Figure 4-3 LSI SAS2208 indicators
Table 4-2 Indicator description

SN Location Indicator Color Descriptio Handling
n Suggestio
ns
1 D7 VCC_1V05 Green On: The If this

power voltage is indicator is
indicator regular. off, replace
Off: The the RAID
voltage is controller
irregular. card.


n Suggestio
ns
2 D9 Global Red On: The If this

drive fault RAID indicator is
indicator controller on, replace
card the RAID
firmware is controller
abnormal. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card
firmware is
normal.
3 D8 Write Red On: The N/A

Pending cache of
indicator the RAID
controller
card has
data.
Off: The
cache of
the RAID
controller
card has
no data.

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.
5 D1004 SYS_ERR1 Red On: The If this

indicator ERR1 indicator is
alarm was on, replace
generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.


n Suggestio
ns

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.
7 D1005 Heartbeat Green Blinking: If this

indicator The indicator is
heartbeat off, replace
signal of the RAID
the RAID controller
controller card.
card is
normal.
Off: The
heartbeat
signal of
the RAID
controller
card is
abnormal.
4.2 Functions
4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60

The controller card supports up to:
● 16 or 32 physical drives (The LSI SAS2208 supports two types of RAID keys,
which support 16 and 32 physical drives respectively).
NOTE
The physical drives supported include the number of hot spare drives, idle drives
(drives in Unconfigured Good state), and the number of drives in RAID arrays.
● 64 virtual drives, specified by Virtual Drive on the Configuration Utility.

● 32 drive groups, specified by Drive Group on the Configuration Utility. Each

drive group holds up to 32 physical drives and can be divided into up to 16 or
32 virtual drives and 16 virtual drives (specified by Virtual Drive).
● 16 virtual drives (specified by Virtual Drive on the Configuration Utility
screen) for each group (specified by Drive Group on the Configuration
Utility screen)
Table 4-3 lists the supported RAID levels and quantity of drives.
Table 4-3 Supported RAID levels and quantity of drives
RAID Level Drives Spans Drives per Maximum

Span Failed Drives
RAID 0 1 to 32 N/A N/A 0
RAID 1 Even numbers Number of

from 2 to 32 spans
RAID 5 3 to 32 1
RAID 6 3 to 32 2
RAID 10 32 and even 2 to 8 RAID 1 16 and even Number of

numbers from numbers from spans
4 to 16 2 to 8
RAID 50 6 to 16/32 2 to 8 RAID 5 3 to 8/16 Number of

spans
RAID 60 6 to 16/32 2 to 8 RAID 6 3 to 8/16 Total spans x

2
NOTE
● RAID 00 is not supported.

● The failed drives cannot be adjacent. For details, see A.2 RAID Levels.
● A RAID array consists of multiple spans. For example, a RAID 50 array consists of two
RAID 5 spans.
● Each span of a RAID 10 or 50 array allows for only one failed drive.
● Each span of a RAID 60 array allows for a maximum of two failed drives.
● The number of drives supported by RAID 10, 50, and 60 varies depending on the
configured key type.
● On a Windows drive management screen, Bus Type of virtual drives for the LSI SAS2208
is RAID.
● The number of drives in RAID 10, 50, and 60 is determined by the number of spans and
the number of drives supported by each span.
4.2.2 Drive Hot Spares

The LSI SAS2208 supports two types of hot spares: hot spare and emergency
spare.

Hot Spare
After RAID configuration of the drives of a server, configuration of hot spare drives
increases security and reduces impact on services from drive faults.
The controller card supports two types of hot spare drives:
● Global hot spare drive: shared by all RAID arrays of LSI SAS2208, which can be
configured with one or more global hot spare drives. A global hot spare drive
automatically takes over services of a failed member drive in any RAID array.
For details, see 4.5.1.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive.
array of LSI SAS2208. One or more dedicated hot spare drives can be
configured for each RAID array. The hot spare drive automatically takes over
services of a failed member drive only in a specified RAID array.
For details, see 4.5.1.2 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
The hot spare drive must have a capacity greater than or equal to that of a
member drive.
NOTE
● The HDDs and SSDs cannot be used as the hot spare drives of each other.
● The HDDs include SAS HDDs and SATA HDDS. If the member drives of a RAID array are
SAS drives, the SATA drives can be used as dedicated hot spare drives. If the member
drives are SATA drives, the SAS drives cannot be used as dedicated hot spare drives.
● An idle drive can be configured as a hot spare drive, but a RAID member drive cannot
be configured as a hot spare drive.
● The type of hot spare drives must be the same as that of the member drives in the RAID
array, and the capacity of hot spare drives must be greater than or equal to the
maximum capacity of the member drives in the RAID array.
● All RAID levels except RAID 0 support hot spare drives.
● You cannot directly change a global hot spare drive to a dedicated hot spare drive or
vice versa. You need to set the drive to idle state, and then set it as a global or
dedicated hot spare drive as required.
Emergency Spares
After the emergency spare function is enabled for a RAID that supports
redundancy and has no hot spare drive specified, a spare drive in the fail or
prefail state will automatically replace a failed member drive of the same type
and rebuild data to avoid data loss.
The capacity of the idle drive used to rebuild data must be greater than or equal
to that of a member drive.
To enable or disable the emergency spare function, set the Emergency Spare
parameter on the Figure 4-223 screen.
4.2.3 Drive Hot Swap

Hot swap means that you can remove and replace a failed drive without powering
off the server, which improves system disaster recovery, expandability, and
flexibility.

NOTE
● After removing a drive, install it after at least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the drive cannot
be identified.
● Before removing and inserting a drive, check the logical status of the drive and the
number of faulty drives allowed by the RAID level.
● If you remove and insert a pass-through drive without powering off the OS, the drive
letter in the system may change. Before removing and inserting a pass-through drive,
record the drive letter in the system.
4.2.4 Copyback
If a member drive of a RAID array becomes faulty, a hot spare drive automatically
replaces the failed drive and starts data synchronization. Once the faulty drive has
been replaced with a newly installed data drive, data is copied from the hot spare
drive to the new data drive. Once the data copyback is complete, the hot spare
drive is restored to the hot spare state.
NOTE
● Different types of hot spare copyback have the same performance. During the copyback,
the RAID and drive status changes as follows:
● The RAID array status remains Optimal.
● The status of the hot spare drive changes from Online to Hot Spare.
● The status of the newly added drive changes from Copyback or Copybacking to
Online.
● You can use the command line tool to pause or resume copyback. For details, see
4.11.2.15 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild, Copyback, and Patrolread Functions.
● If the server is restarted during the copyback, the progress is saved.
4.2.5 Drive Striping
Striping
thresholds are reached when multiple processes concurrently access a drive, new
access requests will be suspended, which causes drive conflicts.
The striping technology evenly distributes I/O loads to multiple physical drives. It
Striping effect is affected by the following factors:
● Strip width: number of strips that can be concurrently read or written

The strip width equals the number of physical drives in a RAID array.
Increasing the strip width can improve the read/write performance of a RAID
array. An increased number of drives indicates more strips for concurrent
read/write operations.

Under the same circumstances, a RAID array consisting of eight 18 GB drives

provides better transmission performance than a RAID array consisting of four
36 GB drives.
● Strip size: size of a strip data block on each drive
Stripes
The storage space of each member drive in a RAID array is striped based on the
strip size. The data written to the drives is also sliced based on the strip size.
The LSI SAS2208 supports multiple strip sizes, including 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB,
128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB and 1 MB. The default value is 256 KB.
Generally, the default value is used during RAID configuration.
4.2.6 RAID Level Migration

LSI SAS2208 supports RAID level migration, which allows RAID configuration to be
changed without affecting data integrity. For details, see 4.5.4 Migrating the
RAID Level.
The RAID controller card supports the following RAID level migration options:
● Migrate RAID 0 to RAID 1, 5, or 6.

● Migrate RAID 5 to RAID 0 or 6.
Table 4-4 lists the minimum numbers of drives to be added for RAID level
migration.
Table 4-4 Number of drives required for RAID level migration
RAID Level Migration Number of Drives Number of Drives

Before Migration After Migration
RAID 0 -> RAID 1 1 to 32 Even numbers from

2 to 32
RAID 0 -> RAID 5 1 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 0 -> RAID 6 1 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 1 -> RAID 0 Even numbers from 2 to 2~32

32
RAID 1 -> RAID 5 Even numbers from 2 to 3 to 32

32

32
RAID 5 -> RAID 0 3 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 5 -> RAID 6 3 to 32 3 to 32


RAID 6 -> RAID 0 3 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 6 -> RAID 5 3 to 32 3 to 32
4.2.7 Initialization
Virtual Drive Initialization
After you create a virtual drive (VD), initialize it for use with an OS. After a VD
with the redundancy function is initialized, the data relationships between its
member drives comply with their RAID level requirements. The three types of
initialization are:
● Fast initialization: In this foreground process, the firmware writes zeros to the
first 100 MB of the VD. During this process, the state of the VD is Optimal.
● Slow initialization: In this foreground process, the firmware writes zeros to the
entire VD During this process, the state of the VD is Optimal.
● Background initialization:
– For RAID 1 and RAID 10: When data is inconsistent between primary and
secondary member drives, data will be copied from the primary drive to
the secondary drive during background initialization to overwrite the
original data on the secondary drive.
– For RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 50, and RAID 60: Reads and checks parity of
data on all member drives. If the result is inconsistent with the parity
drive, the newly generated data will overwrite the original data on the
parity drive
NOTE
Consistency checks and background initialization may affect system performance.

They implement a function similar to parity error correction. During a consistency check,
the system records the areas with data inconsistency and can resolve the inconsistency, but
background initialization does not provide this function. Besides, a consistency check can be
started manually, but background initialization can only be started automatically.
Drive Initialization
Drive initialization is a process of formatting a drive by repeatedly writing zeros to
it.
4.2.8 Capacity Expansion

The two types of capacity expansion are:
● Add new drives to an existing RAID array.
For details, see 4.5.2 Adding a Drive to a RAID Array.
● Increase the available space of a RAID array if the capacity of all member
drives in the RAID array is not fully utilized.

For details, see 4.5.3 Increasing Available RAID Space.

NOTE
● Only RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 6 support capacity expansion by adding drives.
● RAID 10, 50, and 60 do not support capacity expansion by adding drives.
● If a RAID array contains two or more VDs, its capacity cannot be expanded by adding
drives.
● During capacity expansion, you need to add two drives to RAID 1 each time, and only
one drive to RAID 0, RAID 5, or RAID 6 each time.
4.2.9 Secure Data Erasure

Secure data erasure is to permanently delete data from a drive so that the data
cannot be restored. The RAID controller card provides three levels of secure data
erasure for virtual drives:
● Simple: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for only one round.
● Normal: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for three rounds.
● Thorough: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for nine rounds.
During secure data erasure, the host cannot access the virtual drive.
The LSI SAS2208 supports secure data erasure of physical drives and virtual
drives.
4.2.10 Consistency Check

For RAID arrays with redundancy (RAID 1, 10, 50, and 60), you can manually
perform a consistency check for data in the RAID array. If any inconsistency is
found, the system automatically attempts to recover data and saves error
information in the bad block table.
Consistency check applies only to initialized RAID arrays. For details, see Checking
Consistency.
4.2.11 Cache Data Read/Write

To improve the data read/write performance, the following policies are supported:
● Always Read Ahead or Read Ahead: The LSI SAS2208 caches the data that
follows the data being read for faster access. This policy reduces drive seeks
and shortens read time from over 6 ms to less than 1 ms.
NOTE
To achieve optimal drive performance, set the policy to Always Read Ahead or Read
Ahead for HDDs and No Read Ahead for SSDs.
● Write Back: When the cache receives host data, the LSI SAS2208 signals the
host that the data transmission is complete.
Data is directly written to the cache. The RAID controller card updates data to
You can set the read/write policies on the 4.8.9.2 Virtual Drives screen.

4.2.12 Power Failure Protection

If a large number of write operations are performed on a server, writing data into
the cache is much faster than writing data into drives.
● Enabling caching greatly improves the server write performance. If the server
write pressure decreases, or if the cache is nearly full, data is migrated from
the cache to drives.
● Enabling caching also increases the data loss risk. If a server is powered off
unexpectedly, data in the cache gets lost.
To address this problem, a battery or supercapacitor can be configured for the

RAID card to provide power-off protection.
Batteries or supercapacitors start supplying power to the cache only when the
cache voltage is lower than the preset value. If the cache voltage is higher than
the preset value, RAID controller cards supply power to the cache. This ensures
data security of the cache.
The LSI SAS2208 provides the following power failure protection modes:
● Intelligent battery backup unit (iBBU): If a system power failure occurs, the
iBBU provides power supply for the cache. After the system power supply
recovers, the system writes the data in the cache to drives. The iBBU, however,
provides a limited backup time for 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, or 72 hours.
If the system power is not recovered within the limited period, data may get
lost.
● If a power failure occurs, the supercapacitor supplies power to store cached
data in the NAND flash of the supercapacitor protection module. The flash is
a non-volatile storage medium. Therefore, the supercapacitor can provide
approximately permanent protection for cache data.
4.2.13 Patrol Read

Patrol read is performed to protect data integrity by detecting and rectifying
physical drive failures before the failures damage data. In drive patrol read,
potential problems of configured physical drives are detected and resolved.
The system allocates resources for patrol read based on the I/O workload. For
example, if the I/O workload is high, the system allocates fewer resources for
patrol read to ensure higher priority of I/O operations.
Patrol read cannot be performed on a drive that has any of the following
operations in progress:
● RAID hot spare drive recovery

● Dynamic drive expansion
● Full or background initialization
● Consistency check
4.2.14 Automatic SMART Scanning

The self-monitoring, analysis and reporting technology (SMART) tool monitors
drive parts such as the head units, motor driver system, internal circuit, and drive

media. When potential problems are detected, the controller card reports alarms
to users promptly to help avoid data loss.
The controller card supports periodic SMART scanning of managed drives. You can
set the interval period, which is 300 seconds by default. Detected SMART errors
are logged.
4.2.15 Drive Power Saving

The RAID controller card provides the power saving feature for drives. This feature
This feature is enabled by default.
Enabling this feature puts drives in the Unconfig Good state and idle hot spare
drives into the power saving state. Operations, such as RAID array creation, hot
spare drive creation, dynamic capacity expansion, and rebuild, may be delayed
because the drives in the power saving state need to be woken up first.
To check whether the power saving function is enabled, go to the Controller
Properties screen, select Hot Spare Spin Down and Unconfi Good Spin Down.
4.2.16 Drive Roaming

Drive roaming refers to migrating physical drives within a controller. After drive
roaming, the RAID controller card can automatically identify the relocated physical
drives and logically place the relocated physical drives to virtual drives that belong
to the same drive group. Drive roaming can be implemented only when the server
system is shut down.
To implement drive roaming, perform the following operations:
1. Shut down the OS.
2. Power off the server.
3. Insert a physical drive into its new position in the backplane.
4. Perform a security check to ensure that the physical drive is properly inserted.
5. Power on the server.
6. Check that the RAID controller card can detect the RAID configuration from
the physical drive configuration.
4.2.17 Importing a Foreign Configuration

When a RAID configuration in a physical drive is detected, the RAID controller card
marks the physical drive as Foreign, indicating that the drive is a foreign drive.
Import the foreign configuration to the current controller for the configuration to
take effect. This import process is also called configuration migration.
4.2.18 Maintaining Drive Failure History

The LSI SAS2208 records drive faults.
● If this function is enabled, the server management software will receive an
alarm upon a RAID degrade or drive fault. In addition, a new drive with

foreign RAID configuration will be displayed as "Unconfigured Bad". You can

delete or import the foreign RAID configuration as required.
● If this function is disabled, the server management software does not receive
alarms upon a RAID degrade or drive fault. In addition, a new drive with
foreign RAID configuration is displayed as "Unconfigured Good". The RAID
controller processes the drive (for example, performs data rebuild or
copyback) based on the RAID array configuration. Data on the new drive may
be overwritten.
This function also affects the drive fault indicator status.
● If the function is enabled, the fault indicator will be on when a drive is faulty.
● If the function is disabled, the fault indicator remains off even if a drive is
faulty.
By default, this function is enabled for the LSI SAS2208. You can enable or disable
it by setting Maintain PD Fail History on the Controller Properties screen of the
CU.

This section describes the management screen when Boot Type is set to Dual
Boot Type or Legacy Boot Type on the BIOS screen.
All configurations described in this document about the LSI SAS2208 are
performed on the Configuration Utility, which can be accessed only after you
restart the server. To monitor controller card status and obtain configuration
information when the system is running, use the StorCLI tool.
If the boot type is changed after the OS has been installed in Legacy or UEFI
mode, the OS will be inaccessible. To access the OS, you need to change the boot
type to that used when the OS is installed. If the OS needs to be reinstalled, select
the Legacy or UEFI mode based on actual situation.
If multiple boot devices are configured, you are advised to set Boot Type to UEFI
Boot Type because certain boot devices may fail to boot if Boot Type is set to
Legacy Boot Type. If you still want to set Boot Type to Legacy Boot Type, then
disable redirection for certain serial ports or disable PXE for certain NICs based on
the services in use. For details, see "Setting PXE for a NIC" and "Setting Serial Port
Redirection" in the respective BIOS Parameter Reference.
● Huawei Server Brickland Platform BIOS Parameter Reference

● Huawei Server Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter Reference
4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility
Scenarios
The LSI SAS2208 BIOS Configuration Utility is used to configure and manage the
LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card. Configuration Utility is embedded in the BIOS of
the controller and runs independently from the OS. It simplifies the procedures for
configuring and managing RAID properties.

Impact on the System

Before accessing the Configuration Utility main screen, you need to restart the
server, which will interrupt services running on the server.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the Legacy mode. For details, see A.1.3 Setting the Legacy Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility.
1. During the server startup, press Ctrl+H when the message "Press <Ctrl><H>
for WebBIOS or press <Ctrl><Y> for Preboot CLI" shown in Figure 4-4 is
displayed.
Figure 4-4 Command prompt
2. After the self-check is complete, the Adapter Selection screen is displayed, as

shown in Figure 4-5. Table 4-5 describes the parameters.
Figure 4-5 Adapter Selection screen
Table 4-5 Parameter description

Parameter Description
Adapter No. Adapter number.
Bus No. Bus number.
Device No. Device ID.
Type RAID controller card type.
Firmware Firmware version of the RAID controller card.

Pkg. Version
3. Select the LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card and click Start.
The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Table 4-6 describes the parameters.

Figure 4-6 Configuration Utility main screen

Advanced Configures advanced options of a RAID controller card.

Software
Options
Controller Selects a RAID controller card.

Selection
Controller Manages properties of a selected RAID controller card.

Properties
Scan Rescans the status and configuration changes of physical or

Devices virtual drives and displays the current status of the drives.
Virtual Views and modifies virtual drive properties or deletes a

Drives virtual drive.
Drivers Views the physical drive properties and operates the drive,
such as creating a hot spare drive.
Configuratio Starts the configuration wizard. By using the configuration

n Wizard wizard, you can perform operations such as creating new
storage configurations, clearing existing configurations, and
adding new configurations.

Physical/ Switches between physical and logical views, which allow

Logical View you to check physical and virtual drive information
respectively. By default, Physical View is displayed in the left
pane and the Logical View is displayed in the right pane.
– After you click Physical View, Logical View will be
displayed in the left pane and Physical View will be
displayed in the right pane.
– After you click Logical View, Physical View will be
displayed in the left pane and Logical View will be
Events Displays system events.
Exit Exits the Configuration Utility.
----End
Additional Information
Related Tasks
None
Related Concepts
Table 4-7 describes the icons on the Configuration Utility toolbar.
Table 4-7 Icons
Icon Function
Returns to the Configuration Utility main screen.
Returns to the previous page.
Exits the Configuration Utility main screen.
Disables the onboard sound alarm for the RAID controller card.
Displays information about the Configuration Utility version,

browser version, and HTML engine interface.

4.3.2 Manually Creating a RAID 0 Array

Scenarios
NOTE
● Data on a drive will be deleted after the drive is added to a RAID array. Before creating
a RAID array, check that there is no data on drives or that the data on drives is not
required. If the drive data needs to be retained, back up the data first.
● The LSI SAS2208 supports SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs. Drives in one RAID array must be
of the same type, but can have different capacities or be provided by different vendors.
● 4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 lists the number of drives required by each RAID
level.
Workflow
Procedure
Step 1 Back up data on drives and access the Configuration Utility main screen. For
details, see 4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility.

Step 2 Select the manual configuration mode.

1. On the Configuration Utility main screen, click Configuration Wizard in the
navigation tree.
The Configuration Wizard screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.
– Clear Configuration: clears all the existing RAID configuration.
– New Configuration: clears the existing RAID configuration and creates a
RAID array.
– Add Configuration: adds new drives to the existing configuration. The
procedure for adding drives is the same as you add drives when creating
a RAID array. This option is not displayed if no drives are available for
creating a RAID array.
NOTICE
Exercise caution when selecting New Configuration. If you select it, the
existing configuration of the selected physical drives will be deleted. Add
Configuration is recommended if you want to create a RAID array.
Figure 4-7 Configuration Wizard screen
2. Select Add Configuration and click Next.

The Confirm Page screen is displayed.
3. Click Yes.
The Select Configuration Method screen is displayed.

Figure 4-8 Select Configuration Method screen

Manual Allows users to control all storage attributes and set

Configuratio parameters.
n

Automatic Automatically creates an optimal RAID configuration.

Configuratio – Redundancy: specifies whether to enable the redundancy
n function.
▪ Redundancy when possible: The system

automatically configures the existing drives as a RAID
array with redundancy when possible.
NOTE
If there are two drives, the system automatically configures
RAID 1. If there are three or more drives, the system
automatically configures RAID 5 or RAID 6. The system does
not support automatic configuration of RAD 10, RAID 50, or
RAID 60.
▪ No Redundancy: The system automatically configures

existing drives as a RAID 0 array, that is the array
without redundancy.
Default value: Redundancy when possible
– Data Protection: specifies whether to enable data
protection, which is an advanced feature of RAID
controller cards. The RAID controller card stores keys that
are used to encrypt the member drives. If a drive is
removed from the RAID controller card, data on the drive
cannot be obtained without the key. However, this setting
is valid only for drives that support data encryption.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled
Default value: Disabled
4. Select Manual Configuration and click Next.

The Drive Group Definition screen is displayed.

Figure 4-9 Drive Group Definition screen

Data Specifies whether to enable data protection, which is an

protection advanced feature of RAID controller cards. The RAID
controller card stores keys that are used to encrypt the
member drives. If a drive is removed from the RAID
controller card, data on the drive cannot be obtained
without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE
This setting is valid only for drives supporting data encryption.
Step 3 Add drives to the drive group.

1. In the Drives pane on the left of the screen, select drives to be added to Drive
Group 0.
2. Click Add To Array to add the drives to the Drive Groups pane on the right.
For example, Figure 4-10 shows the screen where all drives are added to
Drive Group 0.

Figure 4-10 Adding drives to a drive group
NOTE
– If the drives in the same group have different sizes, the capacity of the RAID array
to be created is affected and an alarm will be generated when you click Accept
DG. It is recommended that you use drives with the same specifications to create a
RAID array.
– To release a selected drive, select the drive in Drive Groups and click Reclaim.
– A RAID 0 array supports 1 to 32 drives
– If the total number of drives in all RAID arrays under a RAID controller card
exceeds 16 or 32 (depending on the RAID key specifications), no drive can be
added to RAID arrays.
3. Click Accept DG to accept the drive group.
The screen shown in Figure 4-11 is displayed.

Figure 4-11 Accepting a drive group
4. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen is displayed.
Figure 4-12 Span Definition screen
5. Select the drive group from Array With Free Space.

6. Click Add to SPAN. The drive group is added to the Span pane on the right.
Figure 4-13 Adding the drive group to the span list
Step 4 Configure the RAID level.

1. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen is displayed.

Figure 4-14 Virtual Drive Definition screen

RAID Level RAID level.

– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60

Strip Size Size of a data strip on each drive.

– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB
Default value: 256 KB
The default size is used during RAID configuration.
Access Data access policy.

Policy – RW: The virtual drive is readable and writable.
– Read Only: The virtual drive is read-only.
– Blocked: The virtual drive is blocked from access.
Default value: RW
Read Policy Options for reading data on a virtual drive.

– No Read Ahead: disables the Read Ahead function.
– Always Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function.
The RAID controller card prefetches sequential data or
the data predicted to be used and saves it in the cache.
Default value: Always Read Ahead
NOTE
To achieve optimal drive performance, set the policy to Always Read
Write Policy Write policy for data on a virtual drive.

– Always Write Back: When the cache receives all data,
the RAID controller card signals the host that the data
transmission is complete.
NOTE
The Always Write Back mode is not recommended because DDR
write data of the RAID controller card will be lost if the
supercapacitor is not installed or being charged.
– Write Through: When the drive subsystem receives all
data, the RAID controller card signals the host that the
data transmission is complete.
– Write Back with BBU (recommended): The RAID
controller card automatically switches to the Write
Through mode when there is no Battery Backup Unit
(BBU), the BBU is on charge or discharge, the BBU is
faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache exists.
Default value: Write Through

IO Policy Options for data I/O of special virtual drives. This policy does
not affect cache prefetch.
– Direct:
▪ In a read scenario, data is directly read from drives. (If

Read Policy is set to Always Read Ahead, data is read
from the cache.)
▪ In a write scenario, data is written into the RAID cache.

(If Write Policy is set to Write Through, data is
directly written into drives.)
– Cached: Data is read from or written to the cache. Use
this option only when configuring CacheCade 1.1.
Default value: Direct
NOTE
The LSI SAS2208 does not support the CacheCade function.
Drive Cache Cache policy of physical drives (valid only for drives with
cache).
– Enable: Data is cached on drives to improve write
performance. However, if no protection mechanism is
available when the system is powered off unexpectedly,
data in the cache will be lost.
– Disable: Data is not cached on drives during a write
process. Data will not be lost when the system is powered
off unexpectedly.
– Unchanged: The current drive cache policy remains
unchanged.
Default value: Unchanged
Disable BGI Status of the background initialization (BGI).

– No: enables background initialization. In this mode, the
background automatically starts initializing virtual drives.
– Yes: disables background initialization.
Default value: No
Select Size Size of a virtual drive. If multiple virtual drives need to be

created in a drive group, the specified capacity must be
smaller than the total capacity.
NOTE
If you want to set Select Size to the available space of the drive in
the current RAID mode, click Update Size. It is used in the following
scenarios:
– Only one virtual drive needs to be created for a drive group.
– The virtual drive to be created is the last one for a drive group
with multiple virtual drives.
2. Select RAID 0 from RAID Level.

3. Set other parameters on the Virtual Drive Definition screen as required.

NOTE
If only one virtual drive needs to be configured, click Update Size and then Accept.
Step 5 (Optional) Configure the RAID array capacity.

To divide a drive group into multiple virtual drives, you need to manually
configure the capacity for each virtual drive.
1. Enter the virtual drive capacity to be configured in the Select Size text box
and click Accept.
For example, after you set the capacity of VD 0 to 200 GB, VD 0 is displayed
under Drive Group 0, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 Configuration result
Step 6 (Optional) Create multiple virtual drives.

NOTE
Each drive group supports a maximum of 16 virtual drives.
1. On the screen shown in Figure 4-248, click Back and repeat Step 3 to Step 5
for each virtual drive to be created.
In this example, three virtual drives are created.

Figure 4-16 Creating multiple virtual drives
2. On the screen shown in Figure 4-248, click Next.

The configuration result is displayed.
3. Click Accept.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Yes.
The dialog box shown in Figure 4-18 is displayed.
Figure 4-18 Initialization information
NOTICE
Initializing virtual drives will damage data on the virtual drives. If the original
data on the drives needs to be retained, select No.
Step 7 Initialize virtual drives.

1. Click Yes.
RAID initialization starts.
After the initialization, Optimal is displayed in the Virtual Drives pane.
Figure 4-19 Virtual drive status

Step 8 Check the configuration result.

1. Click Home in the lower left corner.
The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed. The configured RAID
information is displayed in the Logical View area.
Figure 4-20 RAID manually configured
----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure

navigation tree.
RAID array.

NOTICE

3. Click Yes.
The Select Configuration Method screen is displayed. See Figure 4-22. Table
4-11 describes the parameters.



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled

The Drive Group Definition screen is displayed. See Figure 4-23. Table 4-12
describes the parameters.



without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

Group 0.
Drive Group 0.

NOTE
RAID array.
– A RAID 1 array supports an even number of drives, ranging from 2 to 32.
– If the total number of drives in all RAID arrays under the RAID controller card

4. Click Next.


1. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen is displayed. See Figure 4-28. Table 4-13



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60


– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB

Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:


NOTE

and click Accept.

NOTE


3. Click Accept.

4. Click Yes.
NOTICE

1. Click Yes.


----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure

navigation tree.
RAID array.

NOTICE

3. Click Yes.



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled




without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

Group 0.
Drive Group 0.

NOTE
RAID array.
– A RAID 5 array supports 3 to 32 drives.

4. Click Next.


1. Click Next.

Table 4-16 describes the parameters on the screen.


– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60


– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB

Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:
2. Select RAID 5 from the RAID Level.


NOTE

and click Accept.

NOTE


3. Click Accept.

4. Click Yes.
NOTICE

1. Click Yes.


----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure

navigation tree.
RAID array.

NOTICE

3. Click Yes.



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled




without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

Group 0.
Drive Group 0.


NOTE
RAID array.

4. Click Next.


1. Click Next.



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60


– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB

Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:
Step 5 Select RAID 6 from RAID Level.

Step 6 Set other parameters on the Virtual Drive Definition screen as required.
NOTE

and click Accept.

NOTE


3. Click Accept.

4. Click Yes.
NOTICE

1. Click Yes.


----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Configuration Utility. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging In to the
Configuration Utility.

1. On the main screen, click Configuration Wizard in the navigation tree.
RAID array.
procedure for adding drives is the same for New Configuration and Add
Configuration. This option is not displayed if no drives are available for

NOTICE
Figure 4-63 Configuration Wizard

3. Click Yes.
The Select Configuration Method screen is displayed. See Figure 4-64. Table



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled



Data Data protection is an advanced function of RAID controller

protection cards. The RAID controller card stores keys that are used to
encrypt the member drives. If a drive is removed from the
RAID controller card, data on the drive cannot be obtained
without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

1. In the Drives pane on the left, select two drives to be added to Drive Group
0.
2. Click Add To Array to add them to Drive Groups on the right, as shown in
Figure 4-66.

NOTE
– Each drive group of a RAID 10 array supports an even number of drives, for
example, 2, 4, 6, 8 or 16.
RAID array.
Figure 4-66 Adding drives
3. Click Accept DG. The screen shown in Figure 4-67 is displayed.

4. Repeat Step 3.1 to Step 3.3 to create Drive Group 1, as shown in Figure
4-68.
NOTE
The number of drive groups required for creating a RAID 10 array is 2 to 8.
Figure 4-68 Creating Drive Group 1
5. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen is displayed. See Figure 4-69.

Figure 4-69 Span Definition
6. In the Array With Free Space area, select Drive Group:0 and click Add To
SPAN, as shown in Figure 4-70. Drive Group 0 is added to the Span pane in
the right, as shown in Figure 4-71.
Figure 4-70 Adding a drive group to the span list

Figure 4-71 Drive group added to the span list
7. Repeat Step 3.6 to add more drive groups to the span. See Figure 4-72.
Figure 4-72 Drive groups added to the span list
Step 4 Set the RAID level.

1. Click Next.



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60

– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB


Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:

3. Set other parameters on the Virtual Drive Definition screen.

Step 5 (Optional) Set the VD capacity in Select Size.
NOTE
If you do not need to configure multiple VDs, click Update Size. If you want to divide the
drive group into multiple VDs, manually set the VD capacity.
Step 6 Click Accept.

The VD 0 is created.
For example, after you set the capacity of VD 0 to 0.5 TB, VD 0 is displayed under
Drive Group 0, as shown in Figure 4-74.

NOTE
1. On the screen shown in Figure 4-74, click Back.


2. Click Add to SPAN.

3. Click Next.
Figure 4-76 VD1 property configuration
4. Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

In this example, three virtual drives are created. See Figure 4-77.


The configuration result is displayed. See Figure 4-78.
6. Click Accept.
A confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click Yes.

NOTICE

1. Click Yes.
After the initialization is complete, Optimal is displayed in the Virtual Drives
pane. See Figure 4-80.



information is displayed in the Logical View area. See Figure 4-81.
----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the RAID controller card Configuration Utility. For details, see 4.3.1
Logging In to the Configuration Utility.

RAID array.

NOTICE
– If you select New Configuration, the existing data of the selected physical
drives will be cleared. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
– Add Configuration is recommended if you want to create a RAID array.

3. Click Yes.



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled




without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

1. In the Drives pane on the left, select three drives to be added to Drive Group
0.
Figure 4-85.

NOTE
– Each drive group of a RAID 50 array supports 3 to 8 or 16 drives (depending on the

RAID key specifications).
RAID array.

4-87.
NOTE
For details about the number of drive groups required for creating a RAID 50 array, see
4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
5. Click Next.


7. Repeat Step 3.6 to add more drive groups to the span.

1. Click Next.



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60

– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB


Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:


NOTE


NOTE



3. Click Next.



6. Click Accept.
7. Click Yes.

NOTICE

1. Click Yes.
pane.



----End

Scenarios
NOTE
level.

Workflow
Procedure

RAID array.

NOTICE
– If you select New Configuration, the existing data of the selected physical
drives will be cleared. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
– Add Configuration is recommended if you want to create a RAID array.

3. Click Yes.



n


n function.

NOTE
RAID 60.

without redundancy.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled




without the key.
– Disabled
– Enabled
NOTE

1. In the Drives pane on the left, select three drives to be added to Drive Group
0.
Figure 4-104.

NOTE
– Each drive group of a RAID 60 array supports 3 to 8 or 16 drives (depending on the

RAID key specifications).
RAID array.

4-106.
NOTE
For details about the number of drive groups required for creating a RAID 60 array, see
4.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
5. Click Next.


7. Repeat Step 3.6 to add more drive groups to the span.

1. Click Next.



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60

– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB


Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:


NOTE


NOTE



3. Click Next.



6. Click Accept.
7. Click Yes.

NOTICE

1. Click Yes.
pane.



----End
4.3.9 Automatically Creating a RAID Array

Scenarios
You can automatically create a RAID array if you do not know much about RAID
or have no special requirement on RAID levels, or the storage environment is
simple.
NOTE
● Data will be cleared from the drives added to a RAID array. Before creating an array,
check that the drives to be added have no data or that the data does not need to be
retained.
● An automatically created RAID array may not meet your requirements. Pay attention to
the properties of the automatically created RAID array.

Workflow
Procedure
Step 2 Select the RAID array configuration mode.
navigation tree.
– Clear Configuration: clears the existing RAID configuration.
RAID array.
NOTICE


3. Click Yes.
The Select Configuration Method screen is displayed. See Figure 4-121.



n

n function.

▪ If two drives exist, the system automatically configures

them as a RAID 1 array.
▪ If three or more drives exist, the system automatically

configures them as a RAID 5 or 6 array.
▪ The system does not support automatic configuration

of RAID 10, 50, or 60.

without redundancy.
cannot be obtained without the key. This setting is valid
only for drives supporting data encryption.
▪ Disabled
▪ Enabled
4. Select Automatic Configuration, and click Next.

The Configuration Preview screen is displayed. See Figure 4-122.

Figure 4-122 Configuration Preview screen
5. Click Accept.
6. The "Save this Configuration" message is displayed.
1. Click Yes.
The message "All data on the new Virtual Drives will be lost. Want to
Initialize?" is displayed.
NOTICE
2. Click Yes.
After the initialization, Optimal is displayed in the Virtual Drives pane. See
Figure 4-123.



Figure 4-124 Automatically configured RAID information
----End
4.3.10 Setting Boot Device

Scenarios
NOTICE
● Configuring the boot option is mandatory during the RAID configuration

process.
● In Legacy mode, do not configure more than 25 boot devices for the LSI
SAS2208 controller card.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the server through a remote virtual console (for example, iMana 200)
and can manage the server on a real-time basis. Access the Configuration Utility
main screen. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility.
Step 2 Create a RAID array.
For details, see 4.3.2 Manually Creating a RAID 0 Array to 4.3.9 Automatically
Creating a RAID Array.
Step 3 Set the boot device.

1. Select the Virtual Drives on the main screen.

The Virtual Drives screen is displayed as shown in Figure 4-125.
Figure 4-125 Virtual Drives
2. Choose a virtual drive to be configured as the boot drive, select Set Boot
Drive, and click Go.
Set the virtual drive to Boot Drive.
After the configuration, current=None following Set Boot Drive changes to
current=N (N indicates the virtual drive ID).

Figure 4-126 Set Boot Drive
Step 4 Click Home in the lower left corner.

The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed.
Step 5 Exit the Configuration Utility.
For details, see 4.8.11 Exit.
----End
Related Operations
If a server is configured with drive controllers of different chips, set the drive boot
device on the BIOS.
● For details about the settings on the Grantley platform, see "Setting the Boot
Device" in the Huawei Server Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter
Reference.
● For details about the settings on the Brickland platform, see "Setting the Boot
Device" in the Huawei Server Brickland Platform BIOS Parameter
Reference.

This section describes the management screen when Boot Type is set to EFI Boot
Type or UEFI Boot Type on the Configuration Utility.
performed on the configuration management screen, which can be accessed only
after you restart the server. To monitor RAID status and view RAID configurations
during system running, use the StorCLI tool.

4.4.1 Logging In to the Management Screen

Before accessing the configuration management screen, you need to restart the
server, which will interrupt services on the server.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the EFI mode. For details, see A.1.4 Setting the EFI/UEFI Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the controller card management screen.
The position of the RAID controller card management interface in EFI/UEFI mode
varies with the BIOS platform.
● Brickland platform: The interface is integrated into the BIOS Setup. For details,
see A.1.1 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management Screen in
EFI/UEFI Mode (Brickland Platform).
● Grantley platform: The interface is integrated into the Device Manager. For
details, see A.1.2 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management
Screen in EFI/UEFI Mode (Grantley Platform).
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS2208 controller card and press Enter.
The screen shown in Figure 4-127 is displayed. Table 4-30 describes the
parameters on the screen.

Figure 4-127 LSI SAS2208 controller card configuration

Configuration Configures and manages RAID arrays.

Management
Controller Manages the RAID controller.

Management
Virtual Drive Manages virtual drives.

Management
Drive Manages physical drives.

Management
Hardware Queries component information.

Components
----End

4.4.2 Creating RAID 0

NOTE
level.
Procedure
details, see 4.4.1 Logging In to the Management Screen.
Step 2 Log in to the Create Virtual Drive screen.
1. On the main screen, select Main Menu and press Enter.
2. Select Configuration Management and press Enter.
3. Select Create Virtual Drive and press Enter.
The RAID array configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-128.
Figure 4-128 Create Virtual Drive


Select RAID Level Selects a RAID level.
Protect Virtual Status of virtual drive data protection.

Drive
Select Drives Specifies the source of member drives of the virtual

From drive.
Member drive sources are as follows:
– Unconfigured Capacity: idle drives that are not
added to any virtual drives
– Free Capacity: space that is not used as virtual
drives in drive groups
Select Drives Selects member drives.
Virtual Drive Name of the virtual drive.

Name
Virtual Drive Size Capacity of the virtual drive. The default value is the
current largest capacity supported.
Virtual Drive Size Unit of capacity.

Unit
Strip Size Strip size of the virtual drive.

Options include 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1
MB. The default value is 256 KB.
Read Policy Read policy of the virtual drive. The options are as
follows:
– Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The
controller pre-reads sequential data or the data
predicted to be used and saves it in the cache.
Default value: Read Ahead
NOTE
To achieve optimal disk performance, set the policy to Read

Write Policy Default cache write policy of the RAID array. The values
of this parameter vary depending on the firmware
version.
– If the firmware version of the LSI SAS2208 is
3.460.165-8277, the cache write policies are as
follows:
▪ Write Through: When the drive subsystem

receives all data, the RAID controller card signals
the host that the data transmission is complete.
▪ Write Back: If the supercapacitor is not

configured or the supercapacitor is faulty, the
RAID controller card automatically switches to the
Write Through mode.
▪ Always Write Back: When the cache receives all

data, the RAID controller card signals the host
that the data transmission is complete.
follows:


Write Through mode.
▪ Force Write Back: When the cache receives all


NOTE
▪ Default value: Write Back
▪ The RAID controller card does not have a supercapacitor.
▪ The supercapacitor is being charged and discharged.
▪ The supercapacitor is damaged.
▪ Pinned or preserved cache exists.
▪ If this parameter is set to Always Write Back or Force

Write Back, the DDR write data of the RAID controller
card will be lost when:
▪ The server is powered off unexpectedly.
▪ The supercapacitor is not installed.
▪ The supercapacior is being charged.

This mode is not recommended.
I/O Policy I/O policy of the virtual drive. The policy does not affect
the Read Ahead function. The options are as follows:
– Direct:
▪ In a read scenario, data is directly read from

drives. (If Read Policy is set to Read Ahead, data
is read from the cache.)
▪ In a write scenario, data is written into the RAID

cache. (If Write Policy is set to Write Through,
data is directly written into drives.)
– Cached: Data is read from or written to the cache.
Use this option only when configuring CacheCade
1.1.
NOTE
Access Policy Data access policy.

– Read/Write: Read and write operations are allowed.
Default value: Read/Write

Drive Cache Cache policy of physical drives (valid only for drives
with cache).
– Unchanged: uses the current cache policy.
available when the system is powered off
unexpectedly, data in the cache will be lost.
process. Data will not be lost when the system is
powered off unexpectedly.
Disable Enables or disables background initialization.

Background
Initialization
Default Default initialization mode.

Initialization – No: Initialization is not performed.
– Fast: Fast initialization.
– Full: Full initialization.
Emulation Type Logical drive sector size reported to the OS.

If the member drive is 512 B/512 B:
– Default: The logical drive sector is 512 B/512 B.
– None: The logical drive sector is 512 B/512 B.
– Force: The logical drive sector is 512 B/4 KB.
If the member drive is 512 B/4 KB:
– Default: The logical drive sector is 512 B/4 KB.
Save Saves the settings.

Configuration
Step 3 Select a RAID level.

1. Use the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys to select Select RAID Level and press Enter.
2. Select RAID 0 and press Enter.
Step 4 Add member drives.

NOTE
● A RAID 0 array supports 1 to 32 drives.

● If the total number of drives in all RAID arrays under a RAID controller card exceeds 16
or 32 (depending on the RAID key specifications), no drive can be added to RAID arrays.
1. Use the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys to select Select Drives From and press Enter.

2. Select the source of member drives and press Enter.

In this example, Unconfigured Capacity is selected.
The screen for adding member drives is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-129.
Figure 4-129 Adding member drives
Select Media Selects a drive type.

Type
Select Selects a drive interface type.

Interface Type
Logical Sector Partition size.

Size
Check All Selects all drives.
Uncheck All Deselects all drives.
Apply Changes Saves the settings.
3. Set the filter criteria based on Table 4-32.

4. Select the drive to be added and press Enter.
5. Select Enable and press Enter to select the drive.

6. Select Apply Changes and press Enter.

The message "The operation has been performed successfully" is displayed.
7. Click OK.
Step 5 Set the virtual drive properties.

1. Set other properties of the virtual drive by referring to Table 4-31.
Step 6 Save the settings.

1. Select Save Configuration and press Enter.
A confirmation screen is displayed.
2. Select Confirm and press Enter.
3. Select Enable and press Enter.
4. Select Yes and press Enter.
5. Select OK and press Enter.

1. Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
2. Select Virtual Drive Management and press Enter.
Current RAID information is displayed.
Step 8 Exit the configuration screen.

1. Press Esc to go back to the Advanced screen.
2. Press F10 to exit the BIOS.
A message is displayed prompting you to restart the system.
4. Restart the server.
----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure



Drive

From drive.


Name

Unit

follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration


NOTE
● A RAID 1 array supports an even number of drives, ranging from 2 to 32.




Type

Interface Type
Logical Sector Logical sector size.

Size



7. Click OK.


4. Click OK.


----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure




Drive

From drive.


Name

Unit

follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration


NOTE




Type

Interface Type

Size



7. Click OK.


4. Click OK.


----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure




Drive

From drive.


Name

Unit

follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration


NOTE




Type

Interface Type

Size



7. Click OK.


4. Click OK.


----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure



Drive

From drive.

Name


Unit

follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration

Step 4 Create span 1.



Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE
– RAID 10 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports an even number of drives, for
example, 2, 4, 6, 8 or 16. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
– A RAID 10 array supports an even number of drives, for example, 4, 6...16 or 32.


Step 5 Configure span 2.
Configure multiple spans for RAID 10. Figure 4-138 shows the configuration
screen.
Figure 4-138 RAID 10 configuration screen
1. Select Add More Spans and press Enter.

2. Select Select Drives and press Enter.
3. Select the member drives of span 2.
Step 6 Repeat Step 5 to create multiple spans on idle drives.

NOTE
At least two spans must be created for a RAID 10 array. A maximum of eight spans can be
created.
Set other properties of the virtual drive by referring to Table 4-39.



----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure



Drive

From drive.

Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration





Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE
– RAID 50 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports 3 to 8 or 16 drives. The

maximum number of drives supported by each span varies depending on the RAID
key specifications. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
– A RAID 50 array supports 6 to 16 or 32 drives (depending on the RAID key
specifications).


screen.


NOTE
created.



----End

NOTE
level.
Procedure



Drive

From drive.

Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE

version.
follows:


Write Through mode.

follows:


Write Through mode.


NOTE


– Direct:


1.1.
NOTE


with cache).

Background
Initialization



Configuration





Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE

specifications).


screen.


NOTE
created.



----End
4.4.9 Setting Boot Devices

If a server is configured with an LSI SAS2208 card or drive controllers of different
chips, set the drive boot devices for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.
4.5.1 Managing Spare Drives

increases security and reduces impact on services from drive faults. The controller
card supports two types of hot spare drives:
● Global hot spare drive: shared by all RAID arrays of a controller, which can be
automatically replaces a failed drive of the same type as the hot spare drive
in any RAID array.
array of a controller. One or more dedicated hot spare drives can be
services of a failed drive of the same type as the hot spare drive only in a
specified RAID array.

NOTE
4.5.1.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive
Prerequisites
Conditions
The following requirements must be met before you configure hot spare drives:
● The server has idle drives.
● You have logged in to the server through the Remote Virtual Console and can
manage the server on a real-time basis.
● You have logged in to the Configuration Utility. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging
In to the Configuration Utility.
Data
Data preparation is not required for this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Logical View area on the right of the CU main screen, select an idle drive
to be configured as a hot spare drive, as shown in Figure 4-145.
NOTE
Idle drives are displayed in blue and the status is Unconfigured Good.

Figure 4-145 Selecting an idle drive
Step 2 Select Make Global HSP on the screen shown in Figure 4-146.
Figure 4-146 Configuring a global hot spare drive
Step 3 Click Go. The hot spare drive is configured.

Step 4 Tap Home to return to the CU main screen, as shown in Figure 4-147.
The configured hot spare drives are displayed in the Logical View area.

NOTE
The hot spare drives are displayed in pink and the upper-level node of the global hot spare
drives is Global Hot Spares.
Figure 4-147 Viewing global hot spare drives
----End
Related Tasks
To delete a hot spare drive, see 4.5.1.3 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive.
Related Concepts
None.
4.5.1.2 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive
Prerequisites
Conditions
Data

Procedure
NOTE
If SAS drives are grouped as a RAID array, a SATA drive can be used as a dedicated hot
spare drive. If SATA drives are grouped as a RAID array, the SAS drive cannot be used as the
dedicated hot spare drive.
Step 1 In Logical View on the right of the CU main screen, select an idle drive to be
configured as a hot spare drive, as shown in Figure 4-148.
NOTE
Idle drives are displayed in blue and the status is Unconfigured Good.
Figure 4-148 Selecting an idle drive
Step 2 Select Make Dedicated HSP on the screen shown in Figure 4-149.

Figure 4-149 Configuring a dedicated hot spare drive
Step 3 In the Drive Groups area on the right, select a RAID array.
Step 4 Click Go. The hot spare drive is configured.
Step 5 Tap Home to return to the CU main screen, as shown in Figure 4-150.
The configured hot spare drives are displayed in the Logical View area.
NOTE
The hot spare drives are displayed in pink and the upper-level node of the dedicated hot
spare drives is Dedicated Hot Spares.

Figure 4-150 Viewing a dedicated hot spare drive
----End
4.5.1.3 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive
Scenarios
If the number of member drives in a RAID array is insufficient, you can delete a
hot spare drive to enable it to function as a common drive.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Configuration Utility main screen. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging In
to the Configuration Utility.
Step 2 Delete a hot spare drive.
Step 3 Choose Physical View on the left of the Configuration Utility main page.
The drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-151.

Figure 4-151 Drive list
Step 4 On the right of the page, click the hot spare drive that you want to delete.
The hot spare drive property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-152.
Figure 4-152 Hot spare drive properties
Step 5 Select Remove HOTSPARE and click Go.
The common drive property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-153.

Figure 4-153 Drive properties
Step 6 Click Home to go back to the Configuration Utility main screen.
----End
4.5.2 Adding a Drive to a RAID Array
Scenarios
The capacity of a RAID array can be expanded using either of the following
methods:

NOTICE
● Only RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 6 support capacity expansion through
drive addition.
● RAID 10, 50, and 60 do not support capacity expansion through drive addition.
● If a RAID array contains two or more VDs, its capacity cannot be expanded
through drive addition.

If a drive fault occurs during capacity expansion through drive addition, the
following will occur:

● If a faulty drive exists and the RAID array does not contain redundant data
(for example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 0 array expansion), the RAID
array fails.
● If a faulty drive exists and the RAID array still contains redundant data (for
example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 1 array expansion), the expansion
continues. When the expansion is complete, replace the faulty drive and
rebuild the RAID array.
Perform capacity expansion through drive addition with caution.
Prerequisites
Conditions
The following conditions must be met before you add a drive for RAID array
capacity expansion on a server:
● The server has drives that have not been added to a RAID array.
Data
Drive data has been backed up.
Procedure
Step 1 On the left of the Configuration Utility main screen, select Virtual Drives.
The virtual drive selection screen is displayed.
Figure 4-154 Virtual drive selection screen

Step 2 Select Properties and click Go.

The virtual drive property screen is displayed.
Figure 4-155 Virtual drive properties
Step 3 Select Adv Opers under Operations, and click Go.

The capacity expansion screen is displayed.
Figure 4-156 Adding drives to a RAID array

Step 4 Select Change RAID Level and Add Drive, choose a drive from the area below,
and click Go.
NOTICE
● The RAID level must be the same as the original RAID level.
● Only one drive can be added for a capacity expansion operation.
Step 5 Click Yes.

The Advanced Operations screen is displayed.
Figure 4-157 Advanced Operations screen
Step 6 Click VD Progress Info to view the progress.

Figure 4-158 VD Progress Info
Step 8 On the right of the Configuration Utility main screen, view the RAID configuration
and check the capacity expansion result.
----End
4.5.3 Increasing Available RAID Space

Scenarios
methods:

Prerequisites
Conditions
The following conditions must be met before you increase the available space of a
RAID array:
● Member drives of the RAID array have available space.


Data
Procedure
The virtual drive selection screen is displayed.

The virtual drive property screen is displayed.

Step 3 Select Expand under Operations, and click Go.
The capacity expansion screen is displayed.
Figure 4-161 Capacity expansion
Step 4 Enter the percentage of the available space to be increased, and click OK.

and check the capacity expansion result.
----End
4.5.4 Migrating the RAID Level

Scenarios
RAID level migration is a process of converting one RAID configuration to another.
RAID controller cards support RAID level migration as the data volume and
number of drives increase in the system.
You can perform RAID level migration on the Configuration Utility. Typically, an
array is reconfigured with the same or more storage capacity. Sometimes,
additional drives are added.

If a drive fault occurs during RAID level migration, the following will occur:
(for example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 0 level migration), the RAID
array fails.
example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 1 level migration), the migration
continues. When the migration is complete, replace the faulty drive and
Perform RAID level migration with caution.
Prerequisites
Conditions
The following conditions must be met before you migrate a RAID level:
● The current number of drives meets the requirements of the target RAID level.
LSI SAS2208 controller cards support the following RAID level migration modes:
● If a RAID array contains two or more VDs, it does not support RAID level
migration.
migration.

Table 4-45 Minimum numbers of drives to be added for RAID level migration
RAID Level Migration Number of Drives Before Minimum Number of
Migration Drives to Be Added
RAID 0 -> RAID 1 1 1
RAID 1 -> RAID 0 2 -
Data
To avoid data loss, back up data in the current RAID array before RAID level
migration.
Procedure
The virtual drive selection screen is displayed. See Figure 4-162.

The virtual drive property screen is displayed. See Figure 4-163.
Step 3 Select Adv Opers under Operations, and click Go.
The capacity expansion screen is displayed. See Figure 4-164.

Step 4 Select a method for RAID level migration and click Go.
● To perform RAID level migration without adding drives, select Change RAID
Level and choose the target RAID level from the drop-down list box below.
● To perform RAID level migration with drives added, select Change RAID Level
and Add Drive and choose drives from the area below and the target RAID
level from the drop-down list box above.
and check the RAID level migration result.
NOTE
The duration required for RAID level migration varies depending on the data volume in the
RAID array. Wait for a moment if the data volume is large.
----End
4.5.5 Viewing the Status of a Virtual or Physical Drive

The Physical View/Logical View menu is used to switch between physical and
logical views, which allow you to check physical and virtual drive information
respectively. By default, Physical View is displayed in the left pane and the
Logical View is displayed in the right pane.
● After you click Physical View, Logical View will be displayed in the left pane
and Physical View will be displayed in the right pane.
● After you click Logical View, Physical View will be displayed in the left pane
and Logical View will be displayed in the right pane.

Viewing Virtual Drive Status

Step 2 Choose Logical View on the left of the Configuration Utility main screen.
The information about the current RAID array is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-165. For screen description, see Table 4-46.
Figure 4-165 Logical View screen
Table 4-46 Logical View description
Item Description Operation
Drive The format Click Drive Group. The screen shown in 4.8.9.1 Drive
Group is "Drive Group is displayed.
Group xx,
RAID level".
Virtual The format Click a RAID under Virtual Drives. The screen shown
Drives is "Virtual in 4.8.9.2 Virtual Drives is displayed.
Drives xxx".
Drives The format Click a drive under Drives. The screen shown in
is 4.8.9.3 Drives is displayed.
"Backplane
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".

Global The format Click a drive under Global Hot Spares. The screen
Hot is shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is
Spares "Backplane displayed.
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
Dedicat The format Click a drive under Dedicated Hot Spares. The screen
ed Hot is shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
Unconfi The format Click a drive under Unconfigured Drives. The screen
gured is shown in 4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives is displayed.
Drives "Backplane
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
----End
Viewing Physical Drive Status

Step 2 Choose Physical View on the left of the Configuration Utility main page.
The information about the current physical drive is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-166. For details about the interface, see Table 4-47.

Figure 4-166 Physical View
In the Backplane area, drives are listed in the format of "Slot:drive slot number,
type, capacity, status".
Table 4-47 Physical View
Drive Description Operation

Status
Online The drive Click a drive in Online state. The screen shown in
has been 4.8.9.1 Drive Group is displayed.
added to a
RAID array.
Global The drive is Click a drive in Global Hot Spare/Dedicated Hot

Hot a global hot Spare state. The screen shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/
Spare spare drive. Dedicated Hot Spares is displayed.
Dedicat The drive is

ed Hot a dedicated
Spare hot spare
drive.
Unconfi The drive is Click a drive in Unconfigured Good state. The screen
gured idle and not shown in 4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives is displayed.
Good added to
any RAID
array or
configured
as a hot
spare drive.

----End
4.5.6 Importing Foreign Configurations

Scenarios
● A newly installed drive may already have a storage configuration (considered
as a foreign configuration). You can import the foreign configuration to the
controller card on the Configuration Utility.
● After replacing a RAID controller card on a server, perform this operation to
import the original configuration information to the new RAID controller card.
NOTICE
● To restore a RAID array after a member drive is hot swapped, set the drive to
UGOOD and import the foreign configuration.
● If the number of faulty or missing hard disks exceeds the maximum number
allowed by the RAID group, the RAID group cannot be imported.
● To avoid configuration import failure, replace the original RAID controller card
with a new card of the same type.
Procedure
Logging In to the Configuration Utility Screen
1. Log in to the server through a remote virtual console and can manage the
server on a real-time basis. Access the Configuration Utility main screen. For
Importing Foreign Configurations
2. If a foreign configuration is detected, information shown in Figure 4-167 is
displayed on the Configuration Utility screen.

Figure 4-167 Foreign configuration
3. Click Preview.
The Foreign Configuration Preview screen is displayed. See Figure 4-168.
Figure 4-168 Foreign Configuration Preview screen
4. Click Import.
5. After the import is complete, check the imported configuration in the Logical
View area on the right of the Configuration Utility main screen.

4.5.7 Clearing a Foreign Configuration

Scenarios
A newly installed drive may already have a storage configuration (considered as a
foreign configuration). You can clear the foreign configuration on the
Configuration Utility so that the drive can be used for other RAID configuration.
NOTICE
If you replace a RAID controller card when a RAID array has been configured on
the server, the RAID configuration will be considered as a foreign configuration. If
you clear a foreign configuration, the RAID configuration will be lost. Exercise
caution when doing this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the server using the Remote Virtual Console. Log in to the Configuration
Utility. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility.
Step 2 Clear a foreign configuration.
If a foreign configuration is detected, information shown in Figure 4-169 is
displayed on the Configuration Utility.
1. Click Clear.
2. In the Logical View area on the right of the Configuration Utility main
screen, check the unconfigured drives.

You can see that the drive whose configuration has been cleared is in the
Unconfigured Good state.
----End
4.5.8 Discarding Preserved Cache
Scenarios
If a RAID array fails, discard preserved cache before logging in to the
Configuration Utility again.

Configuration information of the failed RAID array is cleared when the preserved
cache is discarded.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the Configuration Utility main screen. For details, see 4.3.1 Logging In to
the Configuration Utility.
Step 2 In the window shown in Figure 4-170, select the RAID controller card whose
preserved cache is to be discarded and click Discard Cache.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-171.
Figure 4-170 Discarding preserved cache

Figure 4-171 Confirmation dialog box
NOTICE
● Before clearing the cache of the LSI SAS2208 controller card, disconnect the
RAID controller card from the drive by removing the cable or drive. Otherwise,
the configuration information of the failed RAID array will be deleted.
● The cache of the RAID controller card contains data that is being read or
written. Clearing the preserved cache may cause data loss.
Step 3 Select YES and click Enter.

No further operation is required.
NOTE
If the preserved cache still exists, see 4.7.4 Failed to Clear Preserved Cache.
----End
4.5.9 Performing a Consistency Check

Scenarios
A fault-tolerant RAID system requires a consistency check on a regular basis. A
consistency check verifies the correctness and validity of redundant data in RAID 1,
5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the server using the Remote Virtual Console.
Step 3 Create a RAID array.
Step 4 Check the consistency.

1. On the left of the Configuration Utility main screen, select Virtual Drives.
The virtual drive option screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-172.
Figure 4-172 Virtual drive option screen
2. Select Properties and click Go.


3. Select CC and click Go.

Figure 4-174 Confirming the information
4. Click Yes to start the RAID consistency check.
NOTICE
When detecting that data or check value mistakes exist in redundant data,
the Configuration Utility modifies these mistakes automatically. Back up all
data before performing a consistency check.
5. After the check is complete, click Home.

----End
4.5.10 Deleting a RAID Array
Scenarios
If the server does not require an array or you need to reconfigure an array, delete
the existing array configuration to release drives.
Procedure
Step 3 Back up the data in the RAID.
Step 4 Delete the RAID.

1. On the left of the Configuration Utility main screen, select Virtual Drives.

2. Select Properties and click Go.

3. Select Delete and click Go.

4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

5. After the RAID array is deleted, the Configuration Utility main screen is
displayed.
----End

in any RAID array.
services of a failed drive of the same type as the hot spare drive only in a
specified RAID array.
NOTE
Procedure
the Management Screen.
Step 2 Access the Drive Management screen.

1. On the main screen, select Drive Management and press Enter.
2. Select a drive and press Enter. The drive detail screen is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-177.

Figure 4-177 Drive Management
Step 3 Configure a global hot spare drive.

1. Set Operation to Assign Global Hot Spare Drive.
2. Select Go and press Enter.
3. Set Confirm to Enable.
5. Press Enter to finish the configuration and return to the previous screen.
----End
Procedure
NOTE
Management Screen.
in Figure 4-178.

Step 3 Configure a dedicated hot spare drive.

1. Set Operation to Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
The virtual drive list is displayed.
3. Select the virtual drive to be associated and press Enter.
4. Select Enabled and press Enter.
----End
Scenarios
Procedure
to the Management Screen.


in Figure 4-179.

1. Set Operation to Unassign Hot Spare Drive.
----End

Scenarios
methods:

NOTICE
drive addition.
● If a RAID array contains two or more virtual drives, its capacity cannot be
expanded through drive addition.
● The RAID controller card does not allow you to reconfigure two RAID arrays
(that is, reconfigure virtual drives, including adding drives or migrating RAID
levels) at the same time. Perform operations on the next RAID array after the
current process is complete.

array fails.
Prerequisites
Conditions
In to the Management Screen.
● Drive data has been backed up.
Data
None
Procedure
Step 1 Access the Virtual Drive Management screen.
1. Select Main Menu and press Enter.
The Virtual Drive Management screen is displayed. See Figure 4-180.

Figure 4-180 Virtual Drive Management
Step 2 Add a drive.

1. Select the RAID array whose capacity is to be expanded and press Enter.
2. Select Operation and press Enter.
The Operation screen is displayed. See Figure 4-181.
Figure 4-181 Operation

3. Select Reconfigure Virtual Drives and press Enter.

The Reconfigure Virtual Drives screen is displayed. See Figure 4-182.
Figure 4-182 Reconfigure Virtual Drives
5. Select a RAID level.
NOTICE
The RAID level must be the same as the original RAID level.
6. Select Choose the Operation and press Enter.

The drive selection screen is displayed.
7. Select the drive to be added, select Apply Changes, and press Enter.
NOTE
– The types and specifications of the drive to be added must be the same as those of
the member drives in the RAID array. The capacity of the drive must be greater
than or equal to the capacity of the smallest drive in the RAID array.
– During capacity expansion, you need to add two drives to RAID 1 each time, and
only one drive to RAID 0, RAID 5, or RAID 6 each time.
– A RAID controller card cannot be used to expand the capacity of two or more RAID
arrays at the same time.
The system displays a message indicating that the operation is successful.


11. Select Start Operation and press Enter.
The operations are complete. You can go to the Virtual Drive Management
screen and check the capacity expansion result, as shown in Figure 4-183,
which shows that the capacity expansion is going on.
----End
NOTE
The capacity expansion will be interrupted by a server restart, but it continues after the
server is restarted.
4.6.3 Expanding the Available Space of a Virtual Drive
Scenarios
If a virtual drive does not occupy the entire capacity of all its member drives, you
can expand the virtual drive capacity by adjusting the available virtual drive space.
Procedure


3. Select a virtual drive and press Enter.
Basic information about the virtual drive is displayed.
Step 3 Expand the virtual drive capacity.

1. Set Operation to Expand Virtual Drive.
The virtual drive capacity expansion screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-185 and Figure 4-186. Table 4-48 describes the parameters on the screen.

Figure 4-185 Expand Virtual Drive (1)
Current Current capacity of the virtual drive.

Capacity

Available Capacity that can be used for expansion.

Capacity
Enter a Capacity expansion percentage.

Percentage
of Available
Capacity
Capacity of Virtual drive capacity after expansion.

Virtual
Drive after
Expansion
3. Set the expansion percentage.

----End

Procedure
1. On the main screen, select Virtual Drive Management and press Enter.
Basic information about the virtual drive is displayed. See Figure 4-187.

Step 3 Delete the virtual drive.

1. Set Operation to Delete Virtual Drive.
----End
4.6.5 Rebuilding RAID

If a member drive of a RAID array is faulty, RAID data rebuild is required
regardless of its replacement by a new drive or a hot spare drive.
By default, if a RAID array needs to be rebuilt and an appropriate drive is

available, the system automatically starts a rebuild. However, if the controller card
property Auto Rebuild is set to Disable, you need to manually start the rebuild.
Screen Introduction
On the Main Menu screen, select a drive under the Drive Management node and
press Enter to display the drive operation menu, as shown in Figure 4-188. Table
4-49 describes the operations that are available.

Figure 4-188 Drive Management operation menu
Table 4-49 Drive Group available operations

Operation Description
Select operation Selects the operation to be performed.
Star Locate Locates the drive.
Stop Locate Stops locating the drive.
Rebuild Rebuilds a RAID array.

● Suspend
● Stop
Place drive Online Makes a drive online.
Prepare For Prepares for removing the drive.

Removal
Mark drive as Deletes the offline drive from the RAID array.
Missing
Rebuilding RAID
Step 1 On the menu, choose Rebuild and press Enter.
The Rebuild menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select an operation type and press Enter.

Step 3 Select Yes and press Enter.
----End
4.6.6 Viewing RAID Controller Card Properties

Scenarios
Check whether the current RAID controller card meets the actual requirements by
viewing RAID controller card properties.
Procedure
Step 2 Access the Controller Management screen.
2. Select Controller Management and press Enter.
The basic information about the RAID controller card is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-189. Table 4-50 describes the parameters on the screen.
Figure 4-189 Controller Management


Firmware Update Reserved interface.
Silence Alarm Onboard alarm buzzer in the silence state.

NOTE
This parameter is unavailable if the LSI SAS2208 screw-in RAID
controller card is not configured with a buzzer.
Product Name Name of the RAID controller card.
Serial Number Serial number of the RAID controller card.
Controller Status Operating status of the RAID controller card.
Select Boot Current boot device.

Device NOTE
This boot option applies only to the Legacy mode. For details
about how to configure the boot option for the EFI/UEFI mode,
see 4.4.9 Setting Boot Devices.
PCI ID PCI ID of the RAID controller card.
PCI Slot Number PCI slot number of the RAID controller card.
Package Version Package version of the RAID controller card.
Firmware Version Firmware version of the RAID controller card.
NVDATA Version NVDATA version.
Connector Count Number of controller connectors for connecting to the

mainboard.
Drive Count Number of drives mounted to the RAID controller card.
Virtual Drive Number of virtual drives that can be managed by the

Count RAID controller card.
Advanced More operations on the RAID controller card.

Controller
Management
Advanced Displays and modifies advanced controller properties.

Controller
Properties
Step 3 View advanced controller properties.

1. Select Advanced Controller Properties and press Enter.
The advanced controller properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-190. Table 4-51 describes the parameters.
You can view and modify advanced properties of the RAID controller card on
this screen.

Figure 4-190 Advanced Controller Properties

Cache and Displays cache and memory information about the RAID
Memory controller card.
Patrol Read Specifies the system inspection feature.
Power Save Sets the drive sleep mode.

Setting
Spare Sets the hot spare status of the controller.
Task Rates Sets the handling speed of various tasks.
Alarm Control Enables or disables the alarm buzzer.
Auto Import Enables or disables automatic foreign configuration import.

Foreign
Configuration

Boot Mode Specifies the action to be taken when the BIOS detects an
exception.
● Stop on errors (default): stops startup and continues with
startup only when user confirms.
● Pause on errors: suspends startup and continues with
startup even if the user does not confirm after a set
period.
● Ignore errors: continues startup. This option is usually for
system diagnosis.
● Safe mode on errors: enters safe startup mode.
Controller BIOS Enables or disables the controller BIOS.
ROC Specifies the controller temperature.

Temperature
Shield State Specifies whether I/O interruption is supported for drive

Supported diagnosis.
The default value is Yes.
Drive Security Enables or disables drive encryption.
T10-PI Enables or disables information protection technology.
Expanded Specifies whether virtual drive expansion is supported.

Virtual Drive
Support
Maintain Drive Specifies whether to maintain drive failure history.

Fail History
SMART Polling Specifies the SMART polling interval.
Stop Consistency Specifies whether consistency check is stopped in case of

Check on Error errors.
JBOD Mode Enables or disables the pass-through mode.
----End
4.6.7 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration

Scenarios
● After replacing a RAID controller card, import the original configuration to the
new RAID controller card.
● If a drive newly installed on a server already has a RAID configuration that
the user needs or does not need, you can import or delete the configuration.

NOTICE
● To restore a RAID array after a member drive is hot swapped, set the drive to
UGOOD and import the foreign configuration.
● If you replace a RAID controller card when a RAID array has been configured
on the server, the RAID configuration will be considered as Foreign
Configuration. If you clear a foreign configuration, the RAID configuration will
be lost. Exercise caution when doing this operation.
● If the number of faulty or missing drives exceeds the maximum number
allowed by the RAID array, the RAID array cannot be imported.
Importing a Foreign Configuration

Step 2 On the main screen, select Main Menu and press Enter.
Step 3 Select Configuration Management and press Enter.
Step 4 Select Manage Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
The foreign configuration management screen is displayed.
Figure 4-191 Manage Foreign Configuration
Step 5 Select Preview Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
The existing foreign configuration is displayed.

Step 6 Select Import Foreign Configuration and press Enter.

Step 7 Select Confirm and press Enter.
Step 8 Select Enable and press Enter.
Step 10 Select OK to finish the configuration and return to the previous screen.
----End
Clearing a Foreign Configuration


Step 6 Select Clear Foreign Configuration and press Enter.


Step 10 Select OK on the success message to finish the configuration and return to the
previous screen.
----End
4.6.8 Creating Multiple Virtual Drives

Create multiple virtual drives for a RAID array that already has one or more virtual
drives. The following uses a RAID 0 array that has one virtual drive (as shown in
Figure 4-195 as an example).
Step 1 Choose Main Menu > Configuration Management > Create Virtual Drive. The
Create Virtual Drive screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-196.

Step 2 Set Select Drives From to Free Capacity, as shown in Figure 4-197.
Step 3 Choose Select Drive Groups and press Enter.

The existing RAID arrays (drive groups) are displayed, as shown in Figure 4-198.

Figure 4-198 Select Drive Groups
Step 4 Select the RAID array for which you want to create multiple virtual drives and
press Enter, as shown in Figure 4-199.
Step 5 Select Apply Changes and press Enter.

A message is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 6 Press Enter to return to the screen shown in Figure 4-200. For details about the
parameters, see Table 4-52.



Drive
Select Drives From Specifies the source of member drives of the virtual drive.
● Unconfigured Capacity: idle drives that are not added
to any virtual drives
● Free Capacity: space that is not used as virtual drives in
drive groups

Name

Unit


Options include 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1 MB.
The default value is 256 KB.
Read Policy Read policy of the virtual drive. The options are as follows:
● No Read Ahead: disables the Read Ahead function.
● Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The
NOTE
To achieve optimal disk performance, set the policy to Read Ahead
for HDDs and No Read Ahead for SSDs.

Write Policy Default cache write policy of the RAID array. The values of
this parameter vary depending on the firmware version.
● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS2208 is
3.460.165-8277, the cache write policies are as follows:
– Write Through: When the drive subsystem receives
all data, the RAID controller card signals the host
– Write Back: If the supercapacitor is not configured or
the supercapacitor is faulty, the RAID controller card
automatically switches to the Write Through mode.
– Always Write Back: When the cache receives all
data, the RAID controller card signals the host that
the data transmission is complete.
– Force Write Back: When the cache receives all data,
the RAID controller card signals the host that the
NOTE
– Default value: Write Back
– The RAID controller card does not have a supercapacitor.
– The supercapacitor is being charged and discharged.
– The supercapacitor is damaged.
– Pinned or preserved cache exists.
– If this parameter is set to Always Write Back or Force
Write Back, the DDR write data of the RAID controller card
will be lost when:
– The server is powered off unexpectedly.
– The supercapacitor is not installed.
– The supercapacior is being charged.

● Direct:
– In a read scenario, data is directly read from drives.
(If Read Policy is set to Read Ahead, data is read
from the cache.)
– In a write scenario, data is written into the RAID
cache. (If Write Policy is set to Write Through, data
is directly written into drives.)
● Cached: Data is read from or written to the cache. Use
NOTE

● Read/Write: Read and write operations are allowed.
● Read Only: The virtual drive is read-only.
● Blocked: The virtual drive is blocked from access.
cache).
● Unchanged: uses the current cache policy.
● Enable: Data is cached on drives to improve write
● Disable: Data is not cached on drives during a write

Background
Initialization

Initialization ● No: Initialization is not performed.
● Fast: Fast initialization.
● Full: Full initialization.


● Default: The logical drive sector is 512 B/512 B.
● None: The logical drive sector is 512 B/512 B.
● Force: The logical drive sector is 512 B/4 KB.
● Default: The logical drive sector is 512 B/4 KB.

Configuration
Step 7 Set virtual drive properties, as shown in Table 4-52.

Step 8 Select Save Configuration and press Enter.
A confirm screen is displayed.
Step 11 Select OK and press Enter.
You can check the virtual drives on the Virtual Drive Management screen. Figure
4-201 shows the virtual drives configured.

----End
NOTE
A RAID array supports a maximum of 16 virtual drives. To create another virtual drive,
repeat Step 1 to Step 11.
4.7 Troubleshooting
This section describes solutions to drive faults, RAID controller card faults, and
battery or capacitor faults. For other situations, see the Huawei Server
Maintenance Guide.
4.7.1 Drive Fault

Symptom
A drive is faulty if any of the following occurs:
● The drive fault indicator is on.
● After the server is powered on, the drive indicator is off.
● A drive fault alarm was generated.
Solution
Step 1 Determine the slot number of the faulty drive.
● Locate the faulty drive based on the fault indicator, which is steady orange.
For details, see the drive numbering section in the user guide of the server
you use.

● Locate the faulty drive based on the iMana/iBMC drive alarm information. For
details, see iMana/iBMC Alarm Handling.
● Locate the faulty drive using the RAID controller card GUI. For details, see
4.8.7 Drives or 4.9.5 Drive Management.
● Locate the faulty drive using the RAID controller card CLI tool. For details, see
4.11.2.25 Querying RAID Controller Card, RAID Array, or Physical Drive
Information.
Step 2 Check for and delete the Preserved Cache data from the server.
NOTICE
● If the RAID array containing the Preserved Cache data is invalid (the number of
faulty drives in the RAID array exceeds the maximum number of faulty drives
supported by the RAID array), the RAID array will be deleted when
PreservedCache data is deleted.
● If the drive fault is caused by manual removal and installation of the drive in
the RAID array, remove the drive and then delete the Preserved Cache data. By
doing this, the RAID array will not be deleted.
● Clear the Preserved Cache data through the GUI. For details, see 4.5.8
Discarding Preserved Cache.
● To clear the Preserved Cache data through the CLI, perform the following
steps:
a. Run the storcli64/c0 show preservedcache command to check whether
a preserved cache exists.
In this example, Preserved Cache data exists in VD 0 managed by
controller 0.
b. Run the ./storcli64/call/vall delete preservedCache force command to

clear the Preserved Cache.
Step 3 Replace the drive.

NOTICE
● Before removing a drive, determine its location. If a drive is removed by

mistake, the RAID array will fail. For details, see Step 1. If the drive fault is
caused by manual removal and installation of the drive or a faulty backplane,
set the drive to Unconfig Good and restore the RAID array. For details, see
4.5.6 Importing Foreign Configurations or 4.5.7 Clearing a Foreign
Configuration.
● If the faulty drive is a pass-through drive or belongs to a RAID array without
redundancy (for example, RAID 0), the drive data cannot be restored.
● If the faulty drive belongs to a RAID array with redundancy and the number of
faulty drives does not exceed the maximum number of faulty drives supported
by the RAID array, the RAID array data will not be lost. Otherwise, RAID group
data will be lost. For details about the maximum number of faulty drives
supported by RAID arrays, see Table 4-3.
● After a faulty drive is disconnected from its backplane, wait 30 seconds before
removing it. The alarm will not be cleared immediately after a new drive is
installed. It will be cleared after the RAID array is rebuilt. Do not hot remove
and install drives frequently.
● The newly inserted drive should not contain RAID information. If the installed
drive has RAID information, delete the RAID information from the RAID
controller card of the same model as the original RAID controller card or
perform low-level formatting on the drive. For details, see the user guide of the
RAID controller card you use.
Remove the faulty drive and install a new drive. The new drive can be restored in
the following ways based on the RAID configuration of the faulty drive:
● If the RAID array has a hot spare drive, copyback will be performed after the
hot spare drive is rebuilt. After data is copied to the new drive, the hot spare
drive restores to the hot backup state.
● If the RAID array has redundancy feature and has no hot spare drive, the
newly installed drive automatically rebuilds data. If more than one faulty
drive exists in a RAID array, replace the faulty drives one by one based on the
drive fault time. Replace the next drive only after the current drive data is
rebuilt.
● If the faulty drive is a pass-through drive, replace it.
● If the faulty drive belongs to a RAID array without redundancy (RAID 0),
create RAID 0 again.
– For details about how to create a RAID 0 array in Legacy mode, see 4.3.2
Manually Creating a RAID 0 Array.
– For details about how to create a RAID 0 array in UEFI mode, see 4.4.2
Creating RAID 0.
– For details about how to create a RAID 0 array by running commands,
see 4.11.2.7 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array.
----End

4.7.2 RAID Controller Card Fault

Symptom
A RAID controller card is faulty if any of the following occurs:
● The server reports an alarm indicating a controller card fault.
Solution
Step 1 Replace the controller card. Then check whether the alarm is cleared.
● If yes, go to Step 2.
● If no, go to Step 3.
Step 2 Import the original RAID information and check whether data can be written to
the drives controlled by the RAID controller.
● If yes, no further action is required.
Step 3 Contact Huawei technical support.
----End
4.7.3 Battery or Capacitor Fault

Symptom
The battery or capacitor of a RAID controller card on a server is faulty if any of the
following occurs:
● The server write speed greatly decreases.
● The Configuration Utility of the controller card indicates that the battery or
capacitor status is abnormal.
● Information shown in Figure 4-202 is displayed when the OS restarts.
Figure 4-202 Failure to obtain iBBU information
Solution
Step 1 Go to the Configuration Utility of the controller card and check whether the
battery or capacitor state is Present:

Step 2 Power off the server, open the chassis cover, and check whether the controller card
is connected to a battery or capacitor.
Step 3 Install the battery or capacitor based on the system configuration, and check
whether the capacitor state is Present.
Step 4 Remove and install the battery or capacitor and check whether the capacitor state
is Present.
Step 5 Check the battery or capacitor attributes.
Battery attribute check method:
1. Check whether the value of Design Capacity is 65535mAh.

– If yes, go to Step 6.
– If no, go to Step 5.2.
2. Check whether the value of FullCharge Capacity is less than 600mAh.
– If no, go to Step 5.3.
3. Check whether the value of Remaining Capacity is less than 600mAh.
– If no, go to Step 7.
Capacitor attribute check method:
1. Check whether the value of Voltage is Normal.

– If no, go to Step 6.
Step 6 Replace the battery or capacitor, and check whether the capacitor state is Present
and whether the fault is rectified.
----End

4.7.4 Failed to Clear Preserved Cache

Symptom
A drive in a RAID 0 array was faulty. The customer replaced the drive, and
attempted to clear the preserved cache for the LSI SAS2208 controller card, as
shown in Figure 4-203. After the operation was complete, the preserved cache
still existed on the screen.
Figure 4-203 Clearing preserved cache
Cause Analysis
This is an inherent problem of LSI SAS2208. The preserved cache occasionally fails
to be cleared on the CU screen, resulting in RAID array configuration failures.
Solution
Solution 1: Use StroCLI to clear preserved cache. (The following uses Linux as an
example and assumes that the user can log in to the OS.)
1. On the RAID configuration screen, set Boot Error Handling to Ignore errors.
See Figure 4-204.

Figure 4-204 Setting Boot Error Handling
2. Download and decompress the StroCLI package.

3. Upload the StroCLI package (for example storcli-1.17.08-1.noarch.rpm for
Linux OSs) to /tmp of the server OS.
4. Run rpm -ivh storcli-1.17.08-1.noarch.rpm to install StroCLI.
5. After the installation is complete, run find ./ -name *storcli* to query the
installation directory.
6. Go to the directory and run the following command to clear preserved cache:
[linux~host]# cd /opt/MegaRAID/storcli
[linux~host]# /storcli64 /c0/vall delete preservedcache

8. Go to the RAID configuration screen and configure a new RAID array.
9. Set Boot Error Handling to Stop on Errors. See Figure 4-204.
Solution 2: Use the toolkit to clear preserved cache. (Use this solution when the
OS login fails.)

1. Log in to the Huawei Enterprise Website.

2. Choose TECHNICAL SUPPORT > Product Support > Management Software
> FusionServer Tools, click the Software Download tab, and download the
latest toolkit.
3. Mount the toolkit ISO file to the virtual drive of the server. See Figure 4-205.
Figure 4-205 Mounting the toolkit
4. Restart the server from the virtual drive and load the toolkit when prompted.
5. After the loading is complete, press C to go to the CLI, and enter the user
name and password. See Figure 4-206.
Figure 4-206 Logging in to the toolkit CLI
6. Run the following command to clear preserved cache:

linux:/ #cd /opt/MegaRAID/storcli
linux:/opt/MegaRAID/storcli #./storcli64 /c0/vall delete preservedcache

8. Go to the RAID configuration screen and configure a new RAID array.

4.7.5 RAID Controller Card Not Healthy in Device Manager

Symptoms
On the Device Manager screen, the message "Some drivers are not healthy" is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-207.
Figure 4-207 Error message
Solution
Step 1 Select Some drivers are not healthy and press Enter.
The health status screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-208.

Figure 4-208 Health status screen
Step 2 Select Repair the whole platform and press Enter.

The Critical Message screen is displayed.
Step 3 Check the message displayed on the Critical Message screen.
● Some configured disks have been removed from your system or All of the
disks from your previous configuration are gone: See 4.7.5.1 Some
configured disks have been removed from your system/All of the disks
from your previous configuration are gone.
● There are offline or missing virtual drives with preserved cache: See
4.7.5.2 preserved cache.
● The following VDs have missing disks: See 4.7.5.3 VDs have missing disks.
----End
NOTE
For description of messages displayed during startup of the RAID controller card and
handling suggestions displayed on the management screen, see A.3 Common Boot Error
Messages for RAID Controller Cards.
4.7.5.1 Some configured disks have been removed from your system/All of
the disks from your previous configuration are gone
Symptoms
When you select Repair the whole platform to open the Critical Message
screen, the message "Some configured disks have been removed from your

system" or "All of the disks from your previous configuration are gone" is
Figure 4-209 Critical Message screen
Solution
The message indicates that drives are not detected by the RAID controller card,
which is not caused by the RAID controller card. You are advised to perform the
following operations based on actual needs:
● Power off the server and check whether cables are properly connected and
whether any drive is removed. If there is no abnormalities, power on the
server and check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm is cleared, the
fault is rectified. If the alarm persists, contact technical support.
● Ignore the message and perform the following steps to go to the RAID
controller card management screen:
a. On the screen shown in Figure 4-209, select Enter Your Input Here and
press Enter.
An input box is displayed.
b. Type c, select Yes or Ok, and press Enter.
c. Select Enter Your Input Here again and press Enter.
d. Type y, select Yes or Ok, and press Enter.
The system displays "Critical Message handling completed. Please exit."
e. Press Esc to return to the Device Manager screen.
f. Select the LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card and press Enter. The RAID
controller card management screen is displayed.

4.7.5.2 preserved cache
Symptom
When you open the Critical Message screen, the message "There are offline or
missing virtual drives with preserved cache" is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-210.
Figure 4-210 Status information
Solution
Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 4-210, select Enter Your Input Here and press
Enter.

Step 2 Enter any content, select Yes, and press Enter.

The message "Critical Message handling completed. Please exit" is displayed.
Step 3 Press Esc.

Step 4 Press Y to save the configuration.

Step 5 Press Esc to go back to the Device Manager screen, as shown in Figure 4-213.
Figure 4-213 Device Manager screen

Step 6 Select AVAGO MegaRAID<SAS2208> driver Health Protocol Utility and press
Enter.
The Dashboard View screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-214.
Figure 4-214 Configuration Utility screen
Step 7 Select Discard Preserved Cache and press Enter.


Figure 4-215 Discard Preserved Cache screen
Step 11 Restart the server.
Step 12 The Device Manager screen is displayed. Check whether the message "The
platform is healthy" is displayed on the screen.
● If no, contact Huawei technical support.
----End
4.7.5.3 VDs have missing disks
Symptom
On the Driver Healthy Protocol Utility screen, the message "The following VDs
have missing disks" is displayed.
Solution
Step 1 Repair the RAID controller card.

1. Select Enter Your Input Here and press Enter.

2. Enter c, select Yes, and press Enter.
The Driver Healthy Protocol Utility screen is displayed.
3. Select Enter Your Input Here again and press Enter.
4. Enter y, select Yes, and press Enter.
The repair is completed.
Step 2 Press Esc to exit the current interface.
Step 4 Restart the server and check whether the message "The platform is healthy" is
displayed on the Device Manager screen.
----End
Scenarios
The LSI SAS2208 BIOS Configuration Utility is used to configure and manage the
LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card. Configuration Utility is embedded in the BIOS of
the controller and runs independently from the OS. It simplifies the procedures for
configuring and managing RAID properties.

Before accessing the Configuration Utility main screen, you need to restart the
server, which will interrupt services running on the server.
Procedure

1. During the server startup, press Ctrl+H when the message "Press <Ctrl><H>
for WebBIOS or press <Ctrl><Y> for Preboot CLI" shown in Figure 4-216 is
displayed.

2. After the self-check is complete, the Adapter Selection screen is displayed, as


Bus No. Bus number.
Device No. Device ID.
Type RAID controller card type.

Pkg. Version
3. Select the LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card and click Start.
The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-218.


Advanced Configures advanced options of a RAID controller card.

Software
Options
Controller Selects a RAID controller card.

Selection
Controller Manages properties of a selected RAID controller card.

Properties
Scan Rescans the status and configuration changes of physical or

Devices virtual drives and displays the current status of the drives.
Virtual Views and modifies virtual drive properties or deletes a

Drivers Views the physical drive properties and operates the drive,
Configuratio Starts the configuration wizard. By using the configuration

n Wizard wizard, you can perform operations such as creating new
storage configurations, clearing existing configurations, and
adding new configurations.

Physical/ Switches between physical and logical views, which allow

Logical View you to check physical and virtual drive information
respectively. By default, Physical View is displayed in the left
pane and the Logical View is displayed in the right pane.
– After you click Physical View, Logical View will be
displayed in the left pane and Physical View will be
– After you click Logical View, Physical View will be
displayed in the left pane and Logical View will be
Events Displays system events.
Exit Exits the Configuration Utility.
----End
Related Tasks
None
Related Concepts
Table 4-55 describes the icons on the Configuration Utility toolbar.
Table 4-55 Icons
Icon Function
Returns to the Configuration Utility main screen.
Returns to the previous page.
Exits the Configuration Utility main screen.
Disables the onboard sound alarm for the RAID controller card.
Displays information about the Configuration Utility version,

browser version, and HTML engine interface.

4.8.2 Advanced Software Options

On the Advanced Software Options screen, the status of advanced properties of
the RAID controller card is displayed.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-219 shows the screen.
Figure 4-219 Advanced Software Options screen
4.8.3 Controller Selection

If multiple RAID controller cards are installed on the server, the Controller
Selection screen allows you to access the Configuration Utility of each RAID
controller card.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-220 shows the Adapter Selection screen. Table 4-56 describes the


Bus No. Bus number.
Device No. Device number.
Type Type of the RAID controller card.

Pkg. Version
Logging In to the Configuration Utility of a RAID Controller Card

On the Adapter Selection screen, select the RAID controller card to be accessed
and click Start.
The Configuration Utility of the RAID controller card is displayed.
4.8.4 Controller Properties

This menu allows you to view and modify RAID controller card properties.
Screen Description
Figure 4-221 shows the Controller Information screen. Table 4-57 describes the
Figure 4-221 Controller Information screen (1)


Parameter Description Parameter Description
Serial Number Serial number of FRU Field replaceable

a RAID controller unit (FRU).
card.
Sub Vendor ID Vendor ID based Drive Security Indicates whether

on PCIe Capable to enable drive
specifications. encryption.
Sub Device ID Device ID based Port Count Number of ports.

on PCIe
specifications.
Host Interface Host interface. NVRAM Size Size of the

nonvolatile
random access
memory
(NVRAM).
Firmware Version Firmware version. Memory Size Memory size.
FW Package Firmware Min Strip Size Minimum strip

Version package version. size.
Firmware Time Firmware time. Max Strip Size Maximum strip

size.
WebBIOS Version WebBIOS Virtual Drive Number of virtual

Configuration Count drives.
Utility version.
Drive Count Number of drives. Hot Spare Spin Indicates whether

Down to enable drive
energy
conservation for
hot spare drives.
Unconfi Good Spin Indicates whether Spin Down Time Time before a
Down to enable drive drive enters the
energy standby mode for
conservation for energy
drives in the conservation. If a
Unconf Good drive is not
state. accessed within
the standby
duration, the
drive enters the
spin down state.
Chip Temp Chip temperature. – –

Viewing or Modifying RAID Controller Card Properties

1. Click Next.
The Controller Information screen shown in Figure 4-222 is displayed. Table
4-58 describes the parameters on the screen.
Figure 4-222 Controller Information screen (2)
Table 4-58 Parameters

Emergency Spare Specifies Emergency for Specifies whether

whether to use SMARTer to use a hot
the emergency spare drive to
spare function replace a drive
when a drive that prefails.
fails.
Shield State Specifies SSD Disk Cache Specifies whether

Supported whether the Setting to enable SSD
shield state is cache.
supported.
Metadata Size Metadata size. Data Protection Specifies whether

Supported data protection is
supported.

NOTE
Data protection is an advanced feature of RAID controller cards. The RAID controller
card stores keys that are used to encrypt the member drives. If a drive is removed
from the RAID controller card, data on the drive cannot be obtained without the key.
2. Click Next.
The Controller Properties screen is displayed. See Figure 4-223.
Figure 4-223 Controller Properties screen (1)
3. Set parameters on the Controller Properties screen as required. Table 4-59



Battery Backup Indicates Coercion Mode Drive capacity

whether the compression
current RAID mode.
controller card ● None:
has an integrated Truncate no
battery backup drive capacity.
unit (iBBU) or
capacitor. You ● 128MB-way:
can click Truncate 128
Manage to view MB capacity
the iBBU or for capacity
capacitor alignment.
information. ● 1GB-way:
Truncate 1 GB
capacity for
capacity
alignment.
Default value:
1GB-way
Set Factory Specifies whether S.M.A.R.T Polling Interval (in

Defaults to load factory seconds) for the
configurations. drive self-
● No monitoring,
analysis and
● Yes reporting
Default value: technology
No. (SMART) test.
Default value:
300
Cluster Mode Specifies whether Alarm Control Onboard buzzer

to enable the status.
cluster mode. ● Disabled
NOTE
● Enabled
A group of
independent ● Silence
servers that can
access the same
Default value:
storage devices Disabled
and provide
services for the
same users can
be configured as
a cluster.

Rebuild Rate Percentage of Patrol Read Rate Percentage of

I/O resources I/O resources
occupied by RAID occupied by
synchronization. patrol read.
Default value: 30 Default value: 30
BGI Rate Percentage of Cache Flush Interval (in

(Background I/O resources Interval seconds) for
Initialization occupied by cache data
Rate) background drive updates.
initialization. Default value: 4
Default value: 30
CC Rate Percentage of Spinup Drive Number of drives

(Consistency I/O resources Count that spin up
Check Rate) occupied by the simultaneously.
consistency Default value: 4
check for virtual
drives.
Default value: 30
Reconstruction Percentage of Spinup Delay Interval (in

Rate I/O resources seconds)
occupied by RAID between spinups
level migration of drives.
or RAID capacity Default value: 2
expansion.
Default value: 30
NCQ (Native Specifies whether Spin Down Delay Interval (in

Command to enable NCQ Time minutes)
Queuing) (Native between normal
Command operating and
Queuing) on suspension of a
SATA drives. drive.
Default value: Default value: 30
Enabled
4. Click Submit to save the settings or click Reset to restore default settings.
5. Click Next.
The Controller Properties screen is displayed. See Figure 4-224.

Figure 4-224 Controller Properties screen (2)
6. Set parameters on the Controller Properties screen as required. Table 4-60

describes the parameters on the screen.

Stop CC On Error Specifies Schedule CC Specifies

whether to stop whether to start
the consistency a consistency
check when it check at the
detects an error specified time. If
during the yes, click
consistency Supported to
check. set a scheduled
● No task on the
Schedule CC
● Yes screen shown in
Default value: Figure 4-226.
No Table 4-62
describes the
parameters on
the screen.

Maintain PD Fail Specifies Boot Error Specifies how a

History whether to Handling RAID controller
enable the fault card acts when
recording detecting an
function for error.
drives. ● Stop on errors
● Disabled ● Pause on
● Enabled errors
Default value: ● Ignore errors
Enabled ● Safe mode
NOTE
Default value:
If this parameter
is set to Disabled Stop on errors
and a drive fault
or RAID array
degrade occurs,
related alarms
are not reported
and cannot be
found on the
management
software (such as
iMana 200).
Controller BIOS Specifies Disk Activity Specifies

whether to whether to
enable the BIOS enable the
for a RAID activity indicator
controller card. to show the
● Enabled drive status.
● Disabled ● Disabled
Default value: ● Enabled
Enabled Default value:
Disabled

Emergency Spare Mode for using Emergency for Specifies

the emergency SMARTer whether to use a
spare function hot spare drive
when a drive to replace a
fails. drive that
● None prefails.
● UG: A drive in ● Disabled
the ● Enabled
Unconfigure Default value:
d Good state Disabled
participates in
data rebuild.
● GHS: A global
hot spare
drive
participates in
data rebuild.
● UG and GHS:
A drive in the
Unconfigure
d Good state
and a global
hot spare
drive
participate in
data rebuild.
Default value:
UG and GHS
NOTE
When a drive
managed by a
RAID controller
card is in the
Unconfigured
Good state, the
drive functions as
a hot spare drive
if a RAID
member drive
fails.

Link Speed Link speed. Data Protection Specifies

Click Manage to whether to
go to the link enable data
speed protection. Data
configuration protection is an
screen shown in advanced
Figure 4-225. function of RAID
Table 4-61 controller cards.
describes the The RAID
parameters on controller card
the screen. stores keys that
are used to
encrypt the
member drives.
If a drive is
removed from
the RAID
controller card,
data on the
drive cannot be
obtained
without the key.
● Disabled
● Enabled
Default value:
Disabled
NOTE
This setting is
valid only for
drives supporting
data encryption.

Figure 4-225 Manage Link Speed screen

SAS Address SAS address.
Phy Physical slot number.
Select Link Interface link speed.

Speed ● Auto
● 1.5Gbps
● 3Gbps
● 6Gbps

Figure 4-226 Schedule CC screen

CC Specifies how a consistency check is performed.

Frequency ● Disable: The consistency check function is disabled.
● Continuous: A consistency check is executed
continuously.
● Hourly
● Daily
● Weekly
● Monthly
Default value: Weekly
CC Consistency check start date, in the format of mm/dd/yyyy.

Start(mm/d
d/yyyy)
CC Start Consistency check start time.

Time
CC Mode Consistency check mode.

● Sequential
● Concurrent
Default value: Concurrent

Select VDs Specify virtual drives that do not require a consistency check.
to Exclude
CC
7. Click Submit to save the settings or click Reset to restore default settings.
8. Click Home.
9. The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed.
Viewing Supercapacitor Properties

To view the supercapacitor properties, perform the following steps:
1. On the Controller Properties screen shown in Figure 4-223, click Manage on

the right of Battery Backup.
The supercapacitor property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-227.
Figure 4-227 Supercapacitor parameters
Table 4-63 Supercapacitor parameters
Type Model of the supercapacitor.
Status Status of the supercapacitor.

Temprature Current temperature of the supercapacitor.
Capacitance Current capacity of the supercapacitor.
2. Click Advanced Properties.

The Advanced Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-228.
Figure 4-228 Advanced Properties screen
Manufacture Manufacturer of the supercapacitor.

r
Serial Serial number of the supercapacitor.

Number
Date of Production date of the supercapacitor.

Manufacture
Firmware Firmware version of the supercapacitor.

version
Status Status of the supercapacitor.

Voltage Voltage status and value of the supercapacitor.
Current Power supply current of the supercapacitor.
Design Designed capacity of the supercapacitor.

Capacity
Remaining Remaining capacity of the supercapacitor.

Capacity
Automatic Charging and discharging mode of the supercapacitor.

Learn Mode
3. Click Close.
4. Click Close to close the supercapacitor property screen.
The Controller Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-223.
5. Click Home.
Viewing and Setting iBBU Properties

To view and set iBBU properties, perform the following steps:
1. On the Controller Properties screen shown in Figure 4-223, click Manage on

the right of Battery Backup.
The iBBU property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-229. Table 4-65
Figure 4-229 iBBU parameters

Type Model of the iBBU.
Status Status of the iBBU.
Design Mode Designed operating mode of the iBBU.
Temprature Current temperature of the iBBU.
Retention Designed operating duration of the iBBU.

Time
Charge Current capacity of the iBBU.
2. Click Advanced Properties.

The iBBU advanced property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-230.
Figure 4-230 Advanced iBBU properties
Manufacture Manufacturer of the iBBU.

r

Serial Serial number of the iBBU.

Number
Date of Production date of the iBBU.

Manufacture
Status Status of the iBBU.
Voltage Voltage status and current value of the iBBU.
Current Power supply current of the iBBU.
Design Designed capacity of the iBBU.

Capacity
Full Capacity Actual maximum capacity of the iBBU.
Remaining Remaining capacity of the iBBU.

Capacity
Expected Expected margin of error of the iBBU.

Margin of
Error
Completed Number of charging or discharging cycles completed.

Discharge
Cycles
Automatic Charging and discharging mode of the iBBU.

Learn Mode
Next Learn Next charging and discharging time of the iBBU.

Cycle Time
3. Select an iBBU mode from the BBU Mode drop-down list.

4. Select an iBBU charging and discharging mode from the Automatic Learn
Mode drop-down list box.
5. If Automatic Learn Mode is Disable, click Schedule Learn Cycle to set the
charging and discharging cycle.
The Schedule Learn Cycle screen is displayed. See Figure 4-231.

Figure 4-231 Schedule Learn Cycle screen
6. Set the next charge and discharge time as prompted.

7. Click OK.
8. Click Close to close the supercapacitor advanced property screen.
9. Click Close to close the supercapacitor property screen.
The Controller Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-223.
10. Click Home.
4.8.5 Scan Devices

This menu allows you to rescan the status or configurations of physical or virtual
drives. After the scan, the system displays the current status of the drives.
In the navigation tree on the left, click Scan Devices.
The LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card rescans the status and configuration
information of physical or virtual drives.
After the scanning is complete, the screen shown in 4.8.9 Logical/Physical View is
displayed.
If foreign configuration exists, the foreign configuration information is displayed

after the scanning is complete.
4.8.6 Virtual Drives

This menu allows you to view and modify virtual drive properties, and delete or
create a virtual drive.

Screen Description
Figure 4-232 shows the Virtual Drives screen.
Figure 4-232 Virtual Drives screen
In the Virtual Drives pane, virtual drives are displayed in the Virtual drive
number:RAID type:Virtual drive capacity:Virtual drive status format.
A virtual drive can be in either of the following states:
● Optimal: The virtual drive is in optimal operating status.

● Initialize: The virtual drive is being initialized.
Fast Initialization
NOTICE
Fast initialization will cause data loss. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.
1. In the Virtual Drives area, select a virtual drive.

2. In the Virtual Drives pane, select Fast Initialize and click Go.
3. Click Yes.
The fast initialization of the virtual drive starts, as shown in Figure 4-233.

After the initialization, the virtual drive status changes to Optimal in the
Virtual Drives pane.
Figure 4-233 Fast initialization screen
Slow Initialization
NOTICE
Slow initialization will cause data loss. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.
1. On the Virtual Drives screen, select Slow Initialize and click Go.
2. Click Yes.
The slow initialization of the virtual drive starts. See Figure 4-234.

Figure 4-234 Slow initialization screen
3. After the initialization, the virtual drive status changes to Optimal in the
Consistency Check
1. On the Virtual Drives screen, select Check Consistency and click Go.
2. Click Yes.
The consistency check screen starts. See Figure 4-235.

Figure 4-235 Consistency check screen
NOTICE
The RAID controller card automatically corrects data errors or verification

code errors detected in redundant data. Back up all data before performing a
consistency check.
3. After the consistency check, the virtual drive status changes to Optimal in the
Viewing Virtual Drive Properties
1. On the Virtual Drives screen, select Properties and click Go.

The virtual drive property screen is displayed. For details, see 4.8.9.2 Virtual
Drives.
Configuring a Boot Drive
1. On the Virtual Drives screen, choose a virtual drive to be configured as the

boot drive, select Set Boot Drive, and click Go.
Set the virtual drive to Boot Drive.
2. After the setting, the status of Set Boot Drive changes to current=0. See
Figure 4-236.

Figure 4-236 Set Boot Drive
4.8.7 Drives
This menu allows you to view the physical drive properties and perform operations
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-237 shows the Drives screen.

Figure 4-237 Drives screen
In the Drives area, drives are listed in the format of "Slot:drive slot number,
The drive state is as follows:
● Online: The drive has been added to a RAID array.
● Dedicated Hot Spare: The drive is a dedicated hot spare drive.
● Global Hot Spare: The drive is a global hot spare drive.
● Unconfigured Good: The drive is idle and not added to any RAID array or
configured as a hot spare drive.
Rebuilding RAID
In the Drives area, select a drive.
Select Rebuild under Operations, and click Go.
Viewing Drive Properties

In the Drives area, select a drive.
Select Properties and click Go.
Table 4-67 lists the screens displayed when you click different drive states.

Table 4-67 Properties screen

Drive Operation and Screen
State
Online Click a drive in Online state. The screen shown in 4.8.9.1 Drive
Group is displayed.
Global Hot Click a drive in Global Hot Spare state. The screen shown in
Spare 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is displayed.
Dedicated Click a drive in Dedicated Hot Spare state. The screen shown in
Hot Spare 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is displayed.
Unconfigur Click a drive in Unconfigured Good state. The screen shown in

ed Good 4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives is displayed.
4.8.8 Configuration Wizard

This menu allows you to perform operations such as creating new storage
configurations, clearing existing configurations, and adding new configurations.
Figure 4-238 shows the Configuration Wizard screen.
NOTICE
If you select New Configuration, all RAID configurations on the RAID controller
card are deleted and the configuration starts again.

4.8.8.1 Clear Configuration

This option allows you to clear all existing RAID arrays.
On the Configuration Wizard screen, select Clear Configuration and click Next.
Click Yes.
All RAID configurations are cleared, and the Configuration Utility main screen is
displayed.
4.8.8.2 New Configuration

This option allows you to create a RAID array.
Screen Description
Figure 4-239 shows the screen. Table 4-68 describes the parameters on the
screen.


Manual Allows users to control all storage attributes and set parameters.
Configuratio
n

Configuratio ● Redundancy: specifies whether to enable the redundancy
n function.
– Redundancy when possible: The system automatically
configures the existing drives as a RAID array with
redundancy when possible.
NOTE
If there are two drives, the system automatically configures RAID
1. If there are three or more drives, the system automatically
configures RAID 5 or RAID 6. The system does not support
automatic configuration of RAD 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60.
– No Redundancy: The system automatically configures
existing drives as a RAID 0 array, that is the array without
redundancy.
● Data Protection: specifies whether to enable data protection,
which is an advanced feature of RAID controller cards. The
RAID controller card stores keys that are used to encrypt the
member drives. If a drive is removed from the RAID controller
card, data on the drive cannot be obtained without the key.
However, this setting is valid only for drives that support data
encryption.
– Disabled
– Enabled
Manually Creating a RAID Array

Step 1 Select Manual Configuration and click Next.



protection advanced feature of RAID controller cards. The RAID controller
card stores keys that are used to encrypt the member drives. If a
drive is removed from the RAID controller card, data on the
drive cannot be obtained without the key.
● Disabled
● Enabled
NOTE

Group 0.
Drive Group 0.


NOTE
RAID array.
– RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60 require at least two drive groups. Add drive groups
based on the RAID type to be configured.

4. Click Next.


NOTE
RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60 require at least two drive groups. Add drive groups to
the span based on the RAID type to be configured.

1. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen is displayed. See Figure 4-245. Table



– RAID 0
– RAID 1
– RAID 5
– RAID 6
– RAID 10
– RAID 50
– RAID 60


– 8 KB
– 16 KB
– 32 KB
– 64 KB
– 128 KB
– 256 KB
– 512 KB
– 1 MB

Default value: RW

NOTE

NOTE

– Direct:

from the cache.)

NOTE
cache).
off unexpectedly.
unchanged.

Default value: No

NOTE
scenarios:
2. Set parameters on the Virtual Drive Definition screen as required.

NOTE

and click Accept.

NOTE
In this example, three virtual drives are created. See Figure 4-247.


The configuration result is displayed. See Figure 4-248.
3. Click Accept.


4. Click Yes.
NOTICE

1. Click Yes.
Figure 4-250.

Figure 4-250 Virtual drive states
Step 7 Configure the boot drive.

2. Set the virtual drive to Boot Drive. After the configuration, current=None
following Set Boot Drive changes to current=N (N indicates the virtual drive
ID).

----End
Automatically Creating a RAID Array

Step 1 Select Automatic Configuration, and click Next.
The Configuration Preview screen is displayed. See Figure 4-252.

Figure 4-252 Configuration Preview screen

The message "Save this Configuration?" is displayed.
1. Click Yes.
NOTICE
2. Click Yes.

Figure 4-254.
Figure 4-254 Virtual drive states
Step 4 Configure the boot drive.

2. Set the virtual drive to Boot Drive. After the setting, the status of Set Boot
Drive changes to current=0.
2. The Configuration Utility main screen is displayed. The configured RAID

Figure 4-255 Automatically configured RAID information
----End
4.8.8.3 Add Configuration

This option allows you to create a RAID array based on the existing configuration.
This option is not displayed if no drives are available for creating a RAID array.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-256 shows the Select Configuration Method screen.

Creating a RAID Array

For details about the procedure for creating a RAID array, see 4.8.8.2 New
Configuration.
4.8.9 Logical/Physical View

Switch between physical and logical views, which allow you to check physical and
virtual drive information respectively. By default, Physical View is displayed in the
left pane and the Logical View is displayed in the right pane.
● After you click Physical View, Logical View will be displayed in the left pane
and Physical View will be displayed in the right pane.
● After you click Logical View, Physical View will be displayed in the left pane
and Logical View will be displayed in the right pane.
Logical View
Figure 4-257 shows the screen. Table 4-71 describes the screen.

Figure 4-257 Logic View screen
Table 4-71 Logical View description

Drive The format Click Drive Group. The screen shown in 4.8.9.1 Drive
Group is "Drive Group is displayed.
Group xx,
RAID level".
Virtual The format Click a RAID under Virtual Drives. The screen shown
Drives is "Virtual in 4.8.9.2 Virtual Drives is displayed.
Drives xxx".
Drives The format Click a drive under Drives. The screen shown in
is 4.8.9.3 Drives is displayed.
"Backplane
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".

Global The format Click a drive under Global Hot Spares. The screen
Hot is shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
Dedicat The format Click a drive under Dedicated Hot Spares. The screen
ed Hot is shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares is
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
Unconfi The format Click a drive under Unconfigured Drives. The screen
gured is shown in 4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives is displayed.
Drives "Backplane
Slot:drive
slot number,
type,
capacity,
status".
Physical View
Figure 4-258 shows the screen. Table 4-72 describes the screen.

Figure 4-258 Physical View
In the Backplane area, drives are listed in the format of "Slot:drive slot number,
Table 4-72 Physical View

Status
Online The drive Click a drive in Online state. The screen shown in
has been 4.8.9.1 Drive Group is displayed.
added to a
RAID array.
Global The drive is Click a drive in Global Hot Spare/Dedicated Hot

Hot a global hot Spare state. The screen shown in 4.8.9.4 Global/
Spare spare drive. Dedicated Hot Spares is displayed.
Dedicat The drive is

ed Hot a dedicated
Spare hot spare
drive.


Status
Unconfi The drive is Click a drive in Unconfigured Good state. The screen
gured idle and not shown in 4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives is displayed.
Good added to
any RAID
array or
configured
as a hot
spare drive.
4.8.9.1 Drive Group

This option allows you to view drive group details.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-259 shows the Drive Group screen. Table 4-73 describes the parameters
on the screen.
Figure 4-259 Drive Group screen


Total Total capacity.

Capacity
Free Capacity Free capacity.
Data Data protection.

Protection
NOTE
Data protection is an advanced feature of RAID controller cards. The RAID controller card
stores keys that are used to encrypt the member drives. If a drive is removed from the RAID
controller card, data on the drive cannot be obtained without the key. This setting is valid
only for drives that support data encryption.
4.8.9.2 Virtual Drives

This option allows you to view virtual drive properties, modify virtual drive
configuration policies, and operate virtual drives.
Screen Description
screen.
Figure 4-260 Virtual Drives screen


Cate Parameter Description
gory
Prop RAID Level RAID level.

ertie
s Status RAID controller card status.
Strip Size Size of a data strip on each drive. The default value is
256 KB.
Capacity RAID array capacity.
Parity Size/ Parity size/Mirror data size.

Mirror Data
Size
Polici Access Data access policy.

es ● RW: The virtual drive is readable and writable.
I/O Options for data I/O of special virtual drives. This

policy does not affect cache prefetch.
● Direct: Data is read directly from drives.
● Cached: Data is read from the cache.
Read Options for reading data on a virtual drive.

● Always Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead
function. The RAID controller card prefetches
sequential data or the data predicted to be used
and saves it in the cache.
Disk Cache Cache policy for physical drives.

● Enable: writes data to the cache before writing
data to the drive. This option improves data write
performance. However, data will be lost if there is
no protection mechanism against power failures.
● Disable: writes data to a drive without caching.
Data is not lost in the event of power failure.
NOTE
The parameter is not applied to SSDs.
Disable BGI Background initialization status.

● No: enables background initialization. In this mode,
the background automatically starts initializing
virtual drives.
● Yes: disables background initialization.

Cate Parameter Description

gory
Default Write Data write policy of the virtual drive.

● Always Write Back: When the cache receives all
NOTE
The Always Write Back mode is not recommended because
DDR write data of the RAID controller card will be lost if the
● Write Through: When the drive subsystem receives
● Write Back with BBU (recommended): The RAID
Through mode when there is no Battery Backup
Unit (BBU), the BBU is on charge or discharge, the
BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache exists.
Current Write Current data write policy of the virtual drive.
Modifying a RAID Policy
Step 1 In the Policies area, set the RAID policy.
Step 2 Click Change.
After the modification is successful, the new policy is displayed.
----End
Deleting a RAID Array

Step 1 Select Delete and click Go.
A message is displayed, indicating that all data on the virtual drive will be lost if it
is deleted.
Step 2 Click Yes.
The virtual drive is deleted, and the Logical View screen is displayed.
----End
Turning On a Drive Indicator

Step 1 Select Locate and click Go.
All drive indicators of the current virtual drive blink.
----End

Turning Off a Drive Indicator

Step 1 Select Stop Locate and click Go.
All drive indicators of the current virtual drive are off.
----End
Performing Fast Initialization
NOTICE
Fast initialization will cause data loss. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.
Step 1 Select Fast Init and click Go.

A message is displayed, indicating that data on the virtual drive will be lost during
initialization.
Step 2 Click Yes.
The screen shown in Figure 4-260 is displayed, showing the initialization progress.
----End
Performing Slow Initialization
NOTICE
Slow initialization will cause data loss. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.
Step 1 Select Slow Init and click Go.

A message is displayed, indicating that data on the virtual drive will be lost during
initialization.
Step 2 Click Yes.
Step 3 To abort the slow initialization, click Abort.

Figure 4-261 Slow Initialization
----End
Checking Consistency
Step 1 Select CC and click Go.
A message is displayed, indicating that the consistency check may cause
inconsistent information in logs.
Step 2 Click Yes.
● Suspend: suspends consistency check.
● Abort: aborts consistency check.

Figure 4-262 Consistency check progress
----End
Deleting Drives from a RAID Array

Step 1 Select Adv Opers, and click Go.
The Advanced Operations page is displayed.
Step 2 Select Remove drive and select a drive to be deleted, as shown in Figure 4-263.

Figure 4-263 Remove drive screen
Step 3 Click Go.
A message is displayed, indicating that the operation is irreversible.
Step 4 Click Yes.
The drive is deleted and the Advanced Operations screen is displayed.
----End
Changing the RAID Level

Step 2 Select Change RAID Level and select a RAID level from the drop-down list box.
Step 3 Click Go.
Step 4 Click Yes.
The RAID level is changed and the Advanced Operations screen is displayed.
----End
Changing the RAID Level and Adding Drives


Step 2 Select Change RAID Level and Add Drive and select a drive to be added to the
RAID array.
Step 3 Click Go.
Step 4 Click Yes.
The RAID level is changed and the Advanced Operations screen is displayed.
----End
Erasing RAID Data

Step 2 Select Virtual Drive Erase and click Go.
The Mode Selection - Drive Erase screen is displayed. See Figure 4-264.
Figure 4-264 Mode Selection - Drive Erase screen
Step 3 Select a drive erasure mode.

The LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card supports the following levels of secure
erasure for data on a drive:
● Simple: erases data on a virtual drive only one round.
● Normal: erases data on a virtual drive three rounds.
● Thorough: erases data on a virtual drive nine rounds.

● Delete Virtual Drive after Erase: deletes a virtual drive after the data is
erased.
Step 4 Click OK.
A message is displayed, indicating that data on the virtual drive will be erased.
Step 5 Click Yes.
After the data is erased, 4.3.1 Logging In to the Configuration Utility is
displayed.
----End
Expanding the Capacity of a Virtual Drive

Step 1 Select Expand and click Go.
The screen for increasing the virtual drive capacity is displayed. See Figure 4-265.
Figure 4-265 Expanding the capacity of a virtual drive
Step 2 Enter a percentage and click OK.

The screen shown in Figure 4-260 is displayed, showing the expansion progress.
The percentage is the percentage of the remaining capacity.
----End
4.8.9.3 Drives
This option allows you to view parameters of the drives in a RAID array and
manage the drives.

Screen Introduction
screen.
Click Next to go to the next screen, as shown in Figure 4-267 and Figure 4-268.
Figure 4-266 Drive properties screen (1)


Connector Connector port number of the controller card mounted to a

drive.
Enclosure ID ID of the enclosure mounted to a drive.
Model Name Drive model.
Vendor Vendor name.
Revision Drive firmware version.
Slot Number Number of the slot where a drive is installed.
Device Type Drive type.
Connected Connected port number.

Port
Media Errors Number of media errors.
Pred Fail Number of pred fail errors.

Count
SAS Address SAS drive address.

Physical Status of a drive.

Drive State
Certified Indicates that a drive has been certified.
FDE Capable Indicates whether a drive supports the Full Disk Encryption
(FDE) technology.
Max Device Maximum device speed.

Speed
Link Speed Drive link speed.
Temperature Drive temperature.

(Celsius)
Data Indicates whether a drive supports data encryption.

Protection
Emergency Emergency spare drive. A drive in the Unconfigured Good state

Spare or hot spare drive can be configured as an emergency spare
drive.
Commissione Hot spare drive specified for a RAID array.

d Hotspare
Logical Size of a logical sector.

Sector size
Physical Size of a physical sector.

Sector size
Making Drives Offline

Step 1 Select Make Drive Offline and click Go.
A message is displayed, indicating that the drive offline operation may cause data
loss.
Step 2 Click Yes.
The selected drives are offline.
----End
Drive Indicators On
1. Select Locate and click Go.


Drive Indicators Off

----End
4.8.9.4 Global/Dedicated Hot Spares

This option allows you to view and manage global or dedicated hot spare drives.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-269 shows the drive properties screen (1), and Table 4-76 describes the




drive.
Vendor Vendor name.

Port

Count

Drive State
FDE Capable Indicates whether a drive supports the FDE technology.

Speed

(Celsius)

Protection

drive.

d Hotspare

Sector size

Sector size

Deleting a Hot Spare Drive

Step 1 Select Remove HOTSPARE and click Go.
After the hot spare drive is deleted, the screen shown in Figure 4-272 is displayed.
----End
Drive Indicators On
----End

----End
4.8.9.5 Unconfigured Drives

This option allows you to view and manage unconfigured drives.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-272 shows the drive properties screen (1), and Table 4-77 describes the



drive.
Vendor Vendor name.

Port

Count

Drive State

FDE Capable Indicates whether a drive supports the Full Disk Encryption
(FDE) technology.

Speed

(Celsius)

Protection

drive.

d Hotspare

Sector size

Sector size
Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive

Step 1 In the Drive Groups group box, select a drive group.
Step 2 Select Make Global hot spare and click Go.
----End
Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive

Step 1 Select Make Dedicated hot spare and click Go.
----End
Make Unconf Bad

Step 1 Select Make Unconf Bad and click Go.
Figure 4-275 shows the Make Unconf Bad screen.

Figure 4-275 Make Unconf Bad
Step 2 Select Make Unconf Good and click Go.
The Unconfigured Drives screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-272.
----End
Prepare Removal
Step 1 Select Prepare Removal and click Go.
The selected drive enters the Prepare Removal state.
----End
Drive Indicators On
----End

----End

Drive Erase
Step 1 Select Drive Erase and click Go.
The Mode Selection - Drive Erase screen is displayed. See Figure 4-276.
Figure 4-276 Mode Selection - Drive Erase screen
Step 2 Select a drive erasure mode.
The LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card supports the following levels of secure
erasure for data on a drive:
● Simple: wiped once.

● Normal: wiped three times.
● Thorough: wiped nine times.
Step 3 Click OK.
A message is displayed, indicating that data on the drive will be erased.
Step 4 Click Yes.
After the data is erased, Figure 4-6 is displayed.
----End
4.8.10 Events
This screen displays system event information.

Screen Description
screen.
Figure 4-277 Event Information

First First sequence number.

Sequence #
Last Last sequence number.

Sequence #
Event Locale Object that generates an event.
Event Class Severity of the event.
Start Start sequence number.

Sequence #
# of Events Number of events (a maximum of 248 events at a time).

(Max 248 at
a time)

Solution
Step 1 Set the parameters and click Go.
The events that meet the search criteria are displayed in the right pane, as shown
in Figure 4-278. Table 4-79 describes the parameters.
Figure 4-278 Search result
Sequence # Serial number.
Time Stamp Time when the event occurs.

#
Class Severity of the event.
Locale Object that generates an event.
Virtual Drive ID of the target virtual drive.

Target ID
Virtual Drive ID of the virtual drive.

Index
Description Event description.
Step 2 Click Next to display the next event.

Step 3 Click Prev to display the previous event.
Step 4 Click Home.
----End
4.8.11 Exit
Click Exit to exit the Configuration Utility.
Figure 4-279 Exit Information screen
● Click Yes to exit the Configuration Utility.

● Click No to return to the Configuration Utility.


Procedure
Step 1 Set the EFI mode. For details, see A.1.3 Setting the Legacy Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the controller card management screen.
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS2208 controller card and press Enter.
Figure 4-280 LSI SAS2208 controller card configuration

Management
Controller Manages the RAID controller.

Management


Management

Management

Components
----End
4.9.2 Configuration Management

This screen allows you to configure and manage virtual drives, drive groups, and
external configuration, and delete configuration.
Screen Description
Figure 4-281 shows the Configuration Management screen. Table 4-81
Figure 4-281 Configuration Management


Create Virtual Creates a RAID array.

Drive
Create Profile Creates a virtual drive from a profile.

Based Virtual
Drive
View Drive Group Views drive group properties.

Properties
Clear Clears all RAID configurations.

Configuration
Manage Foreign Manages foreign configurations.

Configuration
Clearing RAID Configurations

Step 1 Select Clear Configuration and press Enter.
Step 3 Select Enabled and press Enter.
Step 5 Press Enter.
The configuration is complete.
----End
4.9.2.1 Create Virtual Drive

This screen allows you to create a RAID array.
Screen Description
The Create Virtual Drive screen is shown in Figure 4-282. Table 4-82 describes
the parameters on the screen.



Drive
Select Drives From Specifies the source of member drives of the virtual drive.
drive groups

Name

Unit


NOTE

Write Policy Default cache write policy of the RAID array. The values of
this parameter vary depending on the firmware version.
– Force Write Back: When the cache receives all data,
the RAID controller card signals the host that the
NOTE
● Default value: Write Back
● The RAID controller card does not have a supercapacitor.
● The supercapacitor is being charged and discharged.
● The supercapacitor is damaged.
● Pinned or preserved cache exists.
● If this parameter is set to Always Write Back or Force
Write Back, the DDR write data of the RAID controller card
will be lost when:
● The server is powered off unexpectedly.
● The supercapacitor is not installed.
● The supercapacior is being charged.

● Direct:
from the cache.)
NOTE

cache).

Background
Initialization




Configuration
Creating a Virtual Drive

2. Select a RAID level and press Enter.


Type

Interface Type
Logical Sector Specifies the size of a logical sector.

Size

7. Click OK.


5. Click OK.
----End
4.9.2.2 Create Profile Based Virtual Drive

This screen allows you to create a RAID array quickly.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-284 shows the Create Profile Based Virtual Drive screen. Table 4-84
Figure 4-284 Create Profile Based Virtual Drive

Generic RAID 0 Quickly creates RAID 0, which provides high data

throughput in big data transmission scenarios that have no
requirements on data redundancy.
Generic RAID 1 Quickly creates RAID 1, which can be used in scenarios

where redundancy backup is required to ensure data
security, such as OS installation.
Generic RAID 5 Quickly creates RAID 5, which can be used in scenarios that
have requirements on data redundancy and throughput.
Generic RAID 6 Quickly creates RAID 6, which uses level-2 verification

codes to ensure data redundancy. The scenarios are similar
to those of RAID 5.
Quickly Creating a RAID Array

Step 1 Use the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys to select a RAID level and press Enter. In this example,
Generic RAID 5 is selected.
The RAID array configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-285. Table
Figure 4-285 RAID configuration screen

Drive Selection Member drives that can be automatically selected by the

Criteria system.
Virtual Drive RAID array name defined by the system.

Name
RAID Level RAID level of the RAID array.
Virtual Drive Capacity of the RAID array.

Size
Power Save Power failure protection mode.

Mode
Strip Size Sector size of the RAID array.
Read Policy Read policy of the RAID array.
Write Policy Write policy of the RAID array.
IO Policy I/O policy of the RAID array.
Access Policy Read/Write policy.
Drive Cache Drive cache policy.
Default Default initialization mode of the RAID array.

Initialization
Create Whether to create dedicated hot spare drives for the RAID
Dedicated Hot array.
Spare
Step 2 View or configure parameters. For parameter details, see Table 4-85.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
4.9.2.3 View Drive Group Properties

This screen allows you to query the number of existing drives.
Screen Description
screen.

Figure 4-286 View Drive Group Properties

Drive Group Name of the drive group.
Capacity Capacity of the drive group. Names, RAID levels, capacities,

Allocation and statuses of the virtual drives in the drive group are also
included.
Protected Status of drive group data protection.
4.9.2.4 Manage Foreign Configuration

This screen allows you to view, import, and clear foreign configurations.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-287 shows the Manage Foreign Configuration screen.

Viewing and Importing a Foreign Configuration

The existing foreign configurations are displayed.
Figure 4-288 Foreign configurations


Step 6 Click OK.
----End

Step 5 Click OK.
----End
4.9.3 Controller Management

This screen allows you to view and modify the properties of the RAID controller
card.
Screen Description
screen.

Controller Status RAID controller card status.
Select Boot Device Current boot device.

NOTE
about how to configure the boot option for the EFI/UEFI mode, see
4.4.9 Setting Boot Devices.
NVDATA Version NVDATA version.
Connector Count Number of RAID controller card connectors for connecting

to the mainboard.

Virtual Drive Number of virtual drives that can be managed by the RAID
Count controller card.

Controller
Management
Advanced Displays and modifies advanced controller properties.

Controller
Properties
4.9.3.1 Advanced Controller Management

This screen provides advanced controller configuration interfaces, such as log
management, advanced property management, and factory setting restoration.
Screen Description
screen.


Clear Controller Clears the controller event logs.

Events
Save Controller Saves controller event logs.

Events
Save TTY Log Saves client operation logs.
Manage Link Manages port rates.

Speed
Manage Manages advanced software properties.

MegaRAID
Advanced
Software
Options
Schedule Sets consistency check parameters.

Consistency
Check
Set Factory Restores factory settings.

Defaults
Clearing the Event Logs

Step 1 Select Clear Controller Events and press Enter.
Step 2 Click OK.
----End
Restoring Factory Settings

Step 1 Select Save Controller Events and press Enter.
Step 2 Click OK.
----End
Saving Controller Event Logs

Step 1 Select Set Factory Defaults and press Enter.
The parameter configuration page is displayed.
Step 2 Set event log parameters.
Step 3 Select Save Events and press Enter.

Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Saving Client Operation Logs

Step 1 Select Save TTY Log and press Enter.
The parameter configuration page is displayed.
Step 2 Set operation log parameters.
Step 3 Select Save Log and press Enter.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Configuring the Interface Rate

Step 1 Select Manage Link Speed and press Enter.
The port list is displayed.
Figure 4-291 Port list
Step 2 Select a port and press Enter.
The port rate option is displayed. The LSISAS2208 supports the following port
rates: 1.5 Gbps, 3 Gbps, 6 Gbps, and Auto.

Step 3 Select a rate and press Enter.
The message "Please restart the system for the changes to take effect" is
displayed.
----End
Importing Advanced Software Options

Step 1 Select Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options and press Enter.
Figure 4-292 Advanced software options
SAFE ID Security code of the RAID controller card.
Activation Key Key for activating advanced features.
Active Activates advanced features.

Deactive All Trail Deactivates all advanced features.

Software
Step 2 Enter a valid activation key in the Activation Key field.
Step 3 Select Active and press Enter.
----End
Configuring Consistency Check Parameters

Step 1 Select Schedule Consistency Check and press Enter.
Figure 4-293 Consistency check configuration page
Consistency Consistency check period.

Check Frequency

Consistency Start date of the consistency check.

Check Start
Date
Consistency Start time of the consistency check.

Check Start
Time
Consistency Consistency check mode.

Check Mode
Exclude Virtual Virtual drives that do not use this feature.

Drives
Step 2 Set consistency check parameters by referring to Table 4-90.

Step 4 Click OK.
----End
4.9.3.2 Advanced Controller Properties

This screen allows you to view advanced controller properties that are not
included on the Controller Management screen.
Screen Description
Figure 4-294 and Figure 4-295 show the Advanced Controller Properties screen.

Figure 4-294 Advanced Controller Properties (1)
Figure 4-295 Advanced Controller Properties (2)


Cache and Views cache and memory information about the controller.
Memory
Patrol Read Specifies the system inspection feature.
Power Save Sets the drive sleep mode.

Setting
Spare Sets the hot spare status of the controller.
Task Rates Sets the handling speed of various tasks.
Alarm Control Enables or disables the alarm buzzer.
Auto Import Enables or disables automatic foreign configuration import.

Foreign
Configuration
Boot Mode Specifies the action to be taken when the BIOS detects an
exception.
● Stop on errors: stops startup and continues with startup
only when user confirms.
period.
system diagnosis.
The default value is Stop on errors.
Controller BIOS Enables or disables the controller BIOS.
ROC Specifies the controller temperature.

Temperature
Shield State Specifies whether I/O interruption is supported for drive

Supported diagnosis.
The default value is Yes.
Drive Security Specifies the status of drive encryption.
T10-PI Enables or disables information protection technology.
Expanded Specifies whether virtual drive expansion is supported.

Virtual Drive
Support
Maintain Drive Specifies whether to maintain drive failure history.

Fail History
SMART Polling Specifies the SMART polling interval.

Stop Consistency Specifies whether consistency check is stopped in case of

Check on Error errors.
JBOD Mode Enables or disables the pass-through mode.

The LSI SAS2208 does not support the function.
Modifying Advanced Controller Properties

Step 1 Modify advanced controller properties by referring to Table 4-91.
Step 2 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Apply Changes and press
Enter.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Viewing Cache and Memory Properties

Step 1 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Cache and Memory and
press Enter.
The cache and memory property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-296.
Figure 4-296 Cache and Memory


Cache Flush Specifies the interval for data updates in the cache.
Interval
Preserved Cache Enables or disables cache protection.
CacheCade-SSD Specifies whether SSD caching is supported.

Caching
CacheCade 2.0 Specifies whether CacheCade 2.0 is supported.

Capable
Configured Specifies the cache capacity.

Cache Size
Memory Size Specifies the memory capacity of the controller card.
NVRAM Size Specifies the capacity of the nonvolatile random access

memory (NVRAM).
----End
Viewing and Modifying Patrol Read Properties

Step 1 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Patrol Read and press
Enter.
The patrol read property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-297. Table 4-93

Figure 4-297 Patrol Read
Start Starts the system inspection.
Suspend Suspends the system inspection.
Resume Resumes the system inspection.
Stop Stops the system inspection.
State Specifies the system inspection status.
Iterations Specifies the number of system inspection times.
Mode Specifies the system inspection start mode.

● Auto: System inspection is started automatically.
● Manual: System inspection needs to be started manually.
● Disable: System inspection is disabled.
Rate Specifies the percentage of I/O resources occupied by system

inspection.
Setting for Specifies whether to perform system inspection for

Unconfigured unconfigured space.
Space

Step 2 Set patrol read parameters by referring to Table 4-93.

Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
Setting the Power Saving Mode

Step 1 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Power Save Settings, and
press Enter.
The power saving property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-298. Table
Figure 4-298 Power Save Setting
Spin Down Specifies whether to apply the power saving mode to idle
Unconfigured drives.
Good
Spin Down Specifies whether to apply the power saving mode to hot
Hotspare Drives spare drives.

Drives Standby Specifies the standby time before a drive enters the power
Time saving mode. If there is no drive I/O within the standby time,
the drive enters the spin-down mode.
Spinup Drive Specifies the number of drives that spin up simultaneously

Count upon power-on.
Spinup Delay Specifies the interval between the spinup of drives.
Step 2 Set power saving parameters by referring to Table 4-94.

Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
Modifying System Hot Spare Parameters

Step 1 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Spare and press Enter.
The system hot spare property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-299.
Figure 4-299 Spare


Emergency Specifies the mode for using the emergency spare function
Spare when a drive is faulty.
● None
● Unconfigured Good: Idle drives are used for rebuild.
● Global Hotspare: Hot spare drives are used for rebuild.
● Unconfigured Good and Global Hotspare: Idle and hot
spare drives are used for rebuild.
Emergency for Specifies whether to use a hot spare drive to replace a drive
SMARTer that prefails.
Persistent Hot Specifies whether to enable the persistent hot spare function.
Spare
Replace Drive Specifies whether to copy data on hot spare drives to

member drives.
Replace Drive Specifies whether to enable the Replace Drive function when
on SMART Error a SMART error occurs on a drive.
Step 2 Set system hot spare parameters by referring to Table 4-95.

Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
Modifying Resource Usage Properties

Step 1 On the Advanced Controller Properties screen, select Task Rates and press
Enter.
The resource usage property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-300. Table

Figure 4-300 Task Rates

Background Percentage of I/O resources occupied by background virtual

Initialization drive initialization.
Rate
Consistency Percentage of I/O resources occupied by consistency check of

Check Rate virtual drives.
Patrol Read Rate Percentage of I/O resources occupied by drive inspection.
Rebuild Rate Percentage of I/O resources occupied by RAID rebuilding.
Reconstruction Percentage of I/O resources occupied by RAID level migration

Rate or RAID capacity expansion.
Step 2 Set resource usage parameters by referring to Table 4-96.

Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End

4.9.4 Virtual Drive Management

This screen allows you to view and manage virtual drives.
Screen Description
The Virtual Drive Management page displays the virtual drive list.
Select a virtual drive and press Enter. The drive detail screen is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-301. Table 4-97 describes the parameters on the screen.


Operation Operations that can be performed.

● Start Locate: locates all member drives of the virtual
drive.
● Stop Locate: stops locating the member drives of the
virtual drive.
● Delete Virtual Drive: deletes the virtual drive.
● Expand Virtual Drive: expands the virtual drive
capacity.
● Reconfigure Virtual Drives: reconfigures the virtual
drive.
● Hide/Unhide Virtual Drive: hides or shows the virtual
drive.
● Hide/Unhide Drive Group: hides or shows the drive
group.
● Fast Initialization: performs fast initialization of the
virtual drive.
● Slow Initialization: performs slow initialization of the
virtual drive.
● Check Consistency: performs consistency check.
● Virtual Drive Erase: formats the virtual drive.
Name Name of the virtual drive.
Raid Level RAID level of the virtual drive.
Status Current running status of the virtual drive.
Size Capacity of the virtual drive.
View Associated Displays member drive properties.

Drives
Advanced... Displays advanced properties of the virtual drive.
Expanding the Virtual Drive Capacity

Step 1 Set Operation to Expand Virtual Drive.
Step 2 Select Go and press Enter.
The virtual drive capacity expansion screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-302.

Figure 4-302 Expand Virtual Drive

Capacity


Capacity
Enter a Percentage of available capacity to be used for expansion.

Percentage
of Available
Capacity

Virtual Drive
after
Expansion
Step 3 Set the percentage of available capacity.

Step 5 Press Enter to finish the configuration and return to the previous screen.
----End
4.9.4.1 View Associated Drives

This screen allows you to view details about member drives of a virtual drive.
Screen Description
Figure 4-303 shows the View Associated Drives screen that lists virtual drives.

Figure 4-303 View Associated Drives
Viewing Member Drive Properties

Step 1 Select the member drive to be viewed and set its status to Enabled.
Step 2 Select View Drive Properties and press Enter.

Figure 4-304 View Drive Properties
Operation Operations that can be performed on the member drive.

● Start Locate
● Stop Locate
● Place Drive Offline/Online
Drive ID ID of the member drive.
Status Current operating status of the member drive.
Size Capacity of the member drive.
Type Type of the member drive.
Model Model of the member drive.
Hardware Vendor of the member drive.

Vendor
Associated Virtual drive to which the member drive belongs.

Virtual Drive
Advanced... Advanced member drive properties.
----End

4.9.4.2 Advanced
This screen allows you to view and modify advanced properties of a virtual drive.
Screen Description
Figure 4-305 shows the Advanced screen. Table 4-100 describes the parameters
on the screen.
Figure 4-305 Advanced

Parity Size Parity block size.
Logical Logical sector size.

Sector Size
Segment Strip size.

Size
Starting Start address of logical units.

Logical
Block
Addressing
Protected Whether drive protection is supported.
Bad Blocks Whether bad block processing is supported.

SSD Caching Whether SSD caching is enabled or disabled.
Access Access policy.
Current Write cache policy used by the RAID array.

Write Cache ● Write Back: If the supercapacitor is not configured or the
Policy supercapacitor is faulty, the RAID controller card automatically
switches to the Write Through mode.
● Write Through: When the drive subsystem receives all data,
Default Default cache write policy of the RAID array. The values of this
Write Cache parameter vary depending on the firmware version.
Policy ● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS2208 is 3.460.165-8277,
the cache write policies are as follows:
– Write Back: If the supercapacitor is not configured or the
supercapacitor is faulty, the RAID controller card
– Always Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the
RAID controller card signals the host that the data
● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS2208 is 3.400.95-4061,
the cache write policies are as follows:
– Write Back: If the supercapacitor is not configured or the
supercapacitor is faulty, the RAID controller card
– Force Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the
NOTE
● Default value: Write Back
● If this parameter is set to Write Back, Current Write Cache Policy
will automatically change to Write Through when the RAID
controller card does not have a supercapacitor, the supercapacitor
is in the charge or discharge state, the supercapacitor is damaged,
or pinned/preserved cache exists.
● The Always Write Back or Force Write Back mode is not
recommended because the DDR write data of the RAID controller
card will be lost when the server is powered off unexpectedly, the
capacitor is not installed or is being charged.

Disable Whether background initialization is disabled.

Background
Initialization
Read Cache Current read caching policy.

Policy ● No Read Ahead: disables the Read Ahead function.
● Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The RAID
controller card prefetches sequential data or the data
Input/ I/O read policy.

Output ● Direct: Data is read directly from drives.
● Cached: Data is read from the cache.
Modifying Virtual Drive Properties

Step 1 Set the Advanced parameters described in Table 4-100.
Step 3 Press Enter.
----End
4.9.5 Drive Management

This screen allows you to view the basic properties of a drive and perform
operations on the drive.
Screen Description
The Drive Management screen lists drives.
Select a drive and press Enter. The drive detail screen is displayed, as shown in

Operation Options available.

● Start Locate: locates the drive.
● Stop Locate: stops locating the drive.
● Initialize Drive: initializes the drive.
● Drive Erase: formats the drive.
● Make Unconfigured Good/Bad: changes the drive
status.
● Assign Global Hot Spare Drive: sets the drive as a
global hot spare drive.
● Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive: sets the drive as a
● Unassign Hot Spare Drive: deletes the hot spare drive.
Drive ID ID of the drive.
Status Current operating status of the drive.
Size Capacity of the drive.
Type Type of the drive.
Model Model of the drive.

Hardware Vendor Vendor of the drive.
Advanced... More properties of the drive.

Step 1 Set Operation to Assign Global Hot Spare Drive.
Step 3 Set Confirm to Enable.
----End

Step 1 Set Operation to Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
Step 3 Select the virtual drive to be associated and press Enter.
----End
Viewing Advanced Drive Properties

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 4-306, select Advanced and press Enter.
The advanced drive property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-307. Table

Figure 4-307 Drive Properties
Certified Specifies whether the drive has been certified.
Logical Sector Size Specifies the logical sector size.
Physical Sector Specifies the physical sector size.

Size
SMART Status Specifies whether the SMART function is enabled.
Revision Specifies the drive firmware version.
Media Error Specifies the number of media errors.
Predicted Fail Specifies the number of predictive failures.

Count
SAS Address Specifies the SAS address of the drive.
Drive Power State Specifies the power status of the drive.
Emergency Spare Specifies whether emergency sparing is supported, that is,

whether idle drives and hot spare drives can be used as
backup drives.
Commissioned Specifies whether the drive is assigned to a RAID array as a

Hot Spare hot spare drive.

Cache Setting Specifies whether cache setting is supported.
Available Size Specifies the available space of the drive.
Used Space Specifies the used space of the drive.
Disk Protocol Specifies the protocol supported by the drive.
Megotiated Drive Specifies the data transmission rate of the drive.

Transfer Speed
Number of Specifies the number of connectors.

Connections
FDE Capable Specifies whether the drive supports the Full Disk
Encryption (FDE) technology.
Protection Specifies whether the drive supports data protection.

Capable
Temperature Specifies the drive temperature.
----End
4.9.6 Hardware Components

This screen provides sensor information about the RAID controller card.
Screen Introduction
Figure 4-308 shows the Hardware Components screen. Table 4-103 describes

Figure 4-308 Hardware Components
Temperature Current temperature sensor status.

Sensors
Fans Current fan module operating status.
Power Supplies Current power module operating status.
Advanced... More information.
4.9.7 Exit
Exit the Configuration Utility.
Exiting the Configuration Utility

Step 1 On the LSI SAS2208 main screen, press ESC.
Step 2 Press F10 to exit the BIOS.

The BIOS is closed, and the message "Press Control+Alt+Delete to reboot" is

displayed.
----End

About MegaRAID Storage Manager
MegaRAID Storage Manager enables you to configure RAID controllers, and
monitor, and maintain storage configurations and can be installed on a server OS.
MegaRAID Storage Manager provides a range of functions, such as RAID array
configuration, RAID level migration, RAID array deletion, RAID information import,
and drive status adjustment.
MegaRAID Storage Manager provides a GUI and does not support CLIs.
Table 4-104 lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager and user guide download links.
Table 4-104 MegaRAID Storage Manager download links
Software Download Link User Guide Download Link
MegaRAID Storage Manager 12Gb/s MegaRAID SAS Software User

Guide
Downloading MegaRAID Storage Manager

1. Click the software download link listed in Table 4-104.
2. Click Management Software and Tools.
3. Find MegaRAID Storage Manager and click it to download it.
NOTICE
Download the MegaRAID Storage Manager software for the OS you are using
(Linux or Windows).
Downloading the MegaRAID Storage Manager User Guide

1. Click the software user guide download link listed in Table 4-104.
2. Click User Guide.
3. Click 12Gb/s MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide.

Use the OS command-line tool to perform operations on RAID controller cards
while the server is running. The operations take effect without the need of
restarting servers.

4.11.1 Downloading and Installing StorCLI
Downloading StorCLI
Step 1 Go to the RAID controller card page at BROADCOM website.
Step 2 On the DOWNLOADS tab page, click Management Software and Tools.
The list of management software and tools is displayed.
Step 3 Download StorCLI of the latest version.
Step 4 Decompress the downloaded package to obtain the tool packages for different
OSs.
----End
Installing StorCLI
The StorCLI installation method varies depending on the OS type. The following
uses Windows, Linux, and VMware as examples to describe the StorCLI installation
procedure. For the installation procedures for other OSs, see the Readme file in
the software package.
The StorCLI tool supported by LSI SAS2208 is storcli64.
● Installing StorCLI in Windows

a. Upload the tool package applicable to Windows to the server OS.
b. Go to the command-line interface (CLI).
c. Run a command to go to the directory where the StorCLI tool package
resides.
For Windows, StorCLI does not require installation. You can directly run
RAID controller card management commands.
● Installing StorCLI in Linux
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the StorCLI
package applicable to Linux to the server OS.
b. Run the rpm -ivh StorCLIxxx.rpm command to install StorCLI.
When the installation is complete, you can run RAID controller card
management commands.
● Installing StorCLI in VMware
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the StorCLI
package applicable to VMware to the server OS.
b. Run the esxcli software vib install -v=vmware-xxx-storcli.vib command
to install StorCLI.
4.11.2 Common Commands

4.11.2.1 Querying and Setting Spinup Parameters
Function
Query and set the interval between the spinup of drives and the number of drives
that spin up simultaneously upon power-on.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show spinupdelay
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show spinupdrivecount
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set spinupdelay=time
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set spinupdrivecount=count
Parameters
Parameter Description Value
controller_id Specifies the ID of a –

time Specifies the interval The default value is 2

between the spinup of and the unit is second.
drives.
count Specifies the number of The default value is 4.

drives that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
For details about how to query the RAID controller card ID, see 4.11.2.25
Querying RAID Controller Card, RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information.
Usage Guidelines
Retain the default settings.
Example
# Query the Spinup parameters of a RAID controller card.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show spinupdelay
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Controller Properties:
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
Spin Up Delay 2 second(s)
--------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show spinupdrivecount

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
Spin Up Drive Count 4
--------------------------
# Set spinupdelay to 20s and spinupdrivecount to 5 for the controller card.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set spinupdelay=20
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set spinupdrivecount=5
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
4.11.2.2 Setting Drive PowerSave Parameters
Function
Set the PowerSave parameters for idle drives and hot spare drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set ds= state type= disktype spindowntime= time
Parameters

RAID controller card for
drives.
state Specifies whether to ● on: enable

enable the power saving ● off: disable
mode.
disktype Specifies the drive type. ● 1: idle drive

● 2: hot spare drive

time Specifies the standby The unit is minute.

time. If there is no drive
I/O within the standby
time, the drive enters the
spin-down mode.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the power saving mode for an idle drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set ds=on type=1 spindowntime=30
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
SpnDwnUncDrv Enable
SpnDwnTm 30 minutes
--------------------------
4.11.2.3 Setting the Initialization Function for a Physical Drive and Viewing
the Initialization Progress
Function
Set the initialization function for physical drives and view the initialization
progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action initialization
Parameters

drives.

enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the –

enclosure where the
drives are installed.
slot_id Specifies a slot number. –
action Specifies the operation ● show: views

to be performed. initialization progress.
● start: starts
initialization.
● stop: stops
initialization.
For details about how to query the IDs, see 4.11.2.25 Querying RAID Controller
Card, RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Initialize the drive in slot 3 and view the initialization progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 start initialization
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Initialization Succeeded.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 show initialization
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Initialization Status Succeeded.
------------------------------------------------------
Drive-ID Progress% Status Estimated Time Left
------------------------------------------------------
/c0/e252/s3 0 In progress 0 Seconds
------------------------------------------------------
4.11.2.4 Setting the Data Erasing Mode for a Drive and Viewing the Erasing
Progress
Function
Set the data erasing mode for a drive and view the erasing progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id show erase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id stop erase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id start erase mode

Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the
mode Specifies the data erase ● simple: wipes data

mode. once.
● normal: wipes data
three times.
● thorough: wipes data
nine times.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Erase the data in simple mode from the drive in slot 3 and view the erasing
progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 start erase simple
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Erase Succeeded.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 show erase
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Erse Status Succeeded.
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 stop erase
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Stop Drive Erase Succeeded.

4.11.2.5 Setting Background Task Resource Usage
Function
Set the background initialization rate, consistency check rate, drive patrol rate,
RAID rebuilding rate, and RAID capacity expansion and migration rate.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set action=value
Parameters

action Specifies the background ● bgirate: background

task whose resource initialization rate
usage is to be set. ● ccrate: consistency
check rate
● prrate: drive patrol
rate
● rebuildrate: RAID
rebuilding rate
● reconrate: RAID
capacity expansion
and migration rate
value Specifies the resource 1 to 100

usage of a background
task.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the drive patrol rate to 30%.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set prrate=30
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Controller Properties :
=====================
-----------------------

Ctrl_Prop Value
-----------------------
Patrol Read Rate 30%
-----------------------
4.11.2.6 Setting the BIOS Stop on Error Function
Function
Enable the Stop On Error function so that the controller BIOS stops starting when
it detects an error.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set bios mode=action
Parameters

action Specifies whether to ● soe: The controller

enable the Stop On Error BIOS stops startup
function. when it detects an
error.
● ie: The controller
BIOS ignores errors
during startup.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the Stop On Error function.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set bios mode=soe
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
----------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
----------------
BIOS Mode SOE
----------------

4.11.2.7 Creating and Deleting a RAID Array
Function
Create and delete a RAID array.
Syntax
Syntax Descripti
on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id add vd rlevel[0|1|5|6|10|50|60] Creates a

[size=<VD1_Sz>,<VD2_Sz>,..|*all] [name=<VDNAME1>,..] RAID
drives=enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid- array.
endid,enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid-endid
[pdperarray=pdperarray] [pdcache=on|off|*default][pi] [wt|*wb|
awb] [nora|*ra] [*direct|cached] [Strip=<8|16|32|64|128|256|1024>]
[EmulationType=0|1|2] [Spares=[enclosure_id:slot_id|
enclosure_id:startid-endid,enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid-
endid]
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id del Deletes a

RAID
array.
NOTE
* indicates a default value.
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a -

enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the -

enclosure where the
drive is installed.
rlevel Specifies the target RAID The value can be 0, 1, 5,

array level. 6, 10, 50, or 60.
size Specifies the target RAID The default value is all,

array capacity. that is, the total capacity
of all member drives.
name Specifies the name of -

the target RAID array.

drives Specifies the drives to be -

added to the target RAID
array.
startid-endid Specifies the start ID and -

end ID of the drives to
be added to the RAID
array.
slot_id Specifies the drive ID. -
pdperarray Specifies the number of -

drives in a subarray.
Set this parameter only
when you create a RAID
10, RAID 50, or RAID 60
array.
pdcache Sets the cache status of ● on

a member drive in the ● off
RAID array.
● default
pi Enables data protection. -
wrcache Specifies the write cache ● wt: When the drive

attribute of the RAID subsystem receives all
array. wrcache=wt|wb| data, the RAID
awb is the complete controller card signals
command and wrcache= the host that data
can be omitted. transmission is
complete.
● wb: When the cache
receives all data, the
signals the host that
the data transmission
is complete.
● awb: The RAID
controller card is
forced into the wb
mode when no
capacitor exists or the
capacitor fails.

rdcache Specifies the read cache ● ra: When the required

attribute of the RAID data is read from the
array. rdcache=ra|nora is virtual drive, the
the complete command subsequent data is
and rdcache= can be read and stored in the
omitted. cache. When users
access the data, the
data can be hit in the
cache, which reduces
the drive seeks, saves
the response time,
and improves the
data read speed.
● nora: The RAID
controller card reads
data from the virtual
drive only after
receiving a data read
command.
iopolicy Specifies the I/O policy ● Direct:

of the RAID array. – In a read scenario,
iopolicy=direct|cached data is directly
is the complete read from drives.
command and iopolicy= (If Read Policy is
can be omitted. set to Read
Ahead, data is
read from the
RAID cache.)
– In a write scenario,
data is written into
the RAID cache. (If
Write Policy is set
to Write Through,
data is directly
written into
drives.)
● Cached: Data is read
from or written to the
cache. Use this option
only when configuring
CacheCade 1.1.
Strip Specifies the strip size of MR card: The value can

the RAID array. be 64, 128, 256, 512, or
1024.
iMR card: The value can
only be 64.
The unit is KB.

EmulationType Sets the logical drive ● 0: Default. If there are

sector size reported to any 512e drives
the OS. among member
drives, the sector size
is displayed as 512e
(4K). If there are no
512e drives among
member drives, the
sector size is
displayed as 512n.
● 1: Disable. Even if
there are 512e drives
among member
is displayed as 512n.
● 2: Force. Even if there
are no 512e drives
among member
(4K).
Spares Specifies a hot spare -

drive for the RAID array.
raid_id Specifies the ID of the -

RAID array to be deleted.
NOTE
● For details about how to query the IDs, see 4.11.2.25 Querying RAID Controller Card,
RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information.
● Use a comma (,) to separate multiple drives to be added to a RAID array. The format of
a single drive is enclosure_id:slot_id. The format of drives in consecutive slots is
enclosure_id:startid-endid.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Create a RAID 0 array.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 add vd r0 size=100GB drives=252:0-3
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Add VD Succeeded
# Delete a RAID array.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 del
Controller = 0

Status = Success
Description = Delete VD Succeeded
4.11.2.8 Setting the cache read and write properties for a RAID array
Function
Set the cache read and write properties for a RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id set wrcache=mode
Parameters

raid_id Specifies a RAID ID. –
mode Specifies a cache read/ ● wt: When the drive

write mode. subsystem receives all
data, the RAID
controller card signals
the host that data
transmission is
complete.
is complete.
● awb: The RAID
controller card is
forced into the wb
mode when no
capacitor fails.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the cache read/write mode to wt.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set wrcache=wt

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Details Status :
==============
---------------------------------------
VD Property Value Status ErrCd ErrMsg
---------------------------------------
0 wrCache WT Success 0-
---------------------------------------
4.11.2.9 Setting a RAID Access Policy
Function
Set an access policy for a RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id set accesspolicy=mode
Parameters

mode Specifies a RAID access ● rw: The RAID array is

policy. readable and writable.
● blocked: The RAID
array is inaccessible.
● ro: The RAID array is
read-only.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the RAID access policy to rw.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set accesspolicy=rw
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Details Status :
==============

---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
0 AccPolicy RW Success 0-
---------------------------------------
4.11.2.10 Setting RAID Foreground Initialization
Function
Set RAID foreground initialization.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id start mode
Parameters

mode Specifies a foreground ● init: writes zeros to

initialization mode. the first 100 MB
space of a RAID array.
The RAID array
changes to the
Optimal state after
initialization.
● init full: write zeros
to the entire RAID
array. During the
initialization, the RAID
array is in the
Initialization state.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Quickly initialize a RAID array.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 start init
Controller = 0
Status = Success

Description = Start INIT Operation Success
4.11.2.11 Setting RAID Background Initialization and Viewing the

Initialization Progress
Function
Pause, resume, and stop RAID background initialization and view the initialization
progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id action bgi
Parameters

action Specifies the operation ● show: displays

to be performed. background
initialization progress.
● pause: pauses
background
initialization.
● resume: resumes
background
initialization.
● stop: stops
background
initialization.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View the background initialization progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 show bgi
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
VD Operation Status :

===================
------------------------------------------------------
VD Operation Progress% Staus Estimated Time Left
------------------------------------------------------
0 BGI 3 In progress 53 Minutes
------------------------------------------------------
4.11.2.12 Setting Boot Device
Function
Set a virtual drive or physical drive as a boot drive.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id set bootdrive=on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set bootdrive=on
Parameters
controller_id ID of a RAID controller –

card.
vd_id ID of the target virtual –

drive.
enclosure_id ID of the enclosure –

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot ID of a physical –

drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set VD 0 to boot drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set bootdrive=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
Detailed Status :
===============
----------------------------------------
VD Property Value Staus ErrCd ErrMsg
----------------------------------------
0 Boot Drive On Success 0 -

----------------------------------------
# Set the drive in slot 7 to boot drive.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 set bootdrive=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
=====================
-------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-------------------
BootDrive PD:252_7
-------------------
4.11.2.13 Setting the Emergency Hot Spare Function
Function
Enable the emergency hot spare function and allow the emergency hot spare
function to be used when a SMART error occurs.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set eghs eug=state
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set eghs smarter=state
Parameters

state Specifies whether to ● on: enabled

enable the emergency ● off: disabled
hot spare function.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the emergency hot spare function and allow the emergency hot spare
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set eghs eug=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None

=====================
------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
------------------
EmergencyUG ON
------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set eghs smarter=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
-----------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-----------------------
EmergencySmarter ON
-----------------------
4.11.2.14 Setting the Hot Spare Drive Status
Function
Set the hot spare drive status to global or dedicated.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id add hotsparedrive [dgs=vd_id]
Parameters

card where the drive
resides.

housing the drive.

drive.
vd_id ID of the virtual drive to –

which the dedicated hot
spare drive belongs.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the drive in slot 3 to a global hot spare drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 add hotsparedrive
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Add Hot Spare Succeeded.
# Set the drive in slot 3 to the dedicated hot spare drive for VD 0.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 add hotsparedrive dgs=0
Controller = 0
Status = Success
4.11.2.15 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild, Copyback, and Patrolread

Functions
Function
Pause, resume, and stop the RAID rebuilding, copyback, and patrolread, and view
the progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action function
Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the
action Specifies the operation ● show: views the

to be performed. progress.
● pause: pauses the
process.
● resume: resumes the
process.
● stop: stops the
process.
function Specifies a process to be ● rebuild

performed. ● copyback
● patrolread

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View RAID rebuild progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s4 show rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Rebuild Status Succeeded.
------------------------------------------------------
Drive-ID Progress% Staus Estimated Time Left
------------------------------------------------------
/c0/e252/s4 9 In progress 12 Minutes
------------------------------------------------------
# Pause RAID rebuild.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s4 pause rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Pause Drive Rebuild Status Succeeded.
4.11.2.16 Setting a SMART Scan Interval
Function
Set a SMART scan interval.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set smartpollinterval=value
Parameters

drives.
value Specifies a SMART scan The unit is second.

interval.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the SMART scan interval to 60 seconds.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set smartpollinterval=60
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
-------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-------------------------------
SmartPollInterval 60 second(s)
-------------------------------
4.11.2.17 Increasing Member Drive Available Space to Expand RAID
Function
Adjust the available space of the virtual drive to expand its capacity if it does not
use all the capacity of member drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id expand size=capacity
Parameters

resides.
vd_id ID of the target RAID –

array.
capacity Capacity to be added. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Expand the capacity of VD 0 by 200 GB.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 expand size=200GB
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = expansion operation succeeded.
EXPANSION RESULT :

================
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VD Size FreSpc ReqSize AbsUsrSz %FreSpc NewSize Statsu NoArrExp
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 100.0 GB 457.861 GB 200.0 GB 201.458 GB 44 301.458 GB - 457.861 GB
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size - Current VD size|FreSpc - Freespace available before expansion
%FreSpc - Requested expansion size in % of available free space
AbsUsrSz - User size rounded to nearest %
NOTE
● You can also expand the RAID capacity by adding the available capacity for its member
drives. For details, see 4.11.2.18 Expanding RAID Capacity by Adding New Drives and
Changing the RAID Level.
● The RAID controller card adjusts the capacity to be added based on the drive type.
Therefore, the expanded capacity may be varied.
4.11.2.18 Expanding RAID Capacity by Adding New Drives and Changing the
RAID Level
Function
There are two RAID capacity expansion methods:
● Expanding the capacity of member drives of the RAID array

● Adding new drives to the RAID array
The following command is used in the second method.
After adding a new drive, you can change the RAID level.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id start migrate type=rlevel option=add
drives=enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters


enclosure where the
vd_id Specifies the ID of the –

target RAID array.
slot_id Specifies the slot number –

of a new drive to be
added.

level Specifies the target RAID ● If the target RAID

level after adding a new level is the same as
drive. the original RAID
level, the command
expanses the RAID
capacity.
● If the target RAID
level is different from
the original RAID
level, the command
changes the RAID
level.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Add the drive in slot 2 to the RAID 0 array for capacity expansion.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 start migrate type=r0 option=add drives=252:2
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start MIGRATE Operation Success.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 show migrate
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-------------------------------------------------------
VD Operation Progress% Status Estimated Time Left
-------------------------------------------------------
0 Migrate 1 In progress 13 Minutes
-------------------------------------------------------
# Add the drive to a single-disk RAID 0 array and change the RAID level to RAID 1.
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------

4.11.2.19 Querying and Clearing PreservedCache Data
Function
Query and clear PreservedCache data.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show preservedcache
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id delete preservedcache force
Parameters

drives.

target RAID array.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query PreservedCache data.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show preservedcache
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = No Virtual Drive has Preserved Cache Data.
4.11.2.20 Setting Consistency Check Parameters
Function
Set consistency check parameters.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id[/vvd_id]show cc
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id start cc force
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id action cc

storcli64 /ccontroller_id set cc=conc delay=value starttime=time

excludevd=evd_id
Parameters


target RAID array.
action Specifies the operation ● pause: pauses the

to be performed. check.
check.
● stop: stops the check.
value Specifies the frequency –

of performing
consistency checks.
time Specifies the consistency Example: 2016/07/14

check start time. 22:00:00
evd_id Specifies the ID of a –

virtual drive on which no
consistency check is
performed.
Usage Guidelines
If the show command does not contain /vvd_id, the consistency check parameters
are queried.
If the show command contains /vvd_id, the consistency check progress is queried.
Example
# Set automatic consistency check parameters.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set cc=conc delay=1 starttime=2016/07/14 22:00:00 excludevd=0
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
------------------------------------
CC Mode CONC

CC delay 1
CC Starttime 2016/07/14 22:00:00
CC ExcludeVD(0) Success
------------------------------------
# Query the consistency check progress.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v1 show cc
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-----------------------------------------------------------
VD Operation Progress% Status Estimited Time Left
-----------------------------------------------------------
0 CC - Not in progress -
-----------------------------------------------------------
4.11.2.21 Querying and Setting Patrolread Parameters
Function
Query and set patrolread parameters.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread starttime=time
maxconcurrentpd=number
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread delay=delaytime
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread={on mode=<auto|manual>}|{off}
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show patrolread
Parameters

time Specifies the patrolread Example: 2016/07/15

start time. 23:00:00
number Specifies the number of –

drives to be checked
concurrently.
delaytime Specifies the patrolread The unit is hour.

interval.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the patrolread start time to 2016/07/15 23:00:00 and the number of drives
to be checked concurrently to 2.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set patrolread starttime=2016/07/15 23:00:00 maxconcurrentpd=2
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------------------
PR Starttime 2016/07/15 23:00:00
PR MaxConcurrentPd 2
---------------------------------------
# Enable the patrol read and set it to the automatic mode.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set patrolread=on mode=auto
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------------------
Patrol Read Mode auto
---------------------------------------
# Query the patrolread information.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show patrolread
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------------------------
PR Mode 2016/07/15 23:00:00
PR Execution Delay
PR iterations completed 0
PR Next Start time 07/16/2016,00:00:00
PR on SSD Disabled
PR Current State Stopped
--------------------------------------------
4.11.2.22 Querying and Setting CacheFlush Parameters
Function
Query and set CacheFlush parameters.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show cacheflushint

storcli64 /ccontroller_id set cacheflushint time
Parameters

time Specifies the CacheFlush The unit is second.

interval.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the CacheFlush interval to 10.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set cacheflushint=10
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------
Cache Flush Interval 10 sec
---------------------------
# Query the CacheFlush interval.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show cacheflushint
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------
Cache Flush Interval 10
---------------------------
4.11.2.23 Setting Drive Status
Function
Set drive status.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set state

Parameters


enclosure where the
state Specifies the target drive ● online: places a drive

state. online.
● offline: places a drive
offline.
● missing: removes a
drive from a RAID
array.
● good: sets a drive as
an idle drive.
● jbod: sets a drive as a
JBOD drive.
NOTE
The LSI SAS2208 RAID
controller card does not
support the JBOD
mode. Do not set
related drives as JBOD
drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Change the state of the drive in slot 1 from Unconfigured Bad to
Unconfigured Good.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s1 set good force
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Set Drive Offline Succeeded.

4.11.2.24 Setting the Status of a Drive UID Indicator
Function
Turn on and off the UID indicator of a specified drive.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action locate
Parameters

drives.
enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the The value can be all,

enclosure where the which indicates that the
drives are installed. UID indicators of all the
drives in the enclosure
will be turned on.
slot_id Specifies a slot number. The value can be all,

which indicates that the
UID indicators of all the
will be turned on.
action Specifies the operation ● start: turns on the

to be performed. UID indicator of a
drive.
● stop: turns off the
UID indicator of a
drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Turn on the UID indicator of the drive in slot 7.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 start locate
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Locate Succeeded.


Information
Function
Query detailed information about RAID controller cards, physical drives, and
virtual drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id show all
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id show all
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a If this parameter is set to

RAID controller card for all, information about all
the target drive. controllers managed by
this tool is queried.
enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the If this parameter is set to

enclosure where the all, information about all
drives are installed. drive enclosures
connected to the
managed controllers is
queried.
slot_id Specifies the slot ID of a If this parameter is set to

drive. all, information about all
drives is queried.
vd_id Specifies the ID of a If this parameter is set to

virtual drive. all, information about all
virtual drives is queried.
Usage Guidelines
Table 4-105 describes the fields in the command output.

Table 4-105 Command output description

Format Parameter Description Example
Value
storcli64 /ccontroller_id Product Name Model of the sas3108

show RAID controller
card.
FW Version Firmware 4.660.00-8140

version of the
RAID controller
card.
Driver Name Driver name of megaraid_sas

the RAID
controller card.
Driver Version Driver version of 06.811.02.00-

the RAID rh1
controller card.
Current Working mode RAID-Mode

Personality of the RAID
controller card.
storcli64 / SN Serial number of PHWL517601Y

ccontroller_id/ the physical R800RGN
eenclosure_id/sslot_id drive.
show all
Manufacturer Id Vendor ID of the ATA
physical drive.
Model Number Module number INTEL

of the physical SSDSC2BB800
drive. G4
Firmware Firmware D2010370

Revision version of the
physical drive.
Raw size Physical drive 745.211 GB

capacity. [0x5d26ceb0
Sectors]
Logical Sector Logical partition 512B

Size size of the
physical drive.
Physical Sector Size of the 4 KB

Size physical sector.
storcli64 / TYPE Level of the RAID1

ccontroller_id/vvd_id RAID array.
show all
State RAID array Optl
status.


Value
Access Data access RW

policy applied on
the RAID array.
Cache Current read/ RWTD

write policy and
I/O policy of the
RAID array.
Size Size of the RAID 100.0 GB

array.
PDs for VD0 Physical drives in -

the RAID array.
Strip Size Strip size of the 256KB

RAID array.
Write Cache write Write Through

Cache(initial policy of the
setting) RAID array.
Disk Cache Cache policy of Disk's Default

Policy member drives
in the RAID
array.
Example
# Query detailed information about RAID controller card 0.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0 show
Generating detailed summary of the adapter, it may take a while to complete.
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017

Operating system = Linux3.10.0-514.el7.x86_64
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Product Name = SAS2208

Serial Number =
SAS Address = 50030130f0900000
PCI Address = 00:01:00:00
System Time = 07/07/2018 22:06:42
Mfg. Date = 00/00/00
Controller Time = 07/07/2018 14:06:41
FW Package Build = 24.16.0-0093
BIOS Version = 6.32.02.0_4.17.08.00_0x06150500
FW Version = 4.660.00-8140
Driver Name = megaraid_sas
Driver Version = 06.811.02.00-rh1
Current Personality = RAID-Mode
Vendor Id = 0x1000
Device Id = 0x5D
SubVendor Id = 0x19E5
SubDevice Id = 0xD207

Host Interface = PCI-E

Device Interface = SAS-12G
Bus Number = 1
Device Number = 0
Function Number = 0
Drive Groups = 1
TOPOLOGY :
========
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DG Arr Row EID:Slot DID Type State BT Size PDC PI SED DS3 FSpace TR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0- - - - RAID1 Optl N 744.125 GB dflt N N none N N
00 - - - RAID1 Optl N 744.125 GB dflt N N none N N
0 0 0 252:1 18 DRIVE Onln N 744.125 GB dflt N N none - N
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DG=Disk Group Index|Arr=Array Index|Row=Row Index|EID=Enclosure Device ID

DID=Device ID|Type=Drive Type|Onln=Online|Rbld=Rebuild|Dgrd=Degraded
Pdgd=Partially degraded|Offln=Offline|BT=Background Task Active
PDC=PD Cache|PI=Protection Info|SED=Self Encrypting Drive|Frgn=Foreign
DS3=Dimmer Switch 3|dflt=Default|Msng=Missing|FSpace=Free Space Present
TR=Transport Ready
Virtual Drives = 1
VD LIST :
=======
---------------------------------------------------------------
DG/VD TYPE State Access Consist Cache Cac sCC Size Name
---------------------------------------------------------------
0/0 RAID1 Optl RW Yes RWBD - ON 744.125 GB
---------------------------------------------------------------
Cac=CacheCade|Rec=Recovery|OfLn=OffLine|Pdgd=Partially Degraded|Dgrd=Degraded
Optl=Optimal|RO=Read Only|RW=Read Write|HD=Hidden|TRANS=TransportReady|B=Blocked|
Consist=Consistent|R=Read Ahead Always|NR=No Read Ahead|WB=WriteBack|
AWB=Always WriteBack|WT=WriteThrough|C=Cached IO|D=Direct IO|sCC=Scheduled
Check Consistency
Physical Drives = 6
PD LIST :
=======
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EID:Slt DID State DG Size Intf Med SED PI SeSz Model Sp Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252:0 48 Onln 0 744.125 GB SATA SSD N N 512B INTEL SSDSC2BB800G4 U -
252:2 19 UGood - 744.125 GB SATA SSD N N 512B INTEL SSDSC2BA800G4 U -
252:4 49 UGood - 744.125 GB SATA SSD N N 512B INTEL SSDSC2BB800G4 U -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EID-Enclosure Device ID|Slt-Slot No.|DID-Device ID|DG-DriveGroup

DHS-Dedicated Hot Spare|UGood-Unconfigured Good|GHS-Global Hotspare
UBad-Unconfigured Bad|Onln-Online|Offln-Offline|Intf-Interface
Med-Media Type|SED-Self Encryptive Drive|PI-Protection Info
SeSz-Sector Size|Sp-Spun|U-Up|D-Down/PowerSave|T-Transition|F-Foreign
UGUnsp-Unsupported|UGShld-UnConfigured shielded|HSPShld-Hotspare shielded
CFShld-Configured shielded|Cpybck-CopyBack|CBShld-Copyback Shielded
Cachevault_Info :

===============
------------------------------------
Model State Temp Mode MfgDate
------------------------------------
CVPM02 Optimal 28C - 2016/11/04
------------------------------------
# Query information about the physical drive in slot 0.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s0 show all
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Information Succeeded.
Drive /c0/e252/s0 :
=================
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Drive /c0/e252/s0 - Detailed Information :

========================================
Drive /c0/e252/s0 State :

=======================
Shield Counter = 0
Media Error Count = 0
Other Error Count = 0
Drive Temperature = 20C (68.00 F)
Predictive Failure Count = 0
S.M.A.R.T alert flagged by drive = No
Drive /c0/e252/s0 Device attributes :

===================================
SN = PHWL517601YR800RGN
Manufacturer Id = ATA
Model Number = INTEL SSDSC2BB800G4
NAND Vendor = NA
WWN = 55cd2e404c533246
Firmware Revision = D2010370
Raw size = 745.211 GB [0x5d26ceb0 Sectors]
Coerced size = 744.125 GB [0x5d040800 Sectors]
Non Coerced size = 744.711 GB [0x5d16ceb0 Sectors]
Device Speed = 6.0Gb/s
Link Speed = 6.0Gb/s
NCQ setting = Enabled
Write cache = N/A
Logical Sector Size = 512B
Physical Sector Size = 4 KB
Connector Name = Port A x1
Drive /c0/e252/s0 Policies/Settings :

===================================
Drive position = DriveGroup:0, Span:0, Row:1
Enclosure position = 1
Connected Port Number = 0(path0)
Sequence Number = 2
Commissioned Spare = No
Emergency Spare = No
Last Predictive Failure Event Sequence Number = 0
Successful diagnostics completion on = N/A
SED Capable = No
SED Enabled = No
Secured = No
Cryptographic Erase Capable = No
Locked = No
Needs EKM Attention = No
PI Eligible = No
Certified = No
Wide Port Capable = No
Port Information :
================
-----------------------------------------
Port Status Linkspeed SAS address
-----------------------------------------
0 Active 6.0Gb/s 0x4433221100000000
-----------------------------------------
Inquiry Data =
40 00 ff 3f 37 c8 10 00 00 00 00 00 3f 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 48 50 4c 57 31 35 36 37 31 30 52 59
30 38 52 30 4e 47 20 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 44
31 30 33 30 30 37 4e 49 45 54 20 4c 53 53 53 44
32 43 42 42 30 38 47 30 20 34 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 01 80
00 40 00 2f 00 40 00 00 00 00 07 00 ff 3f 10 00
3f 00 10 fc fb 00 01 bf ff ff ff 0f 00 00 07 00
# Query information about VD 0.

[root@rhel6u5 ~]# /opt/MegaRAID/storcli/storcli64 /c0/v0 show all
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
/c0/v0 :
======
---------------------------------------------------------
DG/VD TYPE State Access Consist Cache sCC Size Name
---------------------------------------------------------
1/0 RAID1 Optl RW Yes RWTD - 1.089 TB
---------------------------------------------------------
Cac=CacheCade|Rec=Recovery|OfLn=OffLine|Pdgd=Partially Degraded|dgrd=Degraded
Optl=Optimal|RO=Read Only|RW=Read Write|B=Blocked|Consist=Consistent|
R=Read Ahead Always|NR=No Read Ahead|WB=WriteBack|
Check Consistency
PDs for VD 0 :
============
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
EID:Slt DID State DG Size Intf Med SED PI SeSz Model Sp
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
25:22 14 Onln 1 1.089 TB SAS HDD N N 512B ST1200MM0007 U


-----------------------------------------------------------------------

SeSz-Sector Size|Sp-Spun|U-Up|D-Down|T-Transition|F-Foreign
CFShld-Configured shielded
VD0 Properties :
==============
Strip Size = 256 KB
Number of Blocks = 2341795840
VD has Emulated PD = No
Span Depth = 1
Number of Drives Per Span = 2
Write Cache(initial setting) = WriteThrough
Disk Cache Policy = Disk's Default
Encryption = None
Data Protection = Disabled
Active Operations = None
Exposed to OS = Yes
Creation Date = 04-01-2018
Creation Time = 12:38:35 PM
Emulation type = None
4.11.2.26 Restoring Frn-Bad Drives
Function
Restore Frn-Bad drives in a RAID array to Online.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set good
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/fall import
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id start rebuild
Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the
slot_id Specifies a member drive –

slot number.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
The drives in slots 1 and 5 are in the UBad F state, as shown in Figure 4-309.
Perform the following steps to restore the state to online.
Figure 4-309 Drive status
1. Set the state of the drives in slots 1 and 5 to UGood.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e0/s1,5 set good
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Set Drive Good Succeeded.
2. Import foreign configurations.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/fall import
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Successfully imported foreign configuration
3. If the RAID array needs to be rebuilt, run the following command:

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e0/s1 start rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Rebuild Succeeded.
4.11.2.27 Query Supercapacitor Information
Function
Query supercapacitor information, such as the supercapacitor name and the cache
capacity of the TFM Flash card.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/cv show all

Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a If the value is all,

RAID controller card. information about all
RAID controllers will be
queried.
Example
# Query supercapacitor information.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/cv show all
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Cachevault_Info :
===============
--------------------
Property Value
--------------------
Type CVPM02
Temperature 28 C
State Optimal
--------------------
Firmware_Status :
===============
---------------------------------------
Property Value
---------------------------------------
Replacement required No
No space to cache offload No
Module microcode update required No
---------------------------------------
GasGaugeStatus :
==============
------------------------------
Property Value
------------------------------
Pack Energy 294 J
Capacitance 108 %
Remaining Reserve Space 0
------------------------------
Design_Info :
===========

------------------------------------
Property Value
------------------------------------
Date of Manufacture 04/11/2016
Serial Number 22417
Manufacture Name LSI
Design Capacity 288 J
Device Name CVPM02
tmmFru N/A
CacheVault Flash Size 8.0 GB
tmmBatversionNo 0x05
tmmSerialNo 0xee7d
tmm Date of Manufacture 09/12/2016
tmmPcbAssmNo 022544412A
tmmPCBversionNo 0x03
tmmBatPackAssmNo 49571-13A
scapBatversionNo 0x00
scapSerialNo 0x5791
scap Date of Manufacture 04/11/2016
scapPcbAssmNo 1700134483
scapPCBversionNo A
scapBatPackAssmNo 49571-13A
Module Version 6635-02A
------------------------------------
Properties :
==========
--------------------------------------------------------------
Property Value
--------------------------------------------------------------
Auto Learn Period 27d (2412000 seconds)
Next Learn time 2018/08/03 17:48:38 (586633718 seconds)
Learn Delay Interval 0 hour(s)
Auto-Learn Mode Transparent
--------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE
In the command output, Device Name CVPM02 indicates that the supercapacitor name is
CVPM02, and CacheVault Flash Size 8.0GB indicates that the cache capacity of the TFM
Flash card is 8.0 GB.
4.11.2.28 Upgrading the Drive Firmware
Function
Upgrade the drive firmware.
Format
./storcli64 /ccontroller_id /eenclosure_id/sslot_id download src=FW_name.bin
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of the –



enclosure housing the
drives.

of the drive.
FW_name Specifies the drive –

firmware name.
Example
# Upgrade the drive firmware.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e64/s5 download src=5200_D1MU004_Releasefullconcatenatedbinary.bin
Starting microcode update .....please wait...
Flashing PD image ..... please wait...
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22,2017
Operation system = Linux 3.10.0-514.el7.x86_64
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Firmware Download succeeded.
Drive Firmware Download :

========================
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drive Status ErrCd ErrMsg
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/c0/e64/s5 Success 0 -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.11.2.29 Rebuilding the RAID Array Manually
Function
Rebuild the RAID array manually.
Syntax
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id insert dg=DG array=Arr row=Row
Parameters

the target drive.


enclosure where the
drive is installed.

of the drive to be added
to the RAID array.
DG Specifies the ID of the –

DG where the drive is
faulty.
Arr Specifies the ID of the –

RAID array where the
drive is faulty.
Row Specifies the row –

number of the RAID
array where the drive is
faulty.
Usage Guidelines
To rebuild a RAID array, perform the following steps:
1. Run the ./storcli64/c0 show command to query the DG, Arr, and Row
information of the faulty drive.
2. Run the storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id insert dg=DG array=Arr

row=Row command to add the drive to the RAID array.
3. Run the storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id start rebuild command

to manually rebuild the RAID array.
Examples
# Add the drive to the RAID array.
[root@localhost ~]# storcli64 /c0/e252/s1 insert dg=0 array=0 row=0
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Operating system = Linux 3.10.0-693.el7.x86_64
Controller = 0

Status = Success
Description = Insert Drive Succeeded.
# Rebuild the RAID array.

[root@localhost ~]# storcli64 /c0/e252/s1 start rebuild
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
4.11.2.30 Setting the Cache Status of a Drive
Function
Set the cache status of member drives in a RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id set pdcache=action
Parameter description
controller_id ID of the RAID controller –

card.
vd_id ID of a RAID array –
action Operation to be ● on: enables the cache

performed. function of the drive.
● off: disables the cache
function of the drive.
● default: sets the drive
cache to the default
status.
For details about how to query the IDs, see 4.11.2.30 Setting the Cache Status of
a Drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the drive cache of RAID array 0.
./storcli64 /c0/v0 set pdcache=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None

Detailed Status :
===============
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
0 PdCac On Success 0-
---------------------------------------
4.11.2.31 Viewing, Importing, and Deleting Foreign Configurations
Function
View, import, and delete foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/fall import preview
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/fall delete
Parameters

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/fall import preview
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Operation on foreign configuration Succeeded
FOREIGN PREVIEW :
===============

TR=Transport Ready
Total foreign drive groups = 0
# Delete foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/fall delete

CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Successfully deleted foreign configuration

5 LSI SAS2308
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the appearance, features, and configuration methods of the
LSI SAS2308 RAID controller card.
5.1 Overview
5.2 Functions
5.7 Troubleshooting
5.1 Overview
The LSI SAS2308 RAID controller card is a 6 Gbit/s SAS controller with the Fusion-
MPTTM architecture. Equipped with PCIe 3.0 x8 ports and a powerful I/O storage
engine, the controller card handles data protection, verification, and restoration.
The controller card provides 1.5 Gbit/s, 3 Gbit/s, and 6 Gbit/s SAS and SATA ports.
Each port supports the SSP, SMP, and STP protocols.
The LSI SAS2308 supports boot and configuration in Legacy and UEFI modes.
The controller card has two structures to provide ease of connection in different
servers:
● LSI SAS2308 for a rack server or X8000/X6800 server

connects to the drive backplane by using two Mini-SAS cables, as shown in
Figure 5-1.
● LSI SAS2308 for a blade server or X6000 server
Figure 5-1 LSI SAS2308 for a rack server or X8000/X6800 server
1 RAID controller card 2 Mini-SAS (SFF-8087)
3 XCede connector – –

Figure 5-2 LSI SAS2308 for a blade server or X6000 server
1 RAID controller card 2 XCede connector
Indicators
Table 5-1 describes the indicators on the LSI SAS2308.

Figure 5-3 LSI SAS2308 appearance

n Suggestio
ns

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.


n Suggestio
ns

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.

signal of the RAID
the RAID controller
controller card.
card is
normal.
Off: The
heartbeat
signal of
the RAID
controller
card is
abnormal.
5.2 Functions
5.2.1 High-Speed Interfaces
The LSI SAS2308 provides the following high-speed interfaces:
● The PCIe x8 interface is used to connect to the server mainboard. The
maximum bandwidth is 8 Gbit/s.
● Eight 6 Gbit/s SAS/SATA ports are used to connect to the drive backplane for
server drive storage.
5.2.2 Support for SAS/SATA/SSD Drives

The RAID controller card supports the mixed use of SAS, SATA, and SSD drives.
SAS RAID, SATA RAID, and SSD RAID can be configured in the same controller.

It is recommended that you use drives of the same type and specifications.
NOTICE
In RAID 1, RAID 1E, and RAID 10, the LSI SAS2308 firmware disables the write
cache function of the drives by default. In RAID 0, the write cache function is
enabled by default.

For RAID arrays with redundancy (RAID 1, 10, and 1E), you can manually perform
a consistency check for data in the RAID array. If any inconsistency is found, the
system automatically attempts to recover data and saves error information in the
bad block table.
Consistency check applies only to initialized RAID arrays. For details, see 5.5.7
Checking Consistency.
5.2.4 Automatic Fault Recovery

If a minor link fault or intermittent drive I/O interruption occurs, the RAID
controller card can automatically deliver the Hard reset command as an attempt
to rectify the fault. If it is a serious fault, after repeating the Hard reset command,
the RAID controller card resets the port as an attempt to rectify the fault.

A hot spare drive is used for replacing a failed member drive of a RAID array and
storing data of the failed drive.
The LSI SAS2308 supports a maximum of two global hot spare drives. If one or
two member drives of the same type as hot spare drives fail, hot spare drives take
over data processing to prevent data loss or fault deterioration.
The LSI SAS2308 does not support emergency spares and dedicated hot spare
drives.
For details about how to configure hot spare drives, see 5.5.1 Configuring a Hot
Spare Drive.
NOTE
The HDDs and SSDs cannot be used as the hot spare drives of each other.
5.2.6 Drive Passthrough

Drive passthrough, also called instruction-based transparent transmission, allows
data to be transmitted without being processed by the transmission devices. It is a
data transmission method used to ensure the transmission quality only.
The controller card enables user commands to be directly transmitted to
connected drives, facilitating upper-layer services or management software in
accessing and controlling the drives. For example, you can install an OS on the

drives mounted to the LSI SAS2308 RAID controller card. If a RAID controller card
does not support the passthrough feature, you can install the OS only on the
virtual drives configured under the RAID controller card.
This function is enabled for the controller card.
NOTE
If a drive in pass-through mode is faulty, the Fault indicator on the drive will not be lit and
the iBMC will not generate an alarm.
5.2.7 Low-Level Formatting

Low-level formatting is a process of formatting a drive by repeatedly writing zeros
to it.

SAS and SATA HDDs support this function, including unconfigured drives and
configured idle hot spare drives.

flexibility.
NOTE
be identified.
● If a drive in a RAID array is removed and inserted online, the RAID array where the drive
resides will be degraded or faulty. Before removing and inserting a drive, check the
logical status of the drive and the number of faulty drives allowed by the RAID level.
5.2.10 RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E

The LSI SAS2308 supports up to two virtual drives, each of which supports up to
10 physical drives. A maximum of 14 physical drives (including only hot spare
drives and physical drives in RAID arrays) can be assigned to virtual drives. The LSI
SAS2308 manages the remaining physical drives as independent physical drives.
RAID Level Drives Maximum Failed Drives
RAID 0 2 to 10 0

RAID 1 2 1
RAID 10 4 to 10 (even) Number of drives/2
RAID 1E 3 to 9 (odd) (Number of drives – 1)/2
NOTE
● On a Windows drive management screen, Bus Type of virtual drives and JBOD drives for
the LSI SAS2308 is RAID.

performed on the Configuration Utility, which is only accessible after server
restart. To monitor RAID status and view RAID configurations during system
running, use the SAS2IRCU tool.

Scenarios
The LSI Logic SAS BIOS Configuration Utility configuration tool is used to
configure and manage the LSI SAS2308 controller card. Configuration Utility is
embedded in the BIOS of the controller and runs independently from the OS. It
simplifies the procedures for configuring and managing RAID properties.

Before accessing the Configuration Utility, you need to restart the server, which
will interrupt services on the server.

Procedure
Step 2 When the message "Press Ctrl-C to start LSI Corp Configuration Utility" is
displayed during server startup, press Ctrl+C, as shown in Figure 5-4.
The message "Please wait, invoking SAS Configuration Utility..." is displayed.
After the system self-check, the Configuration Utility main screen is displayed, as
NOTE
To view the global properties of the controller card, press Alt+N on this screen.
Paramet Description
er
Adapter RAID controller card name.

Paramet Description
er
PCI Bus PCI bus number.
PCI Dev PCI device number.
PCI Fnc PCI function number.
PCI Slot PCI slot of the controller card.
FW Firmware version.
Revision
Status RAID controller card status.

● Enabled: The current RAID controller card is loaded during
system boot.
● Disabled: The current RAID controller card is not loaded during
system boot.
● Error: The BIOS encountered a problem when loading the RAID
controller card. In this case, you can check and modify RAID
controller card settings, but only a limited amount of information
and functions are available.
Boot Boot order of RAID controller cards.

Order NOTE
This parameter specifies the boot order when there are multiple RAID
controller cards.
Step 3 (Optional) Set the boot order of RAID controller cards.

Set the boot order of RAID controller cards in Boot Order when there are multiple
cards, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Setting the boot order of RAID controller cards (1)

1. Select the box in the Boot Order column for a RAID controller card and use
Insert or Delete to set the boot order. For example, in Figure 5-7, SAS9217–
8i is set as the primary boot device and LSISAS2308 is set as the alternate
boot device.
2. Press Esc.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Saving the settings
3. Select Save changes and reboot and press Enter.

The server restarts.
NOTE
If the server is configured with drive controllers of other chips, set the drive boot
device on the BIOS.
– For details about the settings on the Grantley platform, see "Setting the Boot
Device" in the Huawei Server Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter Reference.
– For details about the settings on the Brickland platform, see "Setting the Boot
Device" in the Huawei Server Brickland Platform BIOS Parameter Reference.

The message "Please wait, invoking SAS Configuration Utility..." is displayed. After
the system self-check is complete, the Configuration Utility main screen is
displayed.
Step 5 Select LSI SAS2308 and press Enter.
The Adapter Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10. Table 5-4
describes the controller card properties.
Figure 5-10 Adapter Properties screen
Paramet Description
er

Paramet Description
er
PCI PCI address.

Address
(Bus/
Dev)
MPT MPT firmware version.

Firmware
Revision
SAS SAS address.

Address
NVDATA NVDATA version.

Version
Boot Boot order.

Order This parameter is 0 if there is only one RAID controller card.
Boot Specifies whether boot is supported.

Support ● Enabled BIOS & OS: RAID controller cards can be managed in
the BIOS and OS.
● Enabled BIOS Only: RAID controller cards can be managed only
in the BIOS.
● Enabled OS Only: RAID controller cards can be managed only in
the OS.
● Disabled: RAID controller cards cannot be managed in the BIOS
or OS.
----End
5.3.2 Creating a RAID 0 Array

Scenarios

NOTICE
● Data on a drive will be deleted after the drive is added to a RAID array. Before
creating a RAID array, check that there is no data on drives or the data on
drives is not required. If the drive data needs to be retained, back up the data
first.
● The LSI SAS2308 supports SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs. Drives in one RAID array
must be of the same type, but can have different capacities or be provided by
different vendors.
● 5.2.10 RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E lists the number of drives required by each RAID
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Create a RAID 0 array.
1. On the Adapter Properties screen, select RAID Properties and press Enter.
The Select New Volume Type screen is displayed. See Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Select New Volume Type screen
2. Select Create RAID 0 Volume and press Enter.

The Create New Volume screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12. Table

Figure 5-12 Create New Volume screen

Volume Type RAID level.
Volume Size RAID array capacity.
Slot Num Drive slot number.
Device Identifier Drive name.
RAID Disk Indicates whether the drive is a member of the RAID

array.
Drive Status Drive status.

If the status displays Inc RAID, it indicates that the drive
does not support the SMART or SATA expansion
command. You are advised to replace the drive or link.
Pred Fail Indicates whether the drive is to be identified as failed

by the controller card.
Disk Size Drive capacity.
3. Add drives to the RAID array.

Press the space bar to specify whether to add a drive to the RAID array, as
shown in Figure 5-13.
– Yes indicates that the drive will be added to the RAID array.
– No indicates that the drive will not be added to the RAID array.
NOTE

exceeds 14, no drive can be added to RAID arrays.

Figure 5-13 Configuring RAID member drives
4. Press C.
The RAID array creation confirmation screen is displayed.
5. Select Save changes then exit this menu and press Enter.
RAID array creation takes about 1 minute, during which the Configuration
Utility is in the suspended state. Do not perform any other operations during
this period.
After the configuration is complete, the Figure 5-10 screen is displayed.
----End
Related Tasks
After creating the RAID array, check the configuration result as follows:
The Select New Volume Type screen is displayed.
2. Select View Existing Volume and press Enter.
RAID information is displayed.
Related Concepts
None

5.3.3 Creating a RAID 1 Array
Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Create a RAID 1 array.





array.




NOTE
– A RAID 1 array supports two drives.

– The first added drive is the primary drive, and the other added drives are secondary
drives. The secondary drives synchronize data from the primary drive.
– To facilitate identification of the positions of primary and secondary drives in
future maintenance, add the drives in ascending order of slot numbers.
4. Press C.
this period.
----End
Related Tasks
Related Concepts
None

5.3.4 Creating a RAID 1E or 10 Array
Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Create a RAID 1E or 10 array.

2. Select Create RAID 1E/10 Volume and press Enter.




array.




NOTE
– A RAID 1E can contain three, five, seven, or nine drives (odd numbers). A RAID 10
array can contain four, six, eight, or ten drives (even numbers).
4. Press C.
this period.
----End
Related Tasks
Related Concepts
None


Scenarios
After RAID configuration, set the boot device to the drive or the RAID array where
the OS is installed.
NOTICE
Configuring the boot device is mandatory during the RAID configuration process.

The OS will boot from the drive or the RAID array configured as the boot device.
Procedure
Step 2 Set boot devices.
1. On the Adapter Properties screen, select SAS Topology and press Enter.
The SAS Topology screen is displayed.
2. On the SAS Topology screen, press ↑ or ↓ to select a drive or RAID controller
card, and press ALT+B (or ALT+A) to set the selected device as the primary
(or alternate) boot device.
NOTE
If drive or RAID array information is collapsed, move the cursor to Controller or RAID
XX VOL and press Enter to expand the information.
After the setting is successful, the value of Device Info for the primary boot
device is Boot, and the value of Device Info for the alternate boot device is
Alt, as shown in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 Setting boot devices

3. Press Esc to exit the current screen.

4. On the confirmation screen, select Save changes then exit this menu and
press Enter.
----End
Related Operations
If a server is configured with only the LSI SAS2308 and LSI SAS3008 RAID
controller cards, set the RAID controller card boot order by following "(Optional)
Set the boot order of RAID controller cards" in 5.3.1 Logging In to the
Configuration Utility. If the server is configured with drive controllers of other
chips, set the drive boot device on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.

Type or UEFI Boot Type on the BIOS screen.
performed on the configuration management screen, which is only accessible after
server restart. To monitor RAID status and view RAID configurations during system
running, use the SAS2IRCU tool.



Procedure
Step 1 Set the EFI Boot Type mode. For details, see A.1.4 Setting the EFI/UEFI Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the management screen of the LSI SAS2308.
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS2308 controller card from Disk Devices and press Enter.
The LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration screen is displayed.
Figure 5-21 LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration screen
Step 4 Press Enter.

The Configuration Options screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-22. Table

Figure 5-22 Configuration Options

Controller Configures and manages RAID controller card

Management properties. For example, you can view and modify RAID
controller card properties, create and manage RAID
arrays, clear current configuration, manage foreign
configuration, and save RAID controller logs.
Virtual Disk Configures and manages virtual drives. For example,

Management you can view and modify information of specified
virtual drives, and view or delete specified virtual
drives.
Physical Disk Configures and manages drives. For example, you can
Management view drive properties and perform operations on drives.
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Create Configuration screen.
1. On the main screen, select Controller Management and press Enter.
2. Select Create Configuration and press Enter.
1. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Select RAID level and press Enter.
The list of configurable RAID levels is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23 Selecting a RAID level
Step 4 Select member drives.

1. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Select Physical Disks and press Enter.
The drive selection screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-24. Table 5-9
Figure 5-24 Selecting drives


Selected RAID Indicates the selected RAID level.

Level
Select Interface Selects an interface type. If the controller card controls

Type drives of different interface types, you can use this
parameter to filter the drives.
Select Media Selects a drive type. If the controller card controls drives
Type of different capacities, you can use this parameter to
filter the drives.
0:2:0 SATS Indicates the selectable drives.

HDD-512b 3726 NOTE
GB If there are multiple drives, multiple drive records are displayed.
Check All Selects all listed drives.
2. Select member drives by referring to Table 5-9.

NOTE


1. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Apply Changes and press Enter.
A confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25 Confirmation screen
2. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Confirm and press Enter.

The drive status changes to [X].
3. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Yes and press Enter.
The message "Operation completed successfully" is displayed.
1. On the main screen, select Virtual Disk Management and press Enter.
2. Select Manage Virtual Disk Properties and press Enter.
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure





Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b 3726 NOTE
NOTICE

– If the total number of drives in all RAID arrays under a RAID controller
card exceeds 14, no drive can be added to RAID arrays.



----End

5.4.4 Creating RAID 1E

Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure

2. Select RAID 1E and press Enter.




Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b 3726 NOTE

NOTE
– A RAID 1E can contain three, five, seven, or nine drives (odd numbers).



----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
different vendors.
level.
Procedure





Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b 3726 NOTE

NOTE
– A RAID 10 array can contain four, six, eight, or ten drives (even numbers).

A confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-34



----End

chips, set the drive boot devices for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.

5.5.1 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive

Scenarios
After creating a RAID 1, 1E, or 10 array for the LSI SAS2308, you can configure one
or two global hot spare drives to enhance data security.
The LSI SAS2308 does not support dedicated hot spare drives.
Procedure
Step 2 Configure a hot spare drive.

The View Volume screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36 View Volume screen
NOTE
If the LSI SAS2308 has more than one RAID array, press Alt+N to view information
about other RAID arrays.
3. Select Manage Volume and press Enter.
The Manage Volume screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 Manage Volume
4. Select Manage Hot Spares and press Enter.

The Manage Hot Spares screen is displayed.
5. Add hot spare drives to the RAID array.
NOTICE
Data on the drives to be added to the RAID array will be lost.

Press -, +, or the space bar to specify whether to add a drive to the RAID
array, as shown in Figure 5-38.
Yes indicates that the drive will be added to the RAID array.
Figure 5-38 Setting a drive as a hot spare drive
6. Press C.
The hot spare drive configuration update screen is displayed.
this period.
After the configuration is complete, the Manage Volume screen is displayed.
----End
5.5.2 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive
Scenarios
Procedure




The Manage Volume screen is displayed.
5. Delete a hot spare drive.
When the target hot spare drive is selected, press - or the space bar to mark
the drive as a deleted hot spare drive, as shown in Figure 5-41.
In the Hot Spr column, No is displayed indicating that the hot spare drive is
restored to a common drive.

Figure 5-41 Deleting hot spare drives
6. Press C.
this period.
After the configuration is complete, the Manage Volume screen is displayed.
----End
5.5.3 Activating a RAID Configuration
Scenarios
● A physical drive newly installed on the server may already have a RAID
configuration. You can activate the RAID configuration to add it to the LSI
SAS2308 RAID controller card.
activate the original configuration information in the new RAID controller
card.
Procedure
Step 2 Activate the RAID configuration.





Figure 5-44 Manage Volume screen
4. Select Activate Volume and press Enter.

The Activate Volume screen is displayed.
5. Select an operation as required.
– Press Y to activate the RAID configuration.
After the RAID configuration is activated, the Figure 5-71 screen is
displayed.
– Press N to quit.
The Figure 5-71 screen is displayed.
----End
5.5.4 Viewing Virtual Drive Information

Procedure
Step 2 On the Adapter Properties screen, select RAID Properties and press Enter.
The Select New Volume Type screen is displayed. See Figure 5-45. Table 5-13


View Existing Allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, perform
Volume consistency check, activate RAID arrays, and delete RAID arrays.
This option is available only when the LSI SAS2308 RAID
controller card contains RAID arrays.
Create RAID Creates a RAID 1 array.

1 Volume
Create RAID Creates a RAID 1E or 10 array.

1E/10
Volume

0 Volume
Step 3 Select View Existing Volume and press Enter.

Existing RAID arrays are displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46. Table 5-14 describes


Volume RAID number.
Identifier RAID array name.
Type RAID level.
Size RAID array capacity.
Task Current RAID task.
RAID Disk Indicates whether the drive is a member of the RAID array.
Hot Spr Indicates whether the drive is a hot spare drive.
Drive Status Specifies the drive status.
Pred Fail Indicates whether the drive is to be identified as failed by

the controller card.
Disk Size Specifies the drive capacity.
NOTE
If the LSI SAS2308 has more than one RAID array, press Alt+N to view information about
other RAID arrays.
----End

5.5.5 Viewing Physical Drive Information
Procedure
Step 2 On the Adapter Properties screen, select SAS Topology and press Enter.
The SAS Topology screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-47. Table 5-15
Figure 5-47 SAS Topology screen
Device Identifier Device name.
Device Info Device information.
----End
Scenarios
If the server does not need a RAID array, you can delete the RAID array to release
the drives.

NOTICE
A deleted RAID array cannot be restored. Exercise caution when deleting a RAID
array.
Procedure
Step 2 Delete a RAID array.



4. Select Delete Volume and press Enter.
The Delete Volume screen is displayed.
NOTICE
Data on the RAID array will also be deleted.

– Press Y to delete the RAID array.
After the RAID array is deleted, the Figure 5-10 screen is displayed.
----End
5.5.7 Checking Consistency
Scenarios
10, or 1E. You can start a consistency check for a RAID array on the Configuration
Utility.
Procedure

Step 2 Check consistency.



4. Select Consistency Check and press Enter.
The Consistency Check screen is displayed.

– Press Y to start the consistency check.

After the consistency check is complete, the Figure 5-71 screen is
displayed.
----End
5.5.8 Viewing the Topology

Step 2 Viewing the Topology.

The SAS Topology screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-52.
----End
Turning On Drive Indicators

Step 1 Select a drive and press Enter.
The indicators of the selected drive are on.
----End
NOTE
● You can use the same method to turn off the indicator.
● You can also turn on the drive indicators on the OS CLI. For details, see 5.10.2.10
Turning On Drive Indicators.

Formatting and Verifying a Drive

Step 1 Select a drive and press ALT+D.
The properties of the selected drive are displayed and the menus for formatting
and verifying the drive is provided, as shown in Figure 5-53.
● Format: formats a drive.
● Verify: displays the drive health status, which indicates whether there are
damaged or bad sectors.
Figure 5-53 Device Properties screen
----End
NOTE
● During the formatting process, do not shut down or restart the system or remove and
reinstall the drive. Otherwise, the drive will be corrupted.
● After formatting, all data on the drive is cleared. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.
Setting Boot Devices

Step 1 Set boot devices.
1. Select a drive and select an operation as required.
– ALT+B:
Sets the drive as the primary boot device.
Boot is displayed in Device Info for the selected device, as shown in
Figure 5-54.

– ALT+A:
Sets the drive as the alternate boot device.
Alt is displayed in Device Info.
----End

Scenarios
After creating a RAID 1 or 1E array for the LSI SAS2308, you can configure one or
two global hot spare drives to enhance data security.
The LSI SAS2308 does not support dedicated hot spare drives.

Data on the drives to be added to the RAID array will be lost. Back up data in
advance.
Prerequisites
Conditions

NOTICE
● An idle drive can be configured as a hot spare drive, but a RAID member drive
cannot be configured as a hot spare drive.
● A hot spare drive must be a SATA or SAS drive, and it must have at least the
capacity of the RAID member drive with the largest capacity.

Data
Procedure
Step 1 Access the virtual drive properties screen.
The virtual drive properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-55.

1. Select Manage Global Hotspare Disks and press Enter.

The screen for managing hot spare drives is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-56.
Figure 5-56 Configuring a hot spare drive
2. Use ↑ and ↓ to select a physical drive and press Enter.

3. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Assign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
The message "Operation complete successfully" is displayed.
4. Press Enter.
----End
Scenarios
Procedure


5-58.

2. On the screen shown in Figure 5-58, use ↑ and ↓ to select a hot spare drive
and press Enter.
3. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Unassign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
4. Press Enter.
----End
Scenarios
as a foreign configuration). You can use the WebBIOS to import the foreign
configuration to the current RAID controller card.
NOTE
● If the number of faulty or missing drives exceeds the maximum number allowed by the
RAID array, the RAID array cannot be imported.
● To avoid configuration import failure, replace the original RAID controller card with a
new card of the same type.


Step 2 On the main screen, select Controller Management and press Enter.
The foreign configuration management screen is displayed. See Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-59 Managing foreign configurations
Step 4 Select View Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
Step 6 In the confirmation dialog boxes, click Confirm and then Yes.
----End

The foreign configuration management screen is displayed. See Figure 5-60.

----End
Scenarios
the drives.
NOTICE
array.
Procedure


2. Select Select Virtual Disk Operations and press Enter.

The screen for managing virtual drives is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-61.
Figure 5-61 Virtual drive operations

1. Select Select Virtual Disk and press Enter.
2. Select a RAID array and press Enter.
3. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Delete Virtual Disk and press Enter.
6. Press Enter.
----End
5.7 Troubleshooting
This section describes solutions to drive faults and RAID controller card faults. For
other situations, contact technical supportsee the Huawei Server Maintenance
Guide.

5.7.1 Drive Fault

Symptom
Solution
NOTE
you use.
5.8.3 SAS Topology or 5.9.4.1 Viewing Physical Disk Properties.
5.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information.

NOTICE

caused by manual removal and installation of the drive, set the drive to
Unconfig Good and restore the RAID array. For details, see 5.5.3 Activating a
RAID Configuration (Legacy mode) or 5.6.3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign
Configuration (EFI/UEFI mode).
rebuilt.
Creating a RAID 0 Array.
Creating RAID 0.
----End


Symptom
● Data cannot be written into the drives of the controller card.
Solution
Step 1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI to view the alarm information.
Step 2 Rectify the fault based on the alarm information. For details, see the iBMC Alarm
Handling.
● If the fault is rectified, no further action is required.
● If the fault persists, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Collect and view logs and other necessary fault information.
Step 4 Use the Computing Product Case Library or contact technical support.
NOTE
The Computing Product Case Library is available only to Huawei engineers and partners.
----End

Scenarios
The LSI Logic SAS BIOS Configuration Utility configuration tool is used to
configure and manage the LSI SAS2308 controller card. Configuration Utility is
embedded in the BIOS of the controller and runs independently from the OS. It
simplifies the procedures for configuring and managing RAID properties.

Procedure

After the system self-check, the Configuration Utility main screen is displayed, as
NOTE
To view the global properties of the controller card, press Alt+N on this screen.

Paramet Description
er

Paramet Description
er
FW Firmware version.
Revision

● Enabled: The current RAID controller card is loaded during
system boot.
● Disabled: The current RAID controller card is not loaded during
system boot.
● Error: The BIOS encountered a problem when loading the RAID
controller card. In this case, you can check and modify RAID
controller card settings, but only a limited amount of information
and functions are available.
Boot Boot order of RAID controller cards.

Order NOTE
This parameter specifies the boot order when there are multiple RAID
controller cards.

1. Select the box in the Boot Order column for a RAID controller card and use
Insert or Delete to set the boot order. For example, in Figure 5-7, SAS9217–
8i is set as the primary boot device and LSISAS2308 is set as the alternate
boot device.

2. Press Esc.

NOTE
device on the BIOS.

The message "Please wait, invoking SAS Configuration Utility..." is displayed. After
the system self-check is complete, the Configuration Utility main screen is
displayed.
Step 5 Select LSI SAS2308 and press Enter.

Figure 5-68 Adapter Properties screen

Paramet Description
er

Paramet Description
er
PCI PCI address.

Address
(Bus/
Dev)
MPT MPT firmware version.

Firmware
Revision
SAS SAS address.

Address
NVDATA NVDATA version.

Version
Boot Boot order.

Order This parameter is 0 if there is only one RAID controller card.
Boot Specifies whether boot is supported.

Support ● Enabled BIOS & OS: RAID controller cards can be managed in
the BIOS and OS.
● Enabled BIOS Only: RAID controller cards can be managed only
in the BIOS.
● Enabled OS Only: RAID controller cards can be managed only in
the OS.
● Disabled: RAID controller cards cannot be managed in the BIOS
or OS.
----End
5.8.2 RAID Properties

Figure 5-69 shows the screen. Table 5-18 describes the parameters on the screen.
NOTE
If the number of RAID arrays created reaches the maximum, the 5.8.2.1 Viewing Existing
Volume screen is displayed after you select RAID Properties on the Adapter Properties
screen and press Enter.


View Existing Allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, perform
Volume consistency check, activate RAID arrays, and delete RAID arrays.
This option is available only when the LSI SAS2308 RAID
controller card contains RAID arrays.

1 Volume

1E/10
Volume

0 Volume
5.8.2.1 Viewing Existing Volume

Allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, perform consistency check, activate
RAID arrays, and delete RAID arrays.
Screen Introduction


Volume RAID number.
Type RAID level.
Task Current RAID task.
Drive Status Drive state.

On the View Volume screen, select Manage Volume and press Enter.

Viewing RAID Information

Step 1 If the LSI SAS2308 has more than one RAID array, press Alt+N to view information
about other RAID arrays.
----End

Step 1 On the View Volume screen, move the cursor to Volume and press Enter to turn
on the indicator of the RAID member drive.
----End
Adding or Deleting a Hot Spare Drive

Step 1 Select Manage Volume and press Enter.
Step 2 Select Manage Hot Spares and press Enter.
Step 3 Add or delete a hot spare drive.
NOTICE
Press -, +, or the space bar to specify whether to add a drive to the RAID array, as
● Yes indicates that the drive will be added to the RAID array.

● No indicates that the drive will not be added to the RAID array.
Step 4 Press C.
Step 5 Select Save changes then exit this menu and press Enter.
RAID array creation takes about 1 minute, during which the Configuration Utility
is in the suspended state. Do not perform any other operations during this period.
----End
Step 2 Select Consistency Check and press Enter.
Step 3 Select an operation as required.
● Press Y to start the consistency check.
After the consistency check is complete, the Figure 5-71 screen is displayed.
● Press N to quit.
----End
Activating a RAID Configuration


Step 2 Select Activate Volume and press Enter.
The Activate Volume screen is displayed.

● Press Y to activate the RAID configuration.
After the RAID configuration is activated, the Figure 5-71 screen is displayed.
----End

A configured RAID array or foreign RAID array can be deleted using the following
method.
Step 2 Select Delete Volume and press Enter.

● Press Y to delete the RAID array.
NOTICE
----End
Expanding RAID Array Capacity

NOTE
● The LSI SAS2308 supports only RAID 1 capacity expansion.

● Before the expansion, check that the online capacity expansion function is enabled for
the firmware of the LSI SAS2308 RAID controller card.
● Before the expansion, prepare two drives of the same capacity. Ensure that the two
drives use the same storage media as those in RAID 1 and have a greater capacity.
Step 1 Remove one member drive from RAID 1.
Step 2 Insert a spare drive with large capacity into the vacant slot.

Step 3 Ensure that RAID 1 is rebuilt.
Use one of the following methods to check the rebuild progress:
● Run the sas2ircu controllerid status command of SAS2IRCU in the OS.

● Check the drive indicator status. When the yellow and green indicators are
blinking at the same time, the rebuild is under way. When the yellow
indicator stops blinking, the rebuild is complete.
● Log in to the iBMC WebUI and check whether the In Failed Array alarm is
cleared.
Step 4 Repeat the preceding steps to replace the other member drive in RAID 1.
Step 5 After RAID 1 is rebuilt, select Manage Volume and press Enter.
Figure 5-73 Manage Volume screen
Step 6 Select Online Capacity Expansion and press Enter.
Step 7 Press Y.
The RAID array capacity expansion starts.
Check the capacity expansion result.
Step 8 Check the capacity expansion result on the Manage Volume screen. If the value
of Status is Optimal and the value of Size is the capacity of the RAID array of the
two larger drives, the capacity expansion is successful.
----End
5.8.2.2 Creating RAID 1 Volume

This menu allows you to create a RAID 1 array.

Screen Introduction

does not support the SMART or SATA expansion command.
You are advised to replace the drive or link.

Creating a RAID 1 Array

Step 1 Add drives to the RAID array.

NOTICE
NOTE
● The first added drive is the primary drive, and the other added drives are secondary
● To facilitate identification of the positions of primary and secondary drives in future
maintenance, add the drives in ascending order of slot numbers.
Step 2 Press C.
----End
5.8.2.3 Creating RAID 1E/10 Volume

This menu allows you to create a RAID 1E or 10 array.
Screen Introduction


Pred Fail Indicates whether the drive is to be identified as failed by the

controller card.
Creating a RAID 1E or 10 Volume

NOTICE

Step 2 Press C.
----End
5.8.2.4 Creating RAID 0 Volume

Screen Introduction





NOTICE

Step 2 Press C.
----End
5.8.3 SAS Topology

This menu allows you to view the topology of drives controlled by the LSI
SAS2308, view the details about a single drive or RAID array, format and verify
drives, and set a drive as the primary boot device.
Screen Introduction
Use ↑ and ↓ to select an item and press Enter.



----End

The properties of the selected drive are displayed and the menus for formatting
and verifying the drive is provided, as shown in Figure 5-81.

----End
Setting boot devices

Step 1 Select a drive and select an operation as required.
● ALT+B:
Sets the drive as the primary boot device.
Boot is displayed in Device Info for the selected device, as shown in Figure
5-82.
– ALT+A:
Sets the drive as the alternate boot device.
Alt is displayed in Device Info.
----End

5.8.4 Advanced Adapter Properties

This menu allows you to set advanced device properties and adapter timing
properties.
Screen Introduction
Figure 5-83 Advanced Adapter Properties screen

IRQ Interrupt ID.
NVM Indicates whether the controller card contains non-volatile

memory.
IO Port Address I/O port address.
Chip Revision ID Chip version ID.
Setting Advanced Device Properties

Step 1 Select Advanced Device Properties and press Enter.
The Advanced Device Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-84.

Figure 5-84 Advanced Device Properties screen
Maximum INT 13 Maximum number of INT 13 devices to be reported.

Device for this
Adapter
IO Timeout for Maximum time allowed for an I/O operation of a block

Block Devices device.
IO Timeout for Maximum time allowed for an I/O operation of a removable

Block Devices block device.
(Removable)
IO Timeout for Maximum time allowed for an I/O operation of a sequential

Sequential device.
Devices
IO Timeout for Maximum time allowed for an I/O operation of other

Other Devices devices.
LUNs to Scan for LUNs to be scanned for block devices.

Block Devices
LUNs to Scan for LUNs to be scanned for removable block devices.

Block Devices
(Removable)
LUNs to Scan for LUNs to be scanned for sequential devices.

Sequential
Devices
LUNs to Scan for LUNs to be scanned for other devices.

Other Devices
Removable Indicates whether removable media are supported.

Media Support

Restore Defaults Restores default settings.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select an item and press Enter to set the value.
----End
Setting Adapter Timing Properties

Step 1 Select Adapter Timing Properties and press Enter.
The Adapter Timing Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85.

Figure 5-85 Adapter Timing Properties screen
Direct Attached Interval between spin-ups of directly attached devices.

Spinup Delay
(Secs)
Direct Attached Maximum number of directly attached devices that can spin
Max Targets to up simultaneously.
Spinup
Report Device Latency before a missing device is reported.

Missing Delay
IO Device Missing Latency before an I/O device is reported.

Delay

----End
5.8.5 Exit
Step 1 Press Esc to display the exit screen.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select an item and press Enter.
Figure 5-86 Exit screen
Cancel Exit Cancels the exit.
Save changes Saves the changes and restarts the server.

and reboot
Discard changes Discards the changes and restarts the server.

and reboot
Exit the Exits the Configuration Utility and restarts the server.
Configuration
Utility and
Reboot
----End


Procedure
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS2308 controller card from Disk Devices and press Enter.
The LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in

Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-87 LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration screen
Step 4 Press Enter.

The Configuration Options screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-88. Table

Figure 5-88 Configuration Options

Controller Configures and manages RAID controller card

Management properties. For example, you can view and modify RAID
controller card properties, create and manage RAID
arrays, clear current configuration, manage foreign
configuration, and save RAID controller logs.
Virtual Disk Configures and manages virtual drives. For example,

Management you can view and modify information of specified
virtual drives, and view or delete specified virtual
drives.
Physical Disk Configures and manages drives. For example, you can
Management view drive properties and perform operations on drives.
----End


Figure 5-89 Controller Management screen
View Controller Queries RAID controller card properties.

Properties
Change Changes RAID controller card properties.

Controller
Properties
Create Creates and manages RAID arrays.

Configuration

Configuration
Manage Manages foreign configurations.

Foreign This parameter is displayed only when the RAID controller
Configuration card has foreign configurations.
Save Controller Saves the RAID controller card logs.

Events
5.9.2.1 Viewing Controller Properties

This screen displays RAID controller card properties.

Screen Introduction
Figure 5-90 Controller Properties screen
Chip Name RAID controller card name.
Chip Version Version information of the RAID controller card.
PCI ID PCI address of the RAID controller card. Format: bus

number:device number:function number
Host Interface Interface type of the RAID controller card.
Physical Disk Number of physical drives mounted to the RAID controller

Count card.
Virtual Disk Number of virtual drives managed by the RAID controller

Count card.
Firmware Type Firmware type of the RAID controller card.
Default NVData Version of default NVData.

Version

Persistent Version of persistent NVData.

NVData Version
5.9.2.2 Changing Controller Properties

If the OS has insufficient processing capability, you can use this screen to set the
resource usage rate of RAID rebuild.
Screen Introduction
Figure 5-91 Change Controller Properties screen
Changing Rebuild Rate

Step 1 Press Enter to view the usage rate list.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a rate and press Enter.
Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Apply Changes and press Enter.
The message "changes were applied" is displayed.
----End

5.9.2.3 Creating Configuration

This screen allows you to configure RAID properties.
Screen Introduction
Figure 5-92 Change Controller Properties screen
Configuring a RAID





Level

Configuration procedure:
1. Select the item and press Enter.
2. In the displayed list, select the parameter to be
configured and press Enter.
filter the drives.
Configuration procedure:
2. In the displayed list, select the parameter to be
configured and press Enter.
0:2:9 SAS Indicates the selectable drives.

HDD-512b 465 Configuration procedure:
GB

Configuration procedure: Select this item and press
Enter.

Configuration procedure: Select this item and press
Enter.



----End
5.9.2.4 Managing Foreign Configurations

You can manage foreign configurations on this page.
Screen Introduction

Figure 5-96 Manage Foreign Configuration screen

Step 1 Select a foreign configuration.
Step 2 Move the cursor to View Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
----End

Step 1 Select a foreign configuration.
Step 2 Move the cursor to View Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
----End
5.9.2.5 Clearing Configurations

This screen allows you to delete all existing RAID array configurations.

Step 1 On the Controller Management screen, use ↑ and ↓ to select Clear
Configuration and press Enter.

Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Confirm and press Enter.

Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Yes and press Enter.
----End
5.9.2.6 Saving Controller Events

This screen allows you to save controller event logs.
Screen Introduction

Figure 5-98 Save Controller Events screen
Available File Available file systems.

Systems
Available Available file directories.

Directories
Enter File Name Enters a file name.

NOTE
The event log file is in the .bin format.
Saving Event Logs

Step 1 Configure the file system, directory, and name according to Table 5-32.
Step 3 Press Enter.
----End

5.9.3 Virtual Disk Management

Figure 5-99 Virtual Disk Management screen

Manage Virtual Allows you to view and modify virtual drive properties, and
Disk Properties configure hot spare drives.
Operation method: Select this item and press Enter.
Select Virtual Allows you to view or delete the virtual drive.

Disk Operations Operation method: Select this item and press Enter.
5.9.3.1 Managing Virtual Disk Properties

screen.

Figure 5-100 Manage Virtual Disk Properties screen
Select Virtual Selects a virtual drive.

Disk
Virtual Disk ID ID of the virtual drive.
RAID Level RAID level of the virtual drive.
Virtual Disk Status of the virtual drive.

Status
Virtual Disk Capacity of the virtual drive.

Capacity
Virtual Disk Virtual drive read and write policies.

Policies
View Associated Displays properties of associated physical drives.

Physical Disks
Manage Global Manages hot spare drives.

Hotspare Disks

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 5-100, select View Associated Physical Disks and
press Enter.

screen.
Figure 5-101 View Associated Physical Disks screen

Selected Virtual Disk Specifies the selected virtual drive.
Associated Physical Disks Member drive list.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a member drive and press Enter.

Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select View Physical Disk Properties and press Enter.
The physical drive properties screen shown in Figure 5-102 is displayed.

Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select View More Physical Disk Properties and press Enter.
More physical drive properties are displayed, as shown in Figure 5-103. Table


Select Physical Selects a physical drive.

Disk
Physical Disk ID ID of the physical drive.
State Status of the physical drive.
Revision Version of the physical drive.
Device Type Device type.
SAS Address SAS address of the physical drive.
Disk Cache Cache enablement status of the physical drive.

Setting
Size Capacity of the physical drive.
Disk Protocol Physical drive type.
Serial Number Serial number of the physical drive.

of Disk
Hardware Vendor of the physical drive.

Vendor
Model Number Module number of the physical drive.
Hard Disk Drive Rotation speed of the physical drive.

RPM
Neg. Disk Transfer rate of the physical drive.

Transfer Speed
View More More properties of the physical drive.

Physical Disk
Properties
SMART Status SMART detection result.
Hotspare Indicates whether the physical drive is a hot spare drive.
Associated Virtual drive to which the physical drive belongs.

Virtual Disk
----End
Configuring a Hot Spare Drive

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 5-100, select Manage Global Hotspare Disks and
press Enter.
screen.

Figure 5-104 Manage Global Hotspare Disks screen
Compatible Bare Disks Lists physical drives that can be configured as hot
spare drives.
Global Hotspare Disks Lists existing hot spare drives.
Assign Global Hotspare Configures a global hot spare drive.

Disk
Unassign Global Hotspare Deletes a global hot spare drive.

Disk
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a physical drive and press Enter.
Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Assign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End


Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 5-104, use ↑ and ↓ to select a hot spare drive and
press Enter.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Unassign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
Step 3 Press Enter.
----End
5.9.3.2 Selecting Virtual Disk Operations

screen.
Figure 5-105 Select Virtual Disk Operations screen

Disk

Start Locate / Turns on the UID indicator of a member drive of the virtual
Blink drive.
Stop Locate / Turns off the UID indicator of a member drive of the virtual
Blink drive.
Delete Virtual Deletes the virtual drive.

Disk
Operation in Specifies ongoing operations.

Progress
Operation Specifies operations waiting for execution.

Pending
Allowed Specifies operations that can be performed.

Operations
Operation Specifies the operation progress.

Progress (%)
Is Operation in Specifies whether an operation is in process.

Progress
Start Operation Starts an operation.
Turning On the UID Indicator

Step 1 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Start Locate / Blink and press Enter.
----End
Deleting a Virtual Drive

Step 1 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Delete Virtual Disk and press Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End

5.9.4 Physical Disk Management

screen.
Figure 5-106 Physical Disk Management screen

View Physical Disk Displays drive properties.

Properties
Select Physical Performs operations on the drive.

Disk Operations
5.9.4.1 Viewing Physical Disk Properties

Figure 5-107 and Figure 5-108 show the screen.

Figure 5-107 View Physical Disk Properties screen (1)
Figure 5-108 View Physical Disk Properties screen (2)
Select View More Physical Disk Properties and press Enter to view more drive
properties. Table 5-40 describes the operations that are available.



Disk

Setting

of Disk

Vendor

RPM

Transfer Speed

Physical Disk
Properties
Hotspare Indicates whether the physical drive is a hot spare drive.

Virtual Disk
5.9.4.2 Selecting Physical Disk Operations


Figure 5-109 Select Physical Disk Operations screen
Locating a Drive
Step 1 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Select Physical Disk and press Enter.
Step 2 Select a physical drive and press Enter.
----End
5.9.5 Exit
Exit the configuration screen.
Press Esc consecutively on any screen to exit Device Manager. The screen shown
in Figure 5-110 is displayed. Select options based on the site requirements.

Figure 5-110 Manager list

restarting servers.
5.10.1 Downloading and Installing SAS2IRCU

Downloading SAS2IRCU
Step 1 Go to the RAID controller card page at the Broadcom website.
The management software and tools list are displayed.
Step 3 Download SAS2IRCU of the latest version.
Step 4 Decompress the downloaded file to obtain the tool packages for different
operating systems (OSs).
----End
Installing SAS2IRCU
The SAS2IRCU installation method varies depending on the OS type. The following
uses Windows, Linux, and VMware as examples to describe the SAS2IRCU
installation procedure. For the installation procedures for other OSs, see the
README file in the software package.

● Installing SAS2IRCU on Windows

c. Run a command to go to the directory where the SAS2IRCU package
resides.
For Windows, SAS2IRCU does not require installation. You can directly run
● Installing SAS2IRCU on Linux
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the SAS2IRCU
b. Go to the directory where SAS2IRCU resides in shell mode.
For Linux, SAS2IRCU does not require installation. You can directly run
● Installing SAS2IRCU on VMware
package applicable to VMware to the server OS.
b. Run the esxcli software vib install -v=vmware-xxx-sas2ircu.vib
command to install SAS2IRCU.
5.10.2.1 Viewing All Controllers
Function
View all controllers.
Format
sas2ircu list
Parameters
None
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View all controllers.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu list
Avago Technologies SAS2 IR Configuration Utility.
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Copyright (c) 2009-2016 Avago Technologies. All rights reserved.

Adapter Vendor Device SubSys SubSys

Index Type ID ID Pci Address Ven ID Dev ID
----- ------------ ------ ------ ----------------- ------ ------
0 SAS2308 1000h 97h 00h:01h:00h:00h 1000h 3090h
SAS2IRCU: Utility Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information
Function
View detailed information about RAID controller cards, physical drives, and virtual
drives.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id display
Parameters

card.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View detailed information about RAID controller cards, physical drives, and
virtual drives.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 display
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Read configuration has been initiated for controller 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller type : SAS2308
BIOS version : 8.17.00.00
Firmware version : 12.00.02.00
Channel description : 1 Serial Attached SCSI
Initiator ID :0
Maximum physical devices : 255
Concurrent commands supported : 4096
Slot :0
Segment :0
Bus :1
Device :0
Function :0
RAID Support : Yes
----------------------------------------------------------------------
IR Volume information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
IR volume 1
Volume ID : 323

Volume Name : Test01

Status of volume : Okay (OKY)
Volume wwid : 0f67f7160eb803a8
RAID level : RAID1
Size (in MB) : 761985
Physical hard disks :
PHY[0] Enclosure#/Slot# : 1:0
PHY[1] Enclosure#/Slot# : 1:1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical device information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Initiator at ID #0
Device is a Hard disk
Enclosure # :1
Slot # :0
SAS Address : 4433221-1-0000-0000
State : Optimal (OPT)
Size (in MB)/(in sectors) : 763097/1562824367
Manufacturer : ATA
Model Number : INTEL SSDSC2BA80
Firmware Revision : 0150
Serial No : BTHV511600FN800OGN
Unit Serial No(VPD) : BTHV511600FN800OGN
GUID : 55cd2e404b7b0ab6
Protocol : SATA
Drive Type : SATA_SSD
Device is a Hard disk
Enclosure # :1
Slot # :1
SAS Address : 4433221-1-0100-0000
State : Optimal (OPT)
Size (in MB)/(in sectors) : 763097/1562824367
Manufacturer : ATA
Model Number : INTEL SSDSC2BA80
Firmware Revision : 0140
Serial No : BTHV511504Q1800OGN
Unit Serial No(VPD) : BTHV511504Q1800OGN
GUID : 55cd2e404b7b04d8
Protocol : SATA
Drive Type : SATA_SSD
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Enclosure information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Enclosure# :1
Logical ID : 500605b0:01002003
Numslots :8
StartSlot :0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SAS2IRCU: Command DISPLAY Completed Successfully.
Function
Create and delete a RAID array. (The delete command will delete all RAID arrays.)
Format
sas2ircu controller_id create RAIDlevel capacity enclosure_id:slot_id name
noprompt
sas2ircu controller_id delete noprompt

Parameters

card.
level Target RAID level. –
capacity Target RAID array The value can be MAX,

capacity. which indicates that the
RAID array capacity is set
to the maximum.

housing the drives.
slot_id Drive slot number. –
name RAID array name. Set by the user.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Create a RAID array.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 create RAID1 MAX 1:0 1:1 Test01 noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Please wait, may take up to a minute...
SAS2IRCU: Volume created successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command CREATE Completed Successfully.

Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 delete noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Volume deleted successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command DELETE Completed Successfully.

5.10.2.4 Deleting a RAID Array
Function
Delete a RAID array.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id deletevolume volume_id noprompt
Parameters

card.
volume_id ID of the RAID array. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Delete the RAID array whose ID is 322.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 deletevolume 322 noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Command DELETEVOLUME Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.5 Simulating a Drive Fault
Function
Simulate a drive fault.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id action enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters

card.

action Operation to be ● setonline

performed. ● setoffline

housing the drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Simulate a drive offline fault.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 setoffline 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Physical disk set to Offline successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command SETOFFLINE Completed Successfully.
# Simulate a drive online fault.

domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 setonline 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Physical disk set to Online successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command SETONLINE Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.6 Creating and Deleting a Hot Spare Drive
Function
Create and delete a hot spare drive.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id hotspare enclosure_id:slot_id
sas2ircu controller_id hotspare delete enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters

card.


housing the drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Create a hot spare drive.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 hotspare 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
WARNING: Proceeding with this operation may cause data loss or data
corruption. Are you sure you want to proceed (YES/NO)?yes
WARNING: This is your last chance to abort this operation. Do you wish
to abort (YES/NO)?no
Please wait,may take up to a minute...
SAS2IRCU: Hot Spare disk created successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command HOTSPARE Completed Successfully.
# Delete a hot spare drive.

domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 hotspare delete 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Hot Spare disk deleted successfully.
5.10.2.7 Viewing Virtual Drive Status
Function
View virtual drive status.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id status

Parameters

card.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View virtual drive status.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 status
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Background command progress status for controller 0...
IR volume 1
Volume ID : 323
Current operation : Background Init
volume Status : Enabled
Volume state : Optimal
Volume wwid : 0307b565aa18c1fb
Physical disk I/Os : Not quiesced
Volume size (in sectors) : 1560545280
Number of remaining sectors : 1558128640
Percentage complete : 0.15%
IR volume 2
Volume ID : 323
Current operation : none
Volume wwid : 09fb6da3d1048925
SAS2IRCU: Command STATUS Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.8 Checking Consistency
Function
Check consistency.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id constchk volume_id noprompt
Parameters

card.

volume_id ID of the RAID array. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Perform a consistency check.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 constchk 322 noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Consistency Check Operation started on IR Volume.
SAS2IRCU: Command CONSTCHK Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.9 Activating a RAID Array
Function
Activate a RAID Array.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id activate volume_id
Parameters

card.
volume_id ID of the RAID array to –

be activated.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Activate the RAID array whose ID is 322.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 activate 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

SAS2IRCU: ACTIVATE Volume 322 Passed!

SAS2IRCU: Command ACTIVATE Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.10 Turning On Drive Indicators
Function
Turn on the UID indicator of a specified drive.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id locate enclosure_id:slot_id on
Parameters

card.

housing the drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Turn on the UID indicator of a specified drive.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 locate 1:0 on
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: LOCATE command completed successfully.
SAS2IRCU: Command LOCATE Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.11 Collecting and Clearing RAID Array Event Logs
Function
Collect and clear RAID array event logs.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id logir upload name
sas2ircu controller_id logir clear

Parameters

card.
name Log file name. Set by the user.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Collect RAID array event logs and save them to the local file FW.log.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 logir upload FW.log
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: LogIR command successful.
SAS2IRCU: Command LOGIR Completed Successfully.
# Delete RAID array event logs.

domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 logir clear
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
WARNING: proceeding with this operation will erase all log information
stored in the controller. Are you sure you want to proceed (YES/NO)? yes
5.10.2.12 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Primary Boot Device
Function
Set a specified RAID array as the primary boot device.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id bootir volume_id
Parameters

card.
volume_id ID of the target RAID –

array.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the RAID array whose ID is 322 as the primary boot device.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 bootir 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Command BOOTIR Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.13 Setting a Specified Drive as the Primary Boot Device
Function
Set a specified drive as the primary boot device.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id bootencl enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters

card.

housing the drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set a specified drive as the primary boot device.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 bootencl 1:4
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Command BOOTENCL Completed Successfully.

5.10.2.14 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Alternate Boot Device
Function
Set a specified RAID array as the alternate boot device.
Format
Parameters

card.
volume_id ID of the target RAID –

array.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set a specified RAID array as the alternate boot device.
domino:~# ./sas2ircu 0 altbootir 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS2IRCU: Command ALTBOOTIR Completed Successfully.
5.10.2.15 Setting a Specified Drive as the Alternate Boot Device
Function
Set a specified drive as the alternate boot device.
Format
sas2ircu controller_id altbootencl enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters

card.


housing the drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set a specified drive as the alternate boot device.
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

User Guide 6 LSI SAS3008IR
6 LSI SAS3008IR
About This Chapter

LSI SAS3008IR RAID controller card.
6.1 Overview
6.2 Functions
6.7 Troubleshooting
6.1 Overview
The LSI SAS3008IR controller card is a 12 Gbit/s SAS controller with the Fusion-
MPT™ architecture. (MPT refers to Message Passing Technology.) Equipped with
PCIe 3.0 x8 ports and a powerful I/O storage engine, the controller card handles
data protection, verification, and restoration.
The LSI SAS3008IR provides the 3 Gbit/s, 6 Gbit/s, and 12 Gbit/s SAS ports and 3
Gbit/s and 6 Gbit/s SATA ports, with each port supporting the SSP, SMP, and STP.
The LSI SAS3008IR supports boot and configuration in legacy and UEFI modes.
The LSI SAS3008 IR does not support out-of-band management, but supports
hybrid configuration of RAID and JBOD. RAID controller cards and attached drives
can be managed using the controller card WebUI and CLI, and RAID controller
cards cannot be managed using out-of-band management tools, such as the
iBMC.

The LSI SAS3008IR has two structures to provide ease of connection in different
servers:
● LSI SAS3008IR for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server
The LSI SAS3008IR connects to the mainboard through an XCede connector
and connects to the drive backplane by using two Mini-SAS cables, as shown
in Figure 6-1.
● LSI SAS3008IR for a blade, X6000 V2, G560, or mission-critical server
The LSI SAS3008IR connects to the mainboard through two XCede connectors,
Figure 6-1 LSI SAS3008IR for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server
1 RAID controller card 2 Mini-SAS (port B, SFF-8643)
3 Mini-SAS (port A, SFF-8643) 4 XCede connector

Figure 6-2 LSI SAS3008IR for a blade, X6000 V2, G560, or mission-critical server
Indicators
Table 6-1 describes indicators on the LSI SAS3008IR.

Figure 6-3 LSI SAS3008IR indicator

n Suggestio
ns

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.


n Suggestio
ns

signal of the RAID
the RAID controller
controller card.
card is
normal.
Off: The
heartbeat
signal of
the RAID
controller
card is
abnormal.

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.
6.2 Functions
6.2.1 High-Speed Ports and Modules

The PCIe core of the LSI SAS3008IR provides x8 PCIe ports and is compatible with
x1, x2, and x4 configuration. Each lane has a rate of 8 Gbit/s. The LSI SAS3008IR
supports PCIe 3.0, PCIe 2.x, and PCIe 1.x.

The SAS module of the LSI SAS3008IR provides SAS functions and defines the
supported rates. The LSI SAS3008IR supports the following SAS modules:
● 12 Gbit/s SAS, 6 Gbit/s SAS, and 3 Gbit/s SAS
● 6 Gbit/s SATA, 3 Gbit/s SATA, 1.5 Gbit/s SATA
6.2.2 Support for Multiple Extended Devices

The LSI SAS3008IR supports a maximum of 256 extended devices. When used on a
Huawei server, it supports a maximum of 40 drives.
6.2.3 SAS/SATA/SSD Drives Supported

The RAID controller card supports the mixed use of SAS, SATA, and SSD drives.
SAS RAID, SATA RAID, and SSD RAID can be configured in the same controller.
It is recommended that you use drives of the same type and specifications.
NOTICE
● In RAID 1, RAID 1E, or RAID 10, the LSI SAS3008IR firmware disables the write
cache function of the drive by default. In RAID 0, the write cache function is
enabled by default.
● Drives in the same RAID group must be of the same type and specifications.

For RAID arrays with redundancy (RAID 1, 10, and 1E), you can manually perform
a consistency check for data in the RAID array. If any inconsistency is found, the
bad block table.
Consistency check applies only to initialized RAID arrays.

The RAID controller card is integrated with an automatic faulty recovery tool,
which automatically rectifies minor link failures and intermittent read/write errors.
6.2.6 Hot Spares

Hot spare drives are used for replacing faulty member drives and taking over the
data on them.
The LSI SAS3008IR supports a maximum of two global hot spare drives. When one
or two member drives of the same type as hot spare drives fail, they are replaced
by hot spare drives to prevent data loss or fault deterioration.
The LSI SAS3008IR does not support emergency spares and dedicated hot spare
drives.
Spare Drive.

NOTE
● An idle drive that is not added to a RAID array can be configured as a hot spare drive.
● All RAIDs except RAID 0 support hot spare disks.

The LSI SAS3008IR enables user commands to be directly transmitted to
connected drives, facilitating drive access and control by upper-layer services or
management software. For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted
to the LSI SAS3008IR RAID controller card. If a RAID controller card does not
support the passthrough feature, you can install the OS only on the virtual drives
configured under the RAID controller card.
This function is enabled for the LSI SAS3008IR.
NOTE

Low-level formatting is a process in which zeros are repeatedly written to a drive
to thoroughly format it.
This process takes a long time. During the formatting, do not shut down, restart,
or remove or insert drives. Otherwise, the drives will be damaged.
For details about how to perform low-level formatting on drives in Legacy mode,
see 6.8.3 SAS Topology.
Low-level formatting cannot be performed on drives in EFI/UEFI mode.
NOTICE
After formatting, all data on the drive is cleared. Exercise caution when
performing this operation.


Enabling this feature puts drives in the Unconfigured Good state and idle hot
spare drives into the power saving state. Operations, such as RAID array creation,
hot spare drive creation, dynamic capacity expansion, and rebuild, will wake the
drives from power saving.

flexibility.
NOTE
be identified.
6.2.11 RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E

The LSI SAS3008IR supports up to two virtual drives, each of which supports up to
10 physical drives. A maximum of 14 physical drives can be assigned to virtual
drives (that is, the sum of hot spare drives and drives in RAID arrays). The LSI
SAS3008IR manages the remaining drives as independent physical drives.

RAID 0 2 to 10 0
RAID 1 2 1
RAID 10 4 to 10 (even) Half the number of

drives
RAID 1E 3 to 9 (odd) (Number of drives – 1)/2
NOTE
the LSI SAS3008 IR and LSI SAS3008 iMR is RAID, and Bus Type of JBOD drives for the
LSI SAS3008 IT is SAS.


The LSI Logic SAS BIOS Configuration Utility is used to configure and manage the
LSI SAS3008IR controller card. The Configuration Utility is embedded in the
controller BIOS and independent of the OS. It allows simple setting and
management of RAID properties.
All configurations described in this document about the LSI SAS3008IR are
performed on the Configuration Utility, which can be accessed only after you
restart the server. To monitor controller card status and obtain configuration
information when the system is running, use the SAS3IRCU tool.

Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility screen of the LSI SAS3008IR.
1. When the message "Press Ctrl-C to start LSI Corp Configuration Utility" is

2. After the system self-check, the Configuration Utility main screen is displayed,
as shown in Figure 6-5. Table 6-3 describes the parameters.
NOTE
You can view the global properties of the controller card on this screen.
The global properties include RAID controller card startup settings, such as whether to
enable the controller card, whether to modify the controller card boot order, and the
number of devices displayed.

FW Revision Firmware version.

– Enabled: The current RAID controller card is loaded
during system boot.
– Disabled: The current RAID controller card is not
loaded during system boot.
– Error: The BIOS encountered a problem when
loading the RAID controller card. In this case, you
can check and modify RAID controller card settings,
but only a limited amount of information and
functions are available.
Boot Order Boot order.

NOTE
This parameter specifies the boot order when there are
multiple RAID controller cards.


1. Select the box in the Boot Order column for a RAID controller card and use +
or - to set the boot order. For example, in Figure 6-7, SAS9300–8i is set as
the primary boot device and SAS3008 is set as the alternate one.
2. Press Esc.

After the system self-check is complete, the CU main screen is displayed.

NOTE
device on the BIOS.
Step 4 Select the LSI SAS3008IR and press Enter.

Figure 6-10 Adapter Properties


PCI Address (Bus/ PCI address of the controller card.

Dev)
MPT Firmware LSI SAS3008IR MPT firmware version.

Revision
SAS Address LSI SAS3008IR SAS address.
NVDATA Version LSI SAS3008IR configuration file version
Status Status of the LSI SAS3008IR.

This parameter is 0 if there is only one RAID controller
card.
Boot Support Specifies whether boot is supported.

● Enabled BIOS & OS: RAID controller cards can be
managed in the BIOS and OS.
● Enabled BIOS Only: RAID controller cards can be
managed only in the BIOS.
● Enabled OS Only: RAID controller cards can be
managed only in the OS.
● Disabled: RAID controller cards cannot be managed in
the BIOS or OS.
----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
● The LSI SAS3008IR supports SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs. Drives in one RAID
array must be of the same type, but can have different capacities or be
provided by different vendors.
level.

Procedure
Step 2 Create RAID 0.

The Select New Volume Type screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11 Select New Volume Type



Slot Num Slot number of a drive.

array.



NOTE
▪ A RAID 0 array supports 2 to 10 drives.
▪ If the total number of drives in all RAID arrays under a RAID controller card

4. Press C.
this period.
----End
Related Tasks
Related Concepts
None

Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Create RAID 1.




array.
– Yes: The drive is a member of the RAID array.
– No: The drive is not a member of the RAID array.


– Yes: The drive is to be identified as failed by the RAID
controller card and you need to replace it.
– No: The drive is working properly.


NOTE

– The first added drive is the primary drive, and the other added drives are secondary
– To facilitate identification of the positions of primary and secondary drives in
future maintenance, add the drives in ascending order of slot numbers.
Figure 6-16 Adding hard drives
4. Press C.
this period.
----End
NOTE
After the RAID 1 array is created, the LSI SAS3008IR automatically starts a background
initialization. The background initialization synchronizes data from the primary drive to the
secondary drive. It does not affect the use of the RAID array but affects the performance.
Related Tasks

Related Concepts
None
6.3.4 Creating RAID 1E or 10

Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Create RAID 1E or 10.

2. Select Create RAID 1E/10 Volume and press Enter.


array.
– Yes: The drive is a member of the RAID array.
– No: The drive is not a member of the RAID array.


– Yes: The drive is to be identified as failed by the RAID
– No: The drive is working properly.


NOTE
– A RAID 1E can contain three, five, seven, or nine drives (odd numbers). A RAID 10
array can contain four, six, eight, or ten drives (even numbers).
4. Press C.
this period.
----End
NOTE
After the RAID 1E or RAID 10 array is created, the LSI SAS3008IR automatically starts a
background initialization. The background initialization synchronizes data from the primary
drive to the secondary drive. It does not affect the use of the RAID array but affects the
performance.
Related Tasks

Related Concepts
None
6.3.5 Setting the Boot Device

Scenarios
NOTICE
To ensure that the server can start installed systems, you must set boot devices
during RAID configuration.
● If both configured, the primary and alternate boot devices are started in
sequence.
● If only the primary boot device is configured, the primary boot device is started.
● If only the alternate boot device is configured, the alternate boot device is
started.
Procedure
2. On the SAS Topology screen, press ↑ or ↓ to select a drive or RAID controller
card, and press ALT+B (or ALT+A) to set the selected device as the primary
(or alternate) boot option.
NOTE
If drive or RAID array information is collapsed, move the cursor to Controller or RAID
XX VOL and press Enter to expand the information.

Figure 6-20 Setting the primary boot device

press Enter.
----End
Related Operations
If a server is configured with only the LSI SAS2308 and LSI SAS3008IR RAID
controller cards, set the RAID controller card boot order by following "(Optional)
Set the boot order of RAID controller cards" in 6.3.1 Logging In to the
Configuration Utility. If the server is configured with drive controllers of other
chips, set the drive boot device on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.

All configurations described in this document about the LSI SAS3008IR are
during system running, use the SAS3IRCU tool.

NOTE
● For the configuration of the LSI SAS3008IR RAID controller card in EFI/UEFI mode,
upgrade the card firmware to V109 or later.
● For details about how to upgrade the RAID controller card firmware, see the
FusionServer Pro Rack Server Upgrade Guide or FusionServer Pro High-Density
Server Upgrade Guide.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the EFI/UEFI Boot Type mode. For details, see A.1.4 Setting the EFI/UEFI
Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the management screen of the LSI SAS3008IR.

Figure 6-21 LSI SAS3008IR
Step 4 Press Enter.
The LSI SAS3008IR main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22 LSI SAS3008IR main screen
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure
Step 2 Access the Create Configuration screen.
1. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Select RAID Level and press Enter.




Selected RAID Displays a selected RAID level.

Level

filter the drives.
0:2:0 SAS Indicates a selectable drive.

HDD-512b
279GB

NOTE


A confirmation screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-25.


5. Press Enter.
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure





Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b
279GB

NOTE




5. Press Enter.
----End
NOTE

6.4.4 Creating RAID 1E

Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure

2. Select RAID 1E and press Enter.




Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b
279GB

NOTE
– A RAID 1E can contain three, five, seven, or nine drives (odd numbers).



5. Press Enter.
----End
NOTE
After the RAID 1E array is created, the LSI SAS3008IR automatically starts a background


Scenarios
NOTICE
first.
level.
Procedure





Level

filter the drives.

HDD-512b
279GB

NOTE
– A RAID 10 array can contain four, six, eight, or ten drives (even numbers).



5. Press Enter.

----End
NOTE
6.4.6 Configuring Boot Options

If a server is configured with an LSI SAS3008IR card or drive controllers of
different chips, set the drive boot options for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.

Reference.
Scenarios
After creating a RAID 1, 1E, or 10 array for the LSI SAS3008IR, you can configure
one or two global hot spare drives to enhance data security.
The LSI SAS3008IR does not support dedicated hot spare drives.
NOTE
● All RAIDs except RAID 0 support hot spare disks.

advance.
Prerequisites

● You have accessed the Configuration Utility main screen. For details, see 6.3.1
Data
Procedure



Figure 6-36 View Volume



5. Add hot spare drives to the RAID array.
NOTICE
The data on the drives to be used as hot spare drives will be lost.
When the target drive is selected, press + or the space bar to mark the drive
as a hot spare drive, as shown in Figure 6-38.
In the Hot Spr column, Yes indicates that the drive will be a hot spare drive of
the RAID array.
Figure 6-38 Adding hot spare drives
6. Press C.

Utility is in the suspended state and no other operations can be performed.
After the configuration is complete, the screen shown in Figure 6-37 is
displayed.
----End

Scenarios
Procedure




5. Delete a hot spare drive.
When the target hot spare drive is selected, press - or the space bar to mark
the drive as a deleted hot spare drive, as shown in Figure 6-41.
In the Hot Spr column, No indicates that the drive is not a hot spare drive.

Figure 6-42 Deleting hot spare drives
6. Press C.
----End
6.5.3 Activating a RAID Configuration

Scenarios
● A physical drive newly installed in a server may already have a RAID
configuration. You can add the existing RAID configuration to the controller
card by activating the RAID configuration.
activate the original configuration information in the new RAID controller
card.
Procedure
Step 2 Activate the RAID configuration.




4. Select Activate Volume and press Enter.

– Press Y to activate the RAID configuration.
After the RAID configuration is activated, the Figure 6-10 screen is
displayed.
----End
6.5.4 Viewing Virtual Drive Information

Procedure
Step 2 On the Adapter Properties screen, select RAID Properties and press Enter.
Step 3 Select View Existing Volume and press Enter.
Existing RAID arrays are displayed, as shown in Figure 6-46. Table 6-12 describes


Volume Number of the RAID array. The LSI SAS3008IR supports up

to two RAID arrays.
Type RAID array level.
Status RAID array status.
Task Task of the RAID array. None indicates that the RAID array
does not have running tasks in the background.
RAID Disk Whether the drive is a member of the RAID array.

● Yes: The drive is a member of the RAID array.
● No: The drive is not a member of the RAID array.
Hot Spr Whether the drive is a hot spare drive.

● Yes: The drive is a global hot spare drive.
● No: The drive is not a global hot spare drive.

Pred Fail Whether the drive is to be identified as a failed drive by the

● Yes: The drive is to be identified as failed by the RAID
● No: The drive is working properly.
NOTE
If the LSI SAS3008IR has more than one RAID array, press Alt+N to view information about
other RAID arrays.
----End
6.5.5 Viewing Physical Drive Information

Procedure
Step 2 On the Adapter Properties screen, select SAS Topology and press Enter.
The SAS Topology screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-47. Table 6-13

----End

Scenarios
the drives.
NOTICE
array.
Procedure




4. Select Delete Volume and press Enter.

NOTICE

– Press Y to delete the RAID array.

----End

Scenarios
10, or 1E. You can start a consistency check for a RAID array on the Configuration
Utility.
Procedure
Step 2 Check consistency.



4. Select Consistency Check and press Enter.

– Press Y to start the consistency check.
After the consistency check is complete, the Figure 6-10 screen is
displayed.
----End

6.5.8 Viewing the Topology

Step 1 Log in to the Configuration Utility. For details, see 4.11.2.31 Viewing, Importing,
and Deleting Foreign Configurations.
Step 2 View the Topology.

1. On the Adapter Properties screen, select SAS Topology.
Press Enter. The SAS Topology screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-54.
----End
Turning On a Drive Indicator

Step 1 Select a hard drive and press Enter.
Turn on indicators of the selected hard drive.
----End
NOTE
● You can use the same method to turn off the indicator.
● You can also turn on the hard drive indicators on the OS CLI. For details, see 6.10.2.10
Turning On a Drive UID Indicator.
Formatting and Verifying a Hard Drive

NOTE
reinstall the hard drive. Otherwise, the hard drive will be corrupted.
● After formatting, all data on the hard drive is cleared. Exercise caution when performing
this operation.
Step 1 Select a hard drive and press ALT+D.

The Device Properties screen of the selected hard drive is displayed and provides
menus for formatting and verifying the hard drive, as shown in Figure 6-55.
● Format: formats a hard drive.

● Verify: displays the hard drive health status, which indicates whether there
are damaged or bad sectors.
Step 2 (Optional) Format the drive.

1. Select Format and press Enter.
Figure 6-56 Confirming the operations
2. Press F.
The formatting starts.
When the progress reaches 100%, the formatting is complete, as shown in
Figure 6-57.

Figure 6-57 Formatting completed
Step 3 (Optional) Verify the drive.

1. Select Verify and press Enter.
2. Press Enter.
The verification process starts, as shown in Figure 6-59.

Figure 6-59 Verification started
When the progress reaches 100%, the verification is complete, as shown in

Figure 6-60. On this screen, you can view the verification result.
Figure 6-60 Verification completed
----End
Setting a Boot Drive

Step 1 Select a hard drive or RAID array and then select an operation as required.
● ALT+B
Set the selected device as the first boot device.
After the setting is successful, Boot is displayed in Device Info, as shown in
Figure 6-61.

Figure 6-61 Setting a boot drive
● ALT+A
Set the selected device as the second boot device.
After the setting is successful, Alt is displayed in Device Info, as shown in
Figure 6-62.
Figure 6-62 Setting the second boot device
----End
Scenarios
After you have created a RAID 1, RAID 1E or RAID 10 array for the LSI SAS3008IR,
you can configure one or two global hot spare drives to enhance data security.

The LSI SAS3008IR does not support dedicated hot spare drives.
NOTE
● All RAID arrays except RAID 0 support hot spare drives.

advance.
Prerequisites
Data
Procedure


6-64.
2. Use ↑ and ↓ to select a physical drive and press Enter.


4. Select the physical drive status to Disabled again.
5. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Assign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
6. Press Enter.
----End
Procedure
Management Screen.


6-66.

Figure 6-66 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive
2. Use ↑ and ↓ to select a hot spare drive and press Enter.

4. Select the physical drive status to Disabled again.
5. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Unassign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
6. Press Enter.
----End

Scenarios
as a foreign configuration). You can use the WebBIOS to import the foreign
configuration to the current RAID controller card.
NOTE
● If the number of faulty or missing drives exceeds the maximum number allowed by
the RAID array, the RAID array cannot be imported.
● To avoid configuration import failure, replace the original RAID controller card with
a new card of the same type.


Step 4 Select Select Foreign Configuration and press Enter.

Step 5 Select a RAID configuration and press Enter.
The screen for viewing foreign configurations is displayed, as shown in Figure
6-68.

Figure 6-68 Viewing foreign configurations
Step 8 Press Enter.

Step 11 Press Enter.
----End

Management Screen.
Step 4 Select Select Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
Step 5 Select a RAID configuration and press Enter.
The screen for viewing foreign configurations is displayed, as shown in Figure

6-71.

Figure 6-71 Viewing foreign configurations
Step 7 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Clear Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
Step 8 Press Enter.
----End
Scenarios
the drives.
NOTICE
array.

Procedure
Management Screen.
Step 2 Open the virtual drive properties screen.

2. Select Select Virtual Disk Operations and press Enter.
The basic information about the virtual drive is displayed, as shown in Figure
6-72.
Figure 6-72 Virtual drive operations

1. Select Select Virtual Disk and press Enter.
2. Select a RAID array and press Enter.
3. Use ↑ and ↓ to select Delete Virtual Disk and press Enter.
6. Press Enter.
----End

6.7 Troubleshooting
other situations, see the Huawei Server Maintenance Guide.
6.7.1 Drive Fault

Symptoms
Solution
NOTE
you use.
6.8.3 SAS Topology or 6.9.4.1 View Physical Disk Properties.
6.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information.

NOTICE

caused by manual removal and installation of the drive, set the drive to
Unconfig Good and restore the RAID array. For details, see 6.5.3 Activating a
RAID Configuration (Legacy mode) or 6.6.3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign
Configuration (EFI/UEFI mode).
● If the RAID array has redundancy feature and has a hot spare drive, the global
hot spare drive automatically replaces the faulty drive for data
synchronization and recovery. After a new drive is inserted into the slot of the
faulty drive, the new drive automatically becomes the hot spare drive.
rebuilt.
Creating RAID 0.
Creating RAID 0.
----End


Symptoms
Solution
Step 1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI to view the alarm information.
Step 2 Rectify the fault based on the alarm information. For details, see the iBMC Alarm
Handling.
● If the fault is rectified, no further action is required.
● If the fault persists, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Collect and view logs and other necessary fault information.
Step 4 Use the Computing Product Case Library or contact technical support.
NOTE
The Computing Product Case Library is available only to Huawei engineers and partners.
----End

Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility of the LSI SAS3008IR.

NOTE


during system boot.
– Disabled: The current RAID controller card is not loaded
during system boot.
– Error: The BIOS encountered a problem when loading the
RAID controller card. In this case, you can check and
modify RAID controller card settings, but only a limited
amount of information and functions are available.

NOTE
This parameter specifies the boot order when there are multiple
RAID controller cards.

or - to set the boot order. For example, in Figure 6-76, SAS9300–8i is set as
the primary boot device and SAS3008 is set as the alternate one.

2. Press Esc.


NOTE
device on the BIOS.




Dev)
MPT Firmware LSI SAS3008IR MPT firmware version.

Revision
SAS Address LSI SAS3008IR SAS address.
NVDATA Version LSI SAS3008IR configuration file version
Status Status of the LSI SAS3008IR.

card.

the BIOS or OS.
----End
6.8.2 RAID Properties

This menu allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, and activate, delete, or
expand a RAID array.
NOTE
If the number of RAID arrays created reaches the maximum, the Figure 6-80 screen is
displayed after you select RAID Properties on the Adapter Properties screen and press
Enter.

Table 6-16 Operation description

View Existing This menu allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, perform
Volume consistency checks, and activate, delete, or expand a RAID array.
This option is available only when RAID arrays have been
created for the LSI SAS3008.

1 Volume

1E/10
Volume

0 Volume
6.8.2.1 View Existing Volume

This menu allows you to add or delete hot spare drives, perform consistency
checks, and activate, delete, or expand a RAID array.
Screen Introduction
Figure 6-81 shows the View Volume screen. Table 6-17 describes the parameters
on the screen.

NOTE
If the LSI SAS3008IR has more than one RAID array, press Alt+N to view information about
other RAID arrays.
Volume Number of the RAID array. The LSI SAS3008IR supports up

to two RAID arrays.
Type RAID array level.
Status RAID array status.
Task Task of the RAID array.

None indicates that the RAID array does not have running
tasks in the background.

● Yes: The drive is a global hot spare drive.
● No: The drive is not a global hot spare drive.

Drive Status Drive state.


Step 1 Select Volume and press Enter.
The drive indicators are on.
----End
Adding or Deleting a Hot Spare Drive

Step 2 Select Manage Hot Spares and press Enter.

Step 3 Add or delete a hot spare drive.
NOTICE

Press -, +, or the space bar to specify whether to add or delete a drive, as shown in
Figure 6-83.
● Yes indicates that the drive is a global hot spare drive.

● No indicates that the drive is not a global hot spare drive.
Figure 6-83 Configuring hot spare drives
Step 4 Press C.
----End
Step 2 Select Consistency Check and press Enter.

● Press Y to start a consistency check.
After the consistency check is complete, the Figure 6-82 screen is displayed.
----End

Activating a RAID Configuration

Step 2 Select Activate Volume and press Enter.
● Press Y to activate the RAID configuration.
After the RAID configuration is activated, the Figure 6-10 screen is displayed.
----End

A configured RAID array or foreign RAID array can be deleted using the following
method.

Step 2 Select Delete Volume and press Enter.
● Press Y to delete the RAID array.
NOTICE
----End

NOTE
● The LSI SAS3008IR RAID controller card supports only capacity expansion of RAID 1.
● Before the expansion, check that the online capacity expansion function is enabled for
the firmware of the LSI SAS3008IR RAID controller card.
● Before the expansion, prepare two drives of the same capacity. Ensure that the two
drives use the same storage media as those in RAID 1 and have a greater capacity.
Step 1 Remove one member drive from RAID 1.

Step 2 Insert a spare drive with large capacity into the vacant slot.
Step 3 Ensure that RAID 1 is rebuilt.
Use one of the following methods to check the rebuild progress:
● Run the sas3ircu controllerid status command of SAS3IRCU in the OS.
● Check the drive indicator status. When the yellow and green indicators are
blinking at the same time, the rebuild is under way. When the yellow
indicator stops blinking, the rebuild is complete.
● Log in to the iBMC WebUI and check whether the In Failed Array alarm is
cleared.
Step 4 Repeat the preceding steps to replace the other member drive in RAID 1.
Step 5 After RAID 1 is rebuilt, select Manage Volume and press Enter.
Step 6 Select Online Capacity Expansion and press Enter.

Step 7 Press Y.
The RAID array capacity expansion starts.
Check the capacity expansion result.
Step 8 Check the capacity expansion result on the Manage Volume screen. If the value
of Status is Optimal and the value of Size is the capacity of the RAID array of the
two larger drives, the capacity expansion is successful.
----End
6.8.2.2 Create RAID 1 Volume


Screen Overview
Figure 6-85 shows the Create New Volume screen. Table 6-18 describes the




For details about how to create RAID 1, see 6.3.3 Creating RAID 1.
6.8.2.3 Create RAID 1E/10 Volume

This menu allows you to create a RAID 1E or 10 array.
Screen Overview
On the Select New Volume Type screen, select Create RAID 1E/10 Volume and
press Enter.
The Create New Volume screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-86. Table 6-19




Creating a RAID 1E or 10 Array
NOTICE
● Data on the drives to be added to the RAID array will be lost.

● Drives in the same RAID array must be of the same type and specifications.

Step 2 Press C.
----End
6.8.2.4 Create RAID 0 Volume

Screen Overview
On the Select New Volume Type screen, select Create RAID 0 Volume and press
Enter.
The Create New Volume screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-88. Table 6-20




NOTICE
● Data on the drives to be added to the RAID array will be lost.

● Drives in the same RAID array must be of the same type and specifications.

Step 2 Press C.
----End
6.8.3 SAS Topology

SAS3008IR, view the details about a single drive or RAID array, format and verify
drives, and set a drive as the first boot device.
Screen Overview
Figure 6-90 shows the SAS Topology screen. Table 6-21 describes the parameters
on the screen.


Select a hard drive and press Enter.
NOTE
● You can use the same method to turn off the drive indicator.
● You can also turn on the hard drive indicators on the OS CLI. For details, see 6.10.2.10
Turning On a Drive UID Indicator.

NOTE
reinstall the hard drive. Otherwise, the hard drive will be corrupted.
● After formatting, all data on the hard drive is cleared. Exercise caution when performing
this operation.
The properties of the selected drive is displayed and provides menus for
formatting and verifying the drive, as shown in Figure 6-91.

Step 2 (Optional) Format the drive.

1. Select Format and press Enter.'

2. Press F.
The formatting starts.
When the progress reaches 100%, the formatting is complete, as shown in
Figure 6-93.
Figure 6-93 Formatting completed
Step 3 (Optional) Verify the drive.

1. Select Verify and press Enter.

2. Press Enter.
The verification process starts, as shown in Figure 6-95.
Figure 6-95 Verification started
When the progress reaches 100%, the verification is complete, as shown in

Figure 6-96. On this screen, you can view the verification result.

Figure 6-96 Verification completed
----End

Select a drive or RAID array and then select an operation as required.
● ALT+B:
This operation sets the device as the first boot device.
Boot is displayed in Device Info for the selected device, as shown in Figure
6-97.
Figure 6-97 Setting the first boot device
● ALT+A:
This operation sets the device as the second boot device.
Alt is displayed in Device Info for the selected device, as shown in Figure
6-98.

Figure 6-98 Setting the second boot device

properties.
Screen Overview
Figure 6-99 shows the Advanced Adapter Properties screen. Table 6-22
IRQ Interrupt request number.


memory.

Figure 6-100 Manage Hot Spares

Device for this
Adapter


(Removable)

Sequential device.
Devices



Block Devices

Block Devices
(Removable)

Sequential
Devices

Other Devices
Removable Whether removable media are supported.

Media Support
Restore Defaults Menu used to restore the default settings.
----End


Figure 6-101 Manage Hot Spares

Direct Attached Interval between spinups of directly attached devices.

Spinup Delay
(Secs)
Spinup

Missing Delay

Delay
----End
6.8.5 Exit
Press Esc to exit the LSI SAS3008IR Configuration Utility. The screen shown in
Figure 6-102 is displayed. Table 6-25 describes the operation options.
Use ↑ and ↓ to select an operation and press Enter.
Table 6-25 Operations


and reboot

and reboot
Configuration
Utility and
Reboot

Procedure
Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the management screen of the LSI SAS3008IR.

Figure 6-103 LSI SAS3008IR
Step 4 Press Enter.
The LSI SAS3008IR main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-104.
Figure 6-104 LSI SAS3008IR main screen
----End


Figure 6-105 shows the screen. Table 6-26 describes the operations on the screen.

View Controller View LSI SAS3008IR properties.

Properties
Change Change LSI SAS3008IR properties.

Controller
Properties
Create Create and manage RAID arrays.

Configuration
Clear Clear all RAID configurations.

Configuration
Manage Manage foreign configurations.

Foreign This operation is displayed only when the LSI SAS3008IR has
Configuration foreign configurations.
Save Controller Save the LSI SAS3008IR logs.

Events

6.9.2.1 View Controller Properties

This screen shows the LSI SAS3008IR properties.
Screen Description
screen.
Figure 6-106 Controller Properties

Chip Name Name of the RAID controller card.


● For 16P configurations, the value ranges from 0 to 3.
– 0: primary enclosure of SCE 1.
– 1: secondary enclosure of SCE 1.

Count card.
Virtual Disk Number of virtual drives managed by the RAID controller

Count card.

Version

NVData Version
6.9.2.2 Change Controller Properties

If the OS has insufficient processing capability, you can use this screen to set the
resource usage rate of RAID rebuild.
Screen Introduction

Figure 6-107 Change Controller Properties
Changing Rebuild Rate

Step 1 Press Enter to view the usage rate list.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a usage and press Enter.
The message "changes were applied" is displayed.
----End
6.9.2.3 Create Configuration

This screen allows you to configure RAID properties.
Screen Introduction

Figure 6-108 Create Configuration screen
Configuring a RAID



Level

filter the drives.
0:2:0 SAS Indicates the selectable drives.

HDD-512b
279GB

Step 3 Select member drives by referring to Table 6-28.

Saving the settings

Step 8 Press Enter.
----End

This screen allows you to delete all existing RAID array configurations.
Deleting a RAID Configuration

Step 1 On the Controller Management screen, use ↑ and ↓ to select Clear


Step 5 The message "Operation completed successfully" is displayed.
Step 6 Press Enter.
Step 7 The configuration is complete.
----End
6.9.2.5 Manage Foreign Configuration

This screen allows you to view, import, and delete foreign configurations.
Screen Description
screen.


Select Foreign Selects a foreign configuration.

Configuration
View Foreign Displays details about a foreign configuration.

Configuration
Clear Foreign Deletes a foreign configuration.

Configuration

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 6-113, select View Foreign Configuration and
press Enter.
screen.

Figure 6-114 View Foreign Configuration

Selected Foreign Selects a foreign configuration.

Configuration
Import Foreign Imports a foreign configuration.

Configuration
Clear Foreign Deletes a foreign configuration.

Configuration
Last Known Volume Last known status of foreign configuration.

State The foreign configuration cannot be imported if this
parameter is missing.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Import Foreign Configuration and press Enter.

Step 3 Press Enter.
Step 6 Press Enter.
----End

Step 1 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Clear Foreign Configuration and press Enter.
Step 2 Press Enter.
Step 5 Press Enter.
----End

6.9.2.6 Save Controller Events

This screen allows you to save controller event logs.
Screen Introduction
screen.
Figure 6-116 Save Controller Events

Available File Available file systems.

Systems
Available Available file directories.

Directories
Enter File Name Enters a file name.

NOTE
The event log file is in the .bin format.
Saving Event Logs

Step 1 Configure the file system, directory, and name according to Table 6-31.

Step 3 Press Enter.

----End
6.9.3 Virtual Disk Management

Figure 6-117 Virtual Disk Management

Manage Virtual Displays and modifies virtual drive properties, and configures
Disk Properties hot spare drives.
Select Virtual Allows you to view or delete the virtual drive.

Disk Operations
6.9.3.1 Manage Virtual Disk Properties

screen.

Figure 6-118 Manage Virtual Disk Properties


Disk
Virtual Disk ID ID of the virtual drive.
Virtual Disk Status of the virtual drive.

Status
Virtual Disk Capacity of the virtual drive.

Capacity
Virtual Disk Virtual drive read and write policies.

Policies
View Associated Displays properties of associated physical drives.

Physical Disks
Manage Global Manages hot spare drives.

Hotspare Disks

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 6-118, select View Associated Physical Disks and
press Enter.

screen.
Figure 6-119 View Associated Physical Disks

Selected Virtual Disk Selected virtual drive.
Associated Physical Disks Member drive list.
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a member drive and press Enter.

Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select View Physical Disk Properties and press Enter.
The physical drive properties screen shown in Figure 6-120 is displayed.

Step 5 Use ↑ and ↓ to select View More Physical Disk Properties and press Enter.
More physical drive properties are displayed, as shown in Figure 6-121. Table
Figure 6-121 More properties



Disk

Setting

of Disk

Vendor

RPM

Transfer Speed

Physical Disk
Properties
Hotspare Whether the physical drive is a hot spare drive.

Virtual Disk
----End

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 6-118, select Manage Global Hotspare Disks and
press Enter.
screen.

Figure 6-122 Manage Global Hotspare Disks

Compatible Bare Disks Lists physical drives that can be configured as hot
spare drives.
Global Hotspare Disks Lists existing hot spare drives.
Assign Global Hotspare Configures a global hot spare drive.

Disk
Unassign Global Hotspare Deletes a global hot spare drive.

Disk
Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a physical drive and press Enter.

Step 4 Select the physical drive status to Disabled again.
Step 5 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Assign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
Step 6 Press Enter.
----End


Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 6-122, use ↑ and ↓ to select a hot spare drive and
press Enter.
Step 3 Select the physical drive status to Disabled again.
Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Unassign Global Hotspare Disk and press Enter.
Step 5 Press Enter.
----End
6.9.3.2 Select Virtual Disk Operations

screen.
Figure 6-123 Select Virtual Disk Operations

Disk

Start Locate / Turns on the UID indicator of a member drive of the virtual
Blink drive.
Stop Locate / Turns off the UID indicator of a member drive of the virtual
Blink drive.
Delete Virtual Deletes the virtual drive.

Disk
Operation in Specifies ongoing operations.

Progress
Operation Specifies operations waiting for execution.

Pending
Allowed Specifies operations that can be performed.

Operations
Operation Specifies the operation progress.

Progress (%)
Is Operation in Specifies whether an operation is in process.

Progress
Start Operation Starts an operation.
Turning On the UID Indicator

----End
Deleting a Virtual Drive

Step 1 Use ↑ and ↓ to select Delete Virtual Disk and press Enter.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End

Figure 6-124 shows the Physical Disk Management screen. Table 6-38 describes

Figure 6-124 Physical Disk Management

View Physical Disk Views drive properties.

Properties

Disk Operations
6.9.4.1 View Physical Disk Properties

screen.

Figure 6-125 View Physical Disk Properties

Disk

Setting

of Disk

Vendor


RPM

Transfer Speed

Physical Disk
Properties
Hotspare Whether the physical drive is a hot spare drive.

Virtual Disk
6.9.4.2 Select Physical Disk Operations

Figure 6-126 Select Physical Disk Operations
Locating a Drive

----End
6.9.5 Exit

Step 1 On the LSI SAS3008IR main screen, press ESC. The Advanced screen shown in
Figure 6-127 is displayed.

displayed.
----End

Use this tool to perform controller operations without needing to restart a running
server.


Step 2 Click Management Software and Tools.
OSs.
----End
Installing SAS3IRCU
Readme file in the software package.
● Installing SAS3IRCU in Windows
c. Run a command to go to the directory where the SAS3IRCU tool package
resides.
● Installing SAS3IRCU in Linux
● Installing SAS3IRCU in VMware
a. Use a file transfer tool (such as PuTTY) to upload the SAS3IRCU package
applicable to VMware to the /temp directory on the server OS.
b. In VMware, run the esxcli software vib install -v=/temp/vmware-xxx-
sas3ircu.vib command to install SAS3IRCU. In the command, /temp/
vmware-xxx-sas3ircu.vib indicates the full path of the SAS3IRCU tool
file.
NOTE
The SAS3IRCU installation directory is /opt/lsi/bin. You need to access the

directory and run RAID card commands.

Function
Format
sas3ircu list
Parameters
None
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
----- ------------ ------ ------ ----------------- ------ ------
0 SAS3008 1000h 97h 00h:01h:00h:00h 1000h 3090h
6.10.2.2 Viewing Device Information
Function
View detailed information about RAID controller cards, physical drives, and virtual
drives.
Format
Parameters

card
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# View detailed information about RAID controller cards, physical drives, and
virtual drives.
● You can run the display command to see the information. In the following
example, two drives are set as the primary and alternate boot devices
respectively.
● In the following example, a drive and a RAID array are set as the primary and
alternate boot devices respectively.

Function
Create and delete a RAID array. (The delete command will delete all RAID arrays.)
Format
sas3ircu controller_id create RAIDlevel capacity enclosure_id:slot_id name
noprompt
sas3ircu controller_id delete noprompt

Parameters

level Specifies the target RAID –

level.
capacity Specifies the target RAID The value can be MAX,

array capacity. which indicates that the
RAID array capacity is set
to the maximum.

enclosure where the
name Specifies a RAID array Set by the user.

name.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)


Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

# Delete RAID arrays.

Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
6.10.2.4 Deleting a Specified RAID Array
Function
Delete a specified RAID array.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id deletevolume volume_id noprompt
Parameters

volume_id Specifies the ID of the –

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Delete the RAID array whose ID is 322.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 deletevolume 322 noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Command DELETEVOLUME Completed Successfully.
Function

Format
Parameters

action Specifies the operation ● setonline

to be performed. ● setoffline

enclosure where the
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
6.10.2.6 Creating and Deleting a Hot Spare Drive
Function
Create and delete a hot spare drive.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id hotspare enclosure_id:slot_id
sas3ircu controller_id hotspare delete enclosure_id:slot_id

Parameters


enclosure where the
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the drive in slot 2 of enclosure 1 to a hot spare drive.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 hotspare 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Hot Spare disk created successfully.
# Delete a hot spare drive.

domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 hotspare delete 1:2
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Hot Spare disk deleted successfully.
6.10.2.7 Viewing Virtual Drive Status
Function
View virtual drive status.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id status

Parameters

card
For details about how to query the RAID controller card ID, see 6.10.2.1 Viewing
All Controllers.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View virtual drive status.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 status
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
Background command progress status for controller 0...
IR volume 1
Volume ID : 323
Current operation : Background Init
Volume wwid : 0307b565aa18c1fb
Volume size (in sectors) : 1560545280
Number of remaining sectors : 1558128640
Percentage complete : 0.15%
IR volume 2
Volume ID : 323
Current operation : none
Volume wwid : 09fb6da3d1048925
SAS3IRCU: Command STATUS Completed Successfully.
6.10.2.8 Performing a Consistency Check
Function
Perform a consistency check.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id constchk volume_id noprompt

Parameters

volume_id Specifies the ID of a –

RAID array.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Perform a consistency check.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 constchk 322 noprompt
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Consistency Check Operation started on IR Volume.
SAS3IRCU: Command CONSTCHK Completed Successfully.
6.10.2.9 Activating a RAID Array
Function
Activate a RAID array.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id activate volume_id
Parameters


RAID array to be
activated.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Activate the RAID array whose ID is 322.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 activate 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: ACTIVATE Volume 322 Passed!
SAS3IRCU: Command ACTIVATE Completed Successfully.
6.10.2.10 Turning On a Drive UID Indicator
Function
Format
Parameters


enclosure where the
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
6.10.2.11 Collecting and Clearing RAID Array Event Logs
Function
Collect and clear RAID array event logs.

Format
sas3ircu controller_id logir upload name
sas3ircu controller_id logir clear
Parameters

name Specifies a log file name. Set by the user.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Collect RAID array event logs and save them to the local file FW.log.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 logir upload FW.log
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
# Delete RAID array event logs.

domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 logir clear
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
WARNING: proceeding with this operation will erase all log information
stored in the controller. Are you sure you want to proceed (YES/NO)? yes
6.10.2.12 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Primary Boot Device
Function
Set a specified RAID array as the primary boot device.
Format

Parameters


target RAID array.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the RAID array whose ID is 322 as the primary boot device.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 bootir 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Command BOOTIR Completed Successfully.
6.10.2.13 Setting a Specified Drive as the Primary Boot Device
Function
Set a specified drive as the primary boot device.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id bootencl enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters


enclosure where the
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set a specified drive as the primary boot device.
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
6.10.2.14 Setting a Specified RAID Array as the Second Boot Device
Function
Set a specified RAID array as the second boot device.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id altbootir volume_id
Parameters


target RAID array.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set a specified RAID array as the second boot device.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 altbootir 322
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
SAS3IRCU: Command ALTBOOTIR Completed Successfully.
6.10.2.15 Setting a Specified Drive as the Second Boot Device
Function
Set a specified drive as the second boot device.
Format
sas3ircu controller_id altbootencl enclosure_id:slot_id

Parameters


enclosure where the
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set a specified drive as the second boot device.
domino:~# ./sas3ircu 0 altbootencl 1:4
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

User Guide 7 LSI SAS3008IT
7 LSI SAS3008IT
About This Chapter

LSI SAS3008IT RAID controller card.
7.1 Overview
7.2 Functions
7.5 Troubleshooting
7.1 Overview
The LSI SAS3008IT controller card is a 12 Gbit/s SAS controller with the Fusion-
MPT™ architecture. (MPT refers to Message Passing Technology.) Equipped with
PCIe 3.0 x8 ports and a powerful I/O storage engine, the controller card handles
data protection, verification, and restoration.
The LSI SAS3008IT provides the 3 Gbit/s, 6 Gbit/s, and 12 Gbit/s SAS ports and 3
Gbit/s and 6 Gbit/s SATA ports, with each port supporting the SSP, SMP, and STP.
The LSI SAS3008 IT controller card supports out-of-band management and
transparent transmission but does not support RAID functions. Out-of-band
management tools, such as the iBMC, can be used to manage RAID controller
cards and attached drives, and RAID array configuration and operations are not
supported.
The LSI SAS3008IT has two structures to provide ease of connection in different
servers:
● LSI SAS3008IT for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server

The LSI SAS3008IT connects to the mainboard through an XCede connector

and connects to the drive backplane by using two Mini-SAS cables, as shown
in Figure 7-1.
● LSI SAS3008IT for a blade, X6000 V2, G560, or mission-critical server
The LSI SAS3008IT connects to the mainboard through two XCede connectors,
Figure 7-1 LSI SAS3008IT for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server
1 RAID controller card 2 Mini-SAS (port B, SFF-8643)
3 Mini-SAS (port A, SFF-8643) 4 XCede connector

Figure 7-2 LSI SAS3008IT for a blade, X6000 V2, G560, or mission-critical server
7.2 Functions
7.2.1 High-Speed Ports and Modules

The PCIe core of the LSI SAS3008IT provides x8 PCIe ports and is compatible with
x1, x2, and x4 configuration. Each lane has a rate of 8 Gbit/s. The LSI SAS3008IT
supports PCIe 3.0, PCIe 2.x, and PCIe 1.x.
The SAS module of the LSI SAS3008IT provides SAS functions and defines the
supported rates. The LSI SAS3008IT supports the following SAS modules:
● 12 Gbit/s SAS, 6 Gbit/s SAS, and 3 Gbit/s SAS
● 6 Gbit/s SATA, 3 Gbit/s SATA, 1.5 Gbit/s SATA
7.2.2 Support for Multiple Extended Devices

The LSI SAS3008IT supports a maximum of 256 extended devices. When used on a
Huawei server, it supports a maximum of 40 drives. It can connect to multiple
drives when used with Huawei servers.
The number of drives supported by the LSI SAS3008IT varies depending on the
number of drives supported by the server.


The RAID controller card is integrated with an automatic faulty recovery tool,
which automatically rectifies minor link failures and intermittent read/write errors.

The controller card enables user commands to be directly transmitted to
connected drives, facilitating drive access and control by upper-layer services or
management software. For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted
to the LSI SAS3008IT RAID controller card. If a RAID controller card does not
support the passthrough feature, you can install the OS only on the virtual drives
configured under the RAID controller card.
This function is enabled for the LSI SAS3008IT.
NOTE

Low-level formatting is a process of formatting a drive by repeatedly writing zeros
to it.

When the power saving function is enabled, Unconfig Good drives mounted to
the RAID controller card are in power saving state. I/Os can wake these drives.

flexibility.
NOTE
be identified.


The LSI Logic SAS BIOS Configuration Utility is used to configure and manage the
LSI SAS3008IT controller card. The Configuration Utility is embedded in the
All configurations described in this document about the LSI SAS3008IT are
performed on the Configuration Utility, which is only accessible during server
restart. To monitor controller card status and obtain configuration information
when the system is running, use the SAS3IRCU tool.

Procedure

NOTE


during system boot.
– Disabled: The current RAID controller card is not
loaded during system boot.
– Error: The BIOS encountered a problem when
loading the RAID controller card. In this case, you
can check and modify RAID controller card settings,
but only a limited amount of information and
functions are available.

NOTE
This parameter specifies the boot order when there are
multiple RAID controller cards.


or - to set the boot order. For example, in Figure 7-6, 9305-24i is set as the
primary boot device and SAS3008 is set as the alternate one.
2. Press Esc.


NOTE
device on the BIOS.
Step 4 Select the LSI SAS3008IT controller card and press Enter.



Dev)
MPT Firmware LSI SAS3008IT MPT firmware version.

Revision
SAS Address LSI SAS3008IT SAS address.
NVDATA Version LSI SAS3008IT configuration file version
Status Status of the LSI SAS3008IT.

card.

the BIOS or OS.
----End
7.3.2.1 Setting Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card

This section describes how to set boot devices when a single RAID controller card
is configured.

Scenarios
NOTICE
To ensure that the server can start installed systems, you must set boot devices
during RAID configuration.
● If both configured, the primary and alternate boot devices are started in
sequence.
● If only the primary boot device is configured, the primary boot device is
started.
● If only the alternate boot device is configured, the alternate boot device is
started.
Procedure
2. On the SAS Topology screen, press ↑ or ↓ to select a drive, and press ALT+B
(or ALT+A) to set the selected device as the primary (or alternate) boot
device.
NOTE
If the drive information is collapsed, move the cursor to Direct Attach Devices and
press Enter.
Figure 7-10 Setting Boot Devices


press Enter.
----End
7.3.2.2 Setting Boot Devices for a Server

● If a server is configured with one RAID controller card, the drive under the
RAID controller card is the boot device for the server. For details, see 7.3.2.1
Setting Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card.
● If the server is configured with multiple RAID controller cards:
– When an LSI SAS2308/LSI SAS3008IR/LSI SAS3008IT RAID controller card
is configured, set the RAID card boot sequence provided in Step 3 in 7.3.1
– When an LSI SAS2308/LSI SAS3008IR/LSI SAS3008IT RAID controller card
or a drive controller for other chips is configured, you need to set the
boot device in the BIOS. For details, see "Setting the Boot Device" in the
respective BIOS Parameter Reference.
▪ Huawei Server Brickland Platform BIOS Parameter Reference
▪ Huawei Server Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter Reference

All configurations described in this document about the LSI SAS3008IT are
during system running, use the SAS3IRCU tool.


Procedure
Mode.
Step 2 Log in to the management screen of the LSI SAS3008IT.
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS3008IT controller card and press Enter.
Figure 7-11 LSI SAS3008IT
Step 4 Press Enter.

The main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 LSI SAS3008IT main screen
----End
7.4.2.1 Setting Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card

The LSI SAS3008IT does not support boot option setting in UEFI mode on V2/V3
servers. Set the boot option in Legacy mode. For details, see 7.3.2.1 Setting Boot
Devices for a RAID Controller Card.
7.4.2.2 Setting Boot Devices for a Server

If a server is configured with one RAID controller card, the drive under the RAID
controller card is the boot device for the server. For details, see 7.4.2.1 Setting
Boot Devices for a RAID Controller Card.
If the server is configured with multiple RAID controller cards, you need to set the
boot device in the BIOS in EFI/UEFI mode. For details, see "Setting the Boot
Device" in the respective BIOS Parameter Reference.

7.5 Troubleshooting
This topic describes solutions to drive faults and RAID controller card faults. For

7.5.1 Drive Fault
Symptoms

Solution
NOTE
you use.
7.6.1 SAS Topology or 7.7.2.1 View Physical Disk Properties.
7.8.2.2 Viewing RAID Controller Card and Physical Drive Information.
----End
Symptom
Solution
For details about how to replace a RAID controller card, see the user guide
delivered with your server.

----End

7.6.1 SAS Topology

SAS3008IT, view the details about a single drive, format and verify drives, and set
a drive as the primary boot device.
Screen Introduction
Figure 7-13 shows the Device Identifier screen. Table 7-3 describes the

Select a drive and press Enter.


Select a drive and press ALT+D.
The Device Properties screen of the selected drive is displayed and provides
menus for formatting and verifying the drive, as shown in Figure 7-14.

properties.
Screen Introduction
Figure 7-15 shows the Advanced Adapter Properties screen. Table 7-4 describes


IRQ Interrupt request number.

memory.

Table 7-5 describes related parameters.

Figure 7-16 Advanced Device Properties


Device for this
Adapter


(Removable)

Sequential device.
Devices


Block Devices

Block Devices
(Removable)

Sequential
Devices

Other Devices

Removable Indicates whether removable media are supported.

Media Support
Restore Defaults Menu used to restore the default settings.
----End


Figure 7-17 Adapter Timing Properties
Direct Attached Interval between spinups of directly attached devices.

Spinup Delay
(Secs)
Spinup

Missing Delay


Delay
----End
7.6.3 Exit
Press Esc to exit the LSI SAS3008IT Configuration Utility. The screen shown in
Figure 7-18 is displayed. Table 7-7 describes the operation options.
Use ↑ and ↓ to select an operation and press Enter.

and reboot

and reboot
Configuration
Utility and
Reboot



View Controller View LSI SAS3008IT properties.

Properties
Change Change LSI SAS3008IT properties.

Controller
Properties
7.7.1.1 View Controller Properties

This screen shows the LSI SAS3008IT properties.

Screen Description
Figure 7-20 Controller Properties
Table 7-9 Property description

Property Description
Chip Name Name of the RAID controller card.



Count card.

Version

NVData Version
7.7.1.2 Change Controller Properties
Screen Introduction

Figure 7-21 Change Controller Properties

Figure 7-22 shows the Physical Disk Management screen. Table 7-10 describes

Figure 7-22 Physical Disk Management

View Physical Disk Views drive properties.

Properties

Disk Operations
7.7.2.1 View Physical Disk Properties


Figure 7-23 View Physical Disk Properties

Disk

Setting

of Disk
Unit Serial Unit serial number (VPD) of the physical drive.

Number(VPD)


Vendor

RPM

Transfer Speed
7.7.2.2 Select Physical Disk Operations

Figure 7-24 Select Physical Disk Operations
Locating a Drive
----End


restarting servers.

Step 2 Click Management Software and Tools.
OSs.
----End
Installing SAS3IRCU
Readme file in the software package.
● Installing SAS3IRCU in Windows
c. Run a command to go to the directory where the SAS3IRCU tool package
resides.
● Installing SAS3IRCU in Linux
● Installing SAS3IRCU in VMware
NOTE
When installing SAS3IRCU in the VMware OS, you must use the Huawei-issued RAID
card driver instead of the RAID card driver of the OS.
a. Use a file transfer tool (such as PuTTY) to upload the SAS3IRCU package
applicable to VMware to the /temp directory on the server OS.

b. In VMware, run the esxcli software vib install -v=/temp/vmware-xxx-

sas3ircu.vib command to install SAS3IRCU. In the command, /temp/
vmware-xxx-sas3ircu.vib indicates the full path of the SAS3IRCU tool
file.
NOTE
The SAS3IRCU installation directory is /opt/lsi/bin. You need to access the

Function
Format
sas3ircu list
Parameters
None.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
----- ------------ ------ ------ ----------------- ------ ------
0 SAS3008 1000h 97h 00h:01h:00h:00h 1000h 3090h
7.8.2.2 Viewing RAID Controller Card and Physical Drive Information
Function
View detailed information about RAID controller cards and physical drives.
Format

Parameters

card.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Example
# View detailed information about RAID controller cards and physical drives.
You can run the display command to see the information. In the following
example, two drives are set as the primary and alternate boot devices respectively.

Function
Format
Parameters

card.
action Operation to be ● setonline

performed. ● setoffline

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot number of the drive. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)
7.8.2.4 Turning On a Drive UID Indicator
Function

Format
Parameters

card.

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot number of the drive. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
Version 13.00.00.00 (2016.03.08)

8 LSI SAS3108
About This Chapter

8.1 Overview
8.2 Functions
8.7 Troubleshooting
8.1 Overview
The LSI SAS3108 controller card is a 12 Gbit/s SAS controller with the MegaRAID
architecture. Equipped with PCIe 3.0 x8 ports and a powerful I/O storage engine,
the controller card handles data protection, verification, and restoration.
The LSI SAS3108 supports boot and configuration in legacy and UEFI modes.

less than 1 ms.
NOTE
● The supercapacitor connected to the RAID controller card implements power-off

protection of cache data. For details about the supercapacitor, see the server user guide.
● The supercapacitor must be used with a trans flash module (TFM). Table 8-1 describes
the indicators on the TFM.
The LSI SAS3108 has two structures to provide ease of connection in different
servers:
● LSI SAS3108 for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server
connects to the drive backplane by using two mini-SAS cables, as shown in
Figure 8-1.
● LSI SAS3108 for a blade, G560, or X6000 V2 server
Figure 8-1 LSI SAS3108 for a rack, X8000, X6800 or X6000 V3 server

Figure 8-2 LSI SAS3108 for a blade, G560 or X6000 V2 server
1 TFM status indicator 2 TFM fault indicator
3 TFM power indicator 4 TFM (for supercapacitor)
5 Supercapacitor port 6 Supercapacitor
7 XCede connectors 8 RAID controller card
9 Mini-SAS (port A, SFF-8643) 10 Mini-SAS (port B, SFF-8643)
Table 8-1 TFM indicators

Indicators Color Description
TFM power Green ● On: The supercapacitor is

indicator activated and powering the cache.
● Off: The supercapacitor does not
provide power.
TFM status Blue ● On: Data is being read from or

indicator written to the cache.
● Off: No read/write operation is
executed on the cache.
TFM fault indicator Orange ● On: The supercapacitor is faulty.

● Off: The supercapacitor is working
properly.

Indicators
The LSI SAS3108 screw-in RAID controller card is classified into two types, as
shown in Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-3 LSI SAS3108 screw-in RAID controller card (1)
Table 8-2 Indicator description (1)

n Suggestio
ns

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.


n Suggestio
ns

signal of the RAID
the RAID controller
controller card.
card is
normal.
Off: The
heartbeat
signal of
the RAID
controller
card is
abnormal.

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.


n Suggestio
ns

card the RAID
abnormal. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card
firmware is
normal.

Pending cache of
indicator the RAID
controller
card has
data.
Off: The
cache of
the RAID
controller
card has
no data.

Figure 8-4 LSI SAS3108 screw-in RAID controller card (2)
Table 8-3 Indicator description (2)

SN Location Indicators Color Descriptio Handling
n Suggestio
n

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.


n Suggestio
n

signal of the RAID
the RAID controller
controller card.
card is
normal.
Off: The
heartbeat
signal of
the RAID
controller
card is
abnormal.

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.

generated the RAID
on the controller
RAID card.
controller
card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.


n Suggestio
n

card the RAID
abnormal. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card
firmware is
normal.

Pending cache of
indicator the RAID
controller
card has
data.
Off: The
cache of
the RAID
controller
card has
no data.
8.2 Functions
8.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60

The LSI SAS3108 supports up to:
● 32 or 240 physical drives (The LSI SAS3108 supports two types of RAID keys,
which support 32 and 240 drives respectively).
NOTE
The total number of drives of all RAID arrays is the sum of the hot spare drives, the
idle drives (drives in Unconfigured Good status), and the drives added in RAID arrays.
● 64 virtual drives, specified by Virtual Drive on the Configuration Utility.
● 64 drive groups and 32 or 240 drives for each group, specified by Drive Group
on the Configuration Utility.
● 16 virtual drives (specified by Virtual Drive on the Configuration Utility
screen) for each group (specified by Drive Group on the Configuration
Utility screen)

RAID Level Drives Spans Drives per Maximum

Span Failed Drives
RAID 0 1 to 32 N/A N/A 0
RAID 1 Even numbers Number of

from 2 to 32 spans
RAID 5 3 to 32 1
RAID 6 3 to 32 2

(even (even spans
number) number)

spans
RAID 60 6 to 32/240 2 to 8 RAID 6 3 to 16/32 Twice the

number of
spans
NOTE
● RAID 00 is not supported.

● A RAID array consists of multiple spans. For example, a RAID 50 array consists of two
RAID 5 spans.
● Each span of a RAID 10 or 50 array allows for only one failed drive.
● Each span of a RAID 60 array allows for a maximum of two failed drives.
● The number of drives supported by RAID 10, 50, and 60 varies depending on the
configured key type.
the LSI SAS3108 is RAID.
● The number of drives in RAID 10, 50, and 60 is determined by the number of spans and
the number of drives supported by each span.
8.2.2 Hot Spares

The controller card supports two types of hot spares: hot spare and emergency
spare.
Hot Spare Drives


in any RAID array.
For details, see 8.6.1.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive.
services of a failed member drive only in a specified RAID array.
For details, see 8.6.1.2 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
A hot spare drive must have at least the capacity of a member drive.
NOTE
Emergency Spares
After the emergency spare function is enabled for a RAID that supports
The capacity of the idle drive used to rebuild data must be greater than or equal
to that of a member drive.
Emergency spare involves two scenarios:
● A drive in the Unconfigured Good state replaces a failed member drive.

● A drive in the Unconfigured Good state replaces a member drive in the
prefail state.

flexibility.

NOTE
be identified.
● Before removing and inserting a drive, check the logical status of the drive and the
number of faulty drives allowed by the RAID level.
● If a member drive in a RAID array is manually removed and inserted online, the drive is
identified as a member of an external RAID array. As a result, the drive is considered
faulty. If this fault occurs, set the drive to Unconfigured Good and follow steps provided
in 8.5.5 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration or 8.6.8 Importing or
Clearing a Foreign Configuration to restore the RAID array. You do not need to replace
the drive.
8.2.4 Copyback
If a member drive of a RAID array becomes faulty, a hot spare drive automatically
replaces the failed drive and starts data synchronization. Once the faulty drive has
been replaced with a newly installed data drive, data is copied from the hot spare
drive to the new data drive. Once the data copyback is complete, the hot spare
drive is restored to the hot spare state.
NOTE
● Different types of hot spare copyback have the same performance. During the copyback,
the RAID and drive status changes as follows:
● The RAID array status remains Optimal.
● The status of the hot spare drive changes from Online to Hot Spare.
● The status of the newly added drive changes from Copyback or Copybacking to
Online.
● You can use the command line tool to pause or resume copyback. For details, see
4.11.2.15 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild, Copyback, and Patrolread Functions.
● If the server is restarted during the copyback, the progress is saved.
Striping
thresholds are reached, new access requests will be suspended.

The strip width equals the number of physical drives in a RAID array.
Increasing the strip width can improve the RAID read/write performance. An
increased number of drives indicates more strips for concurrent read/write
operations. Under the same circumstances, a RAID array consisting of eight 18
GB drives provides better transmission performance than a RAID array
consisting of four 36 GB drives.
Stripes
strip size. The data written to the drives is also sliced based on the strip size.
Options include 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1 MB. The default value is
256 KB.
8.2.6 RAID Level Migration

LSI SAS3108 supports RAID level migration, which allows RAID configuration to be
changed without affecting data integrity. For details, see 8.6.4 Migrating the
RAID Level.
LSI SAS3108 supports the following RAID level migration options:

migration.
Table 8-5 Minimum numbers of drives to be added for RAID level migration

RAID 0 -> RAID 1 1 to 32 Even numbers from

2 to 32
RAID 0 -> RAID 5 1 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 0 -> RAID 6 1 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 1 -> RAID 0 Even numbers from 2 to 2~32

32

32

32


RAID 5 -> RAID 0 3 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 5 -> RAID 6 3 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 6 -> RAID 0 3 to 32 3 to 32
RAID 6 -> RAID 5 3 to 32 3 to 32

After creating a virtual drive (VD), you must initialize it so that it can be used by
an operating system. After a VD with the redundancy function is initialized, the
data relationships between the member drives of the VD meet the corresponding
RAID level requirements. The LSI SAS3108 provides the following VD initialization
modes:
● Fast initialization: This is a foreground initialization mode. In fast initialization,

the firmware writes zeros to the first 100 MB space of the virtual drive. The
virtual drive changes to the Optimal state after initialization.
● Slow initialization: This is a foreground initialization mode. To initialize a VD
in this mode, the firmware needs to write zeros to the entire VD. During the
initialization, the VD status is Optimal.
● Background initialization: ensures that the number of member drives in a VD
meets the requirements of the related RAID level.
– For RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 50, and RAID 60: Background initialization reads
data on all member drives and performs parity check. If the calculation
result is inconsistent with the data on the parity drive, the newly
generated data will overwrite the original data on the parity drive.
NOTE
Generally, consistency checks and background initialization affect system performance.

Both consistency checks and background initialization implement a function similar to
parity error correction. During a consistency check, the system records the areas with data
inconsistency and can resolve the inconsistency, but background initialization does not
provide this function. Besides, a consistency check can be started manually, but background
initialization can only be started automatically.
The two types of initialization are:

● Drive initialization: Writes zeros to the first 100 MB.

● Drive erasure: Writes zeros to the entire space.
NOTE
SATA SSD initialization and erasure cannot be stopped.

The LSI SAS3108 supports two capacity expansion modes:

– In Legacy mode, the LSI SAS3108 supports only CLI-based drive addition.
– In EFI/UEFI mode, the LSI SAS3108 supports HII- and CLI-based drive
addition. For details about HII-based drive addition, see 8.6.3 Adding a
Drive to a RAID Array.
– For details about CLI-based drive addition, see 8.11.2.21 Adding Drives
to a RAID Array or Migrating RAID Level After Expansion.
drives in the RAID array is not fully utilized. The Legacy and EFI/UEFI modes
support screen- and CLI-based capacity expansion.
– For details about CU-based capacity expansion in Legacy mode, see 8.5.2
Expanding the Available Space of a Virtual Drive.
– For details about HII-based capacity expansion in EFI/UEFI mode, see
8.6.2 Expanding the Available Space of a Virtual Drive.
– For details about CLI-based capacity expansion, see 8.11.2.20 Increasing
Member Drive Available Space to Expand RAID.
NOTE
● Only RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 6 support capacity expansion through drive
addition.
● If a RAID array contains two or more VDs, its capacity cannot be expanded through
drive addition.
● During capacity expansion, you need to add two drives to RAID 1 each time, and only
one drive to RAID 0, RAID 5, or RAID 6 each time.
● When the available capacity of a drive group is increased by replacing a member drive
and the capacity to be expanded exceeds the original available capacity of the drive
group, use the CLI to expand the capacity. For details, see 8.11.2.20 Increasing Member
Drive Available Space to Expand RAID.
8.2.9 Secure Data Erasure

Secure data erasure is to permanently delete data from a drive so that the data
cannot be restored. The three levels of secure erasure are:
● Simple: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for only one round.
● Normal: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for three rounds.
● Thorough: erases data on a virtual or physical drive for nine rounds.
A virtual or drive cannot be accessed by any host during the process.

The LSI SAS3108 supports secure data erasure of physical and virtual drives.
8.2.10 Write Hole Protection

When a system failure (such as a power failure) causes incomplete write (not
write failures), some stripes, and even some parity data of stripes, enter the
uncertainty state. Writing data into these stripes will encounter errors. This
phenomenon is called write hole.
Storing write failure data in the power failure protection zone and rewriting the
data when appropriate can solve the write hole problem. The main protection
scenarios are as follows:
● Write hole protection is only supported for RAID 5, 6, and 50. Write hole data
is stored and write hole protection is automatic.
– Available power failure protection device: write hole data is recovered on
restart.
– Unavailable power failure protection device: write hole data is lost on
restart.
● When a drive of RAID 6 goes offline, write hole protection is supported.
● When RAID 50 is partially degraded, write hole protection is supported and
data will be restored by span. When RAID 50 is fully degraded, write hole
protection is not supported.

To improve the data read/write performance, the following policies are supported:
● Read Ahead or Ahead: The LSI SAS3108 caches the data that follows the
data being read for faster access. This policy reduces drive seeks and shortens
read time.
NOTE
To achieve optimal drive performance, set the policy to Read Ahead or Ahead for
HDDs and No Read Ahead or Normal for SSDs.
● Write Back: After the cache receives host data, the LSI SAS3108 signals the
Data is directly written to the cache. The LSI SAS3108 updates data to drives
only after the cache data is accumulated to a specified extent. This enables
data writing in batches. In addition, the cache increases the overall data write

Working Principle
Since writing to high-speed cache is faster than to drives, enabling cache greatly
improves write performance.

To prevent this, configure a supercapacitor for LSI SAS3108.
If a power failure occurs, the supercapacitor supplies power and cache data is
written to the NAND flash of the supercapacitor protection module.
Supercapacitor Power Calibration

Data protection requires supercapacitors. The automatic power calibration mode is
enabled by default for RAID controller cards to record supercapacitor discharge
curves to monitor supercapacitor status, such as maximum and minimum
voltages, and extend supercapacitor lifespans.
RAID controller cards calibrate power in the following process to ensure power
stability:
1. RAID controller cards charge supercapacitors with maximum power.

2. The calibration process automatically starts and fully discharges the
supercapacitors.
3. RAID controller cards charge the supercapacitors again to their maximum
power.
During the calibration process, the write policy of the controller card is
automatically changed to WT to ensure data integrity, and the controller card
performance decreases accordingly. The power calibration duration depends on
the supercapacitor discharge speed.
8.2.13 CacheCade
Of all RAID controller cards that use the LSI SAS3108 chip, only SR530C and
SR530C-M support CacheCade Pro 2.0.
You can use SSDs to create a RAID array dedicated for CacheCade and function as
level-2 cache to provide better I/O performance for the existing RAID array.
8.2.14 Patrol Read

Patrol read is performed to protect data integrity by detecting and rectifying
physical drive failures before the failures damage data. In drive patrol read,
potential problems of configured physical drives are detected and resolved.
The system allocates resources for patrol read based on the I/O workload. For
example, if the I/O workload is high, the system allocates fewer resources for
patrol read to ensure higher priority of I/O operations.
Patrol read cannot be performed on a drive that has any of the following
operations in progress:
● RAID hot spare drive recovery

● Dynamic drive expansion
● Full or background initialization
● Consistency check

8.2.15 Automatic SMART Scanning

The self-monitoring, analysis and reporting technology (SMART) tool monitors
drive parts such as the head units, motor driver system, internal circuit, and drive
media. When potential problems are detected, the controller card reports alarms
to users promptly to help avoid data loss.
The controller card supports periodic SMART scanning of managed drives. Set the
interval period, which is 300 seconds by default. Detected SMART errors are
logged.

Enabling this feature puts drives in the Unconfigured Good state and idle hot
spare drives into the power saving state. Operations, such as RAID array creation,
hot spare drive creation, dynamic capacity expansion, and rebuild, will wake the
drives from power saving.

The LSI SAS3108 enables user commands to be directly transmitted to connected
drives, facilitating drive access and control by upper-layer services or management
software. For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted to the LSI
SAS3108 RAID controller card. If a RAID controller card does not support the
passthrough feature, you can install the OS only on the virtual drives configured
under the RAID controller card.
The LSI SAS3108 supports virtual and pass-through drives. Before using pass-
through drives, enable the JBOD mode. To disable pass-through drives, disable the
JBOD mode.
● For details about how to set the JBOD mode in Legacy mode, see
Configuring JBOD Mode.
● For details about how to set the JBOD mode in EFI/UEFI mode, see
Configuring JBOD Mode.

NOTE
● The JBOD mode can be enabled only when the LSI SAS3108 firmware version is
4.650.00-6121 or later. To use drives in JBOD mode, you must install a corresponding
RAID controller card driver.
● After the JBOD mode is enabled for the LSI SAS3108, the status of the physical drives
that have been configured as virtual drives remains unchanged, and the status of other
unconfigured physical drives become pass-through drives (in JBOD state). If you need to
configure a pass-through drive as a virtual drive, set the drive status to Unconfigured
good.
● If a drive in JBOD mode is in UBAD status, the Fault indicator on the drive will be lit and
the iBMC will generate an alarm.
8.2.18 Drive Roaming

Drive roaming refers to migrating physical drives within a controller. After drive
roaming, the RAID controller card can automatically identify the relocated physical
drives and logically place the relocated physical drives to virtual drives that belong
to the same drive group. Drive roaming can be implemented only when the server
system is shut down.
To implement drive roaming, perform the following operations:
1. Shut down the OS.

2. Power off the server.
3. Insert a physical drive into its new position in the backplane.
4. Perform a security check to ensure that the physical drive is properly inserted.
5. Power on the server.
6. Check that the RAID controller card can detect the RAID configuration from
the physical drive configuration.
8.2.19 Importing a Foreign Configuration

When a RAID configuration in a physical drive is detected, the RAID controller card
marks the physical drive as Foreign, indicating that the drive is a foreign drive.
Import the foreign configuration to the current controller for the configuration to
take effect. This import process is also called configuration migration.
8.2.20 Maintaining Drive Failure History

The LSI SAS3108 records drive faults.
● If this function is enabled, the server management software will receive an

alarm upon a RAID degrade or drive fault. In addition, a new drive with
foreign RAID configuration will be displayed as "Unconfigured Bad". You can
delete or import the foreign RAID configuration as required.
● If this function is disabled, the server management software does not receive
alarms upon a RAID degrade or drive fault. In addition, a new drive with
foreign RAID configuration is displayed as "Unconfigured Good". The RAID
controller processes the drive (for example, performs data rebuild or
copyback) based on the RAID array configuration. Data on the new drive may
be overwritten.

This function also affects the drive fault indicator status.

● If the function is enabled, the fault indicator will be on when a drive is faulty.
● If the function is disabled, the fault indicator remains off even if a drive is
faulty.
This function is enabled for the LSI SAS3108 by default. You can change the
settings on the Advanced Controller Properties screen.

The SAS3108 BIOS Configuration Utility is a tool for configuring and managing
the LSI SAS3108 controller card. The Configuration Utility is embedded in the
performed on the Configuration Utility, which is only accessible during server
restart. To monitor controller card status and obtain configuration information
when the system is running, use the StorCLI tool.

Procedure
During server startup, press Ctrl+R when the message "Press <Ctrl><R> to Run
MegaRAID Configuration Utility" is displayed.
The SAS3108 BIOS Configuration Utility screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-6. Table 8-6 describes the tabs.

Table 8-6 Tab description

Tab Description
VD Mgmt Manages virtual drives.
PD Mgmt Manages physical drives.
Ctrl Mgmt Manages the RAID controller card.
Properties Queries the RAID controller card properties.
Foreign View Manages foreign configurations. This menu is available only

when foreign configurations are detected.
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
● Data will be cleared from the drives added to a RAID array. Before creating an
array, check that the drives to be added have no data or that the data does not
need to be retained.
different vendors.
● 8.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 lists the number of drives required by each
RAID level.
Workflow

Procedure

1. Press Ctrl+P or Ctrl+N to switch to the VD Mgmt tab.
2. Use ↑ and ↓ to select SAS3108 (Bus 0x01, Dev 0x00), and press F2.
3. On the screen displayed, select Create Virtual Drive and press Enter.
Figure 8-7 Creating a RAID 0
Press Enter in the RAID Level area, and use ↑ or ↓ to set the RAID level RAID-0.
The default RAID level is RAID 0.
Step 4 Set the number of drives for each RAID span.

NOTE
● This step is optional for RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 6.

● This step is mandatory for RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60.
1. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the PD per Span list.

2. Set the number of drives for each RAID span.
Step 5 Add drives.

1. Select Drives by using ↓.
2. Press ↑ and ↓ to select a drive to be added and press Enter, as shown in
Figure 8-8.

NOTE
– [X] is displayed in the ID column for a selected drive.

Step 6 Set the RAID capacity and name.

1. Enter the virtual drive capacity in Size.
NOTE
– If multiple virtual drives are not required, go to Step 8 after setting the virtual
drive name. The RAID capacity is set to the maximum value by default.
– If the drive group needs to be divided into multiple virtual drives, manually set the
virtual drive capacity. For details, see Step 6 to Step 7. Each drive group supports a
maximum of 16 virtual drives.
2. Use ↓ to select Name, enter the RAID name, and select OK.
A message is displayed asking you whether to set the RAID name.
The VD Mgmt screen is displayed.
1. After creating a drive group, choose Drive Group in the VD Mgmt screen and
press F2, and select Add New VD.
The Add VD in Drive Group screen is displayed.
2. Enter the virtual drive capacity in Size, select OK, and press Enter.
A confirmation message is displayed.
The VD Mgmt screen is displayed. Virtual drives are created.
Step 8 Set advanced properties.
1. In the main menu displayed in Figure 8-8, Select Advanced by using ↓, and
press Enter.

The screen for setting advanced RAID properties is displayed, as shown in

Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Setting advanced properties
Table 8-7 describes the parameters of advanced properties.


Options include 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and
1 MB. The default value is 256 KB.

– Normal: disables the Read Ahead function.
– Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The
controller card prefetches sequential data or data
to be used and stores it in the cache.
NOTE
To achieve optimal drive performance, set the policy to
Ahead for HDDs and Normal for SSDs.

Write Policy Options for writing data on a virtual drive. The write
policy of virtual drives varies with the firmware
version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card.
– If the firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID
controller card is 4.270.00-4382 or earlier, the
following write policies are supported:
▪ Write Back: When the cache receives all data,

the RAID controller card signals the host that

receives all data, the RAID controller card
signals the host that the data transmission is
complete.
▪ Write Back with BBU: The controller card

automatically switches to the Write Through
mode when the controller card has no Battery
Backup Unit (BBU), the BBU is on charge or
discharge, the BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/
Preserved cache reaches 50% of the physical
cache. It is recommended that you set the
write policy to this mode.
controller card is 4.650.00-6121 or later, the
▪ Write Back: The controller card automatically

switches to the Write Through mode when the
controller card has no Battery Backup Unit
(BBU), the BBU is on charge or discharge, the
BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache
reaches 50% of the physical cache. It is
recommended that you set the write policy to
this mode.

complete.
▪ Always Write Back: When the cache receives

all data, the RAID controller card signals the
NOTE
The Always Write Back mode is not recommended
because DDR write data of the RAID controller card will be
lost if the server is powered off and the supercapacitor is
not installed or being charged.

I/O Policy Options for data I/O of special virtual drives. This
policy does not affect cache prefetch. The options
are as follows:
– Direct:

drives. (If Read Policy is set to Ahead, data is
read from the RAID cache.)
▪ In a write scenario, data is written into the

RAID cache. (If Write Policy is set to Write
Through, data is directly written into drives.)
– Cached: Data is read from or written to the
cache. Use this option only when configuring
CacheCade 1.1.
Disk cache Policy Cache policy of physical drives (valid only for drives
with cache).
– Enable: Data is cached on drives to improve
write performance. However, if no protection
mechanism is available when the system is
powered off unexpectedly, data in the cache will
be lost.
– Disable: Data is not cached on drives during a
write process. Data will not be lost when the
system is powered off unexpectedly.
– Unchanged: The current drive cache policy
remains unchanged.
Emulation Sets the virtual sector size.

NOTE
This parameter is supported only when the firmware
version of the LSI SAS3108 is 4.660.00-8102 or later.
Initialize After Initialize is selected, initialization is performed

quickly and automatically after the RAID array is
created. The initialization will damage data stored
on RAID member drives.
[X] is displayed in front of the selected drive.
Configure HotSpare Configures hot spare drives for a RAID array.

This parameter is invalid for RAID 0 arrays.

Disable BGI Disables the BGI function.

NOTE
– This parameter is supported only when the firmware
– If this parameter is selected, the BGI function is
disabled. If this parameter is not selected, the
background automatically initializes the virtual drive.
– This parameter is deselected by default.
2. Set advanced RAID properties as required.
NOTICE
Initialization will damage data on drives. If the original data on the drives
needs to be retained, do not select Initialize on the screen shown in Figure
8-9.

The Create New VD screen is displayed.
If Initialize is selected, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when the
initialization is complete. Press Enter to return to the main screen.
On the Configuration Utility main screen, press → to query configuration details.
Figure 8-10 Configuration details

1. Press Esc.


The Configuration Utility main screen is closed, and the system prompts you
to restart the system.
----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure

Figure 8-11 Creating RAID 1

1. Press Enter in the RAID Level area, and use ↑ or ↓ to set the RAID level
RAID-1.
NOTE
This step is optional for RAID 0, 1, 5, and 6, but mandatory for RAID 10, 50, and 60.

Step 5 Add drives.
Figure 8-12.
NOTE



NOTE
press Enter.
Figure 8-13.


Item Description

Read Policy Read policy of the virtual drive.

RAID controller card prefetches sequential data
or the data predicted to be used and saves it in
the cache.
The default value is Ahead.
NOTE

Item Description
Write Policy Write policy of the virtual drive. The write policy of
virtual drives varies with the firmware version of the


complete.
▪ Write Back with BBU (recommended): The

RAID controller card automatically switches to
the Write Through mode when there is no
Battery Backup Unit (BBU), the BBU is on
charge or discharge, the BBU is faulty, or the
Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50% of the
physical cache.
following three write policies are supported:
▪ Write Back (recommended): The RAID

controller card automatically switches to the
Write Through mode when there is no Battery
cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
I/O Policy Data I/O of special virtual drives. This policy does
– Direct:

read from the cache of the RAID controller
card.)

cache of the RAID controller card. (If Write
Policy is set to Write Through, data is directly
written into drives.)
cache of the RAID controller card. Select this
value only when CacheCade 1.1 is configured.
The default value is Direct.
with cache).
be lost.
The default value is Unchanged.

The default value is Default.
NOTE
Initialize Performs initialization once the RAID array is



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
Initialization will damage data on hard disks. If the original data on the drives
8-13.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure


RAID-5.
NOTE

Step 5 Add drives.
Figure 8-16.
NOTE



NOTE


press Enter.
Figure 8-17.


Item Description


the cache.
NOTE

Item Description


complete.

physical cache.

cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
– Direct:

card.)

with cache).
be lost.

NOTE



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
8-17.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure


RAID-6.
NOTE

Step 5 Add drives.
Figure 8-20.
NOTE



NOTE


press Enter.
Figure 8-21.


Item Description


the cache.
NOTE

Item Description


complete.

physical cache.

cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
– Direct:

card.)

with cache).
be lost.

NOTE



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
8-21.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure


RAID-10.
NOTE

NOTE
RAID 10 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports an even number of drives, for
example, 2, 4, 6...16 or 32. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
Step 5 Add drives.

Figure 8-24.
NOTE



NOTE


press Enter.
Figure 8-25.


Item Description


the cache.
NOTE

Item Description


complete.

physical cache.

cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
– Direct:

card.)

with cache).
be lost.

NOTE



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
8-25.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure


RAID-50.
NOTE

NOTE
RAID 50 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports 3 to 16 or 32 drives. The maximum

number of drives supported by each span varies depending on the RAID key
specifications. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
Step 5 Add drives.

Figure 8-28.
NOTE



NOTE


press Enter.
Figure 8-29.


Item Description


the cache.
NOTE

Item Description


complete.

physical cache.

cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
– Direct:

card.)

with cache).
be lost.

NOTE



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
8-29.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Workflow
Procedure


RAID-60.
NOTE
● This step is optional for RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 6.

● This step is mandatory for RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60.

NOTE
RAID 60 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports 3 to 16 or 32 drives. The maximum

number of drives supported by each span varies depending on the RAID key
specifications. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
Step 5 Add drives.

Figure 8-32.
NOTE



NOTE


press Enter.
Figure 8-33.


Item Description


the cache.
NOTE

Item Description


complete.

physical cache.

cache.

complete.

NOTE

Item Description
– Direct:

card.)

with cache).
be lost.

NOTE



Item Description

NOTE
NOTICE
8-33.


1. Press Esc.


----End

Scenarios
If there are two or more RAID arrays or drives that can be used for boot, you need
to configure the RAID array or drive for installing the OS as the boot device.
In Legacy mode, do not configure more than 25 boot devices for the LSI SAS3108.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the Configuration Utility screen. Press Ctrl+N to switch to the Ctrl Mgmt
tab.
Step 2 Select boot devices and press Enter.
Virtual and independent drives that can be configured as boot devices are listed
here, as shown in Figure 8-35.
Step 3 Select boot devices, and press Enter.

Step 4 Select APPLY and press Enter.
----End
Related Operations
device on the BIOS.

Reference.
Reference.

This section describes how to perform initial configuration if Boot Type is set to
EFI Boot Type on the BIOS.
after you restart the server. To monitor controller card status and obtain
configuration information when the system is running, use the StorCLI tool.

Procedure

Step 3 Select the LSI SAS3108 and press Enter.

The main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-36. Table 8-14 describes the
Figure 8-36 LSI SAS3108 main screen
Main Menu Specifies the main menu of the RAID controller card.
All operations on the RAID controller card are
available.
Help Contains help information.
Status Specifies the status of the RAID controller card.
Backplane Specifies the number of backplanes.
BBU Specifies the installation status of the supercapacitor.
Enclosure Specifies the number of drive backplanes.
Drives Specifies the number of mounted drives.
Drive Groups Specifies the number of drive groups.
Virtual Drives Specifies the number of virtual drives.
View Server Profile Displays and manages RAID controller card properties.
View Foreign Displays and manages a foreign configuration.

Configuration

Configure Deletes a configuration.
Set Factory Defaults Restores factory settings.
Update Firmware Upgrades firmware.
Silence Alarm Specifies the status of the onboard buzzer.

The controller card is not configured with a buzzer.
Virtual Drive Specifies whether any virtual drive operation is being

Operations in Progress performed in the background.
Drive Operations in Specifies whether any physical drive operation is being

Progress performed in the background.
MegaRAID xxx Specifies the status of advanced properties.
Manage MegaRAID Manages advanced properties.

Advanced Software
Options
----End
Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure
Management Screen.
Step 2 Access the Create Virtual Drive screen.





Drive
Select Drives Source of member drives of the virtual drive:

From Member drive sources are as follows:

Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE

policy of virtual drives varies with the firmware version
of the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card.
▪ Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the



cache. It is recommended that you set the write
policy to this mode.

controller card has no Battery Backup Unit (BBU),
the BBU is on charge or discharge, the BBU is
faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50%
of the physical cache. It is recommended that you
set the write policy to this mode.


Default value: Write Back
NOTE
server is powered off and the supercapacitor is not installed or
being charged.

– Direct:

is read from the RAID cache.)

1.1.
Default value: Direct:
Access Policy Virtual drive access policy.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization


Emulation Type Sets the logical drive sector size reported to the OS.

Configuration

2. Select a RAID level RAID 0 and press Enter.


Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE
– The drive status changes to [X].

8. Click OK.
4. Click OK.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure



Drive


Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration



Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE

– A RAID 1 array supports an even number of drives, ranging from 2 to 32.
8. Click OK.
4. Click OK.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure
2. Choose Configuration Management and press Enter.



Drive


Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration



Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE

8. Click OK.
4. Click OK.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure



Drive


Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration



Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE

8. Click OK.
4. Click OK.


----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure
Management Screen.



Drive


Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration




Type

Interface Type

Size


NOTE

– RAID 10 supports 2 to 8 spans. Each span supports an even number of drives, for
example, 2, 4, 6...16 or 32. The number of drives in each span must be the same.
– A RAID 10 array supports an even number of drives, for example, 4, 6...32 or 240.
6. Press Enter.
Configure multiple spans for RAID 10. Figure 8-47 shows the configuration screen.



NOTE
created.

4. Click OK.
----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.

Procedure


Drive



Name

Unit

follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration




Type

Interface Type

Size


NOTE

specifications).
6. Press Enter.



NOTE
created.

4. Click OK.
----End


Scenarios
NOTICE
different vendors.
RAID level.
Procedure



Drive


Name

Unit


follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration




Type

Interface Type

Size


NOTE

specifications).
6. Press Enter.



NOTE
created.

4. Click OK.
----End
8.4.9 Configuring Boot Options

chips, set the drive boot options for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.


in any RAID array.
● Dedicated hot spare drive: replaces a failed drive of the same type as the hot
spare drive only in a specified RAID array, which can be configured with one
or more dedicated hot spare drives. The hot spare drive automatically takes
over services of a failed member drive only in a specified RAID array.
NOTE
Procedure
1. Press Ctrl+N to switch to the PD Mgmt tab.
2. Select the drive to be configured.
3. Press F2 and choose Make Global HS from the shortcut menu.

Figure 8-54 Configuring a global hot spare drive
4. Press Enter.
The hot spare drive status changes to Hotspare.

1. Press Ctrl+P to switch to the VD Mgmt tab.
2. On the VD Mgmt tab, view details about the global hot spare drive, as shown
in Figure 8-56.

Figure 8-56 Details about the global hot spare drive
----End
Procedure
NOTE
1. On the VD Mgmt tab, select a RAID.
2. Press F2 and select Manage Ded. HS from the shortcut menu that is
displayed. See Figure 8-57.

Figure 8-57 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive
3. Press Enter.
The screen for configuring the dedicated hot spare drive is displayed.
4. Select a hot spare drive and press Enter.
[X] is displayed on the left of the selected hot spare drive, as shown in Figure
8-58.
Figure 8-58 Selecting a hot spare drive

On the VD Mgmt tab, view details about the dedicated hot spare drive, as shown
in Figure 8-59.

Figure 8-59 Details about the dedicated hot spare drive
----End
Scenarios
Procedure
1. On the PD Mgmt tab, choose the hot spare drive to be deleted.
2. Press F2 and choose Remove Hot Spare drive from the shortcut menu, as
Figure 8-60 Deleting a hot spare drive

3. Press Enter.
The drive status changes to UG as shown in Figure 8-61.
----End

Scenarios
If a virtual drive does not occupy the entire capacity of all its member drives, you
can expand the virtual drive capacity by adjusting the available virtual drive space.
Procedure
Step 2 Expand the available space of a virtual drive.
1. On the VD Mgmt tab, select the virtual drive to be expanded.
2. Press F2 and choose Expand VD Size from the shortcut menu.

Figure 8-62 Expanding a virtual drive
3. On the screen displayed, set the percentage of available capacity.

The expansion percentage is the percentage of the remaining capacity.
Figure 8-63 Setting the percentage of available capacity
4. Select Resize and press Enter.

On the VD Mgmt tab, view the configuration result.

----End
Procedure

1. On the VD Mgmt tab, select the virtual drive to be deleted.
The VD Mgmt tab displays all existing virtual drives.
2. Press F2.
A shortcut menu is displayed, listing operations that can be performed on the
selected virtual drive.
Figure 8-65 Available operations on a virtual drive

3. Choose Delete VD and press Enter.

4. Select YES and press Enter.
Step 3 Check the operation result.
Check the operation result on the displayed screen shown in Figure 8-65.
----End

Scenarios
Check whether the current RAID controller card meets the actual requirements by
viewing RAID controller card properties.
Procedure
Step 2 Press Ctrl+P to switch to the Properties tab.
Step 3 View RAID controller card properties.
Figure 8-66 and Figure 8-67 show RAID controller card properties. Table 8-29
describes key parameters.
Figure 8-66 RAID controller card properties (1)

Figure 8-67 RAID controller card properties (2)
Table 8-29 Properties key parameters
Controller Status Overall status of a controller. If the status is not

Optimal, certain components may be faulty.
Battery Status Status of the supercapacitor protection module.
Emergency Spare Emergency spare setting.
Emergency For Emergency spare settings for self-monitoring, analysis

SMARTer and reporting technology (SMART) errors.
Power Saving on Energy saving policy for an unconfigured drive or hot

Unconfigured spare drive.
Drives/Hot Spare
Drive Standby Time Standby time of the energy saving policy.
CacheCade - SSD CacheCade status.

Caching NOTE
This parameter is supported only when the firmware version
of the LSI SAS3108 is 4.660.00-8102 or later.
Write Cache capable Write cache status.

NOTE
Total Cache Size Cache size.

NOTE
● Total Cache Size indicates the RAID array capacity of the
CacheCade. This parameter is available only when the
RAID controller card is configured with the CacheCade
Key.
● This parameter is supported only when the firmware

Maximum Cache Size Maximum cache size.

NOTE
● Maximum Cache Size indicates the maximum RAID array
capacity of the CacheCade supported by the RAID
controller card. This parameter is available only when the
RAID controller card is configured with the CacheCade
Key.[L(j1]
Copyback SSD on Option to copy back backup data if a SMART error

Smart Error occurs on the SSD.
Memory Size Capacity of the controller-integrated DDR DIMMs.
----End

Scenarios
NOTICE
on the server, the RAID configuration will be considered as Foreign Config. If
Procedure
Step 2 View foreign configurations.
Press Ctrl+P to switch to the Foreign View tab.
NOTE
If foreign configurations exist, the Foreign View tab is displayed on the Configuration
Utility, as shown in Figure 8-68.

Step 3 Import or clear foreign configurations.

1. Select a RAID controller card and press F2.
Figure 8-69 Available operations
2. Choose Import or Clear as required, and press Enter.

3. On the VD Mgmt tab, view the operation result.
----End
8.5.6 Discarding Preserved Cache

Procedure
Step 2 On the VD Mgmt screen, select the RAID controller card whose preserved cache is
to be discarded and press F2.

Figure 8-70 Discarding preserved cache
Step 3 Select Manage Preserved Cache and press Enter.
The Manage Preserved Cache screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-71.
Figure 8-71 Manage Preserved Cache
Step 4 Select DISCARD CACHE and press Enter.
Step 5 Select YES and press Enter.
No further operation is required.
----End

8.5.7 Managing CacheCade

A special RAID key enables CacheCade to expand the read caching capacity and
introduce write caching. Use SSDs to create a CacheCade-dedicated RAID array to
function as level-2 cache and provide better I/O performance for the existing RAID
array.
8.5.7.1 Creating a CacheCade Virtual Drive
Scenarios
If a CacheCade RAID key is configured for the LSI SAS3108, you can create a
CacheCade virtual drive on the Configuration Utility. The CacheCade virtual drive
serves as level-2 cache for the existing RAID.
Procedure
Step 2 Check that the RAID key is activated.

1. On the VD Mgmt screen, select SAS3108 and press F2.
2. On the controller operation menu, select Advanced Software Options and
press Enter.
The advanced controller properties screen is displayed. If MegaRAID
CacheCade Pro 2.0 exists and its status is Unlimited, the CacheCade RAID
key has been activated.
Figure 8-72 Advanced Software Options screen
3. Select Cancel to return to the main screen.
Step 3 Check that at least one idle SSD is available.
On the PD Mgmt screen, check that at least one idle SSD is available.

Step 4 Create a CacheCade virtual drive.

1. On the VD Mgmt screen, select SAS3108 and press F2.
2. Select Create CacheCade Virtual Drive and press Enter.
The Create CacheCade Virtual Drive screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-73. Table 8-30 describes the parameters on the screen.
Figure 8-73 Create CacheCade Virtual Drive screen

Name User-defined name of the CacheCade virtual drive.
Size Capacity of the CacheCade virtual drive. This parameter is

determined by the selected SSD.
RAID Level RAID level (RAID 0 or RAID 1) of the CacheCade virtual

drive.
Write Policy Read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual drive. The

default policy is Write Through.
– Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the RAID
controller card signals the host that the data
3. Set the name, RAID level, and read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual drive
based on Table 8-30.
4. Under Select SSD, select the SSDs to be added to the CacheCade virtual drive,
and press Enter.
If [X] is displayed before an SSD, the SSD is selected.


The message "The CacheCade Virtual Drive is successfully" created is
displayed.
----End
8.5.7.2 Enabling SSD Caching for a Common Virtual Drive
Scenarios
You can enable SSD caching for a common virtual drive in any of the following
ways:
● If a CacheCade RAID key is configured, the Configuration Utility asks you

whether to enable SSD Caching during the creation of a common virtual
drive.
● If a CacheCade RAID key is configured, you can modify the common virtual
drive properties to enable SSD caching.
● After a common virtual drive is created, you can enable SSD caching for it on
the Manage SSD Caching screen.
Procedure
Step 2 On the VD Mgmt screen, select SAS3108 and press F2.
Step 3 Select Manage SSD Caching and press Enter.
The Manage SSD Caching screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-74.
The list under Virtual Drives shows the virtual drives for which you can enable
SSD caching.
Figure 8-74 Manage SSD Caching screen

Step 4 Select the desired virtual drive and press Enter.
If [X] is displayed before a virtual drive, the virtual drive is selected.
----End
8.5.7.3 Deleting a CacheCade Virtual Drive
NOTICE
● If the CacheCade has been associated with a virtual drive, remove the
association between the CacheCade and the virtual drive before you delete the
virtual drive. If the CacheCade is not associated with any virtual drive, perform
Step 2.
● To prevent data loss, do not perform offline operations on the drives in the
CacheCade virtual drive.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the association between the CacheCade and the virtual drive.
1. On the VD Mgmt screen, select SAS3108 and press F2. The screen shown in
Figure 8-75 VD Mgmt screen
2. Select Manage SSD Caching and press Enter.

The Manage SSD Caching screen is displayed, showing the virtual drives
associated with the CacheCade, as shown in Figure 8-76.

Figure 8-76 Manage SSD Caching
3. Select the virtual drive and press Enter to clear X, as shown in Figure 8-77.
Figure 8-77 Removing the association between the CacheCade and virtual
drives
NOTE
If multiple virtual drives are associated with the CacheCade, remove the association
between the CacheCade and each virtual drive in the same way.
After the association is removed, the VD Mgmt screen is displayed.
Step 2 Delete the CacheCade virtual drive.

1. On the VD Mgmt screen, select the drive group of the CacheCade virtual
drive to be deleted, and press F2.

Figure 8-78 Deleting a CacheCade virtual drive
2. Select Delete Drive Group and press Enter.

----End
8.5.8 Managing the Security Key
8.5.8.1 Enabling the Encryption Function

Step 1 On the VD Mgmt tab, choose SAS3108 (Bus 0x01, Dev 0x00) and press F2.
Figure 8-79 Operation menu

Step 2 Select Drive Security and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, select Enable
Security and press Enter, as shown in Figure 8-80.
Figure 8-80 Enable Security
Figure 8-81 Create Security Key
Step 3 In Identifier, enter the password name.

Step 4 In Security Key, enter the password.
Step 5 In Confirm, enter the password again for confirmation.
NOTE
● The passwords entered in Step 4 and Step 5 must be the same.

● To display the passwords entered, set Show Key to [X].

A confirm dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-82.

Figure 8-82 Confirm
----End
8.5.8.2 Disabling the Encryption Function

Step 1 On the VD Mgmt tab, select SAS3108 (Bus 0x01,Dev 0x00) and press F2.
Step 2 Select Drive Security and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, select Disable
security and press Enter, See Figure 8-83.
Figure 8-83 Disable security
Information shown in Figure 8-84 is displayed.

Figure 8-84 Confirm
----End
8.5.8.3 Changing the Password

Step 1 On the VD Mgmt tab, select SAS3108 (Bus 0x01, Dev 0x00) and press F2.
Step 2 Select Drive Security and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, select Change
security settings and press Enter, as shown in Figure 8-85.
Figure 8-85 Change security settings

Figure 8-86 Change Security Key
Step 3 In Identifier, enter the new password name, for example, key2.
Step 4 Press the Enter key to set Use the Existing Security Key to [ ].
NOTE
[ ] indicates that this option is disabled.
Step 5 In Security Key, enter the new password.

NOTE
● The passwords entered in Step 5 and Step 6 must be the same.

● To display the passwords entered, set Show Key to [X].
Step 7 Press the Enter key to set Pause For Password to [X].
NOTE
[X] indicates that this option is enabled.
Step 8 In Password, enter the RAID controller card password.

Step 9 In Confirm, enter the password for confirmation.

Figure 8-87 Entering the original password
Step 11 Enter the original password, select OK, and press Enter.
Figure 8-88 Confirm
----End
8.5.8.4 Encrypting a JBOD Disk

Step 1 On the PD Mgmt tab, select the JBOD disk to be encrypted and press F2.

Figure 8-89 Operation menu
Step 2 Select Enable Security On JBOD and press Enter.

Figure 8-90 Confirm
----End
8.5.8.5 Encrypting a RAID Array

Step 1 On the VD Mgmt tab, select the RAID array to be encrypted and press F2, as

Figure 8-91 Selecting the RAID array
Step 2 Select Secure Drive Group and press Enter.

Figure 8-92 Confirm


Figure 8-93 Operation successful
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
8.6.1 Managing Hot Spare Drives

in any RAID array.
● Dedicated hot spare drive: replaces a failed drive of the same type as the hot
spare drive only in a specified RAID array, which can be configured with one
or more dedicated hot spare drives. The hot spare drive automatically takes
over services of a failed member drive only in a specified RAID array.

NOTE
Procedure

2. Select Drive Management, and press Enter.
in Figure 8-94.


1. Set Operation to Assign Global Hot Spare Drive.
----End
Procedure
NOTE
Management Screen.
in Figure 8-95.


1. Set Operation to Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
3. Select the virtual drive to be associated and press Enter.
----End
Scenarios
Procedure
in Figure 8-96.


1. Set Operation to Unassign Hot Spare Drive.
----End

Scenarios
Increase the available space of virtual drives if they do not occupy the entire
capacity of all member drives.
Procedure

Step 3 Expand the virtual drive capacity.

1. Set Operation to Expand Virtual Drive.
The virtual drive capacity expansion screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-98 and Figure 8-99. Table 8-31 describes the parameters on the screen.


Capacity


Capacity

Percentage
of Available
Capacity

Virtual
Drive after
Expansion
3. Set the percentage of available capacity.

----End

Scenarios
methods:
NOTICE
drive addition.
● If a RAID array contains two or more virtual drives, its capacity cannot be
expanded through drive addition.

array fails.

Prerequisites
Conditions
● You have logged in to the Configuration Utility.
Data
Procedure
The Virtual Drive Management screen is displayed.

Step 2 Add a drive.

1. Select the RAID array whose capacity is to be expanded and press Enter.
The Operation screen is displayed.

The Reconfigure Virtual Drives screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-102.

5. Select a RAID level.

NOTE
The RAID level must be the same as the original RAID level.
6. Select Choose the Operation and press Enter.
The drive selection screen is displayed.
NOTE
– The types and specifications of the drive to be added must be the same as those of
the member drives in the RAID array. The capacity of the drive must be greater
than or equal to the capacity of the smallest drive in the RAID array.
– During capacity expansion, you need to add two drives to RAID 1 each time, and
only one drive to RAID 0, RAID 5, or RAID 6 each time.
– A RAID controller card cannot be used to expand the capacity of two or more RAID
arrays at the same time.
7. Select the drive to be added, select Apply Changes, and press Enter.
Step 3 Start operation.



The operations are complete. You can go to the Virtual Drive Management
screen and check the capacity expansion result, as shown in Figure 8-103,
which shows that the capacity expansion is going on.
----End
NOTE
The capacity expansion will be interrupted by a server restart, but it continues after the
server is restarted.
8.6.4 Migrating the RAID Level

Scenarios
RAID level migration is a process of converting one RAID configuration to another.
RAID controller cards support RAID level migration as the data volume and
number of drives increase in the system.
You can perform RAID level migration on the Configuration Utility. Typically, an
array is reconfigured with the same or more storage capacity. You can use the
WebBIOS to migrate RAID levels for existing virtual drives.

If a drive fault occurs during RAID level migration, the following will occur:
(for example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 0 level migration), the RAID
array fails.

example, a faulty drive exists during RAID 1 level migration), the migration
continues. When the migration is complete, replace the faulty drive and
Perform RAID level migration with caution.
Prerequisites
Conditions
The following conditions must be met before you migrate a RAID level:
● The current number of drives meets the requirements of the target RAID level.
The LSI SAS3108 supports the following RAID level migration modes:

● If a DG has two or more RAID arrays, RAID level migration is not supported.
migration.
NOTE
● If a RAID array contains two or more VDs, it does not support RAID level migration.
● The RAID controller card does not allow you to reconfigure two RAID arrays (that is,
reconfigure virtual drives, including adding drives or migrating RAID levels) at the same
time. Perform operations on the next RAID array after the current process is complete.
● Only drives of the same type and specifications as the member drives of the RAID array
can be added.
● To avoid data loss, back up data in the current RAID array before RAID level migration.
● Only RAID arrays in the Optimal state can be migrated.
● When migrating a RAID level, ensure that the RAID capacity after the migration is
greater than or equal to that before the migration. For example, to migrate RAID 0 to
RAID 1, you need to add drives. Otherwise, the migration fails.
Procedure

Step 2 Select a new RAID level.

The following describes migration from RAID 1 to RAID 5.
1. Select the RAID to be migrated and press Enter.
The Operation screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-105.


4. Select Advanced... and press Enter to set other properties for the RAID array.
See Figure 8-106. If the parameters are not set, the settings of the original
RAID array are used by default.
Figure 8-106 Advanced...

The Reconfigure Virtual Drives screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-107.

6. Select New RAID Level and press Enter.

Figure 8-108 Selecting a new RAID level

Step 3 Add drives.
1. Select Choose the operation and press Enter.

The drive selection dialog box is displayed.

NOTE
Table 8-5 lists the minimum numbers of drives to be added for various RAID levels.
6. Press Enter.
Step 4 Migrate the RAID level.
Step 5 Check the migration result.
1. Go to the Virtual Drive Management screen and check the result. The screen
shown in Figure 8-109 indicates that the migration is going on.
Figure 8-109 Checking the migration result

NOTE
– If the server is restarted during migration, the task continues after the server is
restarted.
– After migration is complete, the background initialization of the RAID array
automatically starts. The background initialization is a self-check of the RAID array
and does not result in configuration data loss.
2. Select a virtual drive and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure 8-110 is
displayed. The migration is successful when the RAID level changes from
RAID 1 to RAID 5, the RAID array capacity changes, and the value of Status
changes to Optimal.
Figure 8-110 Checking the migration result
----End
Procedure
Management Screen.


Step 3 Delete the virtual drive.

1. Set Operation to Delete Virtual Drive.
----End


available, the system automatically starts a rebuild. However, if the RAID
controller card property Auto Rebuild is set to Disable, you need to manually
start the rebuild.
Screen Introduction
On the Main Menu screen, select a drive under the Drive Management node and
press Enter to display the drive operation menu, as shown in Figure 8-112. Table
8-32 describes the operations that are available.

Figure 8-112 Drive Management operation menu
Table 8-32 Drive Group operations
Select operation Selects the operation to be performed.
Star Locate Locates the drive.
Stop Locate Stops locating the drive.

● Suspend
● Resume
● Stop
Mark drive as Deletes the offline drive from the RAID array.
Missing
Rebuilding RAID
Step 2 The Rebuild menu is displayed.

Step 4 A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
----End
NOTE
To prevent data inconsistency of a RAID array, do not directly place an offline drive online.
Choose Rebuild and add the offline drive to the RAID array.
Procedure
Management Screen.
Step 2 Access the Controller Management screen.

2. Select Controller Management, and press Enter.
The basic information about the RAID controller card is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-113. Table 8-33 describes the parameters.

Controller Status Operating status of the RAID controller card.
Select Boot Current boot device.

Device NOTE
about how to configure the boot option for the EFI/UEFI mode,
see 8.4.9 Configuring Boot Options.
NVDATA Version Controller configuration version.
Connector Count Number of RAID controller card connectors for

connecting to the mainboard.

Count RAID controller card.

Controller
Management
Advanced Advanced properties of the RAID controller card.

Controller
Properties
Step 3 View advanced controller properties.

1. Select Advanced Controller Properties and press Enter.
The advanced controller properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
You can view and modify the advanced properties of the controller card on
this screen.

Figure 8-114 Advanced Controller Properties

Cache and Cache and memory information about the controller.

Memory
Patrol Read Patrol Read feature.
Power Save Drive sleep mode.

Setting
Spare Hot spare status.
Task Rates Handling speed of various tasks.
Alarm Control This parameter does not take effect if the LSI SAS3108 is
not configured with a buzzer.
Auto Import Whether to enable the automatic import of foreign

Foreign configurations
Configuration

Boot Mode Options when the controller BIOS detects an exception:

– Stop on errors: stops startup and continues with
startup only when user confirms.
– Pause on errors: suspends startup and continues with
period.
– Ignore errors: continues startup. This option is usually
for system diagnosis.
– Safe mode on errors: enters safe startup mode.
Controller BIOS BIOS status.
ROC Controller temperature.

Temperature
Shield State Support I/O interruption during drive diagnosis.

Supported The default value is Yes.
Drive Security Status of drive encryption.
T10-PI Status of information protection technology.
Expanded Support for virtual drive expansion.

Virtual Drive
Support
Maintain Drive Status of drive failure history.

Fail History
SMART Polling SMART polling interval.
Stop Status of consistency check in case of errors.

Consistency
Check on Error
JBOD Mode Status of the pass-through mode.

NOTE
JBOD can be configured only when the controller card firmware
version is 4.650.00-6121 or later and the server has been
installed with the driver matching the firmware version.
Write Verify Whether to enable the verification of data write.
----End

Scenarios


NOTICE
on the server, the RAID configuration will be considered as Foreign Config. If
Procedure



----End



----End
8.6.9 Managing CacheCade

A special RAID key enables CacheCade to expand the read caching capacity and
introduce write caching. Use SSDs to create a CacheCade-dedicated RAID array to
function as level-2 cache and provide better I/O performance for the existing RAID
array.
Scenarios
If a CacheCade RAID key is configured for the LSI SAS3108, you can create a
CacheCade virtual drive on the Configuration Utility. The CacheCade virtual drive
serves as level-2 cache for the existing RAID.
Procedure
Management Screen.
Step 2 Check that the RAID key is activated.

2. Choose Controller Management > Advanced Controller Management >
Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options to display the Manage
MegaRAID Advanced Software Options screen.
If CacheCade Pro 2.0 exists and its status is Unlimited, the CacheCade RAID
key has been activated.
3. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu screen.
Step 3 Check that at least one idle SSD is available.

1. Select Drive Management to view the drive list.
2. Check that at least one idle SSD is available.
3. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu screen.
Step 4 Create a CacheCade virtual drive.

1. Choose Configuration Management > Create CacheCade Virtual Drive.
The Create CacheCade Virtual Drive screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-119. Table 8-35 describes the parameters on the screen.

Figure 8-119 Create CacheCade Virtual Drive

CacheCade User-defined name of the CacheCade virtual drive.

Virtual Drive
Name
Logical Sector Sector size of the CacheCade virtual drive. This parameter
Size cannot be manually modified. It automatically changes
based on the selected SSD.
RAID Level RAID level (RAID 0 or RAID 1) of the CacheCade virtual

drive.
Write Cache Read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual drive.

Policy – Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the RAID
controller card signals the host that the data
2. Set the name, RAID level, and read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual
drive. See Table 8-35.
3. Under SELECT SSD DRIVES, select the SSDs to be added to the CacheCade
virtual drive, and press Enter.
If [X] is displayed before an SSD, the SSD is selected.

4. Select Create CacheCade Virtual Drive and press Enter.

----End
8.6.9.2 Enabling SSD Caching for a Common Virtual Drive
Scenarios
You can enable SSD caching for a common virtual drive in any of the following
ways:
● If a CacheCade RAID key is configured, the Configuration Utility asks you
whether to enable SSD Caching during the creation of a common virtual
drive.
● If a CacheCade RAID key is configured, you can modify the common virtual
drive properties to enable SSD caching.
Procedure
Management Screen.
Step 2 Enable SSD caching by modifying the common virtual drive properties.
2. Select Virtual Drive Management.
3. Select the desired virtual drive and press Enter.


View Associated Displays member disk properties of the virtual drive.

Drives
Advanced Displays advanced properties of the virtual drive.
4. Select Enable SSD Caching for Operation and press Enter.

The message "The operation has been started successfully" is displayed.
----End

8.6.9.3 Deleting a CacheCade Virtual Drive
NOTICE
● If the CacheCade has been associated with a virtual drive, remove the
association between the CacheCade and the virtual drive before you delete the
virtual drive. If the CacheCade is not associated with any virtual drive, perform
Step 2.
● To prevent data loss, do not perform offline operations on the drives in the
CacheCade virtual drive.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the association between the CacheCade and the virtual drive.
1. On the Virtual Drive Management screen, select the target virtual drive and
press Enter.
Figure 8-121 Virtual drive operation menu
3. Select Disable SSD Caching and press Enter.


NOTE
If multiple virtual drives are associated with the CacheCade, remove the association
between the CacheCade and each virtual drive in the same way.
Step 2 Delete the CacheCade virtual drive.

1. Select Virtual Drive Management.
2. Select the CacheCade virtual drive to be deleted and press Enter.
The screen shown in Figure 8-122 is displayed. For details about the
Operation Operations that can be performed. Value:

– Start Locate: locates all member drives of the virtual
drive.
– Stop Locate: stops locating the member drives of
the virtual drive.
– Delete Virtual Drive: deletes the virtual drive.
Name Name of the CacheCade virtual drive.
Raid Level RAID level of the CacheCade virtual drive.
Status Current running status of the CacheCade virtual drive.

Size Capacity of the CacheCade virtual drive.
View Associated Displays member drive properties of the CacheCade

Current Write Current read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual drive.

Cache Policy
Default Write Default read/write policy of the CacheCade virtual drive.

Cache Policy The write policy of virtual drives varies with the
firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID card.



cache. This mode is recommended.

of the physical cache. This mode is recommended.


NOTE
being charged.

3. Select Delete Virtual Drive from Operation and press Enter.

A message is displayed indicating that the CacheCade virtual drive is deleted.
----End
8.6.10 Managing the Security Key
8.6.10.1 Enabling the Encryption Function
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Main Menu > Controller Management > Advanced Controller
Management. The Advanced Controller Management screen is displayed, as
Figure 8-123 Advanced Controller Management
Step 2 Select Enable Drive Security and press Enter.
The Enable Drive Security screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-124.

Figure 8-124 Selecting the security key management mode
Step 3 Press the Enter key to set Local Key Management (LKM) to [X].
NOTE

The password setup screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-125.
Figure 8-125 Setting the password

Step 5 In Security Key Identifier, enter the password name, for example, key1.
Step 6 In Security Key, enter the password.
NOTE
The passwords entered in Step 6 and Step 7 must be the same.
Step 8 Press the Enter key to set Pause for Password at Boot Time to [ ].
NOTE
[ ] indicates that this option is disabled.
Step 9 Select I Recorded the Security Settings for Future Reference and press Enter.
Step 10 Select Enable Drive Security and press Enter.
Information is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
----End
8.6.10.2 Disabling the Encryption Function



Clear Controller Clear the controller event logs.

Events
Save Controller Save the event logs of the controller.

Events
Save TTY Log Save the operation logs of the terminal.
Enable Drive Enable the encryption key.

Security
Disable Drive Disable the encryption key.

Security
Change Security Change the encryption key.

Key
Manage Link Manage the port rate.

Speed
Manage SSD Manage SSD Caching.

Caching
Manage Manage the advanced software options.

MegaRAID
Advanced
Software
Options
Schedule Set consistency check parameters.

Consistency
Check
Set Factory Restore the default settings.

Defaults
Step 2 Select Disable Drive Security and press Enter.


Figure 8-127 Confirm

----End
8.6.10.3 Changing the Password


Step 2 Select Change Security Key and press Enter.

The Change Security Key screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-129.
Figure 8-129 Change Security Key (1)
Step 3 Press the Enter key to select Change Current Security Settings.
NOTE
[X] indicates that this option is selected.

parameters.
Figure 8-130 Change Security Key (2)
Enter a New Name the encryption key.

Security Key
Identifier
Use the Existing Use the existing encryption key name.

Security Key
Identifier
Enter Existing Enter the encryption key password.

Security Key
Suggest Security Use the encryption key password created by the system.
Key
Enter a New Enter a new encryption key password.

Security Key
Confirm Enter the password again for confirmation.
Pause for If this option is selected, a password is required when the

Password at RAID controller card starts.
Boot Time

Enforce Strong Enforce security of the password.

Password If this option is selected, the passwords are case-sensitive
Security and must meet the following requirements:
● Contain 8 to 32 characters
● Contain at least one digit, uppercase letter, lowercase
letter, and one special character (such as <> @ +)
● Cannot contain spaces
Password Set the startup password of the RAID controller card.
Confirm Enter the password again for confirmation.
I Recorded the Confirm the content changed.

Security Settings
for Future
Reference
Change Security Confirm the password change.

Key
Step 5 Press the Enter key to deselect Use the Existing Security Key Identifier.
NOTE
[ ] indicates that this option is deselected.
Step 6 Select Enter a New Security Key Identifier and press Enter.
The input box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-131.

Figure 8-131 Input box
Step 7 Enter the name of the new password, for example, key2, as shown in Figure
8-131, and press Enter.
Step 8 Select Enter Existing Security Key and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed,
enter the current password and press Enter.
Step 9 Select Enter a New Security Key and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed,
enter the new password and press Enter.
Step 10 Select Confirm and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, enter the new
password again and press Enter.
NOTE
Step 11 Press the Enter key to set Pause for Password at Boot Time to [X].
NOTE
Step 12 Select Password and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, enter the new RAID
controller card password, and press Enter.
Step 13 Select Confirm and press Enter. In the dialog box displayed, enter the new RAID
controller card password again, and press Enter.
NOTE

Step 14 Press the Enter key to set I Recorded the Security Settings for Future Reference
to [X].
Step 15 Select Change Security Key and press Enter.
----End
8.6.10.4 Encrypting a JBOD Disk

Step 1 Choose Main Menu > Configuration Management. The Configuration
Management screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-132.
Step 2 Select Enable Security On JBOD and press Enter.

The drive list page is displayed. See Figure 8-133.

Figure 8-133 Enable Security On JBOD
Step 3 Press the Enter key to select the JBOD disk to be encrypted.
----End
8.6.10.5 Encrypting a RAID Array

Step 1 Choose Main Menu > Virtual Drive Management. The Virtual Drive
Management screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-134.

Step 2 Select the RAID array to be encrypted, and press Enter.
Step 3 Set Operation to Secure Virtual Drive, as shown in Figure 8-135.
Figure 8-135 Encrypting the RAID array

----End
Viewing the Settings

Step 1 On the Virtual Drive Management screen, select the RAID array and press Enter.
Step 2 Choose Advanced and press Enter.
Detailed RAID array information is displayed.
Step 3 If Secured is Yes, as shown in Figure 8-136, the RAID array is encrypted.
Figure 8-136 Viewing the settings
----End
8.6.11 Creating Multiple Virtual Drives

Create multiple virtual drives for a RAID array that already has one or more virtual
drives. The following uses a RAID 0 array that has one virtual drive (as shown in
Figure 8-137 as an example).

Step 1 Choose Main Menu > Configuration Management > Create Virtual Drive. The
Create Virtual Drive screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-138.
Step 2 Set Select Drives From to Free Capacity, as shown in Figure 8-139.

Step 3 Choose Select Drive Groups and press Enter.

The existing RAID arrays (drive groups) are displayed, as shown in Figure 8-140.
Step 4 Select the RAID array and press Enter, as shown in Figure 8-141.


A message is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 6 Press Enter to return to the screen shown in Figure 8-142. For details about the



Drive
Select Drives From Source of member drives of the virtual drive:

drive groups

Name

Unit

NOTE

Write Policy Options for writing data on a virtual drive. The write policy
of virtual drives varies with the firmware version of the LSI
SAS3108 RAID controller card.
● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID
controller card is 4.270.00-4382 or earlier, the following
write policies are supported:
– Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the
– Write Back with BBU: The controller card
automatically switches to the Write Through mode
when the controller card has no Battery Backup Unit
faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50% of
the physical cache. It is recommended that you set
the write policy to this mode.
controller card is 4.650.00-6121 or later, the following
– Write Back: The controller card automatically
controller card has no Battery Backup Unit (BBU), the
BBU is on charge or discharge, the BBU is faulty, or
the Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50% of the
physical cache. It is recommended that you set the
NOTE
write data of the RAID controller card will be lost if the server is
powered off and the supercapacitor is not installed or being
charged.

● Direct:
from the RAID cache.)

cache).
● Unchanged: The current drive cache policy remains
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration
Step 7 Set virtual drive properties, as shown in Table 8-40.

A confirm screen is displayed.
You can check the virtual drives on the Virtual Drive Management screen. Figure
8-143 shows the virtual drives configured.

----End
NOTE
A RAID array supports a maximum of 16 virtual drives. To create another virtual drive,
repeat Step 1 to Step 11.
8.7 Troubleshooting
Maintenance Guide.
8.7.1 Drive Faults
8.7.1.1 Drive Fault
Symptoms
Solution

NOTE
If a drive in JBOD mode is in UBAD status, the Fault indicator on the drive will be lit and
the iBMC will generate an alarm.
you use.
8.8.3 PD Mgmt or 8.9.2.4 Drive Management.
Information.
Step 2 Check for and delete the Preserved Cache data from the server.
NOTICE
● If the RAID array containing the Preserved Cache data is invalid (the number of
faulty drives in the RAID array exceeds the maximum number of faulty drives
supported by the RAID array), the RAID array will be deleted when
PreservedCache data is deleted.
● If the drive fault is caused by manual removal and installation of the drive in
the RAID array, remove the drive and then delete the Preserved Cache data. By
doing this, the RAID array will not be deleted.
● To clear the Preserved Cache data on the GUI, perform the following steps:
On the VD Mgmt screen, move the cursor to SAS3108 (Bus 0x01, Dev 0x00)
and press F2.
– If Manage Preserved Cache is available, as shown in Figure 8-144, the
Preserved Cache data exists. Delete the Preserved Cache data by referring
to 8.5.6 Discarding Preserved Cache.
Figure 8-144 Checking for Preserved Cache data

– If Manage Preserved Cache is not available, the Preserved Cache data

does not exist. In this case, go to Step 3.
● To clear the Preserved Cache data through the CLI, perform the following
steps:
a. Run the storcli64/c0 show preservedcache command to check whether
a preserved cache exists.
In this example, Preserved Cache data exists in VD 0 managed by
controller 0.
b. Run the ./storcli64/call/vall delete preservedCache force command to

clear the Preserved Cache.
NOTICE

caused by manual removal and installation of the drive or a faulty backplane,
set the drive to Unconfig Good and restore the RAID array. For details, see
8.6.8 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration.

rebuilt.
Creating RAID 0.
Creating RAID 0.
----End
8.7.1.2 Fail or Prefail Drive
Symptom
After the emergency spare function is enabled for a RAID array that supports
If emergency hot spare is not configured for the RAID controller card and the
status of member drive is displayed as fail or prefail, perform the following
operations.
Solution
Step 1 Use the StorCLI tool. For details, see 8.11.1 Downloading and Installing StorCLI.
Step 2 Run the following command to set the status of the member drives in the RAID
array to offline. For details, see 8.11.2.27 Setting Drive Status.
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set offline [force]
NOTE
● controller_id: ID of the RAID controller card where the drive resides

● enclosure_id: ID of the enclosure housing the drive
● slot_id: slot ID of the physical drive
Step 3 Replace the offline drive.

Step 4 The RAID array is automatically rebuilt.

Wait until the rebuilt is complete.
----End
8.7.1.3 Restoring a Drive in Frn-Bad State
8.7.1.3.1 Legacy Mode

If a drive is in Frn-Bad state as shown in Figure 8-145, perform the following
steps to restore the drive to Online or UG state:
Figure 8-145 Drive in Frn-Bad state
Step 1 Select the drive in Frn-Bad state and press F2.

Step 2 Select Make unconfigured good and press Enter.
The drive changes to Foreign state, as shown in Figure 8-146.
Figure 8-146 Drive in Foreign state

Step 3 Import or clear the foreign configuration as required. For details, see 8.6.8
Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration.
● After the foreign configuration is imported, the drive changes to Online state.
● After the foreign configuration is cleared, the drive changes to UG state.
----End
8.7.1.3.2 EFI/UEFI Mode

The drive in Frn-Bad state on the Legacy mode is displayed as Unconfigured Bad
on the EFI/UEFI mode. If a drive is in Unconfigured Bad state as shown in Figure
8-147, perform the following steps to restore the drive to Online or Unconfigured
Good state:
Figure 8-147 Drive status (1)
Step 1 Select the drive in Unconfigured Bad state and press Enter.
The drive property screen is displayed.
Step 2 Select Operation and press Enter.

Figure 8-148 Drive operation menu
Step 3 Select Make Unconfigured Good and press Enter.

The operation is successful if the drive changes to (Foreign), Unconfigured Good
state, as shown in Figure 8-149.

Figure 8-149 Drive status (2)
Step 5 Import or clear the foreign configuration as required. For details, see 8.6.8
● After the foreign configuration is imported, the drive changes to Online state.
● After the foreign configuration is cleared, the drive changes to Unconfigured
Good state.
----End
Symptoms

Solution

Step 2 Import the original RAID information and check whether data can be written to
the drives controlled by the RAID controller.
For details about how to import the original RAID information, see 8.6.8
----End
8.7.3 Supercapacitor Fault

Symptom
The supercapacitor of a RAID controller card on a server is faulty if any of the
following occurs:
● The server read/write speed greatly decreases.
● The Configuration Utility of the controller card indicates that the
supercapacitor status is abnormal.
Solution
Step 1 Go to the Configuration Utility of the controller card and check whether the
supercapacitor state is Optimal:
You can obtain capacitor status information from Battery Status on the
Properties screen.
Step 2 Power off the server, open the chassis cover, and check whether the controller card
is connected to a supercapacitor.
Step 3 Install the supercapacitor based on the system configuration, and check whether
the supercapacitor state is Optimal.
Step 4 Remove and install the supercapacitor and check whether the supercapacitor state
is Optimal.
Step 5 Replace the supercapacitor, and check whether the supercapacitor state is
Optimal and whether the fault is rectified.

----End
8.7.4 RAID Controller Card Not Healthy in Device Manager

Symptoms
On the Device Manager screen, the message "Some drivers are not healthy" is
Figure 8-150 Error message
Solution
Step 1 Select Some drivers are not healthy and press Enter.
The health status screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-151.

Figure 8-151 Health status screen
Step 2 Select Repair the whole platform and press Enter.

The Critical Message screen is displayed.
Step 3 Check the message displayed on the Critical Message screen.
● Some configured disks have been removed from your system or All of the
disks from your previous configuration are gone: See 8.7.4.1 Error
Message: "Some Configured Disks Have Been Removed from Your
System/All of the Disks from Your Previous Configuration Are Gone".
● There are offline or missing virtual drives with preserved cache: See
8.7.4.2 Offline or Missing Virtual Drive Fault.
● The following VDs have missing disks: See 8.7.4.3 Missing Disk Fault.
● Memory/battery problems were detected. The adapter has recovered, but
cached data was lost: See 8.7.4.4 Cache Loss.
----End
NOTE
For description of messages displayed during startup of the RAID controller card and
handling suggestions displayed on the management screen, see A.3 Common Boot Error
Messages for RAID Controller Cards.

8.7.4.1 Error Message: "Some Configured Disks Have Been Removed from
Your System/All of the Disks from Your Previous Configuration Are Gone"
Symptom
When you select Repair the whole platform to open the Critical Message
screen, the message "Some configured disks have been removed from your
system" or "All of the disks from your previous configuration are gone" is
Solution
The message indicates that drives are not detected by the RAID controller card,
which is not caused by the RAID controller card. You are advised to perform the
following operations based on actual needs:
● Power off the server and check whether cables are properly connected and
whether any drive is removed. If there is no abnormalities, power on the
server and check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm is cleared, the
fault is rectified. If the alarm persists, contact technical support.
● Ignore the message and perform the following steps to go to the RAID
controller card management screen:
a. On the screen shown in Figure 8-152, select Enter Your Input Here and
press Enter.
b. Type c, select Yes or Ok, and press Enter.

c. Select Enter Your Input Here again and press Enter.

d. Type y, select Yes or Ok, and press Enter.
The system displays "Critical Message handling completed. Please exit."
e. Press Esc to return to the Device Manager screen.
f. Select the SAS3108 RAID controller card and press Enter. The RAID
controller card management screen is displayed.
8.7.4.2 Offline or Missing Virtual Drive Fault
Symptom
When you open the Critical Message screen, the message "There are offline or
missing virtual drives with preserved cache" is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-153.
Solution
Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-153, select Enter Your Input Here and press
Enter.


Step 3 Press Esc.


Step 5 Press Esc to go back to the Device Manager screen, as shown in Figure 8-156.
Figure 8-156 Device Manager screen

Step 6 Select AVAGO MegaRAID<SAS3108> driver Health Protocol Utility and press
Enter.
The Dashboard View screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-157.
Step 7 Select Discard Preserved Cache and press Enter.


Figure 8-158 Discard Preserved Cache screen
Step 12 The Device Manager screen is displayed. Check whether the message "The
platform is healthy" is displayed on the screen.
----End
8.7.4.3 Missing Disk Fault
Symptom
On the Driver Healthy Protocol Utility screen, the message "The following VDs
have missing disks" is displayed.
Solution
Step 1 Repair the RAID controller card.

1. Select Enter Your Input Here and press Enter.

2. Enter c, select Yes, and press Enter.
The Driver Healthy Protocol Utility screen is displayed.
3. Select Enter Your Input Here again and press Enter.
4. Enter y, select Yes, and press Enter.
The repair is completed.
Step 2 Press Esc to exit the current interface.
● If the message is not displayed, contact Huawei technical support.
----End
8.7.4.4 Cache Loss
Symptom
Memory/battery problems were detected. The adapter has recovered, but
cached data was lost is displayed on the Driver Healthy Protocol Utility screen.
Solution
Step 1 Select Enter Your Input Here and press Enter.
● If the message is displayed, no further action is required.
● If the message is not displayed, contact Huawei technical support.
----End
8.7.5 Some RAID Controller Card Functions Became

Unavailable After Personality Mode Is Set to JBOD-Mode
The LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card supports only the RAID mode (RAID-Mode
for Personality Mode). It does not support the JBOD mode.

Solution
Set Personality Mode to RAID-Mode as follows:
Step 1 Log in to the RAID controller card setup utility. For details, see 8.3.1 Logging In to
Step 2 Press Ctrl+P to switch to the Ctrl Mgmt screen, as shown in Figure 8-159.
Figure 8-159 Ctrl Mgmt(1)
Step 3 Select Next and press Enter.

Step 4 Set Personality Mode to RAID-Mode(current), as shown in Figure 8-160.
Figure 8-160 Ctrl Mgmt(2)

----End

Related Operations
For details about how to set the JBOD mode, see Configuring JBOD Mode.

Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility of the LSI SAS3108 controller card.
During server startup, press Ctrl+R when the message "Press <Ctrl><R> to Run
MegaRAID Configuration Utility" is displayed.
The SAS3108 BIOS Configuration Utility screen is displayed, as shown in Figure

8-162. Table 8-41 describes the tabs.

Table 8-41 Tab description
Tab Description
VD Mgmt Manages virtual drives.
PD Mgmt Manages physical drives.
Ctrl Mgmt Manages the RAID controller card.
Properties Queries the RAID controller card properties.
Foreign View Manages foreign configurations. This menu is available only

when foreign configurations are detected.
----End
8.8.2 VD Mgmt
The VD Mgmt screen displays controller card information, such as drive groups
and unconfigured drives, and enables controller card and virtual drive (VD)
configurations.
Screen Description
Figure 8-163 shows the VD Mgmt screen. Table 8-42 and Table 8-43 describe
the parameters in the left and right areas of the screen.
Figure 8-163 VD Mgmt screen
Table 8-42 Parameters in the left area
SAS3108 (Bus 0xxx, Hardware address.

Dev 0xxx)

Drive Group Basic information of the configured drive group,

including the drive group ID and the RAID level of each
virtual drive.
Virtual Drives Basic information of VDs, including the drive ID, name,
and capacity.
NOTE
Virtual drives in the same drive group must have the same
RAID level.
Drives Basic information of member drives, including drive IDs,

status, and capacity.
Available size Available space of a drive group and the space occupied
by each VD.
Hot spare drives Basic information of hot spare drives, including the IDs,
types, and status of hot spare drives.
NOTE
Select an item marked with + and press → to expand the item. Select an item marked with
- and press ← to fold the item.
Table 8-43 Parameters in the right area
Selected Information Displayed
SAS 3108 Number of existing drive groups, VDs, and drives.
Drive Group Number of configured VDs, number of drives, available

capacity, number of remaining areas, and data protection
status.
Specific virtual Basic information of the specified virtual drive.

drive
Specific drive Drive status, vendor, and slot.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the managed object and press F2.
Step 2 Select an operation to be performed and press Enter.
----End
8.8.2.1 SAS3108
Add or delete RAID configurations, import or clear foreign configurations, enable
or disable data protection, and configure advanced functions.

Screen Description
On the VD Mgmt screen, select SAS3108 and press F2. The menu shown in
Figure 8-164 is displayed. Table 8-44 describes the operation options on the
menu.
Figure 8-164 SAS3108 operation menu
Table 8-44 SAS3108 operations
Create Virtual Creates a virtual drive.

Drive Available only with unconfigured physical drives.
Clear Clears the existing RAID configuration.

Configuration Available only with RAID configuration.
Foreign Config Imports or clears foreign RAID configurations.

Available only with existing foreign configurations.
Manage Preserved Clears preserved cache.

Cache Available only when preserved cache exists.
Drive Security Specifies the status of drive encryption.
Create CacheCade Creates a CacheCade virtual drive.

Virtual Drive NOTE
This parameter is supported only when the firmware version of
the LSI SAS3108 is 4.660.00-8102 or later.
Disable Data Enables or disables the data protection function.

Protection/Enable Set this parameter to Enable for the drive that supports
Protection data protection.
Advanced Software Configures advanced properties, for example, importing

Options license information.

Manage SSD Manages SSD caching.

Caching NOTE

See 8.3.2 Creating RAID 0 to 8.3.8 Creating RAID 60.

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-164, choose Clear Configuration and press
Enter.
----End
Managing Foreign Configurations

The Foreign Config option is available only when foreign configurations are
detected.
Step 1 Open the operation menu.
On the menu shown in Figure 8-164, choose Foreign Config and press Enter.
The menu shown in Figure 8-165 is displayed.
Figure 8-165 Foreign Config operation menu

Step 2 Import or clear foreign configuration.

1. On the menu shown in Figure 8-165, choose Import or Clear and press
Enter.
----End
Disabling Data Protection

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-164, choose Disable Data Protection and press
Enter.
----End
8.8.2.2 Drive Group

Manage member drives of a drive group, for example, rebuild data, copy back
data, locate drives, and make drives offline.
Screen Introduction
On the VD Mgmt screen, select the drive under the Drives node and press F2. The
menu shown in Figure 8-166 is displayed. Table 8-45 describes the operation
options on the menu.
Figure 8-166 Drive Group operation menu


Add New VD Creates a RAID array if the current drive group has free
space.
Manage Ded. HS Manages the dedicated hot spare drive of the current drive
group.
Delete Drive Group Deletes the current drive group.
Secure Drive Group Encrypts the drive group.
Disable Protection Disables the data protection function.
Break Mirror Splits the mirror.

NOTE
Join Mirror Recombines the mirror.

NOTE
Expand Size Expands the virtual drive capacity.
Hide Drive Group Hides a drive group.

NOTE
Unhide Drive Shows a drive group.

Group NOTE

NOTE
Virtual drives in the same drive group must have the same RAID level.
Step 1 Access the virtual drive management screen.

On the menu shown in Figure 8-166, choose Add New VD and press Enter.

Figure 8-167 Create New VD

1. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the Size field, and set the RAID capacity as
required.
The system uses the maximum RAID capacity by default.
2. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the Name area and set the RAID name.
1. Select Advanced by using ↓, and press Enter.
The screen for setting advanced RAID properties is displayed.




controller card prefetches sequential data or data
to be used and stores it in the cache.
NOTE

policy of virtual drives varies with the firmware
version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card.


complete.

cache. It is recommended that you set the

controller card has no Battery Backup Unit
(BBU), the BBU is on charge or discharge, the
BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache
reaches 50% of the physical cache. It is
recommended that you set the write policy to
this mode.

complete.

NOTE

I/O Policy Options for data I/O of special virtual drives. This
policy does not affect cache prefetch. The options
are as follows:
– Direct:

read from the RAID cache.)

RAID cache. (If Write Policy is set to Write
Through, data is directly written into drives.)
cache. Use this option only when configuring
CacheCade 1.1.
Disk cache Policy Cache policy for physical drives.

– Enable: writes data to the cache before writing
data to the drive. This option improves data write
performance. However, data will be lost if there
is no protection mechanism against power
failures.
– Disable: writes data to a drive without caching.
Data is not lost in the event of power failure.

NOTE
Initialize After Initialize is selected, initialization is performed

quickly and automatically after the RAID array is


NOTE



----End
Managing Dedicated Hot Spare Drives

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-166, choose Manage Ded. HS and press Enter.
The Dedicated Hotspare for Drive Group screen is displayed.
Figure 8-169 Dedicated hot spare drive
Step 2 Select a hot spare drive and press Enter.

● [X] indicates a hot spare drive to be set.
● [ ] indicates a hot spare drive to be removed.
----End
Deleting a Drive Group

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-166, choose Delete Drive Group and press
Enter.
----End

8.8.2.3 Virtual Drive

Once a virtual drive is created, you can initialize, delete, expand, format, or check
the consistency of the virtual drive.
Screen Description
On the VD Mgmt screen, select the virtual drive under Virtual Drive and press F2.
The menu shown in Figure 8-170 is displayed. Table 8-47 describes the operation
Initialization Options for virtual drive initialization:

● Start FGI: starts foreground initialization (FGI).
● Stop Init: stops initialization.
● Fast Init: starts fast initialization.
● Suspend BGI: suspends background initialization (BGI).
● Resume BGI: resumes background initialization.
● Stop BGI: stops background initialization.
Consistency Check Options for consistency check:

● Start
● Suspend
● Resume
● Stop
Delete VD Deletes the current virtual drive.
Properties Displays properties of the current virtual drive.

Disable SSD Disables SSD caching.

Caching
Expand VD Size Expands the capacity of the current virtual drive if the
corresponding drive group has free space.
Erase VD Options for safe data erasure:

● Simple: wiped once.
● Normal: wiped three times.
● Thorough: wiped nine times.
● Stop Erase: stops data erasure.
Hide VD Hides a virtual drive.
The basic information about the virtual drive is displayed in the right pane, as
Table 8-48 Virtual drive information

State Current status of the virtual drive.
CacheCade (Write) Current CacheCade acceleration object

(write or read).
CacheCade Capable Specifies whether a RAID array is

created for CacheCade.
Virtual Drives Number of virtual drives of the drive

group.
Drives Number of physical drives of the drive

group.
Free Cap. Free capacity of the drive group.
Free Area Whether the drive group has free

space.
● 0: indicates that the drive group
does not have free space.
● 1: indicates that the drive group has
free space.

Initializing a RAID Array
NOTICE
Initialization will cause data loss. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Initialization and press Enter.
The initialization menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select an initialization type and press Enter.
----End
Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Consistency Check and press Enter.
The consistency check menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select a consistency check type and press Enter.
----End

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Delete VD and press Enter.
----End
Modifying RAID Properties

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Properties and press Enter.
The Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-171. Table 8-49


Figure 8-171 Properties screen
Table 8-49 Properties parameters

General Virtual drive basic information, including the virtual drive name,
capacity, strip size, and status.
You can change the virtual drive name.
Operation Background operation that is being performed on a virtual drive.

The displayed information includes the operation type, progress,
and remaining time.
SSD Settings for the SSD caching function.

Caching
Details
Step 2 Change the virtual drive name.

Step 3 Select Advanced and press Enter.
The Advanced Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-172. Table

Figure 8-172 Advanced Properties screen
Table 8-50 Advanced Properties parameters


● Normal: disables the Read Ahead function.
● Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The RAID
predicted to be used and stores the data in the cache.
NOTE
To achieve optimal drive performance, set the policy to Ahead for
HDDs and Normal for SSDs.

Default Write Default write policy of a virtual drive.

controller card is 4.270.00-4382 or earlier, the following
– Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the
– Write Back with BBU: The controller card
automatically switches to the Write Through mode
when the controller card has no Battery Backup Unit
faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50% of
the physical cache. It is recommended that you set
the write policy to this mode.
controller card is 4.650.00-6121 or later, the following
– Write Back: The controller card automatically
controller card has no Battery Backup Unit (BBU), the
BBU is on charge or discharge, the BBU is faulty, or
the Pinned/Preserved cache reaches 50% of the
physical cache. It is recommended that you set the
NOTE
write data of the RAID controller card will be lost if the server is
powered off and the supercapacitor is not installed or being
charged.
Current Write Current write policy of a virtual drive.

I/O Policy Options for data I/O of special virtual drives. This policy
does not affect cache prefetch. The options are as follows:
● Direct:
(If Read Policy is set to Ahead, data is read from the
RAID cache.)
Disk cache Policy Cache policy for physical drives.

● Enable: writes data to the cache before writing data to
the drive. This option improves data write performance.
However, data will be lost if there is no protection
mechanism against power failures.
● Disable: writes data to a drive without caching. Data is
not lost in the event of power failure.

● RW: The virtual drive is readable and writable.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only when the firmware version of the
LSI SAS3108 is 4.660.00-8102 or later.
Reason for -
difference in Write
Policy
Emulation Emulation type.

NOTE

Disable BGI Specifies whether to disable background initialization

(BGI).
NOTE
Step 4 After setting the parameters, select OK and press Enter.
The Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-171.
----End

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Expand VD Size and press Enter.
The Expand Virtual Drive screen is displayed.
Figure 8-173 Expand Virtual Drive screen
Step 2 Set the expansion percentage.
The expansion percentage is the percentage of the remaining capacity.
Step 3 Select Resize and press Enter.
----End

Safely Erasing RAID Data

Step 1 On the menu shown in Figure 8-170, choose Erase VD and press Enter.
----End
8.8.2.4 Drives
Manage member drives of a drive group, for example, rebuild data, copy back
data, locate drives, and make drives offline.
Screen Introduction
On the VD Mgmt screen, select the drive under the Drives node and press F2. The
menu shown in Figure 8-174 is displayed. Table 8-51 describes the operation
Figure 8-174 Drives operation menu

● Suspend
● Resume
● Stop

Copyback Copies data from a hot spare drive to a new drive.

If an exception occurs (for example the RAID degrades), a
hot spare drive is used to rebuild data and works instead
of the failed drive. After the failed drive is replaced with a
new drive, data will be copied from the hot spare drive to
the new drive. Then, the hot spare drive restores the hot
spare state.
Locate Locates a drive using the indicators on the drive.

● Start: makes the indicators on a drive blink.
● Stop: stops the indicators on a drive from blinking.
Place drive Offline Makes a drive offline.
Rebuilding RAID
----End
Copying Back Data

Step 1 On the menu, choose Copyback and press Enter.
The Copyback menu is displayed.
The Copyback drive screen is displayed.

Figure 8-175 Copyback drive screen
Step 3 Select the source drive for copyback and press Enter.
NOTE
[x] is displayed on the left of the selected drive.
----End
Locating a Drive
Step 1 On the menu, choose Locate and press Enter.
The Locate menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select the operation and press Enter.
----End
Making a Drive Online or Offline

On the menu, choose Place Drive Online or Place Drive Offline and press Enter.
8.8.3 PD Mgmt
The PD Mgmt screen displays basic information about existing physical drives and
allows you to manage physical drives.
Screen Introduction
The PD Mgmt screen is shown in Figure 8-176, Figure 8-177, and Figure 8-178.
The drive properties are displayed in the right pane. For details about the
properties, see Table 8-52.

Figure 8-176 PD Mgmt (PAGE-1)

Table 8-52 Drive properties

Secured Indicates whether the drive is

encrypted.
Encryption Capable Indicates whether the encryption

function is enabled.
EKM Support Indicates whether encryption key

management is supported.
Connector Port of the RAID controller card.
Enclosure Model Communication mode of the

backplane.
Slot Number Drive slot number.
Logical Sector Size Size of a logical sector.
Physical Sector Size Size of the physical sector.
Product ID Drive model.
Disk Write Cache Indicates whether the drive provides

the write cache function.
S.M.A.R.T state S.M.A.R.T status of the drive.
Power State Energy saving state of the drive.
Operation Indicates whether a task is being

performed on the drive.

Max Device Link Rate Current rate of the drive.
Megotiated Link Rate Indicates the negotiated transmission

rate of the drive.
Certified Certification status of the drive.
Temperature Value Drive temperature.
Protection Eligible Indicates whether the drive supports

encryption.
Wide Port Capable Indicates whether the drive supports

wide ports.
Figure 8-179 shows the drive management menu on the PD Mgmt screen. Table
8-53 describes the menu options.
Figure 8-179 PD Mgmt menu
Table 8-53 Description of the PD Mgmt menu

Menu Option Description
Rebuild Rebuilds drive data.

● Suspend
● Resume
● Stop

Menu Option Description
Copyback Copies data from a hot spare drive to a new drive.

If an exception occurs (for example the RAID degrades), a
hot spare drive is used to rebuild data and works instead of
the failed drive. After the failed drive is replaced with a
new drive, data will be copied from the hot spare drive to
the new drive. Then, the hot spare drive restores the hot
spare state.
Locate Locate a drive.

● Start: makes the indicator on a drive blinking.
● Stop: stops the indicator from blinking.
Place drive Offline Makes a drive offline.
Make Global HS Sets a hot spare drive.
Remove Hot Spare Removes a hot spare drive.

drive
Drive Erase Safely erases data from a drive.

● Simple: erases data on a drive only one round.
● Normal: erases data on a drive three rounds.
● Thorough: erases data on a drive nine rounds.
● Stop Erase: stops data erasure.
Make JBOD Enables JBOD, which makes drives to be used without

being added to RAID.
NOTE
The JBOD mode can be configured only when the LSI SAS3108
firmware version is 4.650.00-6121 or later and the driver of the
corresponding version has been installed on the server.
Make Sets the status of a drive to Unconfigured Good.

unconfigured NOTE
good After this operation is performed on drives in JBOD state, the drive
state changes to UG. After this operation is performed on drives in
Frn-Bad state, the drive status changes to Foreign-UG state.
Prepare for Prepares for removing a drive.

Removal
Undo Remove Cancels drive removal.
Rebuilding RAID
NOTE
To prevent data inconsistency of a RAID array, do not directly place an offline drive online.
Choose Rebuild and add the offline drive to the RAID array.


----End
Copying Back Data

Step 1 On the menu, choose Copyback and press Enter.
The Copyback menu is displayed.
The Copyback drive screen is displayed.
Figure 8-180 Copyback drive screen
Step 3 Select the source drive for copyback and press Enter.
NOTE
[x] is displayed on the left of the selected drive.
----End
Locating a Drive
Step 1 On the menu, choose Locate and press Enter.
The Locate menu is displayed.
----End

Making a Drive Online or Offline

On the menu, choose Place Drive Online or Place Drive Offline and press Enter.

On the menu, choose Make Global HS and press Enter.
The drive state changes to Hotspare.
Safely Erasing Data from a Drive

Step 1 On the menu, choose Drive Erase and press Enter.
The Drive Erase menu is displayed.
The PD Mgmt screen is displayed.
----End
Checking the Drive Erasing Process

Step 1 Select the drive to be viewed and press Tab.
Move the cursor to <GoToPage:2>, as shown in Figure 8-181.
Figure 8-181 PD Mgmt
Step 2 Press Enter.
The PAGE-2 screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-182. You can view the erase
process of the drive.

Figure 8-182 Drive erasing process
----End
Pre-removing a Drive
On the menu, choose Prepare for Removal and press Enter.
8.8.4 Ctrl Mgmt

The Ctrl Mgmt screen displays the status of a RAID controller card and allows you
to modify the controller card settings.
Screen Description
Figure 8-183 and Figure 8-184 show the Ctrl Mgmt screen. Table 8-54 describes
Figure 8-183 Ctrl Mgmt screen (1)

Figure 8-184 Ctrl Mgmt screen (2)
Table 8-54 Ctrl Mgmt screen parameters

Alarm Control This parameter does not take effect if the LSI SAS3108
is not configured with a buzzer.
Onboard buzzer status.
● Enable
● Disable
● Silence
Default value: Enable
Coercion Mode Drive capacity compression mode.

● None
● 128 MB
● 1 GB
Default value: 1 GB
NOTE
The drive compression mode can be used to round up the
capacity differences of the same specifications of drives from
different vendors. In this way, the drives of different vendors
can be forcibly set to the same capacity and be used in the
same RAID array. The drives can be rounded up to 128 MB or
1 GB. The value None indicates that the RAID controller card
does not round up the drivers of different vendors.

BIOS Mode Action to be taken when the BIOS detects an exception.

● Stop On Errors: The controller BIOS stops the
startup when detecting an exception and continues
the startup only with user confirmation.
● Pause on Errors: The controller BIOS suspends the
startup when detecting an exception and continues
the startup if no user confirmation is obtained after
a period of time.
● Ignore Errors: continues startup. This option is
usually for system diagnosis.
● Safe Mode on Errors: enters safe startup mode.
Default value: Stop On Errors
Boot Device System boot option. You can set an existing RAID as
the boot device.
Default value: None.
Rebuild Rate Percentage of I/O resources occupied by RAID rebuild.

Default value: 30%
BGI Rate (Background Percentage of I/O resources occupied by BGI.

Initialization Rate) Default value: 30%
CC Rate (Consistency Percentage of I/O resources occupied by the

Check Rate) consistency check for virtual drives.
Default value: 30%
Recon. Rate Percentage of I/O resources occupied by RAID level

migration or RAID capacity expansion.
Default value: 30%
Patrol Rate Percentage of I/O resources occupied by drive

inspection.
Default value: 30%
Cache flush Interval Interval (in seconds) for cache data updates.
Default value: 4
Spinup delay Interval (in seconds) between spinups of drives.

Default value: 2
Spinup drive Number of drives that spin up simultaneously.

Default value: 4.

Maintain PD Fail Status of the fault recording function for drives.

History Default value: Enabled
NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disabled and a drive fault or RAID
array degrade occurs, related alarms are not reported and
cannot be found on the management software.
Enable controller BIOS Indicates whether the controller BIOS is enabled.

Default value: Enabled
Enable Stop CC on Indicates whether to stop a consistency check when an

Error exception is detected.
The value Disabled indicates that the consistency
check is not stopped.
Auto Enhanced Import Indicates whether to automatically import foreign

configurations.
Enable JBOD Indicates whether JBOD is enabled.

NOTE
JBOD can be configured only when the controller card
firmware version is 4.650.00-6121 or later and the server has
been installed with the driver matching the firmware version.
Set Factory Defaults Loads factory configurations.
Emergency Spare Emergency spare drive type when a drive fault occurs.
● None
● UG
● GHS
● UG & GHS
Personality Mode RAID controller card mode.

● RAID-Mode
● JBOD-Mode
NOTE
● The LSI SAS3108 does not support setting the mode to
JBOD using this parameter. If you want to set it to JBOD,
use Enable JBOD in Figure 8-183
Enable Emergency for Indicates whether to configure a hot spare drive for a
SMARTer drive where a SMART error is detected.
Write Verify Verifies data write.

Large IO Support Enables or disables large I/O support.
Manage Link Speed Link speed.

Select Manage Link Speed to go to the screen for
setting the link speed.
Manage Power Save Power-saving mode.

Select Manage Power Save to go to the screen for
setting the power-saving mode.
Details about key parameters are as follows:
● Spin down Unconfigured drives: applies Power
Save settings to unconfigured drives.
● Spin down Hot Spares: applies Power Save settings
to hot spare drives.
● Drive Standby Time: specifies the time wait for
Power Save. If there is no drive I/O within the
standby time, the drive enters the spin-down mode.
Modifying Controller Parameters

Step 1 Modify controller parameters as required.
----End
Configuring JBOD Mode

Step 1 On the screen displayed in Figure 8-183, select Enable JBOD and press Enter.
Step 2 Use ↓ to select APPLY and press Enter.
On the PD Mgmt screen, JBOD is automatically configured for all the Ugood
drives, as shown in Figure 8-185.

Figure 8-185 PM Mgmt screen
Step 3 To change a drive in JBOD mode to the Ugood state, select the drive and press F2.
Then, choose Make unconfigured good and press Enter.
Figure 8-186 Changing state
----End

Step 1 Select Set Factory Defaults and press Enter.
----End

8.8.5 Properties
This screen displays LSI SAS3108 basic information, including product information
and controller status.
Screen Overview
Figure 8-187 and Figure 8-188 show the Properties screen. Table 8-55 describes
Figure 8-187 Properties screen (1)
Figure 8-188 Properties screen (2)
Table 8-55 Properties key parameters
Controller Status Overall status of a controller. If the status is not

Optimal, certain components may be faulty.

Battery Status Status of the supercapacitor protection module.
Emergency Spare Emergency spare setting.
Emergency For Emergency spare settings for self-monitoring, analysis

SMARTer and reporting technology (SMART) errors.
Power Saving on Energy saving policy for an unconfigured drive or hot

Unconfigured spare drive.
Drives/Hot Spare
Drive Standby Time Standby time of the energy saving policy.
CacheCade - SSD CacheCade status.

Caching NOTE
Write Cache capable Write cache status.

NOTE
Total Cache Size Cache size.

NOTE
Maximum Cache Size Maximum cache size.

NOTE
Copyback SSD on Option to copy back backup data if a SMART error

Smart Error occurs on the SSD.
Memory Size Capacity of the controller-integrated DDR DIMMs.
8.8.6 Foreign View

The Foreign View screen displays existing foreign configurations.
Screen Overview
Figure 8-189 shows the Foreign View screen.

Figure 8-189 Foreign View screen
8.8.7 Exit
The Exit screen allows you to exit the Configuration Utility.
Screen Overview
Press Esc on the VD Mgmt, PD Mgmt, Ctrl Mgmt, Properties, or Foreign View
screen. The Exit screen is displayed.

On the Exit screen shown in Figure 8-190, select OK and press Enter.
The Configuration Utility is closed, and the message "Press Control+Alt+Delete to

reboot" is displayed.


Procedure
Step 3 Select the LSI SAS3108 and press Enter.
The main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-191. Table 8-56 describes the
Figure 8-191 LSI SAS3108 main screen


Main Menu Specifies the main menu of the RAID controller card.
All operations on the RAID controller card are
available.
Help Contains help information.
Status Specifies the status of the RAID controller card.
Backplane Specifies the number of backplanes.
BBU Specifies the installation status of the supercapacitor.
Enclosure Specifies the number of drive backplanes.
Drives Specifies the number of mounted drives.
Drive Groups Specifies the number of drive groups.
Virtual Drives Specifies the number of virtual drives.
View Server Profile Displays and manages RAID controller card properties.
View Foreign Displays and manages a foreign configuration.

Configuration
Configure Deletes a configuration.
Set Factory Defaults Restores factory settings.
Update Firmware Upgrades firmware.
Silence Alarm Specifies the status of the onboard buzzer.

The controller card is not configured with a buzzer.
Virtual Drive Specifies whether any virtual drive operation is being

Operations in Progress performed in the background.
Drive Operations in Specifies whether any physical drive operation is being

Progress performed in the background.
MegaRAID xxx Specifies the status of advanced properties.
Manage MegaRAID Manages advanced properties.

Advanced Software
Options
----End
8.9.2 Main Menu

The Main Menu allows you to configure and manage the RAID controller card.

Screen Description
Figure 8-192 shows the Main Menu screen. Table 8-57 describes the parameters
on the screen.
Figure 8-192 Main Menu


Management
Controller Manages the RAID controller card.

Management

Management

Management

Components
8.9.2.1 Configuration Management

This screen allows you to configure and manage virtual drives, drive groups, and
external configuration, and delete configuration.

Screen Description
Figure 8-193 shows the Configuration Management screen. Table 8-58

Create Virtual Creates a RAID array.

Drive
Create Profile Creates a RAID array quickly. The RAID array parameters
Based Virtual are automatically configured.
Drive
View Drive Group Displays drive group properties.

Properties

Configuration
Manage Foreign Manages foreign configurations.

Configuration


Step 5 Press Enter.
----End

Step 1 Switch to the configuration view.
1. On the screen shown in Figure 8-193, select Create Virtual Drive and press
Enter.
Figure 8-194 shows the page. Table 8-59 describes the parameters.



Drive


Name

Unit

follows:
NOTE







NOTE
being charged.

– Direct:


1.1.

with cache).
unchanged.

Background
Initialization



Configuration



Type

Interface Type

Size

NOTE

8. Click OK.


4. Click OK.
----End
Quickly Creating a RAID

Step 1 Use the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys to select a RAID level and press Enter. In this example,
Generic RAID 6 is selected.
The RAID array configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-196. Table

Figure 8-196 RAID configuration screen

Drive Selection Member drives that can be automatically selected by the

Criteria system.
Virtual Drive RAID array name defined by the system.

Name
RAID Level RAID level of the RAID array.
Virtual Drive RAID array capacity.

Size
Power Save Power failure protection mode.

Mode
Strip Size Sector size of the RAID array.
Read Policy Read policy of the RAID array.
Write Policy Write policy of the RAID array.
IO Policy I/O policy of the RAID array.
Access Policy Read/Write policy.

Default Default initialization mode of the RAID array.

Initialization
Create Whether to create dedicated hot spare drives for the RAID
Dedicated Hot array.
Spare
Step 2 View or configure parameters by referring to Table 8-61.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
Viewing Virtual Drive Properties

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-193, select View Drive Group Properties and
press Enter.
Figure 8-197 shows the displayed page. Table 8-62 describes the parameters.
Figure 8-197 View Drive Group Properties


Drive Group Name of the drive group.
Capacity Capacity of the drive group. Names, RAID levels, capacities,

Allocation and statuses of the virtual drives in the drive group are also
included.
Protected Status of drive group data protection.
----End

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-193, select Manage Foreign Configuration and
press Enter.


Step 7 Click OK.
----End

Step 5 Click OK.
----End

8.9.2.2 Controller Management

This screen allows you to manage the controller by viewing and modifying
controller properties.
Screen Description
Figure 8-200 shows the Controller Management screen. Table 8-63 describes
Product Name Name of the controller.
Serial Number Serial number of the controller.
Controller Status Operating status of the controller.
Select Boot Device Current boot device.

NOTE
about how to configure the boot option for the EFI/UEFI mode, see
8.4.9 Configuring Boot Options.
PCI ID PCI ID of the controller.
PCI Slot Number PCI slot number of the controller.

Package Version Package version of the controller.
Firmware Version Firmware version of the controller.
NVDATA Version Version of the controller configuration.
Connector Count Number of controller connectors for connecting to the

mainboard.
Drive Count Number of drives mounted to the controller.

Count controller.
Advanced More operations on the controller.

Controller
Management
Advanced Advanced controller properties.

Controller
Properties
More Operations on the Controller

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-200, select Advanced Controller Management
and press Enter.
screen.


Clear Controller Deletes controller event logs.

Events
Save Controller Saves controller event logs.

Events
Save TTY Log Saves client operation logs.
Manage Link Manages port rates.

Speed
Manage SSD Manages SSD caching.

Caching
Manage Manages advanced software properties.

MegaRAID
Advanced
Software
Options
Schedule Sets consistency check parameters.

Consistency
Check
Set Factory Restores factory settings.

Defaults
----End
Viewing and Modifying Advanced Controller Properties

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-200, select Advanced Controller Properties and
press Enter.
Figure 8-202 and Figure 8-203 show the screen. Table 8-65 describes the

Figure 8-202 Advanced Controller Properties screen (1)
Figure 8-203 Advanced Controller Properties screen (2)


Cache and Cache and memory information about the controller.

Memory
Patrol Read Patrol Read feature.
Power Save Drive sleep mode.

Setting
Spare Hot spare status.
Task Rates Handling speed of various tasks.
Alarm Control This parameter does not take effect if the LSI SAS3108 is not
configured with a buzzer.
Auto Import Automatically imports foreign configurations.

Foreign
Configuration
Coercion Mode Drive capacity compression mode.

● None
● 128 MB
● 1 GB
Default value: 1 GB
Boot Mode Options when the controller BIOS detects an exception:

● Stop on errors: stops startup and continues with startup
only when user confirms.
period.
system diagnosis.
Controller BIOS BIOS status.
ROC Controller temperature.

Temperature
Shield State Support I/O interruption during drive diagnosis.

Supported The default value is Yes.
Drive Security Status of drive encryption.
T10-PI Status of information protection technology.

Expanded Support for virtual drive expansion.

Virtual Drive
Support
Maintain Drive Status of drive failure history.

Fail History
SMART Polling SMART polling interval.
Stop Consistency Status of consistency check in case of errors.

Check on Error
JBOD Mode Status of the pass-through mode.

NOTE
JBOD can be configured only when the controller card firmware
version is 4.650.00-6121 or later and the server has been installed
with the driver matching the firmware version.
Write Verify Verifies data write.
Large IO Enables or disables large I/O support.

Support
Step 2 Modify advanced controller properties by referring to Table 8-65.

Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Configuring JBOD Mode

Step 1 On the screen displayed in Figure 8-202, choose JBOD Mode and press Enter.
Then select Enable and press Enter.
Step 2 Use the ↓ arrow keys to select Apply Changes, and press Enter.
Step 3 The message "The operation has been performed successfully" is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 On the Drive Management screen, JBOD is automatically configured for all the
Ugood drives, as shown in Figure 8-204.

To change a drive in JBOD mode to the Ugood state, select the drive and press
Enter. Then, choose Make Unconfigured Good from Select operation and press
Go, as shown in Figure 8-205.
Figure 8-205 Select operation
----End

8.9.2.3 Virtual Drive Management

This screen allows you to view and manage virtual drives.
Screen Description
Figure 8-206 shows the Virtual Drive Management screen that lists the virtual
drives.
Figure 8-206 Virtual Drive List
Select a virtual drive and press Enter. The drive detail screen is displayed, as



● Start Locate: locates all member drives of the virtual
drive.
● Stop Locate: stops locating the member drives of the
virtual drive.
● Delete Virtual Drive: deletes the virtual drive.
● Expand Virtual Drive: expands the virtual drive
capacity.
● Reconfigure Virtual Drives: reconfigures the virtual
drive.
● Hide/Unhide Virtual Drive: hides or shows the virtual
drive.
● Hide/Unhide Drive Group: hides or shows the drive
group.
● Fast Initialization: performs fast initialization of the
virtual drive.
● Slow Initialization: performs slow initialization of the
virtual drive.
● Check Consistency: performs consistency check.
● Virtual Drive Erase: formats the virtual drive.

View Associated Displays member drive properties.

Drives
Advanced... Displays advanced properties of the virtual drive.
Expanding the Virtual Drive Capacity

Step 1 Set Operation to Expand Virtual Drive.
The virtual drive capacity expansion screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-208.
Figure 8-208 Expand Virtual Drive



Capacity

Capacity

Percentage
of Available
Capacity

Virtual Drive
after
Expansion
Step 3 Set the expansion percentage.

----End


Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-207, select View Associated Drives and press
Enter.
The member drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-209.
Figure 8-209 View Associated Drives
Step 2 Select the member drive to be viewed and set its status to Enabled.
Step 3 Select View Drive Properties and press Enter.
The drive properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-210. Table 8-68

Figure 8-210 View Drive Properties
Operation Operations that can be performed on the member drive.

● Place Drive Offline/Online: makes the drive online/offline.
Drive ID ID of the member drive.
Status Current operating status of the member drive.
Size Capacity of the member drive.
Type Type of the member drive.
Model Model of the member drive.
Hardware Vendor of the member drive.

Vendor
Associated Virtual drive to which the member drive belongs.

Virtual Drive
Advanced... Advanced member drive properties.
----End

Viewing and Modifying Advanced Properties of the Member Drive

Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 8-207, select Advanced and press Enter.
Parameter Parameter description
Parity Size Parity block size.
Logical Logical sector size.

Sector Size
Segment Strip size.

Size
Starting Start address of logical units.

Logical
Block
Addressing
Protected Whether drive protection is supported.
Bad Blocks Whether bad block processing is supported.
SSD Caching Whether SSD caching is enabled or disabled.
Access Access policy.

Current Current write caching policy.

Write Cache
Policy
Default Default write caching policy. The write policy of virtual drives
Write Cache varies with the firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID
Policy controller card.
● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller
card is 4.270.00-4382 or earlier, the following write policies
are supported:
– Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the RAID
controller card signals the host that the data transmission
is complete.
– Write Back with BBU: The controller card automatically
switches to the Write Through mode when the controller
card has no Battery Backup Unit (BBU), the BBU is on
charge or discharge, the BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/
Preserved cache reaches 50% of the physical cache. It is
recommended that you set the write policy to this mode.
● If the firmware version of the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller
card is 4.650.00-6121 or later, the following write policies are
supported:
– Write Back: The controller card automatically switches to
the Write Through mode when the controller card has no
Battery Backup Unit (BBU), the BBU is on charge or
discharge, the BBU is faulty, or the Pinned/Preserved cache
reaches 50% of the physical cache. It is recommended that
you set the write policy to this mode.
– Always Write Back: When the cache receives all data, the
NOTE
The Always Write Back mode is not recommended because DDR write
data of the RAID controller card will be lost if the server is powered off
and the supercapacitor is not installed or being charged.
Default Default write caching policy.

Write Cache
Policy
Disable Whether background initialization is disabled.

Background
Initialization

Read Cache Current read caching policy.

Policy ● No Read Ahead: disables the Read Ahead function.
● Read Ahead: enables the Read Ahead function. The RAID
controller card prefetches sequential data or the data
Input/ Read policy.

Output ● Direct: Data is read directly from drives instead of from cache.
● Cached: Data is read from cache.
Step 2 Set the Advanced parameters described in Table 8-69.

Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
8.9.2.4 Drive Management

This screen allows you to view the basic properties of a drive and perform
operations on the drive.
Screen Description
Figure 8-212 shows the Drive Management screen, which lists the drives.

Figure 8-212 Drive List
NOTE
The drive information is described as follows:

● 1 indicates the port number of the RAID controller card. Drive C0/Drive Port A indicates
Port A and Drive C1/Drive Port B indicates Port B.
● 2 indicates the position of the enclosure or backplane.
● 3 indicates the slot number of the drive.
● 4 indicates the type of the drive.
● 5 indicates the capacity of the drive.
● 6 indicates the status of the drive.
● 7 indicates the sector size of the drive.
Select a drive and press Enter. The drive detail screen is displayed, as shown in




● Initialize Drive: initializes the drive.
● Drive Erase: erases data on a hard drive. To erase data
on a member drive in a RAID array, delete the RAID
array in advance. To erase data on a hot spare drive,
cancel settings of the hot spare drive. To erase data on a
JBOD drive, set the drive to the Unconfigured Good
state.
– Simple: erases data on a hard drive only one round.
– Normal: erases data on a hard drive three rounds.
– Thorough: erases data on a hard drive nine rounds.
– Stop Erase: stops data erasure.
● Make Unconfigured Good/Bad: changes the drive
status.
● Make JBOD: Uses a drive directly without adding it to
any RAID.
● Assign Global Hot Spare Drive: sets the drive as a
global hot spare drive.
● Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive: sets the drive as a
● Unassign Hot Spare Drive: deletes the hot spare drive.
● Place Drive Online: changes the drive state from
Offline to Online.
NOTE
● The Place Drive Online operation does not change drive data.
After this operation, drives in a RAID array have inconsistent
data. To prevent data inconsistency, do not directly place an
offline drive online. Select Rebuild and add the offline drive to
the RAID array.
● If all drives are set to the JBOD mode, the Make JBOD option is
unavailable. If all drives are set to Unconfigured Good, the
Make Unconfigured Good option is unavailable.
● After initialization or erasure is complete, data is deleted from
the drive. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
Drive ID ID of the drive.
Status Current operating status of the drive.
Size Capacity of the drive.
Type Type of the drive.
Model Model of the drive.

Hardware Vendor Vendor of the drive.
Associated Virtual Virtual drive to which the drive belongs.

Drive
Advanced... Advanced properties of the drive.

Step 1 Set Operation to Assign Global Hot Spare Drive.
----End

Step 1 Set Operation to Assign Dedicated Hot Spare Drive.
Step 3 Select the virtual drive to be associated and press Enter.
----End
Safely Erasing Data from a Drive

NOTE
This operation will delete data on the drive. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.

Step 1 Set Operation to Drive Erase.
Step 2 Select Erase Mode and press Enter.
Figure 8-214 Selecting the erase type
Step 3 Select the erase type and press Enter.
----End
Setting the Drive in Unconfigured Good State to JBOD

Step 1 Enable the pass-through feature. For details, see Configuring JBOD Mode.
Step 2 On the screen shown in Figure 8-212, select the drive to be set and press Enter.
The operation screen is displayed.
Step 3 Set Operation to Make JBOD.

----End
Checking the Drive Erasing Process

On the screen shown in Figure 8-212, select the drive to be viewed and press
Enter.
The erasing process of the drive is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-215.
Figure 8-215 Drive erasing process

The drive properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-216. Table 8-71

Figure 8-216 Drive Properties
Certified Certification status of the drive.
Logical Sector Size Size of a logical sector.
Physical Sector Size of a physical sector.

Size
SMART Status Whether the SMART function is enabled.
Media Error Number of media errors.
Predicted Fail Number of predictive failures.

Count
SAS Address SAS address of the drive.
Drive Power State Power status of the drive.
Emergency Spare Whether emergency sparing is supported, that is, whether

idle drives and hot spare drives can be used as backup
drives.
Commissioned Whether any drive is assigned to a RAID array as a hot

Hot Spare spare drive.
Cache Setting Whether cache setting is enabled.

Available Size Available space of the drive.
Used Space Used space of the drive.
Disk Protocol Protocol supported by the drive.
Negotiated Drive Data transmission rate of the drive.

Transfer Speed
Number of Number of connectors.

Connections
FDE Capable Whether the drive supports the Full Disk Encryption (FDE)
technology.
Protection Whether the drive supports data protection.

Capable
----End
8.9.2.5 Hardware Components

This screen provides sensor information about the RAID controller card.
Screen Introduction
Figure 8-217 shows the Hardware Components screen. Table 8-72 describes the

Figure 8-217 Hardware Components

Temperature Current temperature sensor status.

Sensors
Fans Current fan module operating status.
Power Supplies Current power module operating status.
Viewing Advanced Information About Sensors

Step 2 Select Enclosure Management and press Enter.
The component selection screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-218.

Figure 8-218 Selecting a component
Step 3 Select Select Enclosure and press Enter.

Step 4 Select a component and press Enter.
Step 5 Select View Enclosure Status and press Enter.
The sensor details are displayed, as shown in Figure 8-219.
Figure 8-219 Sensor details

Step 6 Under TEMPERATURE SENSOR, select Select Temperature Sensor and press
Enter to select a temperature sensor.
Temperature Sensor Status shows the status of the selected sensor.
Step 7 Under FAN, select Select Fan and press Enter to select a fan sensor.
Fan Status shows the status of the selected sensor.
Step 8 Under POWER SUPPLY, select Select Power Supply and press Enter to select a
power sensor.
Power Supply Status shows the status of the selected sensor.
----End
8.9.3 View Server Profile

This screen allows you to perform management operations.
Screen Description
The View Server Profile screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-220. Table 8-73
Figure 8-220 View Server Profile

UEFI Spec Version Specifies the UEFI specification version supported by the
server.
Controller Manages the controller. For details, see 8.9.2.2 Controller

Management Management.
Hardware Manages controller components. For details, see 8.9.2.5

Components Hardware Components.
Drive Manages physical drives. For details, see 8.9.2.4 Drive

Management Management.
Virtual Drive Manages virtual drives. For details, see 8.9.2.3 Virtual
Management Drive Management.
8.9.4 View Foreign Configuration

This screen allows you to view, import, and delete foreign configurations.
Screen Introduction
Figure 8-221 shows the View Foreign Configuration screen.
Figure 8-221 View Foreign Configuration


Step 5 Click OK.
----End

Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.9.5 Configure
This screen allows you to clear the current configurations.
Screen Introduction
Figure 8-222 shows the Configure screen.

Figure 8-222 Configure
Clearing the Current Configuration

Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.9.6 Set Factory Defaults

Step 1 On the main screen, select Set Factory Default and press Enter.

----End
8.9.7 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options

This screen allows you to view and import advanced software properties of the
controller card.
Screen Introduction
Figure 8-223 shows the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options screen.
Figure 8-223 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options
SAFE ID Security code of the RAID controller card.
Activation Key Key for activating advanced features.
Active Activates advanced features.

The LSI SAS3108 does not support activation of advanced
features.

Deactive All Trail Deactivates all advanced features.

Software
8.9.8 Exit
Step 1 On the LSI SAS3108 main screen, press ESC. The Advanced screen shown in

displayed.
----End


About MegaRAID Storage Manager
MegaRAID Storage Manager enables you to configure RAID controllers, and
monitor, and maintain storage configurations and can be installed on a server OS.
MegaRAID Storage Manager provides a range of functions, such as RAID array
configuration, RAID level migration, RAID array deletion, RAID information import,
and drive status adjustment.
MegaRAID Storage Manager provides a GUI and does not support CLIs.
Table 8-75 lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager and user guide download links.
Table 8-75 MegaRAID Storage Manager download links
Software Download Link User Guide Download Link
MegaRAID Storage Manager 12Gb/s MegaRAID SAS Software User

Guide
Downloading MegaRAID Storage Manager
1. Click the software download link listed in Table 8-75.

2. Click Management Software and Tools.
3. Find MegaRAID Storage Manager and click it to download it.
NOTICE
Download the MegaRAID Storage Manager software for the OS you are using
(Linux or Windows).
Downloading the MegaRAID Storage Manager User Guide
1. Click the software user guide download link listed in Table 8-75.
2. Click User Guide.
3. Click 12Gb/s MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide.

restarting servers.

8.11.1 Downloading and Installing StorCLI

Downloading StorCLI
Step 3 Download StorCLI of the latest version.
OSs.
----End
Installing StorCLI
The StorCLI installation method varies depending on the OS type. The following
uses Windows, Linux, and VMware as examples to describe the StorCLI installation
procedure. For the installation procedures for other OSs, see the Readme file in
the software package.
The StorCLI tool supported by LSI SAS3108 is storcli64.
● Installing StorCLI in Windows
a. Upload the tool package applicable to the Windows to a directory (such
as C:\tmp) on the server.
b. In the Run box, enter cmd and press Enter to open the Command
Prompt.
c. Run the cd Directory where the tool package is stored command, such
as cd C:\tmp.
For Windows, StorCLI does not require installation. You can directly run
● Installing StorCLI in Linux
a. Use a file transfer tool (such as PuTTY) to upload the package applicable
to Linux to a directory (such as the /tmp directory) on the server OS.
b. On the Linux CLI, run the rpm -ivh /tmp/StorCLIxxx.rpm command to
install the StorCLI tool.
NOTE
The StorCLI installation directory is /opt/MegaRAID/storcli/. You need to access

the directory and run RAID card commands.
● Installing StorCLI in VMware
a. Use a file transfer tool (such as PuTTY) to upload the package applicable
to VMware to a directory (such as the /tmp directory) on the server OS.
b. On the VMware CLI, run the esxcli software vib install -v=/tmp/
vmware-xxx-storcli.vib --no-sig-check command to install the StorCLI

tool. /tmp/vmware-xxx-storcli.vib is the complete path of the StorCLI

tool file.
NOTE
The StorCLI installation directory is /opt/lsi/storcli/. You need to access the

8.11.2 Common StorCLI Commands
8.11.2.1 Querying the RAID Controller Card ID
Function
Query the ID of an LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card.
Format
storcli64 show
Example
# Query the LSI SAS3108 RAID controller card ID.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 show
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017
Status Code = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Number of Controllers = 1
Host Name = localhost.localdomain
Operating System = Linux3.10.0-693.el7.x86_64
StoreLib IT Version = 07.0500.0200.0300
StoreLib IR3 Version = 15.02-0
System Overview :
===============
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctl Model Ports PDs DGs DNOpt VDs VNOpt BBU sPR DS EHS ASOs Hlth
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0 SAS3108 8 3 0 0 0 0 Msng Off - Y 3 Opt
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctl=Controller Index|DGs=Drive groups|VDs=Virtual drives|Fld=Failed

PDs=Physical drives|DNOpt=DG NotOptimal|VNOpt=VD NotOptimal|Opt=Optimal
Msng=Missing|Dgd=Degraded|NdAtn=Need Attention|Unkwn=Unknown
sPR=Scheduled Patrol Read|DS=DimmerSwitch|EHS=Emergency Hot Spare
Y=Yes|N=No|ASOs=Advanced Software Options|BBU=Battery backup unit
Hlth=Health|Safe=Safe-mode boot
NOTE
In the command output, the number in the Ctl column is the ID of the RAID controller card.
In this example, the RAID controller card ID is 0.

8.11.2.2 Querying and Setting Spinup Parameters
Function
Query and set the interval between the spinup of drives and the number of drives
that spin up simultaneously upon power-on.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show spinupdelay
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show spinupdrivecount
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set spinupdelay=time
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set spinupdrivecount=count
Parameters

time Specifies the interval The default value is 2

between the spinup of and the unit is second.
drives.
count Specifies the number of The default value is 4.

drives that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
For details about how to query the RAID controller card ID, see 8.11.2.1 Querying
the RAID Controller Card ID.
Usage Guidelines
Retain the default settings.
Example
# Query the Spinup parameters of a RAID controller card.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show spinupdelay
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show spinupdrivecount

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
# Set spinupdelay to 20s and spinupdrivecount to 5 for the controller card.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set spinupdelay=20
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set spinupdrivecount=5
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
--------------------------
8.11.2.3 Setting Drive PowerSave Parameters
Function
Set the PowerSave parameters for idle drives and hot spare drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set ds= state type= disktype spindowntime= time
Parameters

drives.
state Specifies whether to ● on: enable

enable the power saving ● off: disable
mode.
disktype Specifies the drive type. ● 1: idle drive

● 2: hot spare drive

time Specifies the standby The unit is minute.

time. If there is no drive
I/O within the standby
time, the drive enters the
spin-down mode.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the power saving mode for an idle drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set ds=on type=1 spindowntime=30
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------
SpnDwnUncDrv Enable
SpnDwnTm 30 minutes
--------------------------
8.11.2.4 Setting the Initialization Function for a Physical Drive and Viewing
the Initialization Progress
Function
Set the initialization function for physical drives and view the initialization
progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action initialization
Parameters

drives.


enclosure where the
action Specifies the operation ● show: shows

to be performed. initialization progress.
● start: starts
initialization.
● stop: stops
initialization.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Initialize the drive in slot 3 and view the initialization progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 start initialization
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Initialization Succeeded.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 show initialization
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Initialization Status Succeeded.
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
8.11.2.5 Setting the Data Erasing Mode for a Drive and Viewing the Erasing
Progress
Function
Set the data erasing mode for a drive and view the erasing progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id show erase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id stop erase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id start erase mode

Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the
mode Specifies the data erase ● simple: erases data

mode. once.
● normal: erases data
three times.
● thorough: erases data
nine times.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Erase the data in simple mode from the drive in slot 3 and view the erasing
progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 start erase simple
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Erase Succeeded.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 show erase
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Erse Status Succeeded.
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 stop erase
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Stop Drive Erase Succeeded.

8.11.2.6 Setting Background Task Resource Usage
Function
Set the background initialization rate, consistency check rate, drive patrol rate,
RAID rebuilding rate, and RAID capacity expansion and migration rate.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set action=value
Parameters

action Specifies the background ● bgirate: background

task whose resource initialization rate
usage is to be set. ● ccrate: consistency
check rate
● prrate: drive patrol
rate
● rebuildrate: RAID
rebuilding rate
● reconrate: RAID
capacity expansion
and migration rate
value Specifies the resource 1 to 100

usage of a background
task.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the drive patrol rate to 30.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set prrate=30
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
-----------------------

Ctrl_Prop Value
-----------------------
Patrol Read Rate 30%
-----------------------
8.11.2.7 Configuring the BIOS Function: Stop on Error
Function
Enable the Stop On Error function so that the controller BIOS stops startup when
it detects an error.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set bios mode=action
Parameters

action Specifies whether to ● soe: The controller

enable the Stop On Error BIOS stops startup
function. when it detects an
error.
● ie: The controller
BIOS ignores errors
during startup.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the Stop On Error function.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set bios mode=soe
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
----------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
----------------
BIOS Mode SOE
----------------

Function
Syntax
Syntax Descripti
on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id add vd rlevel[0|1|5|6|10|50|60] Creates a

[size=<VD1_Sz>,<VD2_Sz>,..|*all] [name=<VDNAME1>,..] RAID
drives=enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid- array.
endid,enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid-endid
[pdperarray=pdperarray] [pdcache=on|off|*default][pi] [wt|*wb|
awb] [nora|*ra] [*direct|cached] [Strip=<8|16|32|64|128|256|1024>]
[EmulationType=0|1|2] [Spares=[enclosure_id:slot_id|
enclosure_id:startid-endid,enclosure_id:slot_id|enclosure_id:startid-
endid]
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id del Deletes a

RAID
array.
NOTE
* indicates a default value.
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a -


enclosure where the
drive is installed.
rlevel Specifies the target RAID The value can be 0, 1, 5,

array level. 6, 10, 50, or 60.
size Specifies the target RAID The default value is all,

array capacity. that is, the total capacity
of all member drives.
name Specifies the name of -

the target RAID array.

drives Specifies the drives to be -

added to the target RAID
array.
startid-endid Specifies the start ID and -

end ID of the drives to
be added to the RAID
array.
slot_id Specifies the drive ID. -
pdperarray Specifies the number of -

drives in a subarray.
Set this parameter only
when you create a RAID
10, RAID 50, or RAID 60
array.
pdcache Sets the cache status of ● on

a member drive in the ● off
RAID array.
● default
pi Enables data protection. -
wrcache Specifies the write cache ● wt: When the drive

attribute of the RAID subsystem receives all
array. wrcache=wt|wb| data, the RAID
awb is the complete controller card signals
command and wrcache= the host that data
can be omitted. transmission is
complete.
is complete.
● awb: The RAID
controller card is
forced into the wb
mode when no
capacitor fails.

rdcache Specifies the read cache ● ra: When the required

attribute of the RAID data is read from the
array. rdcache=ra|nora is virtual drive, the
the complete command subsequent data is
and rdcache= can be read and stored in the
omitted. cache. When users
access the data, the
data can be hit in the
cache, which reduces
the drive seeks, saves
the response time,
and improves the
data read speed.
● nora: The RAID
controller card reads
data from the virtual
drive only after
receiving a data read
command.
iopolicy Specifies the I/O policy ● Direct:

of the RAID array. – In a read scenario,
iopolicy=direct|cached data is directly
is the complete read from drives.
command and iopolicy= (If Read Policy is
can be omitted. set to Read
NOTE Ahead, data is
Direct IO is set by default. read from the
Cache IO is not supported.
RAID cache.)
For details, see the
firmware release notes of – In a write scenario,
the RAID controller card. data is written into
the cache of the
RAID controller
card. (If Write
Policy is set to
Write Through,
data is directly
written into
drives.)
from or written to the
cache. Use this option
only when configuring
CacheCade 1.1.

Strip Specifies the strip size of MR card: The value can

the RAID array. be 64, 128, 256, 512, or
1024.
iMR card: The value can
only be 64.
The unit is KB.
EmulationType Sets the logical drive ● 0: Default. If there are

sector size reported to any 512e drives
the OS. among member
(4K). If there are no
512e drives among
member drives, the
sector size is
displayed as 512n.
● 1: Disable. Even if
there are 512e drives
among member
is displayed as 512n.
● 2: Force. Even if there
are no 512e drives
among member
(4K).
Spares Specifies a hot spare -

drive for the RAID array.
raid_id Specifies the ID of the -

NOTE
● For details about how to query the IDs, see 8.11.2.29 Querying RAID Controller Card,
RAID Array, or Physical Drive Information.
● Use a comma (,) to separate multiple drives to be added to a RAID array. The format of
a single drive is enclosure_id:slot_id. The format of drives in consecutive slots is
enclosure_id:startid-endid.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 add vd r0 size=100GB drives=252:0-3
Controller = 0
Status = Success

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 del
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Delete VD Succeeded
8.11.2.9 Setting the Cache Read and Write Policies of a RAID Array
Function
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id set wrcache=mode
Parameters

card.
raid_id RAID ID. –
mode Cache read/write mode. ● wt: When the drive

subsystem receives all
data, the RAID
controller card signals
the host that data
transmission is
complete.
is complete.
● awb: The RAID
controller card is
forced into the wb
mode when no
capacitor fails.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the cache read/write mode to wt.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set wrcache=wt
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Details Status :
==============
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
0 wrCache WT Success 0-
---------------------------------------
8.11.2.10 Setting an I/O Policy for a RAID Array
Function
Set an I/O policy for a RAID group.
Syntax
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id set iopolicy=mode
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a RAID -

controller card.
raid_id Specifies a RAID ID. -

mode Sets an I/O policy for a ● Direct: The value has

RAID group. different definitions
in read and write
scenarios.
– In a read scenario,
data is directly
read from drives.
(If Read Policy is
set to Read
Ahead, data is
read from the
cache of the RAID
controller card.)
– In a write
scenario, data is
written into the
cache of the RAID
controller card. (If
Write Policy is set
to Write Through,
data is directly
written into hard
drives.)
from or written to
the cache of the
Select this value only
when CacheCade 1.1
is configured.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the I/O policy of a RAID array to direct.
[root@linux ~]# storcli64 /c0/v1 set iopolicy=direct
CLI Version = 007.1416.0000.0000 July 24, 2020
Operating system = Linux 4.14.0-115.el7a.0.1.aarch64
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Detailed Status :
===============
----------------------------------------


----------------------------------------
1 IoPolicy Direct Success 0-
----------------------------------------
8.11.2.11 Setting a RAID Access Policy
Function
Set an access policy for a RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id set accesspolicy=mode
Parameters

mode Specifies a RAID access ● rw: The RAID array is

policy. readable and writable.
● blocked: The RAID
array is inaccessible.
● ro: The RAID array is
read-only.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the RAID access policy to rw.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set accesspolicy=rw
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Details Status :
==============
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
0 AccPolicy RW Success 0-
---------------------------------------

8.11.2.12 Setting RAID Foreground Initialization
Function
Set RAID foreground initialization.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id start mode
Parameters

mode Specifies a foreground ● init: writes zeros to

initialization mode. the first 100 MB
space of a RAID array.
The RAID array
changes to the
Optimal state after
initialization.
● init full: write zeros
to the entire RAID
array. During the
initialization, the RAID
array is in the
Initialization state.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Quickly initialize a RAID array.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 start init
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start INIT Operation Success

8.11.2.13 Setting RAID Background Initialization and Viewing the

Initialization Progress
Function
Pause, resume, and stop RAID background initialization and view the initialization
progress.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vraid_id action bgi
Parameters

action Specifies the operation ● show: displays

to be performed. background
initialization progress.
● pause: pauses
background
initialization.
● resume: resumes
background
initialization.
● stop: stops
background
initialization.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# View the background initialization progress.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 show bgi
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
===================
------------------------------------------------------

VD Operation Progress% Staus Estimated Time Left

------------------------------------------------------
0 BGI 3 In progress 53 Minutes
------------------------------------------------------
8.11.2.14 Setting Boot Device
Function
Set a virtual drive or physical drive as a boot drive.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id set bootdrive=on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set bootdrive=on
Parameters

card.
vd_id ID of the target virtual –

drive.

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot ID of the physical –

drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set VD 0 to boot drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 set bootdrive=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
Detailed Status :
===============
----------------------------------------
VD Property Value Staus ErrCd ErrMsg
----------------------------------------
0 Boot Drive On Success 0 -
----------------------------------------
# Set the drive in slot 7 to boot drive.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 set bootdrive=on

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Noe
=====================
-------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-------------------
BootDrive PD:252_7
-------------------
8.11.2.15 Setting the Emergency Hot Spare Function
Function
Enable the emergency hot spare function and allow the emergency hot spare
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set eghs eug=state
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set eghs smarter=state
Parameters

state Specifies whether to ● on: enabled

enable the emergency ● off: disabled
hot spare function.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the emergency hot spare function and allow the emergency hot spare
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set eghs eug=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value

------------------
EmergencyUG ON
------------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set eghs smarter=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
-----------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-----------------------
EmergencySmarter ON
-----------------------
8.11.2.16 Setting the Hot Spare Drive Status
Function
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id add hotsparedrive [dgs=vd_id]
Parameters

resides.

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot ID of the physical –

drive.
vd_id ID of the virtual drive to –

which the dedicated hot
spare drive belongs.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 add hotsparedrive
Controller = 0

Status = Success
# Set the drive in slot 3 to the dedicated hot spare drive for VD 0.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s3 add hotsparedrive dgs=0
Controller = 0
Status = Success
8.11.2.17 Querying and Setting RAID Rebuild
Function
Start, pause, resume, and stop RAID rebuild, and query the progress.
Syntax
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action rebuild
controller_id Specifies the ID of the -

where the drive resides.

enclosure where the
drive is installed.
slot_id Specifies the slot number -

of the drive.
action Specifies the operation ● start: starts rebuild.

to be performed. ● show: shows the
rebuild progress.
● pause: pauses rebuild.
● resume: resumes
rebuild.
● stop: stops rebuild.
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
# Manually start rebuild.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 start rebuild

Controller = 0
Status = Success
# Show the current rebuild status of a drive.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 show rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Rebuild Status Succeeded.
-----------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
# Suspend the drive rebuild process.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 pause rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Pause Drive Rebuild Succeeded.
# Resume the rebuild.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 resume rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Resume Drive Rebuild Succeeded.
# Stop the rebuild.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 stop rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Stop Drive Rebuild Succeeded.
8.11.2.18 Querying and Setting Copyback
Function
Start, pause, resume, and stop copyback, and query the progress.
Syntax
Syntax Description
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id Starts copyback.

start copyback
target=target_enclosure_id:target_slot_id
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id Pauses, resumes, displays,

action copyback and stops copyback.

controller_id Specifies the ID of the -

where the drive resides.

enclosure where the
drive is installed.
slot_id Specifies the slot number -

of the drive.
target_enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the -

enclosure where the
copyback target drive
resides.
target_slot_id Specifies the slot number -

of the copyback target
drive.
action Specifies the operation ● show: shows the

to be performed. copyback progress.
● pause: pauses
copyback.
● resume: resumes
copyback.
● stop: stops copyback.
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
# Manually start copyback.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s7 start copyback target=70:3
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Copyback Succeeded.
# Show the current copyback status of a drive.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s3 show copyback
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Copyback Status Succeeded.

-----------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
# Suspend the drive copyback process.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s3 pause copyback
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Pause Drive Copyback Succeeded.
# Resume the copyback.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s3 resume copyback
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Resume Drive Copyback Succeeded.
# Stop the copyback.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e70/s3 stop copyback
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Stop Drive Copyback Succeeded.
8.11.2.19 Setting a SMART Scan Interval
Function
Set a SMART scan interval.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set smartpollinterval=value
Parameters

drives.
value Specifies a SMART scan The unit is second.

interval.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the SMART scan interval to 60 seconds.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set smartpollinterval=60
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
-------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
-------------------------------
SmartPollInterval 60 second(s)
-------------------------------
8.11.2.20 Increasing Member Drive Available Space to Expand RAID
Function
Adjust the available space of the virtual drive to expand its capacity if it does not
use all the capacity of member drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id expand size=capacity [expandarray]
Parameters

resides.

array.
capacity Capacity to be added. –
expandarray This parameter needs to -

be set when the
available capacity of the
drive group is increased
by replacing member
drives and the capacity
to be expanded exceeds
the original available
capacity of the drive
group.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query the VD's capacity that can be used for expansion.
[root@localhost ~]# storcli64 /c0/v1 show expansion
CLI Version = 007.1416.0000.0000 July 24, 2020
Operating system = Linux 4.19.36-vhulk1907.1.0.h691.eulerosv2r8.aarch64
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
EXPANSION INFORMATION :
=====================
--------------------------------------------
VD Size OCE NoArrExp WithArrExp Status
--------------------------------------------
1 10.000 GB Y 3.627 TB 5.447 TB -
--------------------------------------------
OCE - Online Capacity Expansion | WithArrExp - With Array Expansion

VD=Virtual Drive | NoArrExp - Without Array Expansion
NOTE
In the example, if the expansion capacity is less than 3.627 TB, the expandarray parameter
is not required; but if the expanded capacity is greater than 3.627 TB and less than 5.446
TB, the expandarray parameter is required.
# Expand the capacity of VD 0 by 200 GB.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 expand size=200GB
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = expansion operation succeeded.
EXPANSION RESULT :
================
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VD Size FreSpc ReqSize AbsUsrSz %FreSpc NewSize Statsu NoArrExp
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 100.0 GB 457.861 GB 200.0 GB 201.458 GB 44 301.458 GB - 457.861 GB
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size - Current VD size|FreSpc - Freespace available before expansion
%FreSpc - Requested expansion size in % of available free space
AbsUsrSz - User size rounded to nearest %
NOTE
● You can also add drives to the RAID array. For details, see 8.11.2.21 Adding Drives to a
RAID Array or Migrating RAID Level After Expansion.
● The RAID controller card adjusts the capacity to be added based on the drive type.
Therefore, the expanded capacity may be varied.
8.11.2.21 Adding Drives to a RAID Array or Migrating RAID Level After

Expansion
Function
Add drives to a RAID array to expand the RAID capacity.

After adding drives, migrate the RAID level.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id start migrate type=rlevel option=add
drives=enclosure_id:slot_id
Parameters


enclosure where the

target RAID array.

of a new drive to be
added.
level Specifies the target RAID ● If the target RAID

level after adding a new level is the same as
drive. the original RAID
level, the command
expanses the RAID
capacity.
● If the target RAID
level is different from
the original RAID
level, the command
changes the RAID
level.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Add the drive in slot 2 to the RAID 0 array for capacity expansion.
Controller = 0
Status = Success

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
# Add the drive to a single-disk RAID 0 array and change the RAID level to RAID 1.
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
NOTE
You can also expand the RAID capacity by adding the available capacity for its member
drives. For details, see 8.11.2.20 Increasing Member Drive Available Space to Expand
RAID.
8.11.2.22 Querying and Clearing PreservedCache Data
Function
Query and clear PreservedCache data.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show preservedcache
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id delete preservedcache force
Parameters

drives.

target RAID array.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query PreservedCache data.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show preservedcache
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = No Virtual Drive has Preserved Cache Data.
Function
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id[/vvd_id]show cc
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id start cc force
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id action cc
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set cc=conc delay=value starttime=time

excludevd=evd_id
Parameters

resides.

array.
action Operation to be ● pause: pauses the

performed. check.
check.
● stop: stops the check.
value Consistency check –

period.
time Consistency check start Example: 2016/07/14

time. 22:00:00

evd_id ID of a virtual drive that –

does not require
consistency check.
Usage Guidelines
If the show command does not contain /vvd_id, the consistency check parameters
are queried.
If the show command contains /vvd_id, the consistency check progress is queried.
Example
# Set automatic consistency check parameters.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set cc=conc delay=1 starttime=2016/07/14 22:00:00 excludevd=0
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
------------------------------------
CC Mode CONC
CC delay 1
CC Starttime 2016/07/14 22:00:00
CC ExcludeVD(0) Success
------------------------------------
# Query the consistency check progress.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v1 show cc
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
===================
-----------------------------------------------------------
VD Operation Progress% Status Estimited Time Left
-----------------------------------------------------------
0 CC - Not in progress -
8.11.2.24 Querying and Setting Patrolread Parameters
Function
Query and set patrolread parameters.

Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread starttime=time
maxconcurrentpd=number
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread delay=delaytime
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set patrolread={on mode=<auto|manual>}|{off}
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show patrolread
Parameters

resides.
time Patrol read start time. Example: 2016/07/15

23:00:00
number Number of drives to be –

checked concurrently.
delaytime Patrol read interval. The unit is hour.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the patrolread start time to 2016/07/15 23:00:00 and the number of drives
to be checked concurrently to 2.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set patrolread starttime=2016/07/15 23:00:00 maxconcurrentpd=2
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------------------
PR Starttime 2016/07/15 23:00:00
PR MaxConcurrentPd 2
---------------------------------------
# Enable the patrol read and set it to the automatic mode.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set patrolread=on mode=auto
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None

=====================
---------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------------------
Patrol Read Mode auto
---------------------------------------
# Query the patrolread information.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show patrolread
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
--------------------------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
--------------------------------------------
PR Mode 2016/07/15 23:00:00
PR Execution Delay
PR iterations completed 0
PR Next Start time 07/16/2016,00:00:00
PR on SSD Disabled
PR Current State Stopped
--------------------------------------------
8.11.2.25 Querying and Setting CacheFlush Parameters
Function
Query and set CacheFlush parameters.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show cacheflushint
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set cacheflushint time
Parameters

time Specifies the CacheFlush The unit is second.

interval.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the CacheFlush interval to 10.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set cacheflushint=10
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------
Cache Flush Interval 10 sec
---------------------------
# Query the CacheFlush interval.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 show cacheflushint
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
---------------------------
Cache Flush Interval 10
---------------------------
8.11.2.26 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function
Function
Enable the transparent transmission function of a RAID controller card and specify
the pass-through drive. After the configuration, the OS can directly manage the
drive.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set jbod=state
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set JBOD
Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the

state Specifies whether to ● on

enable the JBOD ● off
function of a RAID
controller card.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the JBOD function of a RAID controller card and set the drive in slot 7 as
the JBOD drive.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set jbod=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
----------------
Ctrl_Prop Value
----------------
JBOD ON
----------------
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 set JBOD
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Set Drive JBOD Succeeded.
8.11.2.27 Setting Drive Status
Function
Set drive status.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set state
Parameters



enclosure where the

state Specifies the target drive ● online: enables a

state. drive online. When a
member disk in a
RAID array in the
Degraded state is
offline, you can use
this parameter to add
the offline member
drive to the RAID
array to make this
drive online.
● offline: enables a
drive offline. The
offline drive will be
detached from its
RAID array. If the
RAID array has
redundancy feature,
the drive offline will
degrade the RAID
array. If the number
of offline drives
exceeds the maximum
failed drives in the
array, the RAID array
will be offline. If the
RAID array does not
feature redundancy,
the drive offline will
cause the RAID array
to turn into the Failed
state.
● jbod: enables the
drive to work in JBOD
mode.
● good:
– Enables a drive in
ubad state to turn
into the ugood
(foreign) state.
Then, you can
import a foreign
configuration to
this drive or clear
foreign
configurations
from this drive.

– Enables a drive in
JBOD state to turn
into the ugood
state. The drive in
ugood state can
be used to create
RAID or a hot
spare drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Change the state of the drive in slot 1 from Unconfigured Bad to
Unconfigured Good.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e0/s1 set good force
Controller = 0
Status = Success
#Set the drive in slot 7 as the JBOD drive.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 set JBOD
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Set Drive JBOD Succeeded.
Function
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id action locate
Parameters

drives.

enclosure_id Specifies the ID of the The value can be all,

enclosure where the which indicates that the
drives are installed. UID indicators of all the
will be turned on.
slot_id Specifies a slot number. The value can be all,

UID indicators of all the
will be turned on.
action Specifies the operation ● start: turns on the

to be performed. UID indicator of a
specified drive.
● stop: turns off the
UID indicator of a
specified drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s7 start locate
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Start Drive Locate Succeeded.

Information
Function
virtual drives.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id show
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id show all
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id show all

Parameters
controller_id ID of a RAID controller If this parameter is set to

card where the drive all, information about all
resides. controllers managed by
this tool is queried.
enclosure_id ID of the enclosure If this parameter is set to

housing the drive. all, information about all
drive enclosures
connected to the
managed controllers is
queried.
slot_id Slot ID of the physical The value can be all,

drive. which indicates that the
information about all
physical drives will be
queried.
vd_id Virtual drive ID. The value can be all,

information about all
virtual drives will be
queried.
Usage Guidelines
Table 8-76 describes the fields in the command output.
Table 8-76 Command output description

Value
storcli64 /ccontroller_id Product Name Model of the sas3108

show RAID controller
card.
FW Version Firmware 4.660.00-8140

version of the
RAID controller
card.
Driver Name Driver name of megaraid_sas

the RAID
controller card.
Driver Version Driver version of 06.811.02.00-

the RAID rh1
controller card.


Value
Current Working mode RAID-Mode

Personality of the RAID
controller card.
storcli64 / SN Serial number of PHWL517601Y

ccontroller_id/ the physical R800RGN
eenclosure_id/sslot_id drive.
show all
Manufacturer Id Vendor ID of the ATA
physical drive.
Model Number Module number INTEL

of the physical SSDSC2BB800
drive. G4
Firmware Firmware D2010370

Revision version of the
physical drive.
Raw size Physical drive 745.211 GB

capacity. [0x5d26ceb0
Sectors]
Logical Sector Logical partition 512B

Size size of the
physical drive.
Physical Sector Size of the 4 KB

Size physical sector.
storcli64 / TYPE Level of the RAID1

ccontroller_id/vvd_id RAID array.
show all
State RAID array Optl
status.
Access Data access RW

policy applied on
the RAID array.
Cache Current read/ RWTD

write policy and
I/O policy of the
RAID array.
Size Size of the RAID 100.0 GB

array.
PDs for VD0 Physical drives in -

the RAID array.
Strip Size Strip size of the 256 KB

RAID array.


Value
Write Cache write Write Through

Cache(initial policy of the
setting) RAID array.
Disk Cache Cache policy of Disk's Default

Policy member drives
in the RAID
array.
Example
# Query detailed information about RAID controller card 0.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0 show
Generating detailed summary of the adapter, it may take a while to complete.
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017

Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Product Name = SAS3108

Serial Number =
SAS Address = 50030130f0900000
PCI Address = 00:01:00:00
System Time = 07/07/2018 22:06:42
Mfg. Date = 00/00/00
Controller Time = 07/07/2018 14:06:41
FW Package Build = 24.16.0-0093
BIOS Version = 6.32.02.0_4.17.08.00_0x06150500
FW Version = 4.660.00-8140
Driver Name = megaraid_sas
Driver Version = 06.811.02.00-rh1
Current Personality = RAID-Mode
Vendor Id = 0x1000
Device Id = 0x5D
SubVendor Id = 0x19E5
SubDevice Id = 0xD207
Host Interface = PCI-E
Device Interface = SAS-12G
Bus Number = 1
Device Number = 0
Function Number = 0
Drive Groups = 1
TOPOLOGY :
========
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DG Arr Row EID:Slot DID Type State BT Size PDC PI SED DS3 FSpace TR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0- - - - RAID1 Optl N 744.125 GB dflt N N none N N
00 - - - RAID1 Optl N 744.125 GB dflt N N none N N
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------



TR=Transport Ready
Virtual Drives = 1
VD LIST :
=======
---------------------------------------------------------------
DG/VD TYPE State Access Consist Cache Cac sCC Size Name
---------------------------------------------------------------
0/0 RAID1 Optl RW Yes RWBD - ON 744.125 GB
---------------------------------------------------------------
Cac=CacheCade|Rec=Recovery|OfLn=OffLine|Pdgd=Partially Degraded|Dgrd=Degraded
Optl=Optimal|RO=Read Only|RW=Read Write|HD=Hidden|TRANS=TransportReady|B=Blocked|
Consist=Consistent|R=Read Ahead Always|NR=No Read Ahead|WB=WriteBack|
Check Consistency
Physical Drives = 6
PD LIST :
=======
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Cachevault_Info :
===============
------------------------------------
Model State Temp Mode MfgDate
------------------------------------
CVPM02 Optimal 28C - 2016/11/04
------------------------------------
# Query information about the physical drive in slot 0.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e252/s0 show all
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Show Drive Information Succeeded.
Drive /c0/e252/s0 :
=================
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Drive /c0/e252/s0 - Detailed Information :

========================================
Drive /c0/e252/s0 State :

=======================
Shield Counter = 0
Media Error Count = 0
Other Error Count = 0
Drive Temperature = 20C (68.00 F)
Predictive Failure Count = 0
S.M.A.R.T alert flagged by drive = No
Drive /c0/e252/s0 Device attributes :

===================================
SN = PHWL517601YR800RGN
Manufacturer Id = ATA
Model Number = INTEL SSDSC2BB800G4
NAND Vendor = NA
WWN = 55cd2e404c533246
Firmware Revision = D2010370
Raw size = 745.211 GB [0x5d26ceb0 Sectors]
Coerced size = 744.125 GB [0x5d040800 Sectors]
Non Coerced size = 744.711 GB [0x5d16ceb0 Sectors]
Device Speed = 6.0Gb/s
Link Speed = 6.0Gb/s
NCQ setting = Enabled
Write cache = N/A
Logical Sector Size = 512B
Physical Sector Size = 4 KB
Connector Name = Port A x1
Drive /c0/e252/s0 Policies/Settings :

===================================
Drive position = DriveGroup:0, Span:0, Row:1
Enclosure position = 1
Connected Port Number = 0(path0)
Sequence Number = 2
Commissioned Spare = No
Emergency Spare = No
Last Predictive Failure Event Sequence Number = 0
Successful diagnostics completion on = N/A
SED Capable = No
SED Enabled = No
Secured = No
Cryptographic Erase Capable = No
Locked = No
Needs EKM Attention = No
PI Eligible = No
Certified = No
Wide Port Capable = No
Port Information :
================

-----------------------------------------
Port Status Linkspeed SAS address
-----------------------------------------
0 Active 6.0Gb/s 0x4433221100000000
-----------------------------------------
Inquiry Data =
40 00 ff 3f 37 c8 10 00 00 00 00 00 3f 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 48 50 4c 57 31 35 36 37 31 30 52 59
30 38 52 30 4e 47 20 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 44
31 30 33 30 30 37 4e 49 45 54 20 4c 53 53 53 44
32 43 42 42 30 38 47 30 20 34 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 01 80
00 40 00 2f 00 40 00 00 00 00 07 00 ff 3f 10 00
3f 00 10 fc fb 00 01 bf ff ff ff 0f 00 00 07 00
# Query information about VD 0.

[root@rhel6u5 ~]# /opt/MegaRAID/storcli/storcli64 /c0/v0 show all
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
/c0/v0 :
======
---------------------------------------------------------
DG/VD TYPE State Access Consist Cache sCC Size Name
---------------------------------------------------------
1/0 RAID1 Optl RW Yes RWTD - 1.089 TB
---------------------------------------------------------
Cac=CacheCade|Rec=Recovery|OfLn=OffLine|Pdgd=Partially Degraded|dgrd=Degraded
Optl=Optimal|RO=Read Only|RW=Read Write|B=Blocked|Consist=Consistent|
R=Read Ahead Always|NR=No Read Ahead|WB=WriteBack|
Check Consistency
PDs for VD 0 :
============
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
EID:Slt DID State DG Size Intf Med SED PI SeSz Model Sp
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

SeSz-Sector Size|Sp-Spun|U-Up|D-Down|T-Transition|F-Foreign
CFShld-Configured shielded
VD0 Properties :
==============
Strip Size = 256 KB
Number of Blocks = 2341795840
VD has Emulated PD = No
Span Depth = 1
Number of Drives Per Span = 2
Write Cache(initial setting) = WriteThrough
Disk Cache Policy = Disk's Default

Encryption = None
Data Protection = Disabled
Active Operations = None
Exposed to OS = Yes
Creation Date = 04-01-2018
Creation Time = 12:38:35 PM
Emulation type = None
Function
Create a CacheCade virtual drive on an SSD.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id add vd cc raidlevel drives=enclosure_id:disk
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id del cachecade
Parameters

resides.

housing the drive.
level RAID level. The RAID level for

CacheCade can be RAID
0 or RAID 1.
disk Slot number of the If multiple member

member drive. drives are configured,
the value is a slot
number range, for
example, 0–3.
vd_id ID of the CacheCade –

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Configure a single-drive CacheCade RAID 0.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/ add vd cc raid0 drives=252:0

Controller = 0
Status = Success
# Delete CacheCade RAID 0.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/v0 del cachecade
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Disassociation of the Cachecade virtual drive is in progress and can take a few minutes to
complete.
The Cachecade virtual drive is deleted after the disassociation is complete.
8.11.2.31 Restoring Frn-Bad Drives
Function
Restore Frn-Bad drives in a RAID array to Online.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id set good
Parameters

drives.

enclosure where the
slot_id Specifies a member drive –

slot number.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
The drives in slots 1 and 5 are in the UBad F state, as shown in Figure 8-225.
Perform the following steps to restore the state to online:

1. Set the state of the drives in slots 1 and 5 to UGood.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e0/s1,5 set good
Controller = 0
Status = Success
2. Import foreign configurations.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/fall import
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Successfully imported foreign configuration
3. If the RAID array needs to be rebuilt, run the following command for slot 1 as
an example:
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e0/s1 start rebuild
Controller = 0
Status = Success
8.11.2.32 Query Supercapacitor Information
Function
Query supercapacitor information, such as the supercapacitor name and the cache
capacity of the TFM Flash card.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/cv show all
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of a If the value is all,

RAID controller card. information about all
RAID controllers will be
queried.

Example
# Query supercapacitor information.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/cv show all
CLI Version = 007.0409.0000.0000 Nov 06, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Cachevault_Info :
===============
--------------------
Property Value
--------------------
Type CVPM02
Temperature 28 C
State Optimal
--------------------
Firmware_Status :
===============
---------------------------------------
Property Value
---------------------------------------
Replacement required No
No space to cache offload No
Module microcode update required No
---------------------------------------
GasGaugeStatus :
==============
------------------------------
Property Value
------------------------------
Pack Energy 294 J
Capacitance 108 %
Remaining Reserve Space 0
------------------------------
Design_Info :
===========
------------------------------------
Property Value
------------------------------------
Date of Manufacture 04/11/2016
Serial Number 22417
Manufacture Name LSI
Design Capacity 288 J
Device Name CVPM02
tmmFru N/A
CacheVault Flash Size 8.0 GB
tmmBatversionNo 0x05
tmmSerialNo 0xee7d
tmm Date of Manufacture 09/12/2016
tmmPcbAssmNo 022544412A
tmmPCBversionNo 0x03
tmmBatPackAssmNo 49571-13A
scapBatversionNo 0x00
scapSerialNo 0x5791

scap Date of Manufacture 04/11/2016

scapPcbAssmNo 1700134483
scapPCBversionNo A
scapBatPackAssmNo 49571-13A
Module Version 6635-02A
------------------------------------
Properties :
==========
--------------------------------------------------------------
Property Value
--------------------------------------------------------------
Auto Learn Period 27d (2412000 seconds)
Next Learn time 2018/08/03 17:48:38 (586633718 seconds)
Learn Delay Interval 0 hour(s)
Auto-Learn Mode Transparent
--------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE
● In the command output, Device Name CVPM02 indicates that the supercapacitor name
is CVPM02, and CacheVault Flash Size 8.0GB indicates that the cache capacity of the
TFM Flash card is 8.0 GB.
● If State is FAILED, replace the supercapacitor.
8.11.2.33 Upgrading the Drive Firmware
Function
Upgrade the drive firmware.
Format
./storcli64 /ccontroller_id /eenclosure_id/sslot_id download src=FW_name.bin
Parameters
controller_id Specifies the ID of the –


enclosure where the

of the drive.
FW_name Specifies the drive –

firmware name.

Example
# Upgrade the drive firmware.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/e64/s5 download src=5200_D1MU004_Releasefullconcatenatedbinary.bin
Starting microcode update .....please wait...
Flashing PD image ..... please wait...
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22,2017
Operation system = Linux 3.10.0-514.el7.x86_64
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Firmware Download succeeded.
Drive Firmware Download :

========================
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drive Status ErrCd ErrMsg
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/c0/e64/s5 Success 0 -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.11.2.34 Managing the Security Key
Function
Enable and disable the encryption function, set a password, modify the encryption
settings, and encrypt a JBOD drive or RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set securitykey=key
storcli64 /ccontroller_id delete securitykey
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set securitykey=securitykey passphrase=passphrase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set securitykey=securitykey

oldsecuritykey=oldsecuritykey passphrase=passphrase
storcli64 /ccontroller_id /eenclosure_id/sslot_id set security=on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id /ddg_id set security=on
Parameters
controller_id ID of a RAID controller The value can be all,

card where the drive which indicates all
resides. controllers.
enclosure_id ID of the enclosure The value can be all,

housing the drive. which indicates all
enclosures.
securitykey Encryption key password -

to be set.

dg_id ID of a drive group. The value can be all,

which indicates all drive
groups.
passphrase Password for starting the -

oldsecuritykey Current password of the -

security key.
slot_id Slot ID of a physical The value can be all,

drive. which indicates all
physical drives.
vd_id Slot ID of a virtual drive. The value can be all,

which indicates all
virtual drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
# Enable the encryption function.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set securitykey=Huawei12#$
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------
Ctrl Method Result
---------------------
0 set Key Success
---------------------
[root@localhost ~]#
# Disable the encryption function.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 delete securitykey
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
------------------------
Ctrl Method Result
------------------------
0 delete Key Success
------------------------
[root@localhost ~]#

# Set a password.
domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set securitykey=Huawei12#$ passphrase=@Qwerty123
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
---------------------
Ctrl Method Result
---------------------
0 set Key Success
---------------------
[root@localhost ~]#
# Modify the encryption configuration.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0 set securitykey=@Qwerty123 oldsecuritykey=Huawei12#$ passphrase=@Qwrty123
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
=====================
------------------------
Ctrl Method Result
------------------------
0 update Key Success
------------------------
[root@localhost ~]#
# Encrypt a JBOD drive.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/e11/s0 set security=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Set JBOD Security On Succeeded.
[root@localhost ~]#
# Encrypt the RAID array.

domino:~# ./storcli64 /c0/d0 set security=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Success
[root@localhost ~]#
8.11.2.35 Rebuilding the RAID Array Manually
Function
Rebuild the RAID array manually.
Syntax
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id insert dg=DG array=Arr row=Row

Parameters

card.

housing the drive.
slot_id Slot number of the drive –

to be added to the RAID
array.
DG ID of the DG where the –

drive is faulty.
Arr ID of the RAID array –

where the drive is faulty.
Row Row number of the RAID –

array where the drive is
faulty.
Usage Guidelines
To rebuild a RAID array, perform the following steps:
1. Run the ./storcli64/c0 show command to query the DG, Arr, and Row
information of the faulty drive.
2. Run the storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id insert dg=DG array=Arr

row=Row command to add the drive to the RAID array.
3. Run the storcli64 /ccontroller_id/eenclosure_id/sslot_id start rebuild command

to manually rebuild the RAID array.
Example
# Add the drive to the RAID array.
[root@localhost ~]# storcli64 /c0/e252/s1 insert dg=0 array=0 row=0
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0

Status = Success
Description = Insert Drive Succeeded.
# Rebuild the RAID array.

[root@localhost ~]# storcli64 /c0/e252/s1 start rebuild
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
8.11.2.36 Setting Auto-Restore of Hot Spare Drives
Function
The status of a hot spare drive changes to Ubad after it is reinstalled.
If auto-restore of hot spare drives is enabled, the hot spare drive automatically
changes to hotspare state. If auto-restore of hot spare drives is disabled, you need
to manually restore the hot spare drive.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set restorehotspare=on
storcli64 /ccontroller_id set restorehotspare=off
Parameters

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable auto-restore of hot spare drives.

# Disable auto-restore of hot spare drives.
8.11.2.37 Setting the Cache Status of a Drive
Function
Set the cache status of member drives in a RAID array.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/vvd_id set pdcache=action
Parameter description

card.
vd_id ID of a RAID array –

action Operation to be ● on: enables the cache

performed. function of the drive.
● off: disables the cache
function of the drive.
● default: sets the drive
cache to the default
status.
For details about how to query the IDs, see 8.11.2.37 Setting the Cache Status of
a Drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the drive cache of RAID array 0.
./storcli64 /c0/v0 set pdcache=on
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = None
Detailed Status :
===============
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
0 PdCac On Success 0-
---------------------------------------
8.11.2.38 Viewing, Importing, and Deleting Foreign Configurations
Function
View, import, and delete foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.
Format
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/fall import preview
storcli64 /ccontroller_id/fall delete

Parameters

card.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Example
# View foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.
[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/fall import preview
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Operation on foreign configuration Succeeded
FOREIGN PREVIEW :
===============

TR=Transport Ready
Total foreign drive groups = 0
# Delete foreign configurations of a RAID controller card.

[root@localhost ~]# ./storcli64 /c0/fall delete
CLI Version = 007.0504.0000.0000 Nov 22, 2017
Controller = 0
Status = Success
Description = Successfully deleted foreign configuration

User Guide 9 SoftRAID
9 SoftRAID
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the features and configuration methods of SoftRAID.
9.1 Overview
9.2 Functions
9.3 Initial Configurations
9.4 Common Tasks
9.5 Troubleshooting
9.6 Configuration Utility
9.1 Overview
SoftRAID is a simplified RAID solution that supports RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10. It uses
the Intel Platform Controller Hub (PCH) to output SATA signals and uses the LSI
MegaRAID software solution.
Table 9-1 lists the SoftRAID specifications.
Table 9-1 SoftRAID specifications
Item Description
Chip Intel PCH
Supported RAID RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10

levels
Number of 8
supported RAID
arrays
Drive types SATA HDD, SATA SSD, or a combination of them

Item Description
Ports ● Grantley platform: supports ten 6 Gbit/s SATA ports
Other features ● Supports global hot spare drives.

● Supports only 64 KB stripes.
The following servers support SoftRAID:

● Rack servers: RH2288A V2, 5288 V3, RH2288H V3, RH2288 V3, RH1288 V3,
RH2285H V2, RH2288H V2, and RH1288A V2
● High-density servers: X6000 XH321 V3 and X6800 XH622 V3, XH628 V3, and
XH620 V3
● Blade servers: E9000 CH121 V3 and CH225 V3
NOTE
● SoftRAID requires licenses. If your server does not have licenses, contact Huawei
technical support to purchase licenses and obtain the installation guide.
● A special key is required for SoftRAID to support RAID 5. To configure RAID 5, contact
Huawei technical support to purchase the key and obtain the installation guide.
● Replacing the mainboard will invalidate the configured SoftRAID.
9.2 Functions
9.2.1 RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10

The controller card supports up to:
● 6 physical drives.
● 8 virtual drives. Each virtual drive holds up to 6 physical drives.

RAID 0 1 to 6 0
RAID 1 2 1
RAID 5 3 to 6 1
RAID 10 4 to 6 (even) Number of spans

NOTE
● Each span of a RAID 10 array allows for only one failed drive.
When using the SoftRAID, you need to install a RAID key to support RAID 5.

After you create a virtual drive (VD), initialize it for use with an OS. After a VD
with the redundancy function is initialized, the data relationships between its
member drives comply with their RAID level requirements. The three types of
initialization are:
● Fast initialization: In this foreground process, the firmware writes zeros to the
first 100 MB of the VD, which changes to Optimal status once initialized.
● Slow initialization: In this foreground process, the firmware writes zeros to the
entire VD, during which the VD is in initialization status.
● Background initialization:
– For RAID 5: Reads and checks parity of data on all member drives. If the
result is inconsistent with the parity drive, the newly generated data will
overwrite the original data on the parity drive.
NOTE
Consistency checks and background initialization may affect system performance.

Both consistency checks and background initialization implement a function similar to
parity error correction. During a consistency check, the system records the areas with data
inconsistency and can resolve the inconsistency, but background initialization does not
provide this function. It also can be started manually, while background initialization must
be started automatically.
Drive initialization is a process of formatting a drive by repeatedly writing zeros to
it.

For RAID arrays with redundancy (RAID 1, 10, and 5), you can manually perform a
consistency check for data in the RAID array. If any inconsistency is found, the
bad block table.
Consistency check applies only to initialized RAID arrays. For details, see 9.4.5
Configuring Drive Properties.

9.2.4 RAID Rebuild

If a member drive of a RAID array is faulty, the RAID array can be rebuilt using the
redundancy function to prevent data loss.
Rebuild is performed in the following scenarios:
● When a hot spare drive is available, if a member drive of a RAID array with
redundancy is faulty, the RAID controller card automatically adds the hot
spare drive to the RAID array and uses the data on other member drives or
redundant data to rebuild data (same as the data on the original member
drive) on the new member drive. During the rebuild process, the RAID array is
in the degraded or partially degraded state, and the new member drive (the
original backup or idle drive) is in the rebuild state.
● If the hot spare or emergency spare function is not enabled and a member
drive of a RAID array with redundancy is faulty, the RAID array enters the
degraded or partially degraded state. After the faulty drive is removed and a
new drive is inserted, the RAID controller card automatically adds the new
drive to the RAID group and performs rebuild.
9.2.5 Mixed Use of Drives

SoftRAID supports mixed use of SATA HDDs and SSDs.
However, drives of the same type are recommended.
SoftRAID supports a maximum of six drives on the Romely platform and a

maximum of eight drives on the Grantley platform.

A hot spare drive is used for replacing a failed member drive of a RAID array and
storing data of the failed drive.
The LSI SoftRAID supports a maximum of six hot spare drives. If one or two
member drives of the same type as hot spare drives fail, hot spare drives take over
data processing to prevent data loss or fault deterioration.
Spare Drive.
NOTE
The HDDs and SSDs cannot be used as the hot spare drives of each other.

Hot swap allows removal and replacement of a failed drive without shutting down
the system or changing any configuration. This feature improves system disaster
recovery capability, expandability, and flexibility.
SoftRAID does not support import of foreign configurations. Therefore, the newly
installed drives cannot contain foreign RAID configurations.

9.3 Initial Configurations

All configurations described in this document are performed on the Configuration
Utility, which is only accessible after server restart. To monitor RAID status and
view RAID configurations during system running, use the StorCLI tool. For more
operation details, you can also download related documents from the website.
9.3.1 Configuration process

NOTE
● If SoftRAID is used, the BIOS must be in Legacy mode.

● SoftRAID requires BIOS and licenses. If your server does not have licenses, contact
Huawei technical support to purchase licenses and obtain the installation guide.
● A special key is required for SoftRAID to support RAID 5. To configure RAID 5, contact
Huawei technical support to purchase the key and obtain the installation guide.
● Replacing the mainboard will invalidate the configured SoftRAID.
Figure 9-1 shows the initial configuration process of LSI SoftRAID.
Figure 9-1 Configuration Process
Scenarios
The LSI SoftRAID Configuration Utility runs independently from the operating
system and allows you to configure and manage LSI SoftRAID in an easy way.


Prerequisites
Conditions
● On the BIOS, the controller card working mode is set to RAID.
– On the Grantley platform, two SoftRAID controllers are available.
Configure either of them as required.
▪ Choose Advanced > PCH SATA Configuration, and set HDC

Configure As to RAID.
▪ Choose Advanced > PCH sSATA Configuration, and set HDC

NOTE
● On the Grantley platform of an X6800 server, only PCH SATA Configuration is

available.
● By default, SoftRAID can identify only one of the PCH SATA and PCH sSATA
controllers. The PCH SATA controller manages drives in slots 4 to 7. The PCH sSATA
controller manages drives in slots 0 to 3.
● If the BIOS does not support the RAID working mode of a controller or the license
is missing, there is no "RAID" option for the controller working mode on the BIOS.
Data
Procedure
On the remote console shown in Figure 9-2, click Forced System Reset.
Figure 9-2 Restarting a server
Step 3 During server startup, press Ctrl+M when prompted.

The Configuration Utility main screen with the management menu is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-4. Table 9-3 describes the menu items.

NOTE
● If "SAS/SATA RAID key is Detected" shown in Figure 9-3 is displayed during server
startup, a RAID key has been imported, and LSI SoftRAID supports RAID 0, 1, 10 and 5.
● If a RAID key is not configured, LSI SoftRAID supports only RAID 0, 1, and 10.
Figure 9-3 Startup screen
Figure 9-4 LSI SoftRAID Configuration Utility main screen
Table 9-3 Management menu items

Menu Item Function
Configure Configures a RAID array.
Initialize Initializes a RAID array.
Objects Allows you to view and modify properties of a RAID controller

card and virtual or physical drives.
Rebuild Rebuilds RAID data on a drive that replaces a failed drive.

Menu Item Function
Check Performs a consistency check for a RAID array.

Consistency
----End
Scenarios
For details about the number of drives supported by different RAID levels, see
Table 9-2.
The LSI SoftRAID BIOS allows you to create a RAID array using any of the
following methods:
● Easy Configuration: This is a fast creation mode. In this mode, the existing
RAID configuration data on drives is not deleted during RAID creation, but the
RAID storage capacity cannot be configured.
● New Configuration: This is a common creation mode. In this mode, the
existing RAID configuration data on drives is deleted during RAID creation,
and the RAID storage capacity can be configured.
● View/Add Configuration: This creation mode does not affect the existing
RAID configuration data, and the RAID storage capacity can be configured.
The procedures and screens of the three modes are similar. This section describes
only the New Configuration mode as an example.
NOTICE
● The LSI SoftRAID supports SATA HDDs and SATA SSDs. Drives in one RAID array
different vendors.
creating a RAID array, check that there is no data on drives or that the data on
drives is not required.
Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Configure > New
Configuration.

Figure 9-5 Proceeding to RAID array creation

A drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select drives to be added to the RAID array and press the space bar
to change the drive status from READY to ONLINE, as shown in Figure 9-7.
NOTE
You can select an idle drive and press F4 to configure it as a hot spare drive.

Figure 9-7 Selected drive
Step 5 Press Enter.

The drive array selection screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Selecting a drive array
Step 6 Press the space bar to select the drive array to be configured, as shown in Figure
9-9.

Figure 9-9 Selected array
Step 7 Press F10 to save the configuration.

The RAID array properties are displayed, as shown in Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10 RAID array properties
Step 8 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a property and press Enter to set the value.
Table 9-4 describes the RAID array properties.
Table 9-4 RAID array properties
Parameter Operation and Description
RAID Select RAID and press Enter to display the available RAID
levels.
For details about the number of drives supported by different
RAID levels, see Table 9-2.

Units Select Units and press Enter to set the storage capacity unit.
The unit can be MB, GB, or TB.
Size Select Size and press Enter to set the RAID storage capacity.
NOTE
The size of a RAID 10 array is automatically generated and cannot be
configured.
DWC (Disk Indicates whether drive write caching is enabled for member
Write Cache) drives. It is disabled by default. Select DWC and press Enter to
set this parameter.
RA (Read Indicates whether the Read Ahead (RA) mode is enabled. It is

Ahead) enabled by default. Select RA and press Enter to set this
parameter.
SPAN Indicates whether spans are included. This parameter is valid

only for RAID 10.
Step 9 Select RAID 0 and press Enter.
Step 10 Configure the other RAID parameters. For details, see Table 9-4.
Step 11 After the configuration, select Accept and press Enter.
The Virtual Drive(s) Configured pane displays the RAID configuration. Determine
whether to save the configuration based on the displayed information.
Figure 9-11 Confirming the configuration


Step 14 Press Esc to return to the Configuration Utility main screen.
Step 15 Initialize the created RAID array.
1. On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Initialize and press Enter.
The virtual drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12 Selecting a virtual drive
2. Press the space bar to select the virtual drive to be initialized and press F10.
3. Select Yes and press Enter to start initialization.
When the initialization is complete, "100% Completed" is displayed, as shown
in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Initialization complete
4. Press Esc to exit the initialization progress screen.

5. Press Esc to exit the virtual drive selection screen.

----End

Scenarios
Table 9-2.
following methods:
NOTICE
different vendors.
Procedure
Configuration.


NOTE

Step 5 Press Enter.

9-18.


levels.

NOTE
configured.
DWC (Disk Indicates whether DWC is enabled for member drives. It is

Write Cache) disabled by default. Select DWC and press Enter to set this
parameter.

parameter.

only for RAID 10.


in Figure 9-22.


----End
Scenarios
Table 9-2.
following methods:
NOTICE
different vendors.
● When using the SoftRAID, you need to install a RAID key to support RAID 5.
Procedure
Configuration.


NOTE

Step 5 Press Enter.

9-27.


levels.

NOTE
configured.

parameter.

parameter.

only for RAID 10.


in Figure 9-31.


----End

Scenarios
Table 9-2.
following methods:
NOTICE
different vendors.
Procedure
Configuration.


NOTE

Step 5 Press Enter.

9-36.


levels.

NOTE
configured.

parameter.

parameter.

only for RAID 10.


in Figure 9-40.


----End
9.3.7 Setting Boot Device

Scenarios
If HDD is configured as the system boot device in the BIOS and a RAID array is
configured, the system boots from the first RAID array by default. This topic
describes how to change the boot drive.
Prerequisites
Conditions
● A RAID has been created.
Data
Procedure
Step 1 On the main screen, select Configure > Select Boot Drive and press Enter.
The boot options are displayed, as shown in Figure 9-41.
Figure 9-41 Boot options
Step 2 Select the virtual drive to be configured and press Enter.

After the setting is complete, the message "Boot Drive Information Is Saved" is
displayed.

Step 3 Press Esc to exit the boot options and return to the Configuration Utility main
screen.
Step 4 Press Esc to exit the Configuration Utility.
----End
9.4 Common Tasks

All configurations described in this document are performed on the Configuration
Utility, which is only accessible after server restart. To monitor RAID status and
view RAID configurations during system running, use the StorCLI tool. For more
operation details, you can also download related documents from the website.
Scenarios
You can configure a hot spare drive on the LSI SoftRAID Configuration Utility in
either of the following ways:
● Configure a hot spare drive when creating a RAID array.

● Configure a hot spare drive after a RAID array is created. Do as follows:
Prerequisites
Conditions
NOTICE
● An idle drive that is not added to a RAID array can be configured as a hot spare
drive.
● A hot spare drive must be a SATA HDD or SSD, and its capacity cannot be less
than that of the smallest member drive in the RAID array.
Data
Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Objects > Physical Drive.
The drive list is displayed. See Figure 9-42.

Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a drive in READY state and press Enter.
The drive setting menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-43. Table 9-8 describes
the options.
Table 9-8 Physical Drive parameters
Make Hot Spare Sets a global hot spare drive.
Force Online Forcibly brings the faulty drive online.
Change Drv State Changes the drive status.

Drive Properties Views drive properties, including the drive type,

storage space, asset number, version, and rate.
Step 4 Select Make Hot Spare and press Enter.

The drive status changes to HOTSP.
Step 6 Press Esc to exit the drive list.

Step 7 Press Esc to exit the Objects configuration menu and return to the Configuration
Utility main screen.
Step 8 Exiting the Configuration Utility
1. Press Esc to exit the Configuration Utility.
----End
Related Tasks
To cancel the global hot spare drive, see 9.4.2 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive.
Related Concepts
None


Scenarios
Procedure
Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a drive in HOTSP state and press Enter.
The drive setting menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-46. Table 9-9 describes
the options.



Step 4 Select Change Drv State and press Enter.

The drive status changes to READY.


----End
9.4.3 Configuring Controller Properties

Scenarios
You can view controller properties to check whether the current controller meets
the actual requirements and perform modification accordingly.
Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Objects > Adapter > Adapter-0
and press Enter.
The controller property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-48.

Figure 9-48 Selecting a controller
Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to select the parameters to be set and press Enter.
Table 9-10 describes the controller property parameters.
Table 9-10 Controller properties
Rebuild Rate I/O duty cycle during data synchronization. The

default value is 30%.
Chk Const Rate I/O duty cycle during consistency check. The
FGI Rate I/O duty cycle during foreground initialization. The

BGI Rate I/O duty cycle during background initialization. The

Disk WC Indicates whether DWC is enabled for member

drives during RAID array creation. It is disabled by
default.
Read Ahead Indicates whether the Read Ahead (RA) mode is

enabled during RAID array creation. It is enabled
by default.
Bios State Indicates whether the BIOS supports Option ROM.

The default value is Enable.
Cont On Error Indicates whether Option ROM proceeds with the

subsequent operations after an error occurs in the
POST phase. By default, Option ROM proceeds
with the subsequent operations.

Fast Init Initialization mode. The default value is Enable,

indicating quick initialization. If this parameter is
set to Disable, slow initialization is enabled.
Auto Rebuild Indicates whether to automatically synchronize

data when RAID data needs to be synchronized
and a drive is available for synchronization. The
default value is On, indicating that the
synchronization starts automatically.
Auto Resume Indicates whether to resume the initialization or

rebuild process when the process is interrupted.
The default value is Enable, indicating that the
process is resumed.
Disk Coercion Capacity compression mode. In this mode, the

capacities of member disks in a RAID array are
aligned when drives of different models and
capacities are used at the same time. The options
are None, 128 MB, and 1 GB. The default value is
1 GB. Before setting this mode, you must clear all
RAID configurations.
Factory Default Restores the controller options to the default

settings. Before performing this operation, you
must clear all RAID configurations.
Step 4 Press Esc to exit the controller property screen.

Step 5 Press Esc to exit the controller selection screen and return to the Configuration
----End
9.4.4 Configuring RAID Properties

Scenarios
You can view RAID properties to check whether the current virtual drive meets the
actual requirements and perform operations accordingly.
Procedure
Step 2 On the main screen, choose Objects > Virtual Drive and press Enter.

Step 3 Select the virtual drive to be queried or configured and press Enter.
The virtual drive operation menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-50.
Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select View/Update Parameters and press Enter.

The virtual drive property screen is displayed, showing RAID properties, as shown
in Figure 9-51.

Table 9-11 describes the virtual drive properties.
Table 9-11 Virtual drive properties

RAID RAID level of the virtual drive.
Size Storage space of the virtual drive.
Stripe Size Size of the data strip on each member drive of the
virtual drive. Default value: 64 KB
#Stripe Number of stripes on the virtual drive.
State Virtual drive status.

● Optimal: The virtual drive is running properly
and all member drives are online.
● Degraded: The virtual drive is running
abnormally and a member drive is faulty or
offline.
● Failed: The virtual drive is faulty and cannot
run properly.
● Offline: The virtual drive is not enabled.
Spans Number of drive arrays on the virtual drive. For

RAID 0, 1, and 5, the value is 1. For RAID 10, the
value is 2 or 3.
Disk WC Whether the write cache of the member drives on

the virtual drive is enabled.

Read Ahead Whether the prefetch mode of the virtual drive is

enabled.
Step 6 Press Esc to exit the virtual drive property screen.
Step 7 Press Esc to exit the virtual drive selection screen and return to the Configuration
----End
9.4.5 Configuring Drive Properties
Scenarios
You can view drive properties and perform related operations.
Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Objects > Physical Drive and
press Enter.
Step 3 Select the drive to be queried or configured and press Enter.

The drive operation menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-53.
Figure 9-53 Drive operation menu
Step 4 Use ↑ and ↓ to select an operation and press Enter.

Table 9-12 describes the operations that can be performed on the menu.
Table 9-12 Drive operation parameters

Step 5 Press Esc to exit the drive list and return to the Configuration Utility main screen.
----End

Scenarios


available, the system automatically starts a rebuild. However, if the RAID
controller card property Auto Rebuild is set to Disable, you need to manually
start the rebuild.
Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Rebuild and press Enter.
Step 3 Use ↑ and ↓ to locate the drive to be synchronized, and press Space to select it.
The selected drive turns red. See Figure 9-55.
NOTE
Only drives in HotSpare, Failed, or Rebuilding state can be synchronized.

Figure 9-55 Drive to be synchronized
Step 4 Press F10 to synchronize data.
Step 5 Press Y to start the synchronization.
After the synchronization is complete, the message "100% Completed" is

displayed.
Step 6 Press Esc to exit the synchronization menu and return to the Configuration Utility
main screen.
----End
Scenarios
The consistency check operation verifies inconsistent data between mirrored drives
or between the primary data blocks and redundant data.
The LSI SoftRAID management software provides two data consistency check
methods:
● On the LSI SoftRAID main screen, select Check Consistency.

● Choose Objects > Virtual Drives and select a virtual drive for consistency
check.
The procedures and displayed information of the two methods are similar. This
topic describes the first method.

Procedure
Step 2 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Check Consistency and press
Enter.
Figure 9-56 Virtual drive list
Step 3 Press the space bar to select the virtual drive to be checked and press F10.
The consistency check confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
Only virtual drives in the Optimal state can be checked.
Step 4 Select Yes and press Enter to start the consistency check.
After the consistency check is complete, the message "100% Completed" is
displayed.
Step 5 Press Esc to exit the consistency check screen and return to the Configuration
----End

9.4.8 Clearing a RAID Array

Scenarios
The LSI SoftRAID management software provides two methods for clearing a RAID
array:
● Clear all RAID information.
● Clear information about a specified RAID array.
Procedure
Step 2 Clear all RAID information.
1. On the main screen, select Configure > Clear Configuration and press Enter.
2. Select Yes and press Enter to clear all RAID configurations.
3. Press Esc to exit the configuration menu and return to the Configuration
Clearing a RAID Array
4. On the main screen, choose Objects > Virtual Drive and press Enter.
5. Select the virtual drive to be deleted and press Del.

6. Select Yes and press Enter to clear the selected RAID configuration.
7. Press Esc to exit the virtual drive selection screen and return to the
Configuration Utility main screen.


----End
9.5 Troubleshooting
This section describes solutions to drive faults. For other situations, see the
Huawei Server Maintenance Guide.
9.5.1 Drive Fault

Symptom

● The drive activity indicator is off.
Solution
NOTE
● Before removing a drive, determine its location to prevent misoperations. If a drive is

removed by mistake, the RAID array will fail.
● After a faulty drive is disconnected from its backplane, wait 30 seconds before removing
it. The alarm will not be cleared immediately after a new drive is installed. It will be
cleared after the RAID array is rebuilt. Do not hot remove and install drives frequently.
Step 1 Remove the faulty drive.
Step 2 Determine whether data can be restored.

● For RAID 0, data cannot be restored. Install a new drive and reconfigure the
RAID array. No further action is required.
● If the RAID array has a hot spare drive, the hot spare drive automatically
restores data after the faulty drive is removed.
The hot spare drive automatically works instead of the faulty drive and starts
to rebuild data.
● If the RAID array with redundancy does not have a spare drive, install a new
drive to restore data.
Step 3 Install a new drive.
The new drive must not have data.
● If the original RAID array has a hot spare drive, the newly installed drive
becomes the hot spare drive.
● If the RAID array with redundancy does not have a spare drive, the newly
installed drive automatically rebuilds data of the faulty drive.
----End

9.6 Configuration Utility
Scenarios
The LSI SoftRAID Configuration Utility runs independently from the operating
system and allows you to configure and manage LSI SoftRAID in an easy way.

Prerequisites
Conditions
● On the BIOS, the controller card working mode is set to RAID.
– On the Grantley platform, two SoftRAID controllers are available.
Configure either of them as required.
▪ Choose Advanced > PCH SATA Configuration, and set HDC

▪ Choose Advanced > PCH sSATA Configuration, and set HDC

NOTE
● On the Grantley platform of an X6800 server, only PCH SATA Configuration

is available.
● By default, SoftRAID can identify only one of the PCH SATA and PCH sSATA
controllers. The PCH SATA controller manages drives in slots 4 to 7. The PCH
sSATA controller manages drives in slots 0 to 3.
Data
Procedure
On the remote console shown in Figure 9-58, click Forced System Reset.

Figure 9-58 Restarting a server
Step 3 During server startup, press Ctrl+M when prompted.

The Configuration Utility main screen with the management menu is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-60. Table 9-13 describes the menu items.
NOTE
● If "SAS/SATA RAID key is Detected" shown in Figure 9-59 is displayed during server
startup, a RAID key has been imported, and LSI SoftRAID supports RAID 0, 1, 10 and 5.
● If a RAID key is not configured, LSI SoftRAID supports only RAID 0, 1, and 10.
Figure 9-59 Startup screen
Figure 9-60 LSI SoftRAID Configuration Utility main screen

Table 9-13 Management menu items

Menu Item Function
Configure Configures a RAID array.
Objects Allows you to view and modify properties of a RAID controller

card and virtual or physical drives.
Rebuild Rebuilds RAID data on a drive that replaces a failed drive.
Check Performs a consistency check for a RAID array.

Consistency
----End
9.6.2 Configure
The Configure menu allows you to configure RAID and boot devices.
Screen Introduction
Figure 9-61 shows the Configure menu. Table 9-14 describes the operation items
on the Configure menu.
Figure 9-61 Configure menu

Table 9-14 Configure menu parameters

Easy Fast creation mode. In this mode, the existing RAID

Configuration configuration data on drives is not deleted during RAID
creation, but the RAID storage capacity cannot be
configured.
New Common creation mode. In this mode, the existing RAID

Configuration configuration data on drives is deleted during RAID creation,
View/Add This creation mode does not affect the existing RAID
Configuration configuration data, and the RAID storage capacity can be
configured.
Clear Clears the RAID configuration.

Configuration
Select Boot Configures the boot device.

Drive
9.6.2.1 Easy Configuration

Easy Configuration is a quick creation mode. During RAID creation, the original
data on the drives is not cleared, and the RAID storage capacity cannot be set.

Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, select Configure > Easy Configuration
and press Enter.
NOTE
ONLINE indicates that the drive has been configured with RAID, and READY indicates that
the drive is idle.

Step 2 Select a drive.

Press ↑ and ↓ to select a drive to be added to the RAID array, and perform the
following operations:
● Press the space bar to select an idle drive in READY state to configure the
RAID.
● Press Enter to select a drive in ONLINE state to use the remaining space for
RAID configuration.
Step 3 Press F10.
The ARRAY SELECTION MENU page is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-63.
NOTE
In Figure 9-63, A-0 is the array formed by the remaining RAID space, and A-1 is the array
formed by the newly selected drives.

Figure 9-63 Selecting an array
Step 4 Press the space bar to select the array to be configured, for example, A-1, and
press F10.
The RAID property configuration screen is displayed.
Table 9-15 describes the parameters in Figure 9-64.

Table 9-15 RAID properties

RAID Automatically configured RAID level.
Units Unit of the storage space that is automatically configured.
Size RAID storage space.

parameter.

parameter.

only for RAID 10.

Step 7 Click Yes to save the configuration.
----End
9.6.2.2 New Configuration

New Configuration is the most commonly used method for creating a RAID array.
During RAID array creation, the original data in the drives is cleared. The RAID
array storage capacity can be set.

Configuration.

NOTE

Step 4 Press Enter.

9-69.

Step 6 Press F10 to save the settings.



levels.
NOTE
configured.

parameter.

parameter.

only for RAID 10.

Step 9 Press Enter.


----End
9.6.2.3 View/Add Configuration

Creating a RAID array in View/Add Configuration mode does not affect the
existing RAID configuration data, and the RAID storage capacity can be
configured.
The creation mode is similar to the Easy Configuration mode. For details, see
9.6.2.1 Easy Configuration.

Clear Configuration clears the existing RAID configuration.
Clearing All RAID Configurations

Step 1 On the main screen, select Configure > Clear Configuration and press Enter.
Step 2 Select Yes and press Enter to clear all RAID configurations.
Step 3 Press Esc to exit the configuration menu and return to the Configuration Utility
main screen.
----End
9.6.2.5 Set Boot Drive

Set Boot Drive is used to set the boot device.

Screen Introduction
After you select Set Boot Drive, the boot device list is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 Boot options
Setting the Boot Device

Step 1 On the main screen, select Configure > Select Boot Drive and press Enter.
Boot options are displayed.
Step 2 Select the boot device, and press Enter.
After the setting is complete, the message "Boot Drive Information Is Saved" is
displayed.
Step 3 Press Esc to exit the boot options and return to the Configuration Utility main
screen.
----End
9.6.3 Initialize
Initialize is used to initialize a RAID array.
Screen Description
Select Initialize. The RAID array list is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-73.

Figure 9-73 RAID list
Initializing a RAID Array

Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Initialize and press Enter.
The RAID array list is displayed.
Step 2 Press the space bar to select the virtual drive to be initialized and press F10.
Step 3 Select Yes and press Enter to start initialization.
When the initialization is complete, "100% Completed" is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-74.
Figure 9-74 Initialization completed

Step 4 Press Esc to exit the initialization progress screen.

----End
9.6.4 Objects
Objects allows you to view or modify properties of controllers, virtual drives, and
physical drives.
Screen Description
Figure 9-75 shows the menu.
Figure 9-75 Objects menu
9.6.4.1 Adapter
Adapter allows you to view or modify controller properties.
Screen Introduction
After you select Adapter, the screen shown in Figure 9-76 is displayed. Table 9-17
describes the controller properties.

Figure 9-76 Adapter properties
Table 9-17 Controller properties

Rebuild Rate I/O duty cycle during data synchronization. The

Chk Const Rate I/O duty cycle during consistency check. The
FGI Rate I/O duty cycle during foreground initialization. The

BGI Rate I/O duty cycle during background initialization. The

Disk WC Indicates whether DWC is enabled for member

drives during RAID array creation. It is disabled by
default.
Read Ahead Indicates whether the RA mode is enabled during

RAID array creation. It is enabled by default.
Bios State Indicates whether the BIOS supports Option ROM.

The default value is Enable.
Cont On Error Indicates whether Option ROM proceeds with the

subsequent operations after an error occurs in the
POST phase. By default, Option ROM proceeds
with the subsequent operations.
Fast Init Initialization mode. The default value is Enable,

indicating quick initialization. If this parameter is
set to Disable, slow initialization is enabled.

Auto Rebuild Indicates whether to automatically synchronize

data when RAID data needs to be synchronized
and a drive is available for synchronization. The
default value is On, indicating that the
synchronization starts automatically.
Auto Resume Indicates whether to resume the initialization or

rebuild process when the process is interrupted.
The default value is Enable, indicating that the
process is resumed.
Disk Coercion Capacity compression mode. In this mode, the

capacities of member disks in a RAID array are
aligned when drives of different models and
capacities are used at the same time. The options
are None, 128 MB, and 1 GB. The default value is
1 GB. Before setting this mode, you must clear all
RAID configurations.
Factory Default Restores the controller options to the default

settings. Before performing this operation, you
must clear all RAID configurations.
Modifying Controller Properties

Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Objects > Adapter > Adapter-0
and press Enter.
The controller property screen is displayed.
Step 3 Press Esc to exit the controller property screen.
Step 4 Press Esc to exit the controller selection screen and return to the Configuration
----End
9.6.4.2 Virtual Drive

Virtual Drive allows you to view or modify virtual drive properties.
Screen Description
Figure 9-77 shows the menu displayed after Virtual Drive is selected. Table 9-18
describes the available operations.

Figure 9-77 Virtual Drive menu
Table 9-18 Virtual Drive operation description
Check Consistency Performs consistency check for a specified RAID.
View/Update Parameters Displays or modifies RAID properties.
Initializing a Specified RAID Array

Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Objects > Virtual Drive and
press Enter.
Step 2 Select the virtual drive to be deleted and press Enter.
Step 3 Select Initialize and press Enter.
Step 4 Select Yes and press Enter to start initialization.
After the initialization is complete, the message "100% Completed" is displayed.
Step 5 Press Esc to exit the initialization progress screen.
----End

Performing a Consistency Check

press Enter.
Step 3 Select Check Consistency and press Enter.
NOTE
displayed.
Step 5 Press Esc to exit the consistency check screen.
----End
Modifying RAID Properties

press Enter.
Step 3 Select View/Update Parameters and press Enter.
The virtual drive property screen is displayed, showing RAID properties, as shown
in Figure 9-78. Table 9-19 describes the RAID properties.

Table 9-19 Virtual drive properties

RAID RAID level of the virtual drive.
Size Storage space of the virtual drive.
Stripe Size Size of the data strip on each member drive of the
virtual drive. Default value: 64 KB
#Stripe Number of virtual drive strips.
State Virtual drive status.

● Optimal: The virtual drive is running properly
and all member drives are online.
abnormally and a member drive is faulty or
offline.
● Failed: The virtual drive is faulty and cannot
run properly.
Spans Number of drive arrays on the virtual drive. For

RAID 0, 1, and 5, the value is 1. For RAID 10, the
value is 2 or 3.
Disk WC Whether the write cache of the member drives on

the virtual drive is enabled.
Read Ahead Whether the prefetch mode of the virtual drive is

enabled.

Step 5 Press Esc to exit the virtual drive property screen.
----End
9.6.4.3 Physical Drive

Physical Drive allows you to view or modify physical drive properties.
Screen Introduction
Figure 9-79 shows the menu displayed after Physical Drive is selected. Table
9-20 describes the available operations.
Figure 9-79 Physical Drive menu



Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to select a drive in READY state and press Enter.
Step 3 Select Make Hot Spare and press Enter.
The drive status changes to HOTSP.

----End
Forcibly Bringing a Drive Online

The drive list is displayed.
Step 2 Select a drive in the OFFLINE state and press Enter.
Step 3 On the menu, choose Force Online and press Enter.
----End
Changing the Drive Status

Step 3 On the menu, choose Change Drv State and press Enter.
NOTE
You can click Change Drv State to change the status of a drive from ONLINE to FAIL or
from HOTSP to READY.
----End



Step 3 On the menu, choose Drive Properties and press Enter.
The Physical Drive Information screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-82. The
screen displays the drive type, storage space, asset number, version, and speed.
Step 4 Press any key to exit the Physical Drive Information screen.
----End
9.6.5 Rebuild
Rebuild is used to rebuild RAID data when a drive is replaced with a new drive or
with the hot spare drive.
Rebuilding RAID
Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Rebuild and press Enter.

Step 2 Use ↑ and ↓ to locate the drive to be synchronized, and press Space to select it.
The selected drive turns red. See Figure 9-84.
NOTE
Only drives in HotSpare, Failed, or Rebuilding state can be synchronized.
Figure 9-84 Drive to be synchronized
Step 3 Press F10 to synchronize data.

Step 4 Press Y to start the synchronization.
After the synchronization is complete, the message "100% Completed" is
displayed.

Step 5 Press Esc to exit the synchronization menu and return to the Configuration Utility
main screen.
----End
9.6.6 Check Consistency

Check Consistency is used to verify data.
Step 1 On the Configuration Utility main screen, choose Check Consistency and press
Enter.
Figure 9-85 Virtual drive list
Step 2 Press the space bar to select the virtual drive to be checked and press F10.
The consistency check confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
displayed.
Step 4 Press Esc to exit the consistency check screen and return to the Configuration
----End

9.7.1 Downloading and Installing the MagaCLI Tool

Downloading the MagaCLI Tool
Step 1 Log in to the MagaCLI download page at the BROADCOM website.
Step 2 In the DOWNLOADS area, download the latest MagaCLI tool.
Step 3 Decompress the downloaded package to obtain the tool packages applicable to
different OSs.
----End
Installing the MagaCLI Tool

The installation of the MagaCLI tool varies with the OS you use. The following
uses Windows, Linux, and VMware as examples.
The MagaCLI tool for LSI SoftRAID is MegaCLI64.
● To install MagaCLI on Windows, perform the following steps:
a. Upload the tool package for Windows to the server OS.
b. Open the command line tool.
c. Use the command line tool to go to the directory where the MagaCLI
tool package is located.
The MagaCLI tool can be used to run the RAID controller card commands
without installation.
● To install MagaCLI on Linux, perform the following steps:
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the MagaCLI tool
package to the server OS.
b. Run the rpm -ivh MegaCli -xxx.rpm command to install MagaCLI.
You can run the RAID controller card commands after the installation is
complete.
● To install MagaCLI on the VMware OS, perform the following steps:
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the MagaCLI tool
package to the server OS.
b. Run the esxcli software vib install -v=vmware-xxx-MagaCLI.vib
command to install the MagaCLI tool.
You can run the RAID controller card commands after the installation is
complete.
9.7.2.1 Querying RAID Array Information
Function
Query information about the RAID array of the LSI SoftRAID.

Format
MegaCli64 -ldinfo -lall -acontroller_id
MegaCli64 -ldinfo -lVD_id -acontroller_id
Parameters
controller_id Controller ID. –
VD_id ID of the RAID array. –
Example
# Query information about all RAID arrays.
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -ldinfo -lall -a1
Adapter 1 -- Virtual Drive Information:

Virtual Drive: 0 (Target Id: 0)
Name :
RAID Level : Primary-1, Secondary-0, RAID Level Qualifier-0
Size : 446.102 GB
Sector Size : 512
Is VD emulated : No
Mirror Data : 446.102 GB
State : Optimal
Strip Size : 64 KB
Number Of Drives : 2
Span Depth :1
Default Cache Policy: WriteThrough, ReadAhead, Direct, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Current Cache Policy: WriteThrough, ReadAhead, Direct, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Default Access Policy: Read/Write
Current Access Policy: Read/Write
Disk Cache Policy : Disabled
Encryption Type : None
Is VD Cached: No
Exit Code: 0x00
# Query information about virtual drive 1.

[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -ldinfo -l0 -a1
Adapter 1 -- Virtual Drive Information:

Virtual Drive: 0 (Target Id: 0)
Name :
RAID Level : Primary-1, Secondary-0, RAID Level Qualifier-0
Size : 446.102 GB
Is VD emulated : No
Mirror Data : 446.102 GB
State : Optimal
Strip Size : 64 KB
Number Of Drives : 2
Span Depth :1
Default Cache Policy: WriteThrough, ReadAhead, Direct, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Current Cache Policy: WriteThrough, ReadAhead, Direct, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Default Access Policy: Read/Write

Current Access Policy: Read/Write

Disk Cache Policy : Disabled
Encryption Type : None
Is VD Cached: No
Exit Code: 0x00
9.7.2.2 Querying Drive Information
Function
Query information about all physical drives.
Format
MegaCli64 -pdlist -aall
MegaCli64 -pdInfo -PhysDrv[:slot_id] -acontroller_id
Parameters
slot_id Drive slot ID. -
controller_id Controller ID. -
Example
# Query information about all physical drives.
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -pdlist -aall
Adapter #0
Adapter #1
Enclosure Device ID: N/A

Slot Number: 0
Drive's position: DiskGroup: 0, Span: 0, Arm: 0
Enclosure position: N/A
Device Id: 0
WWN: 5002538c000aee64
Sequence Number: 0
Media Error Count: 0
Other Error Count: 0
Predictive Failure Count: 0
Last Predictive Failure Event Seq Number: 0
PD Type: SATA
Raw Size: 447.130 GB [0x37e436b0 Sectors]

Non Coerced Size: 446.630 GB [0x37d436b0 Sectors]
Coerced Size: 446.102 GB [0x37c34800 Sectors]
Sector Size: 512
Logical Sector Size: 512
Physical Sector Size: 512
Firmware state: Online, Spun Up
Device Firmware Level: 104Q

Shield Counter: 0
Successful diagnostics completion on : N/A
SAS Address(0): 0x0
Connected Port Number: 0
Inquiry Data: S3F4NY0HB00373 SAMSUNG MZ7KM480HMHQ-00005 GXM5104Q
FDE Capable: Not Capable
FDE Enable: Disable
Secured: Unsecured
Locked: Unlocked
Needs EKM Attention: No
Foreign State: None
Device Speed: 6.0Gb/s
Link Speed: 6.0Gb/s
Media Type: Solid State Device
Drive Temperature :32C (89.60 F)
PI Eligibility: No
Drive is formatted for PI information: No
PI: No PI
Port-0 :
Port status: Active
Port's Linkspeed: 6.0Gb/s
Drive has flagged a S.M.A.R.T alert : No

Slot Number: 1
Drive's position: DiskGroup: 0, Span: 0, Arm: 1
Device Id: 1
WWN: 500253850026ae85
Sequence Number: 0
PD Type: SATA

Sector Size: 512
Shield Counter: 0
SAS Address(0): 0x0
Inquiry Data: S1G1NYAG308096 SAMSUNG MZ7WD480HCGM-00003 DXM9203Q
FDE Enable: Disable
Secured: Unsecured
Locked: Unlocked
Foreign State: None
Link Speed: 6.0Gb/s
PI Eligibility: No
PI: No PI
Port-0 :
Port status: Active


Slot Number: 2
Device Id: 2
WWN: 5002538c000aee5a
Sequence Number: 0
PD Type: SATA

Sector Size: 512
Firmware state: Unconfigured(good), Spun Up
Shield Counter: 0
SAS Address(0): 0x0
Inquiry Data: S3F4NY0HB00363 SAMSUNG MZ7KM480HMHQ-00005 GXM5104Q
FDE Enable: Disable
Secured: Unsecured
Locked: Unlocked
Foreign State: None
Link Speed: 6.0Gb/s
PI Eligibility: No
PI: No PI
Port-0 :
Port status: Active
# Query information about the drive in slot 1.

[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -pdInfo -PhysDrv[:1] -a1

Slot Number: 1
Drive's postion: DiskGroup: 0, Span: 0, Arm: 1
Device Id: 1
WWN: 500253850026ae85
Sequence Number: 0
PD Type: SATA

Emulated Drive: No
Shield Counter: 0

SAS Address(0): 0x0

Inquiry Data: S1G1NYAG308096 SAMSUNG MZ7WD480HCGM-00003
DXM9203Q
FDE Enable: Disable
Secured: Unsecured
Locked: Unlocked
Foreign State: None
Link Speed: 6.0Gb/s
PI Eligibility: No
PI: No PI
Port-0 :
Port status: Active
Exit Code: 0x00

[root@localhost ~]#
9.7.2.3 Creating a RAID Array
Function
Create a RAID 0, RAID 1, or RAID 5 array.
NOTE
For details about how to create a RAID 10 array, see 9.7.2.4 Creating a RAID 10 Array.
Format
MegaCli64 -cfgldadd -rlevel[:slot_id,:slot_id] -acontroller_id
Parameters
level RAID array level to be The value can be 0, 1, or

configured. 5.
Example
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -cfgldadd -r1[:2,:3] -a1

Adapter 1: Created VD 1
Adapter 1: Configured the Adapter!!
Exit Code: 0x00
9.7.2.4 Creating a RAID 10 Array
Function
Create a RAID 10 array.
Format
MegaCli64 -cfgspanadd -rlevel -array0[:slot_id,:slot_id] -array1[:slot_id,:slot_id]
-acontroller_id
Parameters
level RAID array level to be -

configured.
Example
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -cfgspanadd -r10 -array0[:2,:3] -array1[:4,:5] -a1
Adapter 1: Created VD 1
Adapter 1: Configured the Adapter!!
Exit Code: 0x00
9.7.2.5 Deleting a RAID Array
Function
Delete a RAID array.
Format
MegaCli64 -cfglddel -lVD_id -acontroller_id

Parameters
VD_id ID of the RAID array. -
Example
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -cfglddel -l1 -a1
Adapter 1: Deleted Virtual Drive-1(target id-1)
Exit Code: 0x00
Function
Pinpoint the position of a drive by setting its indicator status.
Format
MegaCli64 -PDLocate -Start -PhysDrv[:slot_id] -acontroller_id
MegaCli64 -PDLocate -Stop -PhysDrv[:slot_id] -acontroller_id
Parameters
Example
# Turn on the indicator of the drive in slot 0.
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -PDLocate -Start -PhysDrv[:0] -a1
Adapter: 1: Device at EnclId-N/A SlotId-0 -- PD Locate Start Command was successfully sent to Firmware
Exit Code: 0x00
# Turn off the indicator of the drive in slot 0.

[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -PDLocate -Stop -PhysDrv[:0] -a1
Adapter: 1: Device at EnclId-N/A SlotId-0 -- PD Locate Stop Command was successfully sent to Firmware
Exit Code: 0x00

9.7.2.7 Configuring or Deleting a Global Hot Spare Drive
Function
Configure or delete a global hot spare drive.
Format
MegaCli64 -pdhsp -set -physdrv[:slot_id] -acontroller_id
MegaCli64 -pdhsp -rmv -physdrv[:slot_id] -acontroller_id
Parameters
Example
# Set the drive in slot 2 as a global hot spare drive.
[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -pdhsp -set -physdrv[:2] -a1
Adapter: 1: Set Physical Drive at EnclId-N/A SlotId-2 as Hot Spare Success.
Exit Code: 0x00
# Delete the global hot spare drive.

[root@localhost ~]# MegaCli64 -pdhsp -rmv -physdrv[:2] -a1
Adapter: 1: Remove Physical Drive at EnclId-N/A SlotId-2 as Hot Spare Success.
Exit Code: 0x00

User Guide 10 PM8060
10 PM8060
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the features and configuration methods of PM8060.
10.1 Overview
10.2 Functions
10.7 Troubleshooting
10.9 Management Sscreen (EFI/UEFI Mode)
10.1 Overview
A PM8060 RAID controller card provides two 12 Gbit/s SAS wide ports and
supports PCIe 3.0 ports.
A PM8060 RAID controller card supports boot and configuration in legacy and
UEFI modes.

less than 1 ms.
Figure 10-1 shows a PM8060, which is installed in a PCIe slot of a server.
Figure 10-1 PM8060 appearance
Indicators
Table 10-1 describes indicators on the PM8060.

Figure 10-2 PM8060 indicators

n Suggestio
ns

Off: The the RAID
irregular. card.


n Suggestio
ns
2 D16 BOOT_LED Green On: The If this

RAID card RAID indicator is
status controller off, replace
indicator card the RAID
normal. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card
firmware is
abnormal.
3 D1 RAID Yellow On: The If this

controller RAID indicator is
card fault controller on, replace
indicator card is the RAID
malfunctio controller
ning. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card is
working
properly.
4 D18 Battery Green On: The N/A

status battery is
indicator being
charged.
Off: The
battery is
not in
position or
the
charging is
complete.
5 D19 24610 chip Green On: The If this

power power indicator is
indicator supply is off, replace
normal. the RAID
Off: The controller
power card.
supply is
abnormal.


n Suggestio
ns
6 D21 Battery Yellow Steady on: N/A

status The battery
indicator is being
charged.
Blinking:
The charge
is
complete.
Intermitten
t blinking:
The battery
is not in
position.
7 D22 Backup Yellow Blinking N/A

indicator fast: Data
is being
backed up.
Off: No
data is
being
backed up.
10.2 Functions
10.2.1 Support for Multiple RAID Levels

The PM8060 supports up to 256 devices (including 240 drives and 16 expansion
boards) and up to 64 arrays. Each array supports a maximum of four logical drives
(LDs).
NOTE
Arrays are also called RAID arrays. Each array can contain one or more LDs.
Table 10-2 lists the RAID levels and number of drives supported by the PM8060.
Table 10-2 RAID parameters supported by the PM8060
RAID Level Total Drives Maximum Failed Drives
Volume 1 0
RAID 0 2 to 128 0
RAID 1 2 1

RAID Level Total Drives Maximum Failed Drives
RAID 5 3 to 32 1
RAID 6 4 to 32 2
RAID 10 4 to 128 (2 to 64 RAID 1 Number of LDs

arrays) (even)
RAID 50 6 to 128 (2 to 8 RAID 5 Number of LDs

arrays)
RAID 60 8 to 128 (2 to 8 RAID 6 Number of LDs x 2

arrays)
NOTE
● An array consists of multiple LDs. For example, a RAID 50 array consists of two RAID 5
LDs and the number of LDs is 2.
● Failed drives cannot be adjacent.
● Each LD of a RAID 10 or RAID 50 array allows for only one failed drive.
● Each LD of a RAID 60 array allows for a maximum of two failed drives.
● The PM8060 supports non-standard RAID 1E, which allows for only one failed drive and
therefore is not recommended.

Hot spare drives are used to replace member drives in an array and take over data
on faulty member drives.
The PM8060 supports a maximum of two hot spare drives. When one or two
member drives of the same type as hot spare drives fail, they are replaced by hot
spare drives to prevent data loss or fault deterioration.
NOTE
● An idle drive can be configured as a hot spare drive, but a RAID member drive cannot.
● A hot spare drive must be a SATA or SAS drive, and it must have at least the capacity of
the RAID member drive with the largest capacity.

flexibility.

NOTE
After removing a drive, install it after at least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the drive cannot be
identified.
10.2.4 Rebuild and Copyback

If a member drive of a RAID array with redundancy becomes faulty, the hot spare
drive automatically replaces the failed drive and starts data synchronization with
the failed drive. Once the faulty drive has been replaced with a newly installed
data drive, data is copied from the hot spare drive to the new data drive. Once the
data copyback is complete, the hot spare drive is restored to the hot spare state.

The strip width equals the number of physical drives in an array. Increasing
the strip width can improve the array read/write performance. An increased
number of drives indicates more strips for concurrent read/write operations.
36 GB drives.
strip size. The data written to the drives is also divided into blocks based on the
strip size.
The PM8060 supports multiple strip sizes, including 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512
KB, and 1024 KB.

The PM8060 enables user commands to be directly transmitted to connected
drives, facilitating upper-layer services or management software in accessing and
controlling the drives. For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted
to the PM8060. If a RAID controller card does not support the passthrough

feature, you can install the OS only on the virtual drives configured under the
NOTE
If a drive in passthrough mode is faulty (not in the healthy status), the Fault indicator on
the drive will be lit and the iBMC will generate an alarm.
Drives mounted to the PM8060 support the following initialization modes:
● Initialize Drives: initializes specified drives to Ready.

NOTE
Drives in the Ready state can be used as member drives of an array or initialized to pass-
through drives in the Raw state.
● Secure Erase Drives: erases data from a specified drive and formats the drive
completely, which takes a long time.
● Secure ATA Erase: erases data from a specified SATA drive and formats the
drive completely, which takes a long time.
● Uninitialize Drives: initializes specified drives to Raw.

The PM8060 supports the following capacity expansion methods:
● Adding drives: Adds new drives to an existing array for capacity expansion.
● Increasing available array space: Increases the percentage of available space
of an array for capacity expansion if the capacity of all member drives in the
array is not fully utilized.
Before using this feature, download the ARCCONF Command Line Utility released
by PMC. For details, see the documents downloaded from the PMC official
website.

The PM8060 supports cache data read/write to improve the data read/write
performance. It supports the following read/write policies:
● Always Read Ahead: The PM8060 caches the data that follows the data
being read for faster access. This policy reduces drive seeks and shortens read
time from over 6 ms to less than 1 ms.
● Write Back: After the cache receives host data, the PM8060 signals the host
Data is directly written to the cache. The RAID controller card updates data to


If a large number of write operations are performed on a server, writing data into
the cache is much faster than writing data into drives.
To address this problem, a supercapacitor can be configured for the RAID
controller card to provide power-off protection.
Supercapacitors start supplying power to the cache only when the cache voltage is
lower than the preset value. If the cache voltage is higher than the preset value,
RAID controller cards supply power to the cache. This ensures data security of the
cache.
10.2.11 Import of Foreign Configurations

When a drive containing RAID configurations is installed into a server, the server
automatically imports the configurations when determining that the drive
configurations are foreign during the boot process.

All configurations described in this document about the PM8060 are performed on
the Configuration Utility, which is only accessible during server restart. To monitor
controller card status and obtain configuration information when the system is
running, use the ARCCONF tool.
10.3.1 Configuration Process

Figure 10-3 shows the initial configuration process for the PM8060 RAID
controller card.

Figure 10-3 Configuration process

interrupts services.
Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility screen of the PM8060.
1. During the server startup, press Ctrl+A when the message "Press <Ctrl><A>
for PMC RAID Configuration Utility" is displayed.

Figure 10-4 Configuration main screen

Logical Device Creates or deletes a RAID array, configures RAID

Configuration properties, initializes and erases drive data, scans for
drives, and sets boot options.
Controller Setting Configures RAID controller card attributes, staggered

power-on specifications, and RAID controller card
time, and views supercapacitor status.
Disk Utilities Views the current drive list and performs operations
on specific drives, such as turning on indicators,
formatting drives, and verifying data.
----End
Related Tasks
When the server is restarted and before the RAID configuration screen is
displayed, you can view the firmware version, PCIe slot information, capacitor
information, drives connected to the controller, and information about created
RAID arrays. See Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 Controller information
Related Concepts
None
10.3.3 Creating a Volume

Scenarios
Create a volume (single-drive RAID 0).

Workflow
Procedure
Step 2 Initialize member drives.
Before an array is created, if the predetermined drive contains partition
information or is totally used for creating another array, the drive is gray and
cannot be selected. Initialization is required if you want to use this drive as a
member drive of the new array.
1. Select Logical Device Configuration and press Enter.
The array configuration main screen is displayed.

Figure 10-6 Array configuration main menu
2. Select Initialize Drives and press Enter.

The screen lists all drives.
3. In the Select drives for initialization area, select the drives to be initialized
by pressing the space or Insert button.
The selected drives are displayed in the Selected Drives area, as shown in
Figure 10-8.
To cancel the selected drives, you can press Del.

Figure 10-8 Selecting the drives to be initialized
4. Press Enter.
NOTICE
Initialization clears the data on the RAID member drives. Be cautious to

perform this operation.
5. Enter Y.
The Initialization begins and lasts for about 10 seconds.
6. Press any key to return to the screen shown in Figure 10-6.
Step 3 Select the member drives.
1. Select Create Array and press Enter.
2. In the Select drives to create Array area, select the drives to be added to the
array by pressing the space or Insert button.
The selected drives are displayed in the Selected Drives area.
NOTE
Only one drive can be added to Volume.

Figure 10-9 Select the member drives.
Step 4 Configure array properties.

1. Press Enter.
Enter the array configuration screen, as shown in Figure 10-10. The
description about parameters on the screen is given in Table 10-4.
Figure 10-10 Array properties screen
Array Type Indicates the current RAID level.
Array Lable Indicates the array name.

Array Size Indicates the array capacity.

NOTE
This parameter is set to the maximum value by default. If
multiple logical drives are to be created, manually set the
array size.
Stripe Size Indicates the stripe size (64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512
KB, or 1024 KB).
When Array Type is RAID 1 or Volume, the value of
this parameter cannot be changed.
Read Caching Enables or disables the cache function.
Write Caching Indicates the write cache policy, which can be set as
follows:
– Enable Always: RAID write cache is still enabled in
case of no capacitor protection, and data loss may
be caused if a power failure occurs.
NOTE
Exercise caution when selecting Enable Always.
– Enable With Backup Unit: RAID write cache is
disabled in case of no capacitor protection or in case
that capacitor protection is not ready. This setting is
recommended.
– Disable: RAID write cache is always disabled.
Create RAID via Specifies the actions performed after creating an array.
– Quick Init and Skip Init can be performed for RAID
0, 1, and volumes. Quick Init allows you to quickly
initialize the array data, and Skip Init allows you to
recover the array and to set the RAID properties
among different drives without clearing the data.
– Besides Quick Init and Skip Init, Build, Verify, and
Clear can also be performed for arrays with a
redundancy function and allow you to initialize and
clear the array data.
2. Configure the array parameters according to Table 10-4.

3. Select Done and press Enter.
The system creates an array and performs the operations defined in Create
RAID via.
After the creation is complete, the array management screen is displayed.
Step 5 (Optional) Create multiple logical drives.

NOTE
● This operation can be performed only when the array size is smaller than the maximum
value.
● A maximum of 64 logical drives can be created for each array.
1. After the array is created, repeat Step 2 to Step 4, as shown in Figure 10-6.
You can create multiple logical drives based on the actual situation.
1. On the screen shown in Figure 10-6, select Manage Array and press Enter.
The array list is displayed.
Figure 10-11 Array list
2. Select an array by pressing ↑ and ↓ and then Enter.

The configuration information about the array is displayed.
----End

Scenarios
NOTE
The PM8060 supports SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs. Drives in one RAID array must be of the
same type, but can have different capacities or be provided by different vendors.

Workflow
Procedure
The array configuration main screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-12.


The screen lists all drives, as shown in Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-14.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-15.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 0.
3. Configure the other array parameters according to Table 10-5.
RAID via.

NOTE
value.
The array list is displayed, as shown in Table 10-5.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-20.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-21.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 1.
RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-26.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-27.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 5.
RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-32.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-33.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 6.
RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-38.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-39.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 10.

RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-44.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-45.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 50.

RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure


Figure 10-50.

4. Press Enter.
NOTICE

5. Enter Y.
Figure 10-51.


1. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.
KB, or 1024 KB).
follows:
NOTE
recommended.
2. Select RAID 60.

RAID via.

NOTE
value.

----End
10.3.11 Setting the Boot Device

Scenarios
The boot items in the PM8060 can only be configured in Legacy or Dual mode.
This section describes how to set a created array as a boot item.
NOTICE
A single drive working as a boot device has a higher priority than an array.
Prerequisites
Conditions

● You have performed the operations in 10.3.2 Logging In to the

● You have created an array.
Data
Procedure
Step 1 On the configuration tool main screen, select Logical Device Configuration and
press Enter.
The array configuration main screen is displayed.
Figure 10-54 Array configuration main screen
Step 2 Select Manage Array and press Enter.
Step 3 Select an array that you want to configure as a boot device, and press Ctrl+B to
change the boot order.
The first array in the list is the boot item.
NOTE
When an array is in the rebuild or initialization state, its boot order cannot be changed.
Step 4 Press Esc when prompted to exit the configuration screen and restart the server.
----End
Related Operations
device on the BIOS.

Reference.
Reference.

the configuration management screen, which can be accessed only after you
restart the server. To monitor RAID status and view RAID configurations during
system running, use the ARCCONF tool.

Scenarios
This section describes how to log in to the configuration management screen of
the PM8060.

Prerequisites
Conditions
None
Data
Documents

For details about how to log in to the screen by using the remote virtual console,
see the user guides of specific servers.
Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the PM8060 management screen.
Step 3 Select PMC maxView Storage Manager and press Enter.
The PMC maxView Storage Manager screen is displayed, as shown in Figure

10-55.
Figure 10-55 PMC maxView Storage Manager
Step 4 Press Enter.
Device scanning starts, and the controller list is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-56.

Figure 10-56 Controller list
Step 5 Select a controller and press Enter.

The controller configuration management screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-57. Table 10-12 lists the operations that can be performed on the screen.
Figure 10-57 Controller configuration management screen

Logical Device Configures arrays.

Configuration
Controller Settings Configures RAID controller card properties.
Disk Utilities Configures drives.
Administration Manages RAID controller card firmware.
----End
10.4.2 Creating SIMPLE_VOL
Scenarios
Create SIMPLE_VOL (single-drive RAID 0).
Workflow
Procedure


Before being added to a RAID, a drive must be initialized. The procedure is as
follows:
1. In Figure 10-57, select Logical Device Configuration and press Enter.
The Logical Device Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-58.
Figure 10-58 Logical Device Configuration screen


3. Select a drive and press Enter.

The [X] symbol indicates that the drive is selected, as shown in Figure 10-60.

4. Select SUBMIT and press Enter.

An alarm dialog box is displayed.
NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE
The [ ] symbol after a drive indicates that the drive is selectable.
2. Select a drive that you want to add to the array and press Enter, as shown in
Figure 10-62.

NOTE
– Only one drive can be added to SIMPLE_VO.

– The [X] symbol after a drive indicates that the drive is selected.
Figure 10-62 Selecting the member drives
3. Select PROCEED and press Enter.


Figure 10-63 Array configuration

The array properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-64. Table

Figure 10-64 Configuring array properties

Array lable Indicates the array name.
KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.
Array Size Indicates the array capacity unit.

Selection
Read Cache Enables or disables the cache function.

Write Cache Indicates the write cache policy, which can be set as
follows:
NOTE
recommended.

The system prompts that the array is created successfully.
(Optional) Create multiple logical drives.
NOTE
– This operation can be performed only when the array size is smaller than the
maximum value.
– A maximum of 64 logical drives can be created for each array.
5. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4, as shown in Figure 10-58.

----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-65.





NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

2. Select a drive that you want to add to the array and press Enter.
Select member drives, as shown in Figure 10-69.
NOTE
The [X] symbol after a drive indicates that the drive is selected.




1. Press Enter.
Figure 10-71 Configuring the RAID Level



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-73.





NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-81.





NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-89.





NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-97.





NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-105.




The [X] symbol indicates that the drive is selected, as shown in Figure
10-107.

NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow
Procedure
follows:
10-113.




The [X] symbol indicates that the drive is selected, as shown in Figure
10-115.

NOTICE

5. Press Enter.

NOTE

NOTE




1. Press Enter.



KB, or 1024 KB).

NOTE
array size.

Selection

follows:
NOTE
recommended.


NOTE
value.


----End


If a server is configured with a PM8060 RAID controller card or drive controllers of
different chips, set the boot devices for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.
Scenarios
After drives of a server are configured with array properties, hot spare drives are
configured to increase security and reduce impact on services caused by drive
faults.
When the PM8060 is in Legacy or Dual mode, hot spare drives cannot be
configured on the management screen.
Prerequisites
Conditions

● You have downloaded and installed the arcconf tool on the operating system.
Data
Tools
The hot spare drive must be configured by using the official ARCCONF released by
the PMC and installed on the operating system.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the arcconf tool in the operating system.
Step 2 Run the configuration command for hot spare drives.
Format: arcconf setstate controller ID device channel id device id hsp

[logicaldrive LM LN …]
Parameters in the command are described as follows:
● controller ID: indicates the controller ID.

● channel id: indicates the channel ID of the drive to be configured. The default
value is 0.
● device id: indicates the slot ID of the drive to be configured. (When the drive
backplane is a pass-through one, the device id is the same as the slot ID of
the drive. When the drive backplane is an expander one, the device id equals
the slot ID of the drive plus eight.)
● LM, LN: indicates the designated RAID.
When logicaldrive is specified, the hot spare drive of a designated RAID is
configured. When logicaldrive is not specified, the global hot spare drive is
configured.
The Figure 10-121 shows the process of configuring a hot spare drive.
Figure 10-121 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive
----End
10.5.2 Checking the Status of a Hot Spare Drive

After a drive is configured as a hot spare drive using the RAID controller card, use
the ARCCONF provided by PMC to query the drive status.
For details, see 10.10.2.18 Querying the Status of a Drive. In the command
output, if the value of State for a drive is Global Hot-Spare, the drive is a global
hot spare drive. If the value is Dedicated Hot-Spare, it is a dedicated hot spare
drive. Figure 10-122 shows a global hot spare drive and Figure 10-123 shows a
Figure 10-122 Checking the status of a drive (1)

Figure 10-123 Checking the status of a drive (2)

Scenarios
The PM8060 allows you to delete a hot spare drive using either of the following
methods:
● Initializing the drive on the Configuration Utility
● Deleting the drive using ARCCONF
10.5.3.1 Deleting a Hot Spare Drive on the Configuration Utility

Initialize the drive on the Configuration Utility. For details, see 10.8.2.3 Initialize
Drives or 10.8.2.5 Uninitialize Drives.
10.5.3.2 Using the CLI
Prerequisites
Conditions
● You have downloaded and installed the ARCCONF tool on the operating
system.
Data

Tools
The ARCCONF provided by PMC has been installed on the OS.
Procedure
1. Open the ARCCONF tool in the operating system.

2. Run the configuration command:
Format: arcconf setstate controller ID device channel id device id RDY
– controller ID: indicates the controller ID.
– channel id: indicates the channel ID of the hot spare drive to be deleted.
The default value is 0.
– device id: indicates the slot ID of the hot spare drive to be deleted.
10.5.4 Configuring Boot Drives
Scenarios
If the OS is installed on a raw drive, set the drive as the boot drive. Otherwise, the
OS cannot be started.
This section describes how to set a drive as the boot drive.
NOTICE
A drive working as the boot drive has a higher priority than an array.
Prerequisites
Conditions

Data
Data on the target drive will be lost during the restoration. Therefore, back up the
data before the restoration.
Procedure
Restoring the Target Drive
This operation will delete the array partition information and OS residual
partitions from the drive so that the OS can directly use the drive.

NOTE
This operation will cause data loss on the drive. Back up the data before this operation.
Step 1 On the array configuration and management main screen, select Logical Device
The array configuration screen is displayed. See Figure 10-124.
Figure 10-124 Array configuration screen
Step 2 Select Uninitialize Drives and press Enter.

Step 3 In the Select drives for uninitialization area, press the space bar to select the
target drive. The selected drive is displayed in the Selected Drives area, as shown
in Figure 10-125.
NOTE
Drives that have been added to an array cannot be selected.

Figure 10-125 Selecting the drive to be restored
Step 4 Press Enter.

Step 5 Enter Y.
The system starts to restore drive information.
Step 6 Set the boot drive.
1. On the main menu shown in Figure 10-124, select Select Boot Device and
press Enter.
2. In the Select drive to set as boot device area, press the space bar to select
the drive whose information has been restored in Figure 10-125. The drive is
displayed in the Selected Drives area, as shown in Figure 10-127.

To deselect a drive, press Del.
Figure 10-127 Selecting the drive to be configured
3. Press Enter.
4. Press Y.
The drive is set as the boot drive.
----End
Related Tasks
After the configuration is complete, go to the drive list again. In the Selected
Drives area, check that the drive has been set as the boot drive.
Related Concepts
None
10.5.5 Expanding Array Capacity
Scenarios
When the PM8060 is in Legacy or Dual mode, array capacity cannot be expanded
on the management screen.
methods:
● Adding drives: Adds new drives to an existing array for capacity expansion.
● Increasing available array space: Increases the percentage of available space
of an array for capacity expansion if the capacity of all member drives in the
array is not fully utilized.


If a drive fails when you add drives to an array for capacity expansion, the array
will become offline and data cannot be recovered. Perform this operation with
caution.
Prerequisites
Conditions
The following conditions must be met before you add a drive for array capacity
expansion:
● The server has drives that have not been added to an array.
The following conditions must be met before you Increase available array space
for capacity expansion:
● Member drives of the array have available space.

Data
Tools
The RAID capacity cannot be expanded on the BIOS screen. To expand the RAID
capacity, you must install the Adaptec ARCCONF Command Line Utility
(ARCCONF for short) released by Microsemi on the operating system.
Procedure
● Add drives.
a. Open ARCCONF in the operating system.
b. Run the following command:
Format: arcconf modify controller_ID from RAID_ID to stripesize
stripsizevalue capacity RAID_level channel id1 device id1 ... channel idN
device idN
● RAID_ID: indicates the ID of the array whose capacity is to be expanded.
● stripsizevalue: indicates the strip size.
● capacity: indicates the capacity after the expansion.
● RAID_level: indicates the RAID level after the expansion.
● channel id: indicates the channel ID of the drive to be added. The default
value is 0.
● device id: indicates the slot ID of the drive to be added.
Example:
./arcconf modify 1 from 1 to stripesize 64 10240 5 0 1 0 2 0 3

● Increase available array space.

a. Open ARCCONF in the operating system.
b. Run the following command:
Format: arcconf modify controller_ID from RAID_ID to capacity
RAID_level channel id1 device id1 ... channel idN device idN
● RAID_ID: indicates the ID of the array whose capacity is to be expanded.
● capacity: indicates the capacity after the expansion.
● RAID_level: indicates the RAID level after the expansion.
● channel id: indicates the channel ID of the current member drive. The default
value is 0.
● device id: indicates the slot ID of the current member drive.
Example:
./arcconf modify 1 from 1 to 10240 5 0 1 0 2 0 3
10.5.6 Deleting an Array

Scenarios
Delete an array to release drives if you want to reconfigure the array.
Prerequisites
Conditions
Data
The data in the array to be deleted has been backed up.
Procedure
Step 1 On the configuration tool main screen, select Logical Device Configuration and
press Enter.
The array configuration main screen is displayed. See Figure 10-128.

Figure 10-128 Array configuration main screen
Step 2 Select Manage Arrays and press Enter.
The array list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-129.
Step 3 Select the array to be deleted and press Del to delete the array.
Step 4 Select Delete and press Enter.
Step 6 Repeatedly press Esc to exit the configuration screen.

----End
10.5.7 Viewing Supercapacitor Properties

Scenarios
You can view the supercapacitor properties of a controller to check whether the
supercapacitor protection feature meets the actual requirements.
Procedure
Step 2 On the configuration tool main screen, select Controller Settings and press Enter.
The controller operation menu is displayed. See Figure 10-130.
Figure 10-130 Controller operation menu
Step 3 Select Backup Unit Status and press Enter.

The screen for querying the supercapacitor status is displayed, as shown in Figure

Figure 10-131 Supercapacitor status screen
Table 10-21 Supercapacitor status parameters

Overall Backup Working status of a supercapacitor. The supercapacitor can

Unit Status protect cache data only when this parameter is set to Ready.
NOTE
This parameter is set to Ready only when both Non-Volatile Storage
Status and Supercap Status are Ready.
Backup Unit Supercapacitor model.

Type
Non-Volatile Flash status of the data protection module.

Storage Status
Supercap Working status of a supercapacitor. The supercapacitor can

Status protect cache data only when this parameter is set to Ready.
NOTE
This parameter is set to Ready only when both Non-Volatile Storage
Status and Supercap Status are Ready.
Temperature Supercapacitor temperature.
Threshold Supercapacitor temperature threshold.

Temperature
Life-time Highest and lowest historical temperatures.

Temperature
Recorded(Min/
Max)
Voltage(Presen Current voltage and voltage threshold provided by the

t/Max) supercapacitor.

Life-time Max Highest historical voltage.

Voltage NOTE
Recorded The value may be higher than the voltage threshold. It is the maximum
value reached during the self-learning of the supercapacitor. The value
is normal if it is lower than 5500 mV.
Current Current and current threshold provided by the supercapacitor.

Drawn(Present
/Max)
Health Supercapacitor health. Generally, the value must be greater

than 90%. Otherwise, the supercapacitor may be faulty.
Charge Level Supercapacitor charging level status. When the supercapacitor

status is Ready, the parameter value must be 100%.
Estimated life Supercapacitor service life.

time
(Years:Months)
Step 4 Repeatedly press Esc to exit the configuration screen.
----End
10.6.1 Configuring a Global Hot Spare Drive
Scenarios
faults.
Prerequisites
Conditions

● You have performed the operations in 10.4.1 Logging In to the Management
Screen.
Data

Procedure
Step 1 The page for managing hot spare drives appears.
1. On the Controller Operations screen, select Logical Device Configuration
and press Enter.
10-132.
2. Select Global Hotspares and press Enter.

The capacity of the hot spare drive must be greater than that of the member
drive.
3. Press any key.
The hot spare drive operation list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-133.

Figure 10-133 Operation list
Step 2 Add a hot spare drive.

1. On the screen displayed in Figure 10-133, select Add Spares and press Enter.
NOTE
[ ] indicates that the drive is idle.

2. Select an idle drive and press Enter.

After a drive is selected, its status changes to [X].
3. Select ADD and press Enter.
4. Press any key to return to the Figure 10-133 screen.
1. Press Esc to go back to the Boot Manager screen.
----End
10.6.2 Deleting a Global Hot Spare Drive

Scenarios
Procedure
Step 2 The page for managing hot spare drives appears.
and press Enter.
10-135.

2. Select Global Hotspares and press Enter.

The capacity of the hot spare drive must be greater than that of the member
drive.
3. Press any key.


1. On the screen displayed in Figure 10-136, select Delete Spares and press
Enter.
The hot spare drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-137.

Figure 10-137 Hot spare drive list
2. Select the hot spare drive to be deleted and press Enter.

The status of the selected hot spare drive changes to [X].
3. Select DELETE and press Enter.
----End
10.6.3 Configuring a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive

Scenarios
faults.
Prerequisites
Conditions
Screen.
Data

Procedure
Step 1 On the Controller Operations screen, select Logical Device Configuration and
press Enter.
The Logical Device Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-138.


Step 3 Select the array to be operated and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure
10-140 is displayed. Table 10-22 describes the operations on the screen.
Figure 10-140 Array operation list

Array Properties Queries array properties.
Delete Array Deletes an array.
Force Online Forces the array online.
Cache Settings Modifies the cache properties of the

array.
Failover Assignment Manages the dedicated hot spare

drives of the array.
Rebuild Array Rebuilds the array.
Step 4 Select Failover Assignment and press Enter.

An operation list is displayed.
Step 5 Select Add Spares and press Enter.
NOTE
[ ] indicates that the drive can be configured as a hot spare drive.

Step 7 Select ADD and press Enter.
----End
10.6.4 Deleting a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive
Scenarios
Procedure
Step 2 On the Controller Operations screen, select Logical Device Configuration and
press Enter.

Step 4 Select the array to be operated and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure



array.


Step 6 Select Delete Spares and press Enter.
The hot spare drive list is displayed.
Step 7 Select the hot spare drive to be deleted and press Enter.
The status of the hot spare drive changes to [X].
Step 8 Select DELETE and press Enter.
----End

Scenarios
Prerequisites
Conditions
Screen.
Data
Procedure
Step 1 Go to the array property management screen.
and press Enter.


10-145.
2. Select Manage Array and press Enter.


3. Select an array and press Enter.

The array operation list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-147.

Step 2 Delete an array.

1. Select Delete Array and press Enter.
2. Press Enter.
The message "Logical Drive Deletion success..." is displayed.
----End
Maintenance Guide.
10.7.1 Drive Fault

Symptom
NOTE
If a drive in pass-through mode is faulty (not in the healthy status), the Fault indicator
on the drive will be lit and the iBMC will generate an alarm.
Solution
NOTE
● Before removing a drive, determine its location to prevent misoperations. If another

drive is removed, the RAID array will fail.
Step 1 Remove the failed drive.

replaces the failed drive and rebuilds data.


● If the new drive does not contain data, it works as follows:
– If the RAID array has a hot spare drive, the data on the hot spare drive
will automatically be copied to the newly installed drive. Then, the
original hot spare drive is still the hot spare drive. No further action is
required.
– If the RAID array with redundancy does not have a spare drive, the newly
● If the new drive already contains RAID information, go to Step 4.
Step 4 Use secure erase to remove data from the new drive.
Step 5 Manually rebuild a RAID array.
----End

Symptom
● The server reports an alarm indicating a RAID controller card fault.
Solution
Step 1 Replace the RAID controller card. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Restart the server. After the foreign configuration is automatically imported, check
whether the RAID configuration is the same as that before the replacement.
----End
10.7.3 Supercapacitor Fault

Symptom
If the supercapacitor of a RAID controller card is faulty, the write speed of the
server may decrease significantly.
Solution
Step 1 Restart the server and observe the supercapacitor status displayed during the
server startup.

Figure 10-148 shows the supercapacitor status information. Perform operations

based on the supercapacitor status.
● Ready: The supercapacitor is in the normal state.
● Not Ready: The supercapacitor is not in position. Install a supercapacitor.
● Preparing: The supercapacitor is being charged. Wait for 15 minutes and then
operate the RAID controller card.
Figure 10-148 Supercapacitor status
Step 2 If the fault persists, contact Huawei technical support.
----End

Procedure
Step 2 Log in to the Configuration Utility screen of the PM8060.


Logical Device Creates or deletes a RAID array, configures RAID

Configuration properties, initializes and erases drive data, scans for
drives, and sets boot options.
Controller Setting Configures RAID controller card attributes, staggered

power-on specifications, and RAID controller card
time, and views supercapacitor status.
on specific drives, such as turning on indicators,
formatting drives, and verifying data.
----End
Related Tasks
When the server is restarted and before the RAID configuration screen is
displayed, you can view the firmware version, PCIe slot information, capacitor
information, drives connected to the controller, and information about created
RAID arrays. See Figure 10-150.

Related Concepts
None
10.8.2 Logical Device Configuration

On the Logical Device Configuration screen, you can create and delete arrays,
configure array properties, initialize and erase data from drives, scan for drives,
and configure boot devices.
Screen Introduction
On the Configuration Utility screen shown in Figure 10-149, select Logical Device
Configuration to display the array configuration main menu, as shown in Figure


Manage Arrays Manages created arrays.
Create Array Creates an array.
Initialize Drives Initializes specific drives.
Rescan Drives Rescans devices that are mounted to a RAID controller

card.
Secure Erase Drives Erases data from specified drives.

NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drives. Before
performing the operation, check whether the data needs to be
backed up.
Uninitialize Drives Initializes specified drives to Raw.

NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drives. Before
backed up.
Select Boot Device Sets the boot drive.
10.8.2.1 Manage Arrays

On the Manage Arrays screen, you can delete an array and set the boot devices.

Screen Description
Select Main Menu > Manage Arrays, as shown in Figure 10-151. The array list is

Step 1 In the array list, select the array to be configured as the boot device and press
CTRL+B.
The array is moved to the first row of the list.
----End
Checking Array Status

Step 1 In the array list, select the array to be viewed and press Enter.
The array property window is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-153. Table 10-26
describes the array property parameters.
Figure 10-153 Array properties

Table 10-26 RAID properties
Array #00N Array ID.
Array Size Array capacity.
Array Status Array status.

● Optimal: The virtual drive is running properly and all
member drives are online.
● Degraded: The virtual drive is running abnormally and a
member drive is faulty or offline.
● Failed: The virtual drive is faulty and cannot run properly.
Array BlockSize Strip size of the array.
Type RAID level of the array.
Array Members List of member drives in the array.
----End
10.8.2.2 Create Array

On the Create Array screen, you can create an array.
Screen Introduction
Select Main Menu > Create Array, as shown in Figure 10-151. The array list is


Step 1 Press Insert or the space bar on the screen shown in Figure 10-154 to add
member drives to the Selected Drives area.
Step 2 Press Enter.
The array configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-155. Table

Array Type RAID level of the array.
Array Label Array name.
Stripe Size Stripe size (64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, or 1024 KB).
When Array Type is RAID 1 or Volume, the value of this
parameter cannot be changed.

Write Caching Write cache policy. The options are as follows:

● Enable Always: RAID write cache is still enabled in case
of no capacitor protection, and data loss may be caused
if a power failure occurs.
● Enable With Backup Unit: RAID write cache is disabled
in case of no capacitor protection or in case that
capacitor protection is not ready. This setting is
recommended.
● Disable: RAID write cache is always disabled.
Create RAID via Specifies the operation to be performed after an array is

created.
● Quick Init and Skip Init can be performed for RAID 0,
1, and volumes. Quick Init allows you to quickly
recover the array and to set the RAID properties among
different drives without clearing the data.
● Besides Quick Init and Skip Init, Build, Verify, and
redundancy function and allow you to initialize the
RAID data and clear the array data.
Step 3 Set array parameters according to Table 10-27.
Step 4 Select Done and press Enter.

NOTE
If all the drives to be added to the array are SSDs, a dialog box is displayed asking you
whether to disable cache settings.
The system creates an array and performs the operations defined in Create RAID
via.
After the configuration is complete, the Main Menu screen is displayed.
----End
10.8.2.3 Initialize Drives

On the Initialize Drives screen, you can initialize a specified drive.
Before creating a RAID array, you must initialize member drives.
Screen Introduction
Select Main Menu > Initialize Drives, as shown in Figure 10-151. The disk list is

Procedure
Step 1 In the Select drives for initialization area, select the drives to be initialized by
pressing the space bar or Insert button.
The selected drives are displayed in the Selected Drives area, as shown in Figure
10-157.
Step 2 Press Enter.


NOTICE
Initialization clears all the data on the RAID member drives. Be cautious to
Step 3 Enter Y.
The initialization begins and lasts for about 10 seconds.
Step 4 Press any key to return to the Main Menu screen.
----End
10.8.2.4 Secure Erase

On the Secure Erase screen, you can clear all information on a specified drive.
NOTICE
This operation will delete all data from the drive. Before performing the operation,
check whether the data needs to be backed up.
Screen Introduction
Select Main Menu > Secure Erase, as shown in Figure 10-151. The drive list is
Procedure
Step 1 In the Select drives for secure erase area, select the desired drives by pressing
the space bar or Insert button.

10-159.
Step 2 Press Enter.
NOTE
Drives that have been added to an array cannot be selected.
Step 3 Enter Y.
The secure erasing starts and the progress is displayed.
The system starts to safely erase the drive. During this process, no other
operations can be performed on the drive.
----End
10.8.2.5 Uninitialize Drives

On the Uninitialize Drives screen, you can initialize a specified drive.
When a specified drive is used as a pass-through drive, you can use this function
to initialize the drive.
NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drive. Before performing the operation, check
whether the data needs to be backed up.

Screen Introduction
Select Main Menu > Uninitialize Drives, as shown in Figure 10-151. The drive list
is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-160.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Select drives for uninitialization area, select the drives to be initialized by
10-161.

Step 2 Press Enter.

NOTICE
Initialization clears all the data on the RAID member drives. Be cautious to
Step 3 Enter Y.
The initialization begins and lasts for about 10 seconds.
----End
10.8.2.6 Select Boot Device

On the Select Boot Device screen, you can set a specified drive as the boot device.
If both the drive and array boot options exist, the drive boot option has a higher
priority than the array boot option.
Screen Introduction
Select Main Menu > Select Boot Device, as shown in Figure 10-151. The drive
list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-162.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Select drives to set as boot device area, select the desired drives by

10-163.
Step 2 Press Enter.

Step 3 Enter Y.
The Main Menu page is displayed.
----End
10.8.3 Controller Settings

On the Controller Settings screen, you can configure RAID controller card
properties, staggered power-on specifications, and time parameters, and view the
supercapacitor status.
Screen Introduction
Select Controller Settings in Figure 10-149. The controller operation menu is
displayed, as shown in Figure 10-164. Table 10-28 describes the parameters.

Figure 10-164 Options

Controller Queries and modifies controller properties.

Configuration
Advanced Queries and modifies advanced controller properties.

Configuration NOTE
If you need to modify the advanced properties of a controller,
modify them before enabling services.
Backup Unit Status Views supercapacitor properties.
10.8.3.1 Controller Configuration

On the Controller Configuration screen, you can view and modify controller
properties.
Screen Introduction
On the Options screen shown in Figure 10-164, select Controller Configuration
to display the controller property screen, as shown in Figure 10-165. The
parameters are described in Table 10-29.

Figure 10-165 Controller properties
Table 10-29 Controller parameters
Drives Write Cache Indicates the drive cache write policy. The value options
are as follows:
● Drive Specific: retains the defaults.
● Enable All: enables the cache write function of all
drives.
● Disable All: disables the cache write function of all
drives. The default value is Drive Specific.
Runtime BIOS Indicates the controller Option ROM status. The value
options are as follows:
● Enabled: enables the controller Option ROM. The
default value is Enabled.
● Disabled: disables the controller Option ROM.
Automatic Failover Indicates the automatic rebuild function status. The

value options are as follows:
● Enabled: enables the automatic rebuild function. The
● Disabled: disables the automatic rebuild function.
Array Background Indicates the status of the RAID background consistency

Consistency Check check function. The value options are as follows:
● Enabled: enables the background consistency check
function.
● Disabled: disables the background consistency check
function. The default value is Disabled.

Device based BBS Indicates the boot device reported to the BIOS. The value
Support options are as follows:
● Enabled: reports drive or RAID device information to
the BIOS.
● Disabled: reports only RAID device information to the
BIOS. The default value is Disabled.
SATA Native Indicates the status of the optimization configuration for

Command Queuing SATA read and write commands by the controller. The
● Enabled: enables the optimization configuration. The
● Disabled: disables the optimization configuration.
Physical Drives Indicates whether the currently connected physical drive

Display during POST is displayed during the Option ROM boot phase. The
● Enabled: displays the drive. The default value is
Enabled.
● Disabled: does not display the drive.
Alarm Control Indicates the onboard buzzer status. The value options
are as follows:
● Enabled: enables the onboard buzzer. The default
value is Enabled.
● Disabled: disables the onboard buzzer.
Default Background Indicates the default background task priority. The value
Task Priority options are as follows:
● High
● Medium
● Low
Backplane Mode Indicates the backplane interaction mode. The value

options are as follows:
● SGPIO
● IBPI
● Disabled
Selectable Indicates the performance mode. The value options are

Performance Mode as follows:
● Dynamic
● OLTP/Db
● Big Block Bypass
● User Defined

Controller Mode Indicates the controller working mode. The value options
are as follows:
● RAID: expose RAW: If drives are not configured with
RAID properties, the controller card reports them to
the OS as raw drives. Therefore, the drives can be
operated on the OS directly.
● RAID: hide RAW: The controller card reports only the
drives with the RAID properties.
● HBA: No RAID level is supported, and all drives are
reported as raw drives.
● Auto Volume: If drives are not configured with the
RAID properties but contain OS partitions, the
controller card reports them to the OS as raw drives.
If the drives are not configured with the RAID
properties and do not contain the OS partitions, the
controller card reports them after volumes are created
in the drives by using the controller card. The default
value is RAID: expose RAW.
Modifying RAID Controller Card Properties

Step 1 Select a parameter to be modified and press Enter.
The value option list is displayed.
Step 2 Select a value and press Enter.
Step 3 Press Esc.
The Options screen is displayed.
----End
10.8.3.2 Advanced Configuration

On the Advanced Configuration screen, you can view advanced controller
properties and modify power supply parameters.
Screen Introduction
On the Options screen shown in Figure 10-164, select Advanced Configuration
to display the advanced controller property screen, as shown in Figure 10-166.

Figure 10-166 Advanced controller properties
Power Management You can set the power supply parameters of the
controller.
Time Zone Time zone.
Stay Awake Start Time from which the drive stays in the active state. That
is, the drive will not spin down from the specified time.
Stay Awake End Time after which the drive will no longer stay in the
active state. That is, the drive will not spin down before
the specified time.
Spinup limit Staggered power-on mechanism of drives in the server.

(Internal)
Spinup limit Staggered power-on mechanism of external JBOD drives.

(External)
NVRAM State NVRAM status of the controller.
Controller Memory Memory capacity of the controller.

Size
Controller Serial Serial number of the controller.

Number
Modifying Power Supply Parameters

Step 1 When the cursor is on Set Values, press Enter.

Step 2 Modify the parameters. See Table 10-30.

Step 3 Press Esc.
----End
10.8.3.3 Backup Unit Status

On the Backup Unit Status screen, you can view supercapacitor properties.
Screen Introduction
On the Options screen shown in Figure 10-164, select Backup Unit Status to
display the supercapacitor property screen, as shown in Figure 10-167. Table
Figure 10-167 Supercapacitor properties

Overall Backup Unit Status Working status of a supercapacitor. The

supercapacitor can protect cache data only
when this parameter is set to Ready.
NOTE
This parameter is set to Ready only when both
Non-Volatile Storage Status and Supercap Status
are Ready.
Backup Unit Type Supercapacitor type.
Non-Volatile Storage Status Status of the non-volatile memory.
Supercap Status Supercapacitor status.

Threshold Temperature Temperature threshold.
Life-time Temperature Highest and lowest historical temperatures.

Recorded(Min/Max)
Voltage(Present/Max) Current voltage and voltage threshold

provided by the supercapacitor.
Life-time Max Voltage Highest historical voltage.

Recorded NOTE
The value may be higher than the voltage
threshold. It is the maximum value reached during
the self-learning of the supercapacitor. The value is
normal if it is lower than 5500 mV.
Current Drawn(Present/Max) Current and current threshold provided by the

supercapacitor.
Health Supercapacitor health. Generally, the value

must be greater than 90%. Otherwise, the
supercapacitor may be faulty.
Charge Level Supercapacitor charging level status. When

the supercapacitor status is Ready, the
parameter value must be 100%.
Estimated life time Supercapacitor service life.

(Years:Months)
10.8.4 Disk Utilities

On the Disk Utilities screen, you can check the current drive list and perform
operations on specific drives, such as turning on indicators, formatting drives, and
verifying data.
Screen Introduction
On the Configuration Utility screen shown in Figure 10-149, select Disk Utilities
to display the drive list, as shown in Figure 10-168.
Select a drive and press Enter to display the operation menu, as shown in Table
10-32.

Table 10-32 Operation menu

Format Disk Formats the drive, which takes a long time and clears
all data in the drive. Formatting cannot be stopped
once started.
NOTE
This operation cannot be stopped once started, takes a long
time, and will delete all data from the drive. Therefore, this
operation is not recommended.
Verify Disk Media Checks drive bad blocks to prevent bad block during
use. Users can stop the operation by pressing Esc.
Identify Drive Locates the drive.
Locating a Drive
Step 1 Move the cursor to a specified drive and press Enter.
Step 2 On the displayed menu, select Identify Drive.
NOTE
Pressing any key will turn off the UID.
----End
10.8.5 Exit
Click Exit to exit the configuration screen.

● Click Yes to exit the configuration screen and restart the server.
● Click No to return to the configuration screen.
10.9 Management Sscreen (EFI/UEFI Mode)
Scenarios
This section describes how to log in to the configuration management screen of
the PM8060.

Prerequisites
Conditions
None
Data
Documents
For details about how to log in to the screen by using the remote virtual console,
see the user guides of specific servers.

Procedure
Step 3 Select PMC maxView Storage Manager and press Enter.
The PMC maxView Storage Manager screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-55.
Figure 10-170 PMC maxView Storage Manager
Step 4 Press Enter.

Device scanning starts, and the controller list is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-171.

Figure 10-171 Controller list
Step 5 Select a controller and press Enter.

The controller configuration management screen is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-172. Table 10-33 lists the operations that can be performed on the screen.
Figure 10-172 Controller configuration management screen

Logical Device Configures arrays.

Configuration
Controller Settings Configures RAID controller card properties.
Disk Utilities Configures drives.
----End
10.9.2 Logical Device Configuration

On the Logical Device Configuration screen, you can create and delete arrays,
configure array properties, initialize and erase data from drives, and configure
global hot spare drives.
Screen Introduction
Configuration to display the Logical Device Configuration screen, as shown in
Figure 10-173. The parameters are described in Table 10-34.

Initialize Drives Initializes specified drives to Ready.

NOTE
Drives in the Ready state can be used as member drives of an
array or initialized to pass-through drives in the Raw state.
Rescan Drives Rescans devices that are mounted to a RAID controller

card.
Procedure: Select the item and press Enter.
Secure Erase Drives Erases data from specified drives.

This method can thoroughly format drives but takes a
long time.
NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drive. Before
backed up.
Secure ATA Erase Erases data from specified SATA drives.

This method can thoroughly format drives but takes a
long time.
Uninitialize Drives Initializes specified drives to Raw.

NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drive. Before
backed up.
Global Hotspares Manages global hot spare drives.
Initialize a drive.
NOTE
This operation will delete all data from the drive. Before performing the operation, check
whether the data needs to be backed up.
Step 1 Based on the actual situation, select Initialize Drives, Secure Erase Drives, Secure
ATA Erase, or Uninitialize Drives and press Enter.
Step 3 Select SUBMIT and press Enter.
----End

10.9.2.1 Manage Arrays

On the Manage Arrays screen, you can view array properties, delete an array, set
hot spare drives, and manually rebuild an array.
Screen Introduction
Select Logical Device Configuration > Manage Arrays, as shown in Figure
10-173. The array list is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-174.
Select the array to be operated and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure


Delete Array Deletes the array.

array.

Querying Array Properties

Step 1 Select Array Properties and press Enter.
The array property screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-176. Table 10-36
describes the array properties.

Table 10-36 Array properties

Array name Array name defined by user.
Array Type RAID level of the array.
Array Block Size Block size of the array.
Stripe size Stripe size of the array.
Status Array status.

● Optimal: The virtual drive is running properly and all
● Degraded: The virtual drive is running abnormally and a
member drive is faulty or offline.
Protected by Whether a global hot spare drive is configured.

Dedicated spare
Protected by Whether a dedicated hot spare drive is configured.

Global spare

----End
Deleting an Array
Step 1 Select Delete Array and press Enter.
Step 2 Press Enter.
The array is deleted.
----End

NOTE
[] indicates that the drive can be configured as a hot spare drive.


The drive state changes to [X].
----End
Deleting a Dedicated Hot Spare Drive

The status of the hot spare drive changes to [X].
----End
10.9.2.2 Create Array

Creating an Array
Step 1 Select Logical Device Configuration > Create Array, as shown in Figure 10-173.

Step 2 Select drives to be added to the RAID array and press Enter.
NOTE
If [X] follows a drive, the drive has been selected.
Step 3 Select PROCEED and press Enter.

The RAID array level configuration screen is displayed. See Figure 10-179.
Figure 10-179 Configuring the RAID level
Step 4 Press Enter.

The configurable RAID levels are displayed.
Step 5 Select a RAID level and press Enter.
describes the parameters displayed on the screen.


Array lable Array name.
Stripe Size Stripe size (64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, or 1024 KB).
When Array Type is RAID 1 or Volume, the value of this
parameter cannot be changed.
Array Size Array capacity unit.

Selection
Write Cache Write cache policy. The options are as follows:

● Enable Always: RAID write cache is still enabled in case
of no capacitor protection, and data loss may be caused
if a power failure occurs.
● Enable With Backup Unit: RAID write cache is disabled
in case of no supercapacitor protection or in case that
supercapacitor protection is not ready. This setting is
recommended.
● Disable: RAID write cache is always disabled.

Create RAID via Operation to be performed after an array is created.

● Quick Init and Skip Init can be performed for RAID 0,
1, and volumes. Quick Init allows you to quickly
recover the array and to set the RAID properties among
different drives without clearing the data.
● Besides Quick Init and Skip Init, Build, Verify, and
redundancy function and allow you to initialize the
RAID data and clear the array data.
Step 7 Configure array parameters.

----End
10.9.2.3 Global Hotspares

On the Global Hotspares screen, you can create and delete global hot spare
drives.
Select Global Hotspares on the Logical Device Configuration screen shown in
Figure 10-173. See Figure 10-181.
Figure 10-181 Operations on the global hot spare drive


Step 2 Select an idle drive and press Enter.
----End
Deleting a Global Hot Spare Drive

----End

On the Controller Settings screen, users can view and modify controller
properties.
Screen Introduction
On the Configuration Utility screen shown in Figure 10-172, select Controller
Settings to display the Controller Settings screen, as shown in Figure 10-182.

Figure 10-182 Controller Settings screen

Controller Configures controller properties.

Configuration
Advanced Configures advanced controller properties.

Configuration
Backup Unit Status Views capacitor properties.
Clear NVSAM Clears the NVSAM.
10.9.3.1 Controller Configuration

On the Controller Configuration screen, you can view and modify RAID controller
card properties.
Screen Introduction
On Controller Settings shown in Figure 10-182, select Controller Configuration
to display the Controller Configuration screen, as shown in Figure 10-183. Table

Figure 10-183 Controller Configuration screen
Table 10-39 Parameters on the Controller Configuration screen

Drives Write Cache Indicates the drive cache write policy.

The value options are as follows:
● Drive Specific: retains the defaults.
● Enable All: enables the cache write
function of all drives.
● Disable All: disables the cache
write function of all drives. The
default value is Drive Specific.
Runtime BIOS Indicates the controller Option ROM

status. The value options are as
follows:
● Enabled: enables the controller
Option ROM.
● Disabled: disables the controller
Option ROM. The default value is
Enabled.

Automatic Failover Indicates the automatic rebuild

function status. The value options are
as follows:
● Enabled: enables the automatic
rebuild function.
● Disabled: disables the automatic
rebuild function. The default value
is Enabled.
Array Background consistency check Indicates the status of the RAID

background consistency check
function. The value options are as
follows:
● Enabled: enables the background
consistency check function.
● Disabled: disables the background
consistency check function. The
default value is Disabled.
Device based BBS support Indicates the device reported to the

BIOS. The value options are as follows:
● Enabled: reports drive or RAID
device information to the BIOS.
● Disabled: reports only RAID device
information to the BIOS. The
default value is Disabled.
SATA NCQ(Native Command Queuing) Indicates the status of the

optimization configuration for SATA
read and write commands by the
controller. The value options are as
follows:
● Enabled: enables the optimization
configuration.
● Disabled: disables the optimization
configuration. The default value is
Enabled.
Physical Drives Display during POST Indicates whether the currently

connected physical drive is displayed
during the Option ROM boot phase.
● Enabled: displays the drive.
● Disabled: does not display the
drive. The default value is Enabled.

Alarm Control Indicates the onboard buzzer status.

● Disabled: disables the onboard
buzzer.
● Enabled: enables the onboard
buzzer.
● Silence: mutes the onboard buzzer.
● Test: tests the onboard buzzer.
Default Background Task Priority Indicates the default background task

priority. The value options are as
follows:
● High
● Medium
● Low
Backplane Mode Indicates the backplane interaction

mode. The value options are as
follows:
● SGPIO
● IBPI
● Disabled
Selectable Performance Mode Indicates the performance mode. The

● Dynamic
● OLTP/Db
● Big Block Bypass
● User Defined

Controller Mode Indicates the controller working mode.

● RAID: expose RAW: If drives are
not configured with RAID
properties, the controller card
reports them to the OS as raw
drives. Therefore, the drives can be
operated on the OS directly.
● RAID: hide RAW: The controller
card reports only the drives
configured with the RAID
properties.
● HBA: No RAID level is supported,
and all drives are reported as raw
drives.
● Auto Volume: If drives are not
configured with the RAID properties
but contain OS partitions, the
controller card reports them to the
OS as raw drives. If the drives are
not configured with the RAID
properties and do not contain OS
partitions, the controller card
reports them after volumes are
created in the drives by using the
controller card.
Max Link Speed Indicates the controller port rate. The

● 6 GBPS
● 12 GBPS
Modify RAID controller card properties.

Step 1 Select a parameter to be modified and press Enter.
----End
10.9.3.2 Advanced Configuration

On the Advanced Configuration screen, you can view and modify the advanced
properties of the RAID controller card.

Screen Introduction
On Controller Settings shown in Figure 10-182, select Advanced Configuration
to display the Advanced Configuration screen, as shown in Figure 10-184. Table
Figure 10-184 Advanced Configuration screen

Spinup Limit Internal Staggered power-on mechanism of

drives in the server.
Spinup Limit External Staggered power-on mechanism of

external JBOD drives.
NVRAM state NVRAM status of the controller.
Controller Memory Size Memory capacity of the controller.
Controller Serial Number Serial number of the controller.
RESET Restores the status before modification.
SUBMIT Submits the configuration.

Modifying Power Supply Parameters

Step 1 When the cursor is on Set Values, press Enter.
Step 2 Modify Spinup Limit Internal and Spinup Limit External. See Table 10-40.
----End
10.9.3.3 Bettery Backup Information

On the Bettery Backup Information screen, you can view supercapacitor
properties.
Screen Introduction
On Controller Settings shown in Figure 10-182, select Bettery Backup
Information to display the Bettery Backup Information screen, as shown in
Figure 10-185. Table 10-41 describes the parameters.
Figure 10-185 Battery Backup Information screen


Overall Backup Unit Status Working status of a supercapacitor. The

supercapacitor can protect cache data only
when this parameter is set to Ready.
NOTE
This parameter is set to Ready only when both
Non-Volatile Storage Status and Supercap Status
are Ready.
Backup Unit Type Supercapacitor type.
Non-Volatile Storage Status Status of the non-volatile memory.
Supercap Status Supercapacitor status.
Threshold Temperature Temperature threshold.
Life-time Temperature Highest and lowest historical temperatures.

Recorded(Min/Max)
Voltage(Present/Max) Current voltage and voltage threshold

provided by the supercapacitor.
Life-time Max Voltage Highest historical voltage.

Recorded NOTE
The value may be higher than the voltage
threshold. It is the maximum value reached during
the self-learning of the supercapacitor. The value is
normal if it is lower than 5500 mV.
Current Drawn(Present/Max) Current and current threshold provided by the

supercapacitor.
Health Supercapacitor health. Generally, the value

must be greater than 90%. Otherwise, the
supercapacitor may be faulty.
Charge Level Supercapacitor charging level status. When

the supercapacitor status is Ready, the
parameter value must be 100%.
Estimated life time Supercapacitor service life.

(Years:Months)

On the Disk Utilities screen, you can view the drive list, format drives, and turn
on the unit identification light (UID).

Screen Introduction
On Controller Settings shown in Figure 10-182, select Disk Utilities to display
the Disk Utilities screen, as shown in Figure 10-186.
Figure 10-186 Disk Utilities screen
Select the drive to be operated and press Enter. The drive operation screen is
displayed, as shown in Figure 10-187. The parameters are described in Table
10-42.

Figure 10-187 Drive operation screen
Table 10-42 Parameters on the drive operation screen
Format Disk Formats the drive, which takes a long time and clears all
data in the drive. Formatting cannot be stopped once
started.
Verify Disk Media Checks drive bad blocks to prevent bad block during use.
You can stop the operation by pressing Esc.
Write Cache Indicates the drive cache write policy. The value options are
as follows:
● Write-Back (Enable): After the cache receives all data,
the controller card sends the host a message indicating
that data transmission is complete.
● Write-Through (Disable): After the drive receives all
data, the controller card sends the host a message
indicating that data transmission is complete.
Locating a Drive
Step 1 On the displayed menu, select Identify Drive.

NOTE
Pressing any key will turn off the UID indicator.
----End
Formatting a Drive
NOTICE
This operation cannot be stopped once started, takes a long time, and will delete
all data from the drive. Therefore, this operation is not recommended.
Step 1 On the displayed menu, select Format Disk.
Step 2 Press Enter.
Formatting drives will take a long time.
Step 3 Press Enter.
----End
Configuring the Cache Write Policy

Step 1 On the displayed menu, select Write Cache.
The parameter list is displayed.
Step 2 Select a policy to be configured, and press Enter.
----End
10.9.5 Administration
On the Administration screen, you can upgrade RAID controller card firmware
and view firmware parameters.
Screen Introduction
On the Configuration Utility screen shown in Figure 10-172, select
Administration to display the Administration screen, as shown in Figure 10-188.

Figure 10-188 Administration screen
Table 10-43 Parameters on the Administration screen

FW update from Upgrades RAID controller card firmware.

Media
Save Support Archive Saves support documentation.
CPLD Information Displays CPLD version information.
PBSI Information Allows you to query and set PBSI information.

Slave address: Press Enter to set the information.
PBSI Frequency: Press Enter to display a list, and select
0 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 400 kHz, or 800 kHz from
the list.
Clock Stretch: Select Enabled or Disabled.
Select Protocol: Select PBSI or Multi-Channel
Transmission Platform (MCTP).
Boot Configuration Provides information about the boot configuration

Table Information table.

Upgrading RAID Controller Card Firmware

Step 1 Log in to the remote console of the server.
Step 2 Mount the PM8060 firmware file by using the virtual DVD drive or FDD.
Step 3 Restart the server and log in to the Figure 10-188 screen.
Step 4 Select FW update from Media and press Enter.
Upgrade the firmware when prompted.
----End
10.9.6 Exit
Press ESC consecutively on any screen to exit Device Manager. The screen shown

restarting servers.
10.10.1 Downloading and Installing ARCCONF

Downloading ARCCONF
Step 1 Go to the controller card page at the Microsemi website.
Step 2 Click Microsemi Adaptec ARCCONF Command Line Utility vxxx on the
download list.
Download ARCCONF when prompted.

----End
Installing ARCCONF
The ARCCONF installation method varies depending on the OS type. The following
uses Windows and Linux as examples to describe the ARCCONF installation
procedure. For the installation procedures for other OSs, see the ARCCONF user
guide, which can be found at Microsemi's website.
● Installing ARCCONF in Windows
c. Run a command to go to the directory where the ARCCONF tool package
resides.
For Windows, ARCCONF does not require installation. You can directly run
● Installing ARCCONF in Linux
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the ARCCONF
b. Run the rpm -ivh Arcconf-xxx.rpm command to install ARCCONF.
10.10.2.1 Querying RAID Controller Card Hard Disk Information
Function
Query RAID controller card hard disk information.
Format
arcconf list controller_id
Parameters

card.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Query the information about the hard disk of controller 1.
[root@localhost ~]# arcconf list 1
Controllers found: 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller ID : Status, Slot, Mode, Name, SerialNumber, WWN
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller 1: : Optimal, Slot 1, RAID (Expose RAW), PM8060-RAID, 7A45F30016A,
50000D1E00189F30
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Array Information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Array ID : Status (Interface, TotalSize MB, FreeSpace MB)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Array 0 : Ok (SATA SSD, 305152 MB, 0 MB)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Logical device information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Logical ID : Status (RAID, Interface, Size MB) Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Logical 0 : Optimal (0, Data, 305190 MB) LogicalDrv 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
maxCache information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical Device information
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical ID : State (Interface, BlockSize, SizeMB, Vendor, Model, Type) WWN, [Location]
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical 0,0 : Online (SATA, 512 Bytes, 152627MB, ATA , INTEL SSDSA2BW16, Solid State
Drive) 30000D1E00189F30, [Enclosure Direct Attached, Slot 0(Connector 0:CN0)]
Physical 0,1 : Online (SATA, 512 Bytes, 1526185MB, ATA , SSDSC2BB016T7H , Solid State
Physical 0,4 : Ready (SAS, 512 Bytes, 1716957MB, TOSHIBA , AL14SEB18EQ , Hard Drive)
500003969812C842, [Enclosure Direct Attached, Slot 4(Connector 1:CN1)]
Physical 0,5 : Ready (SAS, 512 Bytes, 858483MB, HGST , HUC101890CSS200 , Hard Drive)
5000CCA0361C09C1, [Enclosure Direct Attached, Slot 5(Connector 1:CN1)]
Physical 0,6 : Ready (SATA, 512 Bytes, 457862MB, ATA , MTFDDAK480TDC-1A, Solid State
Physical 0,7 : Ready (SATA, 512 Bytes, 915715MB, ATA , MTFDDAK960TDC-1A, Solid State
Drive) 30000D1E00189F3B, [Enclosure Direct Attached, Slot 7(Connector 1:CN1)]
Physical 2,2 : Ready (SES2, Not Applicable, Not Applicable, MSCC , Virtual SGPIO, Enclosure
Services Device) 50000D1E00189F30, [Not Applicable]
Command completed successfully.
10.10.2.2 Setting Spinup Parameters
Function
Set the number of drives that spin up simultaneously upon power-on.
Format
arcconf setpower controller_id spinup internal external

Parameters

card for drives.
internal Number of internal –

drives that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
external Number of external –

drives (such as external
JBODs) that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set drive spinup parameters.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpower 1 spinup 4 0
# Query the spinup configuration.

domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 | grep Spinup
Spinup limit internal drives :4
Spinup limit external drives :0
10.10.2.3 Setting Drive Power Saving Parameters
Function
Set power saving parameters for the virtual drive.
Format
arcconf setpower controller_id ld ld_id slowdown timer1 poweroff timer2
Parameters

card.
ld_id ID of the virtual drive. –

timer1 Deceleration timer. The unit is minute.
timer2 Power-off timer. The unit is minute.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set power saving parameters.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpower 1 ld 0 slowdown 3 poweroff 5
10.10.2.4 Setting the Device Initialization Function
Function
Set the initialization function for physical and virtual drives.
Format
arcconf task start controller_id logicaldrive ld_id option [noprompt]
arcconf task stop controller_id logicaldrive ld_id
arcconf task start controller_id device channel_id slot_id option [noprompt]
arcconf task stop controller_id device channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card.
ld_id Virtual drive ID. –

drive.
channel_id Channel ID of the –

physical drive.

option Initialization type. For virtual drives:

● verify_fix
● verify
● clear
For physical drives:
● verify_fix
● verify
● clear
● initialize
● securerase
Usage Guidelines
If the noprompt parameter is contained, the command is executed forcibly.
NOTICE
If the noprompt parameter is used, the confirmation step is omitted. Therefore,

you are not advised to use this parameter.
Examples
# Initialize the drive in slot 3.
domino:~# ./arcconf task start 1 device 0 3 clear
Clear of a Hard drive is a long process.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Press y, then ENTER to continue or press ENTER to abort: y
Clearing Channel 0, Device 3.
# Query the task status.

domino:~# ./arcconf getstatus 1
Physical Device Task:
Channel,Device : 0,3
Task ID : 100
Current operation : Clear
Status : In Progress
Priority : High
Percentage complete :0

10.10.2.5 Setting the Task Priority
Function
Set the task priority and make the priority of the current task take effect.
Format
arcconf setpriority controller_id priority [current]
Parameters

card.
priority Background task priority. ● high

● medium
● low
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the priority of the background task to high and make the setting take effect.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpriority 1 high current
10.10.2.6 Querying and Setting the Performance Mode of a RAID Controller

Card
Function
Query and set the performance mode of a RAID controller card.
Format
arcconf setperform controller_id mode
arcconf getperform controller_id

Parameters

card.
mode Performance mode of ● 1: Dynamic

the RAID controller card. ● 2: OLTP/Database
● 3: Big Block Bypass
mode
● 4: User defined mode
The default mode is
Dynamic.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the performance mode of the RAID controller card to Dymatic.
domino:~# ./arcconf setperform 1 1
# Query the performance mode of the RAID controller card.

domino:~# ./arcconf getperform 1
Performance Mode : Default/Dymatic
CACHE_REPRESSPREFETCHING : DISABLE
CACHE_IO_SORTING : ENABLE
CACHE_INSERT_LRU : DISABLE
CACHE_DYNAMIC_SHARING : ENABLE
CACHE_READ_LOAD_BYPASS_VALID : ENABLE
CACHE_WRITE_LOAD_BYPASS_VALID : ENABLE
CACHE_LARGE_WRITE_BYPASS : DISABLE
IO_COALESCING : ENABLE
CACHE_MAX_DIRTY : 75 percent
CACHE_DEMAND_FLUSH_THRESHOLD : 75 percent
CACHE_PAGE_SIZE : 256 KB
CACHE_RESERVED_FOR_INACTIVE : 10
CACHE_ADDITIONAL_WRITES :4
CACHE_MIN_FLUSH_STRIPE : 64 KB
CACHE_BYPASS_WRITE_IO_SIZE : 128 KB
IO_LIMIT_SATA_HDD : 32
IO_LIMIT_SATA_SSD : 32
IO_LIMIT_SAS_HDD : 64
IO_LIMIT_SAS_SSD : 64
R1_SEQ_READ_LOW_QW_THRESHOLD :4
R1_SEQ_DETECTION_THRESHOLD :4

10.10.2.7 Setting the Working Mode for a RAID Controller Card
Function
Set the working mode for a RAID controller card.
Format
arcconf setcontrollermode controller_id mode
Parameters


mode Specifies the working ● 0 (default): indicates

mode of a RAID RAID: expose RAW. If
controller card. drives are not
configured with RAID
properties, the
controller card reports
them to the OS as
raw drives. Therefore,
the drives can be
operated on the OS
directly.
● 1: indicates RAID:
hide RAW. The RAID
only the drives with
the RAID properties.
● 2: indicates HBA. No
RAID level is
supported, and all
drives are reported as
raw drives.
● 3: indicates Auto
Volume. If the drives
are not configured
with the RAID
properties but contain
OS partitions, the
them to the OS as
raw drives. If the
drives are not
configured with the
RAID properties and
do not contain the OS
partitions, the
them after volumes
are created in the
drives by using the
controller card.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the working mode to RAID: expose RAW.

domino:~# ./arcconf setcontrollermode 1 0

domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1
--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Controller Status : Optimal
Controller Mode : RAID (Expose RAW)
Channel description : SAS/SATA
......
# Query the working mode.

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
......
10.10.2.8 Setting a SATA Password
Function
Set a SATA password to prevent SATA drive data from being securely erased.
Format
arcconf atapassword controller_id set new_password channel_id slot_id
arcconf atapassword controller_id clear current_password channel_id slot_id
Parameters

channel_id Specifies a drive channel –

ID.
new_password Specifies the new –

password.
current_password Specifies the current –

password of the SATA
drive.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the password of the SATA drive in slot 0 to huawei.
domino:~# ./arcconf atapassword 1 set huawei 0 0
Setting the ATA security password on the SATA harddrive
# Clear the password of the SATA drive in slot 0.

domino:~# ./arcconf atapassword 1 clear huawei 0 0
Clearing the ATA security password on the SATA harddrive
Function
Format
arcconf create controller_id logicaldrive stripesize stripesize name ld_name
priority ld_priority method mode capacity raid_level channel_id1 slot_id1
channel_id2 slot_id2...channel_idN slot_idN [noprompt]
arcconf delete controller_id logicaldrive ld_id noprompt
Parameters

card.
stripesize Sector size of the virtual –

drive.
ld_name Name of the virtual –

drive.
ld_priority Priority of the task for ● high

creating a virtual drive. ● medium
● low

mode Follow-up action after a ● For RAID 0/1 and

virtual drive is created. Volume, there are two
actions: quick and
skip. quick allows you
to quickly initialize
the array data, and
skip allows you to
recover the array and
to set the RAID
properties among
different drives
without clearing the
data.
● For an array with the
redundancy function,
there are another two
actions: Build/Verify
to initialize RAID data
and Clear to clear
array data.
capacity Capacity of the virtual –

drive.
raid_level RAID level of the virtual –

drive.
channel_idN Drive channel ID. –
slot_idN Slot ID of a member –

drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
domino:~# ./arcconf create 1 logicaldrive stripesize 64 name test01 priority high method quick 102400
5000102
For arrays with all SSD drives, caching is not recommended. Disable all cache settings?(Y/N)
Do you want to add a logical device to the configuration?
Creating logical device: test01
# Delete the virtual drive 1.

domino:~# ./arcconf delete 1 logicaldrive 1 nopromt

All data in logical device 1 will be lost:
Deleting: logical device 1 ("LogicalDrv 1")
10.10.2.10 Setting the Cache Read and Write Properties for a RAID Array
Function
Format
arcconf setcache controller_id logicaldrive ld_id mode
Parameters

card.

mode Cache read/write policy The read policies are as

of the RAID. follows:
● ron: enables the read
cache function.
● roff: disables the read
cache function.
The write policies are as
follows:
● wb: The write cache
of the RAID array is
enabled even if no
capacitor is used for
protection. As a result,
data may be lost
when an unexpected
power failure occurs.
NOTE
Exercise caution when
setting the write policy to
wb.
● wbb (recommended):
The write cache of the
RAID array is
automatically
disabled when no
capacitor is available
or the capacitor is not
ready.
● wt: disables the write
cache function.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the read cache for a RAID array.
domino:~# ./arcconf setcache 1 logicaldrive 0 ron
10.10.2.11 Setting a Hot Spare Drive
Function

Format
arcconf setstate controller_id device channel_id slot_id hsp [logicaldrive ld_id1
ld_id2]
Parameters

card.
channel_id Drive channel ID. –

drive.
ld_id1 ld_id2 Virtual drive ID. A local hot spare drive

can be used by a
maximum of two virtual
drives.
Usage Guidelines
If logicaldrive ld_id1 ld_id2 is not contained, the drive is a global hot spare drive.
If logicaldrive ld_id1 ld_id2 is contained, the drive is a dedicated hot spare drive.
Example
domino:~# ./arcconf setstate 1 device 0 3 hsp
This global hot spare will only protect logicals whose member block size is 512 Bytes.
10.10.2.12 Changing the RAID Strip Size, Capacity, and Level
Function
You can adjust the RAID strip size, capacity, and level simultaneously.
Format
arcconf modify controller_id from ld_id to [stripesize size] capacity raid_level
channel_id1 slot_id1 ... channel_idN slot_idN [noprompt]

Parameters

card.
ld_id ID of the virtual drive to –

be operated.
size Strip size to be set. –
capacity Size of the virtual drive –

to be set.

drive to be set.
channel_id1...channel_id Drive channel ID. –

N
slot_id1...slot_idN Slot ID of a physical –
drive.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
# Change the strip size to 1024 without adding drives.
domino:~# ./arcconf modify 1 from 0 to stripesize 1024 1525760 0 0 0 0 1
Reconfiguration of a logical device is a long process. Are you sure you want to continue?
Reconfiguring logical device: LogicalDrv 0
# Change the RAID level of VD 0 to RAID 5.

domino:~# ./arcconf modify 1 from 0 to 1024 5 0 0 0 1 0 2 noprompt
Function
Format
arcconf consistencycheckcontroller_idperiod time

Parameters

card for drives.
time Consistency check At least 10 days

period.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the automatic consistency check period to 10 days.
domino:~# ./arcconf consistencycheck 1 period 10
Setting the period will automatically turn on background consistency check.
10.10.2.14 Setting the Enable Status of NCQ
Function
Enable or disable the read/write instruction optimization function.
Format
arcconf setncqcontroller_id state
Parameters

card for drives.
state Status of the NCQ ● enable

function. ● disable
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the NCQ function.

domino:~# ./arcconf setncq 1 enable

WARNING : NCQ setting changes will be reflected only after next power cycle.
10.10.2.15 Setting a Drive as a Pass-Through Drive
Function
After a drive is configured as a pass-through drive, the OS can directly manage the
drive.
Format
arcconf uninitcontroller_id channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card for drives.
slot_id Drive slot ID. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the drive in slot 3 as a pass-through drive.
domino:~# ./arcconf uninit 1 0 3
1 device(s) uninitialized.
Function
Format
arcconf identify controller_id device physical_id

Parameters

card for drives.
physical_id Physical ID of a drive. -
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
domino:~# ./arcconf identify 1 device 3
The specified device(s) is/are blinking.
Press any key to stop the blinking.
10.10.2.17 Querying Device Information
Function
virtual drives.
Format
arcconf getconfig controller_id <ad | ld ld_id | pd channel_id slot_id | mc | al>
Parameters

card for drives.
ad Queries controller –
properties.
ld Queries virtual drive –

properties.
ld_id ID of a virtual drive. –
pd Queries physical drive –

properties.

slot_id Drive slot ID. –
mc Queries the maxCache –

information.
al Queries all information. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query controller properties.
domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 ad
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller Model : PM8060-RAID
Controller Serial Number : 123A456B789
Controller World Wide Name : 5E0247F95EEF7000
Controller Alarm : Enabled
Physical Slot :6
.................
10.10.2.18 Querying the Status of a Drive
Function
Query the status of a drive.
Format
arcconf getconfig controller_id <pd>
Parameters

the target drive.
pd Specifies the type of the –

target drive.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query the status of a drive.
domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 pd
Device #2----------------------------------------------------------------------
Device is a Hard drive
State : Global Hot-Spare
Block Size : Bytes
Supported : Yes
Programmed Max Speed : SATA 6.0 Gb/s
Transfer Speed : SATA 12.0 Gb/s
Reported Channel,Device(T:L) : 0,1(11:0)
Reported Location : Enclosure 0, Slot 3(Connector 0, Connector 1 )
Reported ESD(T:L) : 2,0(0:0)
Vendor : ATA
Model : INTEL SSDSC2BX01
Firmware : 0150
Serial Number : BTHC445301D81P6PGN
Reserved Size : 435480 KB
Used Size : 1525760 MB
Unused Size : 64 KB
Total Size : 1526185 MB
Write Cache : Enabled (write-back)
FRU : None
SMART : NO
S M A R T warnings :0
Power States : Full RPM
NOTE
The command output Reported Channel,Device(T:L):0,1(11:0) shows that the device ID is

11 and the LUN ID is 0.

11 PM8068
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the features and configuration methods of PM8068.
11.1 Overview
11.2 Functions
11.8 Configuration Utility (Legacy/Dual mode)
11.1 Overview
A PM8068 RAID controller card provides two 12 Gbit/s SAS wide ports and
supports PCIe 3.0 ports.
The PM8068 is connected to the mainboard through an Xcede connector and to
the drive backplane through two Mini-SAS HD cables. Figure 11-1 shows the
components of the card.

Figure 11-1 PM8068 appearance
RAID Controller Card Indicators

Table 11-1 describes indicators on the PM8068.

Figure 11-2 PM8068 indicators

n Suggestio
ns

indicator normal. off, replace
Off: The the RAID
abnormal. card.


n Suggestio
ns
2 D6 BOOT_LED Green On: The If this

RAID card RAID indicator is
status controller off, replace
indicator card the RAID
normal. card.
Off: The
RAID
controller
card
firmware is
abnormal.

Off: The the RAID
abnormal. card.

Off: The the RAID
abnormal. card.

Off: The the RAID
abnormal. card.
11.2 Functions
11.2.1 Support for Multiple RAID Levels

The PM8068 supports a maximum of 64 arrays, and each array contains a
maximum of 64 logical drives.
Table 11-2 lists the RAID levels and number of drives supported by the PM8068.

RAID Level Number of Supported Maximum Number of

Drives Failed Drives
RAID 0 1 to 128 0
RAID 1 2 1
RAID 5 3 to 32 1
RAID 10 Even numbers from 4 to Number of drives/2

128
NOTE
The failed drives cannot be adjacent. For details, see A.2 RAID Levels.

Hot spare drives are used to replace member drives of the same type as the hot
spare drives in an array and take over data on faulty member drives.
The PM8068 supports two types of hot spare drives:
● Dedicated spare drive: When the system detects that a member drive of the
array is faulty, the hot spare drive is enabled.
● Auto replace drives: When the system detects a SMART error occurs on a
member drive of the array, the hot spare drive is enabled.
11.2.3 Rebuild and Copyback

If a member drive of a RAID array with redundancy becomes faulty, the hot spare
drive automatically replaces the failed drive and starts data synchronization with
the failed drive. Once the faulty drive has been replaced with a newly installed
data drive, data is copied from the hot spare drive to the new data drive. Once the
data copyback is complete, the hot spare drive is restored to the hot spare state.



The strip width equals the number of physical drives in an array. Increasing
the strip width can improve the read/write performance of a RAID array. An
increased number of drives indicates more strips for concurrent read/write
operations.
36 GB drives.
strip size. The data written to the drives is also divided into blocks based on the
strip size.
The PM8068 supports multiple strip sizes, including 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128
KB, 256 KB, 512 KB and 1 MB.

The PM8068 enables user commands to be directly transmitted to connected

drives, facilitating upper-layer services or management software in accessing and
controlling the drives. For example, you can install an OS on the drives mounted
to the PM8068. If a RAID controller card does not support the passthrough
feature, you can install the OS only on the virtual drives configured under the
NOTE
If a drive in passthrough mode is faulty (not in the healthy status), the Fault indicator on
the drive will be lit and the iBMC will generate an alarm.

If an array does not use all the capacity of its member drives, you can add logical
drives to the array to expand the array capacity.
11.2.7 Import of Foreign Configurations

When a drive containing RAID configurations is inserted into a server, the
following information is displayed during the server startup:

When the server meets the conditions for importing foreign configurations, you
can press Ctrl+H to import the foreign configurations.

the Configuration Utility, which can be accessed only after you restart the server.
To monitor controller card status and obtain configuration information when the
system is running, use the ARCCONF tool.
11.3.1 Configuration Process

Figure 11-3 shows the initial configuration process for the PM8068 RAID
controller card.
Figure 11-3 Configuration process


Procedure
Set the boot type to Legacy on the BIOS. For details, see A.1.3 Setting the
Legacy Mode.
Log in to the PM8068 Configuration Utility.
Logical Device Creates or deletes RAID arrays, configures RAID

Configuration properties, and sets boot options.
Controller Setting Configures RAID controller card properties.
on a specific drive, such as turning on indicators and
formatting the drive.
Related Tasks
During the server restart, you can view the firmware version and PCIe slot
information of the current controller before accessing the RAID configuration
screen, as shown in Figure 11-5.

Related Concepts
None

Scenarios
NOTE
Workflow

Procedure
Back up data on drives and access the Configuration Utility main screen. For
Select a member drive.
1. On the screen shown in Figure 11-4, select Logical Device Configuration

and press Enter.
11-6.


3. In the Select drives to create Array area, press the space or Insert key to
select drives to be added to the array.
Figure 11-8.
Figure 11-8 Selecting member drives
Configure array properties.

4. Press Enter.
The Array Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-9. Table
11-4 describes the parameters displayed on the screen.

Array Type Specifies the RAID level of the array.
Array Lable Specifies the array name defined by users.
Array Size Specifies the array capacity.

NOTE
array size.
Stripe Size Specifies the stripe size (8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128
KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1024 KB for option).
Create RAID via Specifies the operation to be performed after an array

is created.
● Default: No operation is performed after an array is
created.
● RPI: Perform initialization after an array is created.
5. Select RAID 0.
6. Configure the other RAID parameters. For details, see Table 11-4.
RAID via.
After the array is created, the system displays the maximum capacity of the
array.
NOTE
● This operation can be performed only when the array size is smaller than the
maximum value.
9. After the array is created, select Manage Arrays and press Enter, as shown in
Figure 11-6.
10. Select the array for which multiple logical drives are to be created, and press
Ctrl+C.
The array configuration screen is displayed.
11. Repeat 6 to 8.
You can create multiple logical drives based on the actual situation. For
example, after two logical drives are created, select Manage Arrays and press
Enter, as shown in Figure 11-6. On the displayed screen, select the array for
which multiple logical drives have been created, and press Enter. The
configuration results are displayed, as shown in Figure 11-10.

Figure 11-10 Configuration results
Check the configuration result.

12. On the screen shown in Figure 11-6, select Manage Arrays and press Enter.
13. Select the target array and check the configuration results.

Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure
and press Enter.
11-11.


Figure 11-13.

4. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.

is created.
created.
5. Select RAID 1.
RAID via.
array.

NOTE
maximum value.
Figure 11-11.
Ctrl+C.
11. Repeat 6 to 8.


Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure
and press Enter.
11-16.


Figure 11-18.

4. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.

is created.
created.
5. Select RAID 5.
RAID via.
array.

NOTE
maximum value.
Figure 11-16.
Ctrl+C.
11. Repeat 6 to 8.


Scenarios
NOTE

Workflow
Procedure
and press Enter.
11-21.


Figure 11-23.

4. Press Enter.



NOTE
array size.

is created.
created.
5. Select RAID 10.

RAID via.
array.

NOTE
maximum value.
Figure 11-21.
Ctrl+C.
11. Repeat 6 to 8.

11.3.7 Configuring a Logical Drive as the Boot Device
Scenarios

NOTICE
The priority of a single drive as the boot device is higher than that of the logical
drive in an array.
Prerequisites
Conditions
● You have logged in to the Configuration Utility. For details, see 11.3.2
Data
Procedure
1. On the configuration tool main screen, select Logical Device Configuration
and press Enter.
The Main Menu screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-26.

3. Select the target virtual array and press Enter.
The logical drive list of the array is displayed.
4. Select a logical drive that you want to configure as a boot device, and press
Ctrl+B to change the boot priority.
The logical drive is moved to the first row of the logical drive list.

NOTE
When an array is in the rebuild or initialization state, its boot priority cannot be changed.

Press Esc when prompted to exit the configuration screen and restart the server.

Use ARCCONF to monitor controller card status and obtain configuration
information when the system is running.

Procedure
Step 3 Select Huawei BC11ESMS and press Enter.
The PM8068 configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-27. Table

Figure 11-27 PM8068 configuration screen

Controller Information Queries RAID controller card properties.
Controller Manages RAID controller card configurations.

Configuration
Array Configuration Configures and manages arrays.
Disk Utilities Configures and manages drives.
----End

Scenarios
NOTE

Procedure
Open the array configuration screen.
1. On the displayed screen, select Array Configuration and press Enter.
The Array Configuration screen is displayed. See Figure 11-28.
Figure 11-28 Array Configuration screen
2. Select Select Drives and Create Array and press Enter.


Select member drives.

3. Select drives to be added to the array and press Enter.
NOTE


Configure the RAID level.

5. Press Enter.


Logical Drive Specifies the logical drive (LD) name.

Name
Stripe Size Specifies the stripe size. The value can be 8 KiB, 16 KiB,
32 KiB, 64 KiB, 128 KiB, 256 KiB, 512 KiB, or 1024 KiB.
Sectors Per Track ● 32

● 63
Build Method Specifies the operation to be performed after an array

is created.
created.
Size of LD Specifies the logical drive capacity.

NOTE
logical drive size.
Unit Size Specifies the logical drive capacity unit. The value can
be TiB, GiB, or MiB.


8. Configure array parameters. For details, see Table 11-9.
A message is displayed, indicating that the array is successfully created.
NOTE
maximum value.
10. After the array is created, select Manage Array LD and press Enter in Figure
11-28.
Enter. The array operation list is displayed. See Figure 11-32.
12. Select Create LD and press Enter. A UI shown in Figure 11-33 is displayed.

Figure 11-33 Create LD screen
13. Repeat 6 to 9.
You can create multiple logical drives as required. For example, after three
logical drives are created, select List Logical Drives and press Enter in Figure
11-32. The configuration result is displayed. See Figure 11-34.


Scenarios
NOTE
Procedure




NOTE


5. Press Enter.


Logical Drive Specifies the logical drive name.

Name

● 63

is created.
created.

NOTE
logical drive size.


NOTE
maximum value.
11-35.

13. Repeat 6 to 9.


Scenarios
NOTE
Procedure




NOTE


5. Press Enter.



Name

● 63

is created.
created.

NOTE
logical drive size.


NOTE
maximum value.
11-42.

13. Repeat 6 to 9.


Scenarios
NOTE
Procedure




NOTE


5. Press Enter.



Name

● 63

is created.
created.

NOTE
logical drive size.


NOTE
maximum value.
11-49.

13. Repeat 6 to 9.


If a server is configured with a PM8068 RAID controller card or drive controllers of
different chips, set the boot devices for the EFI/UEFI mode on the BIOS.
Reference.
Reference.

Use ARCCONF to monitor controller card status and obtain configuration
information when the system is running.

Scenarios
After an array is configured, hot spare drives are configured to improve security
and reduce the impact of drive faults on system services.

There are two types of the hot spare drives:

Prerequisites
Conditions
Data
Procedure
Step 1 On the screen shown in Figure 11-4, select Logical Device Configuration and
press Enter.


Step 3 Select an array and press Ctrl+S.

Step 4 In the Select Hotspare drives area, select the target drives and press the space
bar or Insert.
Step 5 Press Enter.
Step 6 Enter Y.
The Select Spare Type screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-59.

Figure 11-59 Setting the hot spare drive type
Step 7 Select the type of the hot spare drive to be configured and press Enter.
Step 8 Select DONE and press Enter.
Return to Figure 11-57.
----End

Scenarios
Procedure
press Enter.


Step 4 Select an array and press DEL.

The hot spare drive list is displayed. See Figure 11-62.

Figure 11-62 Hot spare drive list
bar or Insert.
Step 6 Press Enter.
Step 7 Type Y and press Enter.
----End
11.5.3 Configuring Boot Drives

Scenarios
NOTICE
The priority of a single drive as the boot device is higher than that of the logical
drive in an array.
Prerequisites
Conditions
Data

Procedure
press Enter.
Step 2 Select Select Boot Device and press Enter.

Step 3 In the Select drive to set as boot device area, select the target drives and press
the space bar or Insert.
Step 4 Press Enter.
----End
11.5.4 Adding logical drives to an Array

Scenarios
If an array does not use all the capacity of its member drives, you can add logical
drives to the array to expand the array capacity.
Prerequisites
Conditions
● Member drives of the array have available space.
Data
Procedure
Access the expansion screen.
and press Enter.
11-65.


3. Select an array and press Ctrl+C.

The Array Properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-67. Table

Stripe Size Strip size. The value can be 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB,
128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, or 1024 KB.

is created.
created.

4. Configure the array parameters, as shown in Table 11-13.
5. Select DONE and press Enter.
6. Select the array involved in 11.5.4 Adding logical drives to an Array and
press Enter.
Open the logical drive list of the array. The configured logical drive is
displayed in the list.


Scenarios
Prerequisites
Conditions
Data
Procedure
press Enter.


Step 3 Select the array to be deleted and press Enter.
The logical drive list is displayed. See Figure 11-70.
Figure 11-70 Logical drive list
Step 4 Select the first logical drive and press Del.
Return to the logical drive list.
Step 6 Repeat the steps to delete all the logical drives in the array.

Return to Figure 11-69. The target array has been deleted.
----End

Scenarios
Prerequisites
Conditions
Logging In to the Management Screen.
Data
Procedure
The page for managing hot spare drives appears.

2. Select Manage Array LD.

3. Select the array to be operated and press Enter. The array operation list is

4. Select Manage Spare and press Enter.

Figure 11-73 Hot spare drive operation list

Add a hot spare drive.

5. Select the type of the hot spare drive to be configured in Figure 11-73 and
press Enter.
6. Select an idle drive to be configured and press Enter.
A message is displayed indicating that the hot spare drive is successfully
added.
7. Repeat the preceding operations to add multiple hot spare drives.

Scenarios
Prerequisites
Conditions
● Hot spare drives have been configured.
Data
Procedure
The page for managing hot spare drives appears.



4. Select Manage Spare and press Enter.


Deletes a hot spare drive.

5. Select Delete Spare in Figure 11-76 and press Enter.
6. Select the hot spare drive to be deleted and press Enter.
A message is displayed indicating that the hot spare drive is deleted
successfully.
7. Repeat the preceding operations to delete multiple hot spare drives.

Prerequisites
Conditions
● Arrays have been configured.
Data
Procedure
Open the array management screen.



Deletes an array.
4. Select Delete Array in Figure 11-78 and press Enter.
11.7.1 Drive Fault

Symptom

Solution
NOTE
● Before removing a drive, determine its location to prevent misoperations. If a drive is

removed by mistake, the RAID array will fail.
● If a drive in pass-through mode is faulty (not in the healthy status), the Fault indicator
on the drive will be lit and the iBMC will generate an alarm.
Step 1 Remove the faulty drive.

replaces the failed drive and rebuilds data.
● If the new drive does not contain data, it works as follows:
– If the RAID array has a hot spare drive, the data on the hot spare drive
will automatically be copied to the newly installed drive. Then, the
original hot spare drive is still the hot spare drive. No further action is
required.
– If the RAID array with redundancy does not have a spare drive, the newly
● If the new drive already contains RAID information, go to Step 4.
Step 4 Use secure erase to remove data from the new drive.
Step 5 Manually rebuild a RAID array.
----End

Symptom
A RAID card fault occurs if any of the following symptoms occurs on a server:
Solution
Step 1 Replace the RAID controller card. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Restart the server. After the foreign configuration is automatically imported, check
whether the RAID configuration is the same as that before the replacement.
Step 3 Contact technical support.
----End
11.8 Configuration Utility (Legacy/Dual mode)

Procedure
Set the boot type to Legacy on the BIOS. For details, see A.1.3 Setting the
Legacy Mode.
Log in to the PM8068 Configuration Utility.


Logical Device Creates or deletes RAID arrays, configures RAID

Configuration properties, and sets boot devices.
Controller Setting Configures RAID controller card properties.
Disk Utilities Views the current drive list and perform operations
on a specific drive, such as turning on indicators and
formatting the drive.
Related Tasks
During the server restart, you can view the firmware version and PCIe slot
information of the current controller before accessing the RAID configuration
screen, as shown in Figure 11-80.
Related Concepts
None
11.8.2 Logical Device Configurations

On the Logical Device Configuration screen, you can create or delete a RAID
array, configure RAID properties, and set boot devices.

Screen Introduction
Configuration to display the array configuration main menu, as shown in Figure

Select Boot Device Sets the boot drive.
11.8.2.1 Managing Arrays

On the Manage Arrays screen, you can delete arrays, configure and delete hot
spare drives, configure boot logical drives, and view array properties.
Screen Introduction
Select Manage Arrays to open the array list in Figure 11-81, as shown in Figure
11-82. Table 11-16 describes the operations that can be performed.


Ctrl+C Adds a logical drive to a specified array.
Ctrl+S Configures a hot spare drive for a specified array.
Del Deletes a hot spare drive from a specified array.
ENTER Displays the logical drive list of the specified array.

Step 1 In the array list, select the array to be configured as the boot device and press
Enter.
The logical drive list of the array is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-83.

Figure 11-83 Logical drive list
Step 2 Select the logical drive to be configured as the boot device and press Ctrl+B.
The logical drive is moved to the first row of the logical drive list.
----End
Viewing Array Information

Step 1 In the array list, select the array to be viewed and press Enter.
The logical drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-83.
Step 2 Select a logical drive and press Enter.
The logical drive properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-84. Table
11-17 describes the RAID properties.
Figure 11-84 Logical drive properties


Status Logical drive status.

● Optimal: The logical drive is running properly and all
● Interim Recovery: The logical drive is running abnormally
and a member drive is faulty or offline.
● Offline: The logical drive is not enabled.
Drive Type Drive type.
Size Logical drive capacity.
RAID Level RAID level of the logical drive.
Legacy Disk Track/Head/Sector.

Geometry
(C/H/S)
Stripe Size Stripe size of the logical drive.
Drive Unique ID ID of the logical drive.
Logical Drive Logical drive name defined by the user.

Label
----End

Step 1 In the array list, select the array for which you want to configure a hot spare drive,
and press Ctrl+S.

bar or Insert.
Step 3 Press Enter.
Step 4 Enter Y.
The Select Spare Type screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-86.
Figure 11-86 Setting the hot spare drive type

Step 5 Select the type of the hot spare drive to be configured and press Enter.
Step 6 Select DONE and press Enter.
----End
Deleting an Array
Deletes an array, that is, deletes all the logical drives in the array.
Step 1 Select the array to be deleted and press Enter.

The logical drive list is displayed.
Step 2 Select the first logical drive and press Del.
Return to the logical drive list.
Step 4 Repeat the steps to delete all the logical drives in the array.
----End
11.8.2.2 Creating Arrays

Screen Introduction
Select Create Array in Figure 11-81 to open the drive list, as shown in Figure
11-87.


Step 1 Press Insert or the space bar in Figure 11-87 to add member drives to the
Selected Drives area.
Step 2 Press Enter.
Stripe Size Strip size. The value can be 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128
KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, or 1024 KB.
Create RAID via Action after an array is created.

created.
Step 3 Set RAID parameters according to Table 11-18.
Step 4 Select Done and press Enter.
----End

11.8.2.3 Selecting Boot Devices

On the Select Boot Device screen, you can set a specified drive as the boot device.
If both the boot drive and boot logical drive exist, the boot drive has a higher
priority than the boot logical drive.
Screen Introduction
Select Select Boot Device in Figure 11-81. The screen for selecting a drive is
Configuring Boot Drives

Step 1 In the Select drive to set as boot device area, select the target drives and press
the space bar or Insert.
Step 2 Press Enter.
----End

On the Controller Settings screen, you can configure RAID controller card
properties, port mode, and advanced RAID controller card properties, and clear
current configurations.

Screen Introduction
Select Controller Settings in Figure 11-4. The controller operation menu is
Figure 11-90 Options

Controller Queries and modifies controller properties.

Configuration NOTE
This configuration cannot be performed when configuring an
array.
Set Controller Port Shows and sets the port mode of a controller.
Mode
Advanced Controller Queries and modifies advanced controller properties.

Configuration NOTE
This configuration cannot be performed when configuring an
array.
Clear Controller Clear the configurations on the controller.

Configuration
11.8.3.1 Configuring the Controller

On the Controller Configuration screen, you can view and modify controller
properties.

Screen Introduction
Select Controller Configuration in Figure 11-90. The Controller Properties
screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-91. Table 11-20 describes the
parameters.
Transformation Priority of array capacity expansion during system

Priority running is as follows:
● High: The priority of capacity expansion task is the
highest among all system tasks.
● Medium: The priority of a capacity expansion task is
the same as that of common system operation tasks.
● Low: The priority of the capacity expansion task is
lower than that of other system operation tasks.
Rebuild Priority Priority of a rebuilding task during system running is as

follows:
● High: The priority of rebuilding task is the highest
among all system tasks.
● Medium High: The priority of rebuilding task is
higher than common system operation tasks.
● Medium: The priority of rebuilding task is the same
as that of common system operation tasks.
● Low: The priority of rebuilding task is the lowest
among all system tasks.

Surface Scan Priority of parallel scanning analysis:

Analysis Priority ● Disabled
● High
● Idle
Parallel Surface Scan The number of scanned parallel interfaces.

Count Value range: 1 to 32
PD Write Cache Indicates the drive cache write policy. The value options
State are as follows:
● Enable All: enables the cache write function of all
drives.
● Disable All: disables the cache write function of all
drives.
Spare Activation The activation mode of hot spare drives.

Mode ● Failure SA: When the system detects that a member
drive of an array is faulty, the hot spare drive is
enabled.
● Predictive SA: When the system detects that a
SMART error occurs on a member drive of the array,
the hot spare drive is enabled.

Step 1 Select the parameter to be modified and press Enter.
Step 3 Press Esc.
----End
11.8.3.2 Setting Controller Port Mode

On the Set Controller Port Mode screen, you can view and change the port mode
of the controller.
Screen Introduction
Select Set Controller Port Mode in Figure 11-90. The controller port mode screen
is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-92.

Figure 11-92 Port mode

Step 1 Select the port to be changed and press Enter.
The value option list is displayed. The port modes are as follows:
● RAID: The drives managed by the RAID controller card can be used only after
an array is created.
● MIXD: Both the RAID mode and HBA mode are supported.
● HBA: The drives managed by the RAID controller card cannot be used to
create an array. They can only be used directly.
Step 3 Press Esc.
----End
11.8.3.3 Setting Advanced Controller Properties

On the Advanced Controller Configuration screen, you can view and modify
advanced controller properties.
Screen Introduction
Select Advanced Controller Configuration in Figure 11-90. The screen for setting
advanced controller properties is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-93. Table

Figure 11-93 Advanced controller properties

Degraded Mode Indicates whether the optimal performance mode is

Performance enabled during degradation.
Optimization ● Enabled
● Disabled
Physical Drive Request Status of the drive request elevator sorting

Elevator Sort function.
● Enabled
● Disabled
Alternate Inconsistency Indicates whether the dynamic data inconsistency

Repair Policy repair mode is enabled.
● Enabled
● Disabled
Maximum Drive Request Maximum queue depth.

Queue Depth ● Automatic
● 2
● 4
● 8
● 16
● 32

Monitor & Performance Monitor and performance analysis delay.

Analysis Delay ● Disabled(0)
● 1–1440
HDD Flexible Latency Mode of flexible latency optimization for HDDs.

Optimization ● Disabled
● Low
● Middle(100ms)
● High
● Very High(30ms)
● Very High(10ms)
Modifying Advanced Controller Parameters

Step 1 Select the configuration item to be modified and press Enter.
A list of optional parameters is displayed.
Step 3 Press Esc.
----End
11.8.3.4 Clearing Controller Configurations

On the Clear Controller Configuration screen, you can delete controller
configurations.
Screen Introduction
Select Clear Controller Configuration in Figure 11-90. The Clear Controller
Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-94. Table 11-22

Figure 11-94 Clearing configurations
Delete All Array Configurations Clears all array configurations.
Delete RIS on All Physical drives Clear invalid RAID information on all drives.
Deleting All Arrays

Step 1 Select Delete All Array Configurations and press Enter.
Return to Figure 11-94. A message is displayed, indicating that the role is deleted.
----End
Deleting RIS Information

Step 1 Select Delete RIS on All Physical drives and press Enter.
Return to Figure 11-94. A message is displayed, indicating that the role is deleted.
----End

On the Disk Utilities screen, you can check the current drives, format drives, and
turn on/off indicators on drives.

Screen Introduction
On the Configuration Utility main screen shown in Figure 11-4, select Disk
Utilities. The drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-95.
Select a drive and press Enter. Table 11-23 describes the parameters displayed on
the screen.
Secure Erase Formats the drive. It takes a long time because all data
on the drive will be deleted.
Turning On Indicators
Step 2 Select Identify Drive from the displayed menu.

NOTE
You can press any key to turn off the drive indicator.
----End
Formatting a Drive

Step 2 Select Secure Erase from the displayed menu.
The drive formatting progress is displayed.
You can stop the formatting by pressing Alt+A.
----End
11.8.5 Exit
Click Exit to exit the configuration screen.
● Click Yes to exit the configuration screen and restart the server.
● Click No to return to the configuration screen.


Procedure
Step 3 Select Huawei BC11ESMS and press Enter.
The PM8068 configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-97. Table

Figure 11-97 PM8068 configuration screen
Controller Information Queries RAID controller card properties.
Controller Manages RAID controller card configurations.

Configuration

Array Configuration Configures and manages arrays.
Disk Utilities Configures and manages drives.
----End
11.9.2 Controller Information

On the Controller Information screen, you can view RAID controller card
properties.
Screen Introduction
Select Controller Information in Figure 11-27. The Controller Information
parameters.
Product ID Product ID of the RAID controller card.

Device ID Device ID of the RAID controller card.
PCI Bus:Device:Function PCI bus number:device

number:function number of the RAID
controller card.
Firmware Version Firmware version of the RAID

controller card
uEFI Driver Version UEFI driver version of the RAID

controller card.
Controller Mode Mode of the RAID controller card
Total Memory Size Capacity of the RAID controller card

memory
Hardware Revision Hardware version of the RAID

controller card.
Controller Temperature(Degree Temperature of the RAID controller

Celsius) card (°C).
WWN Number World Wide Name (WWN) of the

Serial Number Serial number of the RAID controller

card.
11.9.3 Controller Configuration

On the Controller Configuration screen, you can query and manage RAID
controller card configurations.
Screen Introduction
Select Controller Configuration in Figure 11-27. The Controller Configuration
parameters.


Controller Properties Queries and manages RAID controller

card properties.
Clear Controller Configuration Clears the RAID controller card

configurations.
11.9.3.1 Setting Controller Properties

On the Controller Properties screen, you can query and modify the port mode of
the RAID controller card.
Screen Introduction
Select Controller Properties in Figure 11-99. The Controller Properties screen is

Changing the Port Mode of a Controller

Step 1 Select the port to be modified and press Enter.
● RAID: The drives managed by the RAID controller card can be used only after
an array is created.
● MIXD: Both the RAID mode and HBA mode are supported.
● HBA: The drives managed by the RAID controller card cannot be used to
create an array. They can only be used directly.
----End
11.9.3.2 Clearing Controller Configurations

On the Clear Controller Configuration screen, you can delete RAID controller
card configurations.
Screen Introduction
Select Clear Controller Configuration in Figure 11-99. The Clear Controller
Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-101. Table 11-27

Delete All Arrays Clears all array configurations.
Clear RIS On Drives Clears all RIS information on drives.
Deleting All Arrays

Step 1 Select Delete All Arrays and press Enter.
Step 2 Select CLEAR CONFIG SUBMIT and press Enter.
----End
Deleting the RIS of all drives.

Step 1 Select Clear RIS On Drives and press Enter.
Step 2 Select CLEAR CONFIG SUBMIT and press Enter.
----End

11.9.4 Array Configuration

On the Array Configuration screen, you can create or delete an array, and
configure array properties and hot spare drives.
Screen Introduction
Select Array Configuration in Figure 11-27. The Array Configuration screen is

Select Drives and Creates an array.

Create Array
Manage Array LD Manages arrays.
11.9.4.1 Selecting Drives and Creating Arrays

On the Select Drives and Create Array screen, you can create an array.

Configuring an Array
Step 1 Select Select Drives and Create Array in Figure 11-102. The drive list is
Step 2 Select drives to be added to the array and press Enter.

NOTE


Step 4 Press Enter.

Step 5 Select a RAID level and press Enter.


Name
Stripe Size Specifies the stripe size. The value can be 8 KiB, 16 KiB, 32
KiB, 64 KiB, 128 KiB, 256 KiB, 512 KiB, or 1024 KiB.
Sectors Per Track Specifies the number of sectors on each track.

● 32
● 63
Build Method Action after a logical drive is created.

● Default: No operation is performed after a logical drive
is created.
● RPI: Perform initialization after a logical drive is
created.
Unit Size Specifies the logical drive capacity unit. The value can be
TiB, GiB, or MiB.
Step 7 Configure array parameters. For details, see Table 11-29.

----End
11.9.4.2 Managing Array LD

On the Manage Array LD screen, you can view array properties, delete arrays, and
configure hot spare drives.
Screen Introduction
Select Manage Array LD in Figure 11-102 to open the array list.
List Logical Drives Shows the logical drives of an array.
Manage Spare Manages the hot spare drives of an array.

Deleting an Array
Step 1 Select Delete Array and press Enter.
----End
11.9.4.2.1 List of Logical Drives

On the List Logical Drives screen, you can view the logical drives in an array and
their properties.
Screen Introduction
On the screen shown in Figure 11-106, select List Logical Drives to open the
logical drive list.
Figure 11-107 Logical drive operation list
Display LD Properties Displays logical drive properties.
Delete LD Deletes a logical drive.

Querying logical drive Properties

Step 1 Select Display LD Properties and press Enter.
The logical drive properties screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-108. Table
Figure 11-108 Logical drive properties
LogicalDrive Status Logical drive status.

● Optimal: The virtual drive is running
properly and all member drives are online.
abnormally and a member drive is faulty
or offline.
● Failed: The virtual drive is faulty and
cannot run properly.
RAID Level RAID level of the logical drive.
LogicalDrive Label Logical drive name defined by the user.
Stripe Size Stripe size of the logical drive.

Full Stripe Size Full stripe size.
RAID Size Logical drive capacity.
Cylinders/Heads/Sectors Number of cylinders/heads/sectors.
LogicalDrive Members Member drives contained in the logical drive.
----End
Deleting a logical drive

Step 1 Select Delete LD and press Enter.
----End
11.9.4.2.2 Management of Hot Spare Drives

On the Manage Spare screen, you can configure and delete hot spare drives.
Screen Introduction
Select Manage Spare in Figure 11-106 and press Enter.
The hot spare drive list is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-109. Table 11-33
describes the operations.

Dedicated Spare For Configures a dedicated hot spare drive. When the
Array system detects that a member drive in an array is
faulty, the hot spare drive is enabled.
Auto Replace For Array Configures an automatically adapted hot spare drive.
When the system detects that a SMART error occurs
on a member drive of the array, the hot spare drive is
enabled.
Delete Spare Deletes a hot spare drive.

Step 1 Select Dedicated Spare For Array or Auto Replace For Array and press Enter.
A message is displayed indicating that the hot spare drive is successfully added.
Step 3 Repeat the preceding operations to add multiple hot spare drives.
----End

Step 1 Select Delete LD and press Enter.
A message is displayed indicating that the hot spare drive is deleted successfully.
----End

On the Disk Utilities screen, you can view the drive list, format drives, and turn
on the UID light.
Screen Introduction
Select Disk Utilities in Figure 11-27 to open the drive list.
Select the drive to be operated and press Enter. The drive operation screen is
displayed, as shown in Figure 11-110. The parameters are described in Table
11-34.

Figure 11-110 Drive operation screen
Blink LED Turns on the indicator to pinpoint the location

of the drive.
Erase Disk Formats the drive. It takes a long time because

all data on the drive will be deleted.
Turning On Indicators
Step 1 Select Blink LED and press Enter.
To turn on the LED, perform the following steps:
● Continue: turns on the indicator and the server can be located.
● Stop: turns off the indicator.
Step 2 Select Continue and press Enter.
----End
Formatting a Drive
Step 1 Select Erase Disk.

Step 2 Select Continue and press Enter.

A message is displayed, indicating that the formatting starts.
----End
11.9.6 Administration
On the Administration screen, you can upgrade RAID controller card firmware
and view firmware version.
Screen Introduction
Select Administration in Figure 11-27. The Administration screen is displayed.
Press Enter. The screen shown in Figure 11-111 is displayed.
Figure 11-111 FW version screen
Upgrading RAID Controller Card Firmware

Step 1 Log in to the remote console of the server.
Step 2 Mount the PM8068 firmware file by using the virtual DVD drive or FDD.
Step 3 Restart the server and log in to the Figure 11-111 screen.
Step 4 Select Continue with flashing new Firmware and press Enter.
Upgrade the firmware when prompted.
----End

11.9.7 Exit
Press Esc consecutively on any screen to exit Device Manager. The screen shown

restarting servers.
11.10.1 ARCCONF Download and Installation
Downloading ARCCONF
Step 1 Go to the controller card page at the Microsemi website.
Step 2 Click Microsemi Adaptec ARCCONF Command Line Utility vxxx on the
download list.
Download ARCCONF when prompted.
----End
Installing ARCCONF
The ARCCONF installation method varies depending on the OS type. The following
uses Windows and Linux as examples to describe the ARCCONF installation
procedure. For the installation procedures for other OSs, see the ARCCONF user
guide, which can be found at Microsemi's website.
● Installing ARCCONF on Windows


c. Run a command to go to the directory where the ARCCONF tool package

resides.
For Windows, ARCCONF does not require installation. You can directly run
● Installing ARCCONF on Linux
a. Use a file transfer tool (for example, PuTTY) to upload the ARCCONF
b. Run the rpm -ivh Arcconf-xxx.rpm command to install ARCCONF.
11.10.2.1 Setting Spinup Parameters
Function
Set the number of drives that spin up simultaneously upon power-on.
Format
arcconf setpower controller_id spinup internal external
Parameters

card for drives.
internal Number of internal –

drives that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
external Number of external –

drives (such as external
JBODs) that spin up
simultaneously upon
power-on.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set drive spinup parameters.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpower 1 spinup 4 0

# Query the spinup configuration.

domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 | grep Spinup
Spinup limit internal drives :4
Spinup limit external drives :0
11.10.2.2 Setting Drive Power Saving Parameters
Function
Set power saving parameters for the virtual drive.
Format
arcconf setpower controller_id ld ld_id slowdown timer1 poweroff timer2
Parameters

card.
timer1 Deceleration timer. The unit is minute.
timer2 Power-off timer. The unit is minute.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set power saving parameters.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpower 1 ld 0 slowdown 3 poweroff 5
11.10.2.3 Setting the Device Initialization Function
Function
Set the initialization function for physical and virtual drives.
Format
arcconf task start controller_id logicaldrive ld_id option [noprompt]
arcconf task stop controller_id logicaldrive ld_id

arcconf task start controller_id device channel_id slot_id option [noprompt]

arcconf task stop controller_id device channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card.
option Initialization type. For virtual drives:

● verify_fix
● verify
● clear
For physical drives:
● verify_fix
● verify
● clear
● initialize
● securerase
Usage Guidelines
Example
# Initialize the drive in slot 3.
domino:~# ./arcconf task start 1 device 0 3 clear
Clear of a Hard drive is a long process.
Clearing Channel 0, Device 3.
# Query the task status.

domino:~# ./arcconf getstatus 1
Physical Device Task:
Channel,Device : 0,3
Task ID : 100
Current operation : Clear
Status : In Progress
Priority : High
Percentage complete :0

11.10.2.4 Setting the Task Priority
Function
Set the task priority and make the priority of the current task take effect.
Format
arcconf setpriority controller_id priority [current]
Parameters

card.
priority Background task priority. ● high

● medium
● low
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the priority of the background task to high and make the setting take effect.
domino:~# ./arcconf setpriority 1 high current
11.10.2.5 Querying and Setting the Performance Mode of a RAID Controller

Card
Function
Query and set the performance mode of a RAID controller card.
Format
arcconf setperform controller_id mode
arcconf getperform controller_id

Parameters

card.
mode Performance mode of a ● 1: Dynamic

RAID controller card. ● 2: OLTP/Database
● 3: Big Block Bypass
mode
● 4: User defined mode
The default mode is
Dynamic.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the performance mode of the RAID controller card to Dymatic.
domino:~# ./arcconf setperform 1 1
# Query the performance mode of the RAID controller card.

domino:~# ./arcconf getperform 1
Performance Mode : Default/Dymatic
CACHE_REPRESSPREFETCHING : DISABLE
CACHE_IO_SORTING : ENABLE
CACHE_INSERT_LRU : DISABLE
CACHE_DYNAMIC_SHARING : ENABLE
CACHE_READ_LOAD_BYPASS_VALID : ENABLE
CACHE_WRITE_LOAD_BYPASS_VALID : ENABLE
CACHE_LARGE_WRITE_BYPASS : DISABLE
IO_COALESCING : ENABLE
CACHE_MAX_DIRTY : 75 percent
CACHE_DEMAND_FLUSH_THRESHOLD : 75 percent
CACHE_PAGE_SIZE : 256 KB
CACHE_RESERVED_FOR_INACTIVE : 10
CACHE_ADDITIONAL_WRITES :4
CACHE_MIN_FLUSH_STRIPE : 64 KB
CACHE_BYPASS_WRITE_IO_SIZE : 128 KB
IO_LIMIT_SATA_HDD : 32
IO_LIMIT_SATA_SSD : 32
IO_LIMIT_SAS_HDD : 64
IO_LIMIT_SAS_SSD : 64
R1_SEQ_READ_LOW_QW_THRESHOLD :4
R1_SEQ_DETECTION_THRESHOLD :4

11.10.2.6 Setting the Working Mode for a RAID Controller Card
Function
Set the working mode for a RAID controller card.
Format
arcconf setcontrollermode controller_id mode
Parameters

card.

mode Working mode of a RAID ● 0 (default): indicates

controller card. RAID: expose RAW. If
drives are not
configured with RAID
properties, the
them to the OS as
raw drives. Therefore,
the drives can be
operated on the OS
directly.
● 1: indicates RAID:
hide RAW. The RAID
only the drives with
the RAID properties.
● 2: indicates HBA. No
RAID level is
supported, and all
drives are reported as
raw drives.
● 3: indicates Auto
Volume. If the drives
are not configured
with the RAID
properties but contain
OS partitions, the
them to the OS as
raw drives. If the
drives are not
configured with the
RAID properties and
do not contain the OS
partitions, the
them after volumes
are created in the
drives by using the
controller card.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the working mode to RAID: expose RAW.

domino:~# ./arcconf setcontrollermode 1 0

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
......
# Query the working mode.

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
......
11.10.2.7 Setting a SATA Password
Function
Set a SATA password to prevent SATA drive data from being securely erased.
Format
arcconf atapassword controller_id set new_password channel_id slot_id
arcconf atapassword controller_id clear current_password channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card.
new_password Specifies the new –

password.
current_password Specifies the current –

password of the SATA
drive.
Usage Guidelines
None

Example
# Set the password of the SATA drive in slot 0 to huawei.
domino:~# ./arcconf atapassword 1 set huawei 0 0
Setting the ATA security password on the SATA harddrive
# Clear the password of the SATA drive in slot 0.

domino:~# ./arcconf atapassword 1 clear huawei 0 0
Clearing the ATA security password on the SATA harddrive
Function
Format
arcconf create controller_id logicaldrive stripesize stripesize name ld_name
priority ld_priority method mode capacity raid_level channel_id1 slot_id1
channel_id2 slot_id2...channel_idN slot_idN [noprompt]
arcconf delete controller_id logicaldrive ld_id noprompt

card.
stripesize Sector size of the virtual –

drive.
ld_name Name of the virtual –

drive.
ld_priority Priority of the task for ● high

creating a virtual drive. ● medium
● low

mode Follow-up action after a ● For RAID 0/1 and

virtual drive is created. Volume, there are two
actions: quick and
skip. quick allows you
to quickly initialize
the array data, and
skip allows you to
recover the array and
to set the RAID
properties among
different drives
without clearing the
data.
● For an array with the
redundancy function,
there are another two
actions: Build/Verify
to initialize RAID data
and Clear to clear
array data.
capacity Capacity of the virtual –

drive.

drive.
channel_idN Drive channel ID. –
slot_idN Slot ID of a member –

drive.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
domino:~# ./arcconf create 1 logicaldrive stripesize 64 name test01 priority high method quick 102400
5000102
For arrays with all SSD drives, caching is not recommended. Disable all cache settings?(Y/N)
Do you want to add a logical device to the configuration?
Creating logical device: test01
# Delete the virtual drive 1.

domino:~# ./arcconf delete 1 logicaldrive 1 nopromt

All data in logical device 1 will be lost:
Deleting: logical device 1 ("LogicalDrv 1")
11.10.2.9 Setting a Cache Read and Write Policy
Function
Set the cache read and write policies for a RAID array.
Format
arcconf setcache controller_id logicaldrive ld_id mode

card.
mode Cache read/write policy The read policies are as

of the RAID. follows:
● ron: enables the read
cache function.
● roff: disables the read
cache function.
The write policies are as
follows:
● wb: The write cache
of the RAID array is
enabled even if no
capacitor is used for
protection. As a result,
data may be lost
when an unexpected
power failure occurs.
● wbb (recommended):
The write cache of the
RAID array is
automatically
disabled when no
capacitor is available
or the capacitor is not
ready.
● wt: disables the write
cache function.

Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the read cache for a RAID array.
domino:~# ./arcconf setcache 1 logicaldrive 0 ron
11.10.2.10 Configuring a Hot Spare Drive
Function
Format
arcconf setstate controller_id device channel_id slot_id hsp [logicaldrive ld_id1
ld_id2]
Parameters

card.
ld_id1 ld_id2 Virtual drive ID. A local hot spare drive

can be used by a
maximum of two virtual
drives.
Usage Guidelines
If logicaldrive ld_id1 ld_id2 is not contained, the drive is a global hot spare drive.
If the parameter is contained, the drive is a dedicated hot spare drive.
Example
domino:~# ./arcconf setstate 1 device 0 3 hsp
This global hot spare will only protect logicals whose member block size is 512 Bytes.

11.10.2.11 Changing the RAID Strip Size, Capacity, and Level
Function
You can adjust the RAID strip size, capacity, and level simultaneously.
Format
arcconf modify controller_id from ld_id to [stripesize size] capacity raid_level
channel_id1 slot_id1 ... channel_idN slot_idN [noprompt]
Parameters

card.
ld_id ID of the virtual drive to –

be operated.
size Strip size to be set. –
capacity Size of the virtual drive –

to be set.

drive to be set.
channel_id1...channel_id Drive channel ID. –

N
slot_id1...slot_idN Drive slot number. –
Usage Guidelines
Example
# Change the strip size to 1024 without adding drives.
domino:~# ./arcconf modify 1 from 0 to stripesize 1024 1525760 0 0 0 0 1
Reconfiguration of a logical device is a long process. Are you sure you want to continue?
# Change the RAID level of VD 0 to RAID 5.

domino:~# ./arcconf modify 1 from 0 to 1024 5 0 0 0 1 0 2 noprompt

Function
Format
arcconf consistencycheckcontroller_idperiod time
Parameters

card for drives.
time Consistency check At least 10 days

period.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the automatic consistency check period to 10 days.
domino:~# ./arcconf consistencycheck 1 period 10
Setting the period will automatically turn on background consistency check.
11.10.2.13 Setting the Enable Status of NCQ
Function
Enable or disable the read/write instruction optimization function.
Format
arcconf setncqcontroller_id state
Parameters

card for drives.

state Status of the NCQ ● enable

function. ● disable
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Enable the NCQ function.
domino:~# ./arcconf setncq 1 enable
WARNING : NCQ setting changes will be reflected only after next power cycle.
11.10.2.14 Setting a Drive as a Pass-Through Drive
Function
After a drive is configured as a pass-through drive, the OS can directly manage the
drive.
Format
arcconf uninitcontroller_id channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card for drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Set the drive in slot 3 as a pass-through drive.
domino:~# ./arcconf uninit 1 0 3
1 device(s) uninitialized.

Function
Format
arcconf identify controller_iddevice channel_id slot_id
Parameters

card for drives.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
domino:~# ./arcconf identify 1 device 0 3
The specified device(s) is/are blinking.
Press any key to stop the blinking.
11.10.2.16 Querying Device Information
Function
virtual drives.
Format
arcconf getconfig controller_id <ad | ld ld_id | pd channel_id slot_id | mc | al>

Parameters

card for drives.
ad Queries controller –
properties.
ld Queries virtual drive –

properties.

properties.
mc Queries the maxCache –

information.
al Queries all information. –
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query controller properties.
domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 ad
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller Model : PM8068-RAID
Controller Serial Number : 123A456B789
Controller World Wide Name : 5E0247F95EEF7000
Controller Alarm : Enabled
Physical Slot :6
.................
11.10.2.17 Querying the Status of a Drive
Function
Query the status of a drive.

Format
arcconf getconfig controller_id <pd>
Parameters

card for drives.

properties.
Usage Guidelines
None
Example
# Query the drive status.
domino:~# ./arcconf getconfig 1 pd
Device #2----------------------------------------------------------------------
Device is a Hard drive
State : Global Hot-Spare
Block Size : Bytes
Supported : Yes
Programmed Max Speed : SATA 6.0 Gb/s
Transfer Speed : SATA 12.0 Gb/s
Reported Channel,Device(T:L) : 0,1(11:0)
Reported Location : Enclosure 0, Slot 3(Connector 0, Connector 1 )
Reported ESD(T:L) : 2,0(0:0)
Vendor : ATA
Model : INTEL SSDSC2BX01
Firmware : 0150
Serial Number : BTHC445301D81P6PGN
Reserved Size : 435480 KB
Used Size : 1525760 MB
Unused Size : 64 KB
Total Size : 1526185 MB
Write Cache : Enabled (write-back)
FRU : None
SMART : NO
S M A R T warnings :0
Power States : Full RPM
NOTE
In the command output, 11:0 in the brackets at the end of the row Reported
Channel,Device(T:L): 0,1(11:0) indicates that the channel ID is 11 and the device ID is 0.

User Guide A Appendix
A Appendix
A.1 Common Tasks
A.1.1 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management

Screen in EFI/UEFI Mode (Brickland Platform)
Scenarios
The method of logging in to the RAID controller card management screen in EFI
mode varies with the BIOS platform.
This section describes how to log in to the LSI SAS2208 RAID controller card
management screen in EFI mode on the Brickland platform.

The server needs to be restarted, which will interrupt services.
Prerequisites
Conditions
You have logged in to the real-time server desktop through the remote virtual
console of the management software (iBMC or iMana 200).
Procedure
Step 1 Press Delete when prompted to go to the BIOS configuration screen.
Step 2 Switch to the Advanced tab page.
The RAID controller card list is displayed, as shown in Figure A-1.

Figure A-1 RAID controller card list
NOTE
The displayed information varies with the RAID controller card.
----End
A.1.2 Logging In to the RAID Controller Card Management

Screen in EFI/UEFI Mode (Grantley Platform)
Scenarios
The method of logging in to the RAID controller card management screen in EFI
mode varies with the BIOS platform.
This section describes how to log in to the LSI SAS2308 management screen in EFI
mode.

Prerequisites
Conditions
Data

None
Procedure
Step 1 During the restart process, press F11 when information shown in Figure A-2 is
displayed.
A password text box is displayed.
Figure A-2 BIOS boot screen
Step 2 Type the password and press Enter.

The Boot Manager screen is displayed, as shown in Figure A-3.
Boot information about various servers may be different. Go to the Boot Manager
screen as prompted.

Figure A-3 Boot Manager screen
Step 3 Press Esc.
The manager list is displayed, as shown in Figure A-4.
Figure A-4 Manager list
Step 4 Select Device Manager and press Enter.

The Device Manager screen is displayed, as shown in Figure A-5.
NOTE
The displayed information varies with the RAID controller card.
Figure A-5 Device Manager screen
----End
A.1.3 Setting the Legacy Mode
Scenarios
Set the server boot mode to the Legacy mode when required.

Prerequisites
Conditions
Data
None

Procedure
1. Restart the server. Press Delete when the screen shown in Figure A-6 is
displayed.
The BIOS configuration screen is displayed.
Figure A-6 Command prompt
2. On the Boot screen, set the RAID controller card boot mode to the Legacy
mode.
– On a Grantley platform, set Boot Type to Legacy Boot Type, as shown in
Figure A-7.

Figure A-7 Setting the Legacy mode on a Grantley platform
– On a Brickland platform, set Boot mode select to LEGACY and Storage

to Legacy only, as shown in Figure A-8 and Figure A-9.
Figure A-8 Setting the Legacy mode on a Brickland platform

Figure A-9 Setting Storage
3. Press F10 to save the settings.

A.1.4 Setting the EFI/UEFI Mode

Scenarios
Set the server boot mode to the EFI/UEFI mode when required.

Prerequisites
Conditions
Data
None
Procedure
1. Restart the server. Press Delete when the screen shown in Figure A-10 is
displayed.

The BIOS configuration screen is displayed.
Figure A-10 Command prompt
2. On the Boot screen, set the RAID controller card boot mode to the EFI/UEFI
mode.
– On a Grantley platform, set Boot Type to UEFI Boot Type, as shown in
Figure A-11.
Figure A-11 Setting the UEFI mode on a Grantley platform

– On a Brickland platform, set Boot mode select to UEFI and Storage to

UEFI only, as shown in Figure A-12 and Figure A-13.
Figure A-12 Setting the UEFI mode on a Brickland platform
Figure A-13 Setting Storage
3. Press F10 to save the settings.


A.1.5 Downloading and Installing the RAID Controller Card

Driver
Querying the Version Mapping Between the RAID Controller Card Driver and
the OS
1. Log in to the Huawei Enterprise Website.
2. Choose Technical Support > Product Support > Server - Intelligent
Computing > Management Software > FusionServer iDriver.
3. Select the latest version.
4. Download the driver version mapping table to view the RAID controller card
drivers for different OSs.
Downloading the RAID Controller Card Driver

Download the RAID controller card driver as follows:
1. Open Computing Product Compatibility Checker.
2. Select the server series name.
3. On the Search Parts tab, select the product model, select RAID Controller
Card from Part Type, and click Search.
The RAID controller cards supported by the server are displayed, as shown in
Figure A-14.
Figure A-14 RAID controller card list
4. Click Link in the Drivers column.

The server version list is displayed.
5. Select the version.
The software packages used by the server are displayed.
6. Download the OS driver package.
Decompress the OS driver package. You can obtain the RAID controller card
driver.
The drivers of the following formats are available:

– .img: Used to install the RAID controller card driver during the OS
installation process.
– .iso: Used to install the RAID controller card driver after the OS is
installed. Two types of .iso files are available:
▪ .iso file: a single RAID controller card driver package.
▪ onboard_driver_xxx.iso: a package containing all the board drivers

supported by the server.
Determining the Driver Installation Method

1. Open Computing Product Compatibility Checker.
2. Select the server series name.
3. On the Search OSs tab, select the product model and click Search.
Open the OS compatibility list and obtain the method of installing the RAID
controller card driver.
– If the OS is installed during the configuration of xx card, the OS
integrates the XX card driver. You do not need to install the card driver
separately. After the OS is installed, upgrade the RAID controller card
driver using the .iso file if required.
– If the XX driver needs to be loaded during the configuration of the XX
card, use the .img file to install the RAID controller card driver during the
OS installation.
– If an installation source needs to be prepared, make separate OS and
RAID controller card driver installation source files for simultaneous
installation of the OS and RAID controller card driver.
Figure A-15 RAID controller card installation methods

Installing the RAID Controller Card Driver

For details about how to install the RAID controller card driver:
● See readme.txt contained in the driver package.

● See the Huawei Server OS Installation Guide.
A.1.6 Managing the RAID Controller Card Through the iBMC

iBMC 2.32 and later versions provide out-of-band management of RAID arrays.
You can use the iBMC WebUI or CLI to perform basic query and configuration
operations on the LSI SAS3008 or LSI SAS3108 controller card.
For details, see iBMC User Guide.
A.2 RAID Levels

RAID is a data backup technology that uses a RAID controller card to combine
multiple physical drives into a virtual large-capacity drive, providing higher storage
and I/O performance and reliability than a traditional drive.
NOTE
The RAID controller card supports secure boot only in EFI or UEFI mode and uses the
security authentication mechanism provided by the BIOS.
A.2.1 RAID 0
RAID 0, also referred to as drive striping, provides the highest storage performance
in all RAID levels. In RAID 0 array, data is stored on multiple drives, which allows
data requests to be concurrently processed on the drives. Each drive processes
data requests that involve data stored on itself. The concurrent data processing
can make the best use of the bus bandwidth, improving the overall drive read/
write performance. However, RAID 0 provides no redundancy or fault tolerance.
The failure of one drive will cause the entire array to fail. RAID 0 applies only to
scenarios that require high I/O rate but low data security.
Working Principle
Figure A-16 shows how data is distributed into three drives in a RAID 0 array for
concurrent processing.
RAID 0 allows the original sequential data to be processed on three physical drives
at the same time.
Theoretically, the concurrent execution of these operations increases the drive

read/write speed threefold. Although the actual read/write speed may be affected
by various factors, such as the bus bandwidth, and is lower than the theoretical
value, the concurrent transmission speed is definitely higher than the serial
transmission speed for large-volume data.

Figure A-16 RAID 0 data processing
A.2.2 RAID 1
RAID 1 is also referred to as mirroring. In a RAID 1 array, each operating drive has
a mirrored drive. Data is written to and read from both operating and mirrored
drives simultaneously. After a failed drive is replaced, data can be rebuilt from the
mirrored drive. RAID 1 provides high reliability, but only half of the total capacity
is available. It applies to scenarios where high fault tolerance is required, such as
finance.
Working Principle
Figure A-17 shows how data is processed on a RAID 1 array consisting of two
physical hard drives.
● When writing data into drive 0, the system also automatically copies the data
to drive 1.
● When reading data, the system obtains data from Drive 0 and Drive 1
simultaneously.

A.2.3 RAID 5
RAID 5 is a storage solution that balances storage performance, data security, and
storage costs. To ensure data reliability, RAID 5 uses the distributed redundancy
check mode and distributes parity data to member drives. If a drive in a RAID 5
array is faulty, data on the failed drive can be rebuilt from the data on other
member drives in the array. RAID 5 can be used to process a large or small
amount of data. It features high speed, large capacity, and fault tolerance
distribution.
Working Principle
Figure A-18 shows how a RAID 5 array works. As shown in the figure, PA is the
parity information of A0, A1, and A2; PB is the parity information of B0, B1, and
B2; and so on.
RAID 5 does not back up the data stored. Instead, data and its parity information
are stored on different member drives in the array. If data on a member drive is
damaged, the data can be restored from the remaining data and its parity
information. If data on a RAID 5 member drive is damaged, RAID 5 can use the
remaining data and the corresponding parity information to restore the damaged
data.
RAID 5 can be considered as a compromise between RAID 0 and RAID 1.
● RAID 5 provides lower data security level and lower storage costs than RAID
1.
● RAID 5 provides slightly lower data read/write speed than RAID 0. However,
its read performance is higher than the single-drive write performance.
A.2.4 RAID 6
Compared with RAID 5, RAID 6 adds a second independent parity block. In RAID 6,
two independent parity systems use different algorithms to ensure high reliability.

Data processing is not affected even if two drives fail at the same time. However,
RAID 6 requires larger drive space for storing parity information and has worse
"write hole" effect compared with RAID 5. Therefore, RAID 6 provides lower write
performance than RAID 5.
Working Principle
Figure A-19 shows how data is stored on a RAID 6 array consisting of five drives.
PA and QA are the first and second parity blocks for data blocks A0, A1, and A2;
PB and QB are the first and second parity blocks for data blocks B0, B1, and B2;
and so on.
Data blocks and parity blocks are distributed to each RAID 6 member drive. If one
or two member drives fail, the controller card restores or regenerates the lost data
by using data on other normal member drives.
A.2.5 RAID 10
RAID 10 is a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0. It allows drives to be mirrored
(RAID 1) and then striped (RAID 0). RAID 10 is a solution that provides good
storage performance (similar to RAID 0) and data security (same as RAID 1).
(same as RAID 1), as well as storage performance similar to RAID 0.
Working Principle
In Figure A-20, drives 0 and 1 form span 0, drives 2 and 3 form span 1, and drives
in the same span are mirrors of each other.
If I/O requests are sent to drives in RAID 10, the sequential data requests are
distributed to the two spans for processing (RAID 0 mode). At the same time, in
RAID 1 mode, when data is written to drive 0, a copy is created on drive 1; when
data is written to drive 2, a copy is created on drive 3.

A.2.6 RAID 1E
RAID 1E is an enhanced version of RAID 1 and uses a similar working principle.
Data strips and backups of a RAID 1E array spread across all of its member drives.
Like RAID 1, RAID 1E data is mirrored, so the logical drive capacity is half the total
capacity of all member drives, but data is redundant and the performance is high.
However, RAID 1E allows more physical drives and consists of at least three drives.
Working Principle
Figure A-21 shows how data is processed on a RAID 1E array consisting of three
physical hard drives. Strip data is distributed evenly to the three drives and all data
has backup data in another drive. If a single drive fails, data is not lost.
Figure A-21 RAID 1E data processing

A.2.7 RAID 50
RAID 50 is a combination of RAID 5 and RAID 0. RAID 0 allows data to be striped
and written to multiple drives simultaneously, and RAID 5 ensures data security by
using parity bits evenly distributed on drives.
Working Principle
Figure A-22 shows how a RAID 50 array works. As shown in the figure, PA is the
parity information of A0, A1, and A2; PB is the parity information of B0, B1, and
B2; and so on.
As a combination of RAID 5 and RAID 0, a RAID 50 array consists of multiple RAID
5 spans, where data is stored and accessed in RAID 0 mode. With the redundancy
function provided by RAID 5, RAID 50 ensures continued operation and rapid data
restoration if a member drive in a span is faulty. In addition, the replacement of
member drives does not affect services. RAID 50 tolerates a failed drive across
multiple spans simultaneously, which cannot be implemented in RAID 5 alone.
What is more, as data is distributed on multiple spans, RAID 50 provides high
read/write performance.
A.2.8 RAID 60
RAID 60 is a combination of RAID 6 and RAID 0. RAID 0 allows data to be striped
and written to multiple drives simultaneously. RAID 6 ensures data security by
using two parity blocks distributed evenly on drives.
Working Principle
In Figure A-23, PA and QA are respectively the first and second parity information
of A0, A1, and A2; PB and QB are respectively the first and second parity
information of B0, B1, and B2; and so on.

As a combination of RAID 6 and RAID 0, a RAID 60 array consists of multiple RAID

6 spans, where data is stored and accessed in RAID 0 mode. With the redundancy
function provided by RAID 6, RAID 60 ensures continued operation and rapid data
restoration if two member drives in a span are faulty. In addition, the replacement
of member drives does not affect services.
A.2.9 Fault Tolerance Capabilities

● RAID 0
RAID 0 does not provide the fault tolerance function. The failure of any
member drive will cause data loss. Data is written into multiple member
drives through striping. RAID 0 is ideal for scenarios that demand high
performance without fault tolerance.
● RAID 1
RAID 1 provides 100% data redundancy. If a member drive fails, data on a
corresponding drive in the same RAID array can be used to run the system
and rebuild the failed drive. In RAID 1, data on a member drive is also
completely written into another drive, therefore, the failure of one member
drive does not cause data loss. Member drives in a pair always contain the
same data. RAID 1 is ideal for scenarios that demand the maximum fault
tolerance capability but minimum capacity requirements.
● RAID 5
RAID 5 combines distributed parity check and drive striping. With parity
check, the RAID array provides redundancy for one drive without the need to
back up all data on the drive. If a member drive fails, the RAID controller card
uses parity check data to rebuild all lost data. RAID 5 provides sufficient fault
tolerance capability using a small amount of system overhead.
● RAID 6
RAID 6 combines distributed parity check and drive striping. With parity
check, the RAID array provides redundancy for two drives without the need to
back up data on all drives. If a member drive fails, the RAID controller card
uses parity check data to rebuild all lost data. RAID 6 provides sufficient fault
tolerance capability using a small amount of system overhead.

● RAID 10
RAID 10 uses multiple RAID 1 arrays to provide comprehensive data
redundancy capabilities. RAID 10 is applicable to all scenarios that require
100% redundancy based on mirror drive groups.
● RAID 50
RAID 50 provides data redundancy based on the distributed parity check of
multiple RAID 5 arrays. Each RAID 5 array allows one failed member drive, if
data integrity is ensured.
● RAID 60
RAID 60 provides data redundancy based on the distributed parity check of
multiple RAID 6 arrays. Each RAID 6 array allows two failed member drives, if
data integrity is ensured.
A.2.10 I/O Performance

A RAID array can be used as an independent storage unit or multiple virtual units.
The I/O read/write speed for a RAID array is higher than that for a regular drive
because a RAID array allows concurrent access to multiple drives.
● RAID 0
RAID 0 provides excellent performance. In RAID 0, data is divided into smaller
data blocks and written into different drives. RAID 0 improves I/O
performance because it allows concurrent read and write of multiple drives.
● RAID 1
Drives in this RAID array exist in pairs. When data is written, the data is
written into the two drives in the same RAID array. This method requires more
time and resources. As a result, the performance deteriorates.
● RAID 5
RAID 5 provides relatively high data throughput capabilities. Each member
drive stores both common data and check data concurrently. Therefore, each
member drive can be read or written separately. In addition, RAID 5 adopts a
comprehensive cache algorithm. All these features make RAID 5 ideal for
many scenarios.
● RAID 6
RAID 6 is ideal for scenarios that demand high reliability, response rate, and
transmission rate. It provides high data throughput, redundancy, and I/O
performance. However, RAID 6 requires two sets of check data to be written
into each member drive, resulting in a performance deterioration during write
operations.
● RAID 10
The RAID 0 span provides high data transmission rates. In addition, RAID 10
provides excellent data storage capabilities. The I/O performance of RAID 10
improves as the number of its spans increases.
● RAID 50
RAID 50 delivers the best performance in scenarios that require high
reliability, response rate, and transmission rate. The I/O performance of RAID
50 improves as the number of its spans increases.

● RAID 60
● RAID 60 applies to scenarios similar to those of RAID 50. However, RAID 60 is
not suited for large-volume write tasks because it requires two sets of parity
data to be written into each member drive, which affects performance during
write operations.
NOTE
● If a RAID controller card has a RAID array requiring no verification (such as RAID 0 and
RAID 1) and a RAID array that needs verification (such as RAID 5 or RAID 6), and the
write policy of both RAID arrays is set to Write Back, the performance of the RAID array
that needs verification deteriorates and the I/O wait increases.
● You are advised to set the write policy of RAID groups that do not require verification to
Write Through to prevent impact on the performance of RAID groups that require
verification.
A.2.11 Storage Capacity

Storage capacity is an important factor for RAID level selection.
● RAID 0
With the same circumstances for a specified group of drives, RAID 0 provides
the maximum storage capacity.
Available storage capacity = Minimum member drive capacity x Number of
member drives
● RAID 1
When data is written into a drive, the data must also be written into the other
drive in the same pair, which consumes storage space.
Available storage capacity = Minimum capacity of all member drives
● RAID 5
The check data block is isolated from common data blocks. Therefore, check
data occupies the capacity of one member drive.
Available storage capacity = Minimum capacity of a member drive x (Number
of member drives – 1)
● RAID 6
Two check data blocks are isolated from common data blocks. Therefore,
check data occupies the capacity of two member drives.
Available storage capacity = Minimum capacity of a member drive x (Number
of member drives – 2)
● RAID 10
Available storage capacity = Total capacity of all spans
● RAID 50
● RAID 60

A.3 Common Boot Error Messages for RAID Controller

Cards
Table A-1 describes the boot error messages present in the MegaRAID firmware.
Table A-1 Boot error messages

SN Boot Message Description Troubleshooting Action
1 Memory or battery problems were Cause: The cached data is

detected. lost and cannot be
The adapter has recovered, but cached retrieved.
data was lost. Action: Perform memory
Press any key to continue, or press C and battery tests. If
to load the configuration utility. needed, replace the RAID
controller card or the
battery.
2 This is a test message. You can press a This is a test message.

key to ignore it, or you can wait five You can press any key to
seconds. ignore it or wait five
No further action is required. seconds. No further
action is required.
Press any key to continue, or press C
to load the configuration utility.
3 Firmware version inconsistency was Cause: Firmware versions

detected. The adapter has recovered, are inconsistent. The
but cached data was lost. adapter has recovered,
Press any key to continue, or press C but cached data was lost.
to load the configuration utility. Action: Ensure that the
other controller also has
the same firmware
version.
4 Foreign configuration(s) found on Cause: A storage device

adapter. was inserted with the
Press any key to continue or press C to metadata that does not
load the configuration utility or press F belong to any RAID
to import foreign configuration(s) and arrays recognized by the
continue. controller.
Action: Either import the
configuration settings of
the inserted storage
device or delete the RAID
array.

5 Previous configuration cleared or Cause: The controller is

missing. not able to recognize the
Importing configuration created on current RAID array
%02d/%02d%2d:%02d. configuration.
Press any key to continue, or press C Action: Either import the
to load the configuration utility. configuration settings or
delete the foreign
configuration found on
the storage device.
6 Firmware package: %s None
7 Firmware version: %s None
8 This firmware is a TEST version. It has Cause: The controller is

not completed any validation. not able to recognize the
current RAID array
configuration.
Action: Update the
firmware to the correct
version.
9 This firmware is an ALPHA version – It Cause: The controller is

has not completed all validation. not able to recognize the
The validation stamp is: current RAID array
configuration.
%s"""
Action: Update the
version.
10 This firmware is BETA version – It has Cause: The controller is

not completed all validation. not able to recognize the
The validation stamp is: current RAID array
configuration.
%s"""
Action: Update the
version.

11 An enclosure was found that contains Cause: A single enclosure

both SAS and SATA drives, but that has both SAS and
this controller does not allow mixed SATA drives cannot be
drive types in a single enclosure. used because the
controller does not
Correct the problem then restart your support mixed drive types
system. in a single enclosure.
Press any key to continue, or press C Action:
● Use only one type of
drive, either SAS or
SATA drive.
● Replace the controller
with one that supports
mixed drive types in an
enclosure.
● Contact technical
support to enable this
feature.
12 SAS drives were detected, but this Cause: This controller

controller does not support SAS drives. does not support SAS
Remove the SAS drives then restart drives.
your system. Action: Replace the SAS
Press any key to continue, or press C drives with SATA drives
to load the configuration utility. and restart the system.
13 SATA drives were detected, but this Cause: This controller

controller does not support SATA does not support SATA
drives. drives.
Remove the SATA drives then restart Action: Replace the SATA
your system. drives with SAS drives
Press any key to continue, or press C and restart the system.
14 There are %d enclosures connected to Cause: This controller

connector %s, but only maximum of supports only a particular
%d enclosures can be connected to a number of enclosures.
single SAS connector. Action: Remove extra
Remove the extra enclosures then enclosures or insert a
restart your system. controller that supports
your enclosure
requirements.

15 Invalid SAS topology detected. Cause: The controller has

Check your cable configurations, repair detected an invalid SAS
the problem, and restart your system. topology.
Action: Check the cables
or reconfigure the
attached devices to create
a valid SAS topology.
16 The battery is currently discharged or Cause: The battery is

disconnected. Verify the connection currently discharged or
and allow 30 minutes for charging. disconnected.
If the battery is properly connected Action:
and it has not returned to operational ● Check the battery
state after 30 minutes of charging cable to ensure that it
then contact technical support for is connected properly.
additional assistance.
● Ensure that the battery
is charging properly.
support to replace the
battery if the battery is
draining out.
17 The battery hardware is missing or Cause: The battery

malfunctioning, or the battery is hardware is missing or
unconnected, or the battery could be malfunctioning, or the
fully discharged. battery is unconnected, or
If you continue to boot the system, the the battery could be fully
battery-backed cache will not function. discharged.
If battery is connected and has been Action:
allowed to charge for 30 minutes and ● Check the battery
this message continues to appear, cable to ensure that it
contact technical support for is connected properly.
assistance.
Press D to disable this warning (if your is charging properly.
controller does not have a battery)
draining out.

18 Invalid SAS Address present in MFC Cause: An invalid SAS

data. address is in the MFC
Program a valid SAS Address and data.
restart your system. Action:
1. Power off the system
and remove the
controller.
2. Contact technical
support to re-program
the SAS address.
19 Some configured disks have been Cause: The controller

removed from your system, or are no cannot find the
longer accessible. configured drives.
Check your cables and also make sure Action:
all disks are present. ● Check if the
Press any key to continue, or press C configured drives are
to load the configuration utility. present and are
properly connected.
● Access the BIOS and
check if the devices are
displayed.
● Ensure that the drives
are spun-up and have
power supplied to
them.
● If there is a backplane,
check the connector to
ensure that power is
being supplied to the
drives.

20 The following VDs have missing disks: Cause: The controller

%s. cannot find the
If you proceed (or load the configured drives.
configuration utility), these VDs will be Action:
marked OFFLINE and will be ● Check if the
inaccessible. configured drives are
Check your cables and make sure all present and are
disks are present. properly connected.
Press any key to continue, or press C ● Access the BIOS and
to load the configuration utility. check if the devices are
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
21 The following VDs are missing: %s. Cause: The controller

If you proceed (or load the cannot find the
configuration utility), these VDs will be configured drives.
removed from your configuration. Action:
If you wish to use them at a later ● Check if the
time, they will have to be imported. If configured drives are
you believe these VDs should be present and are
present, power off your system and properly connected.
check your cables to make sure all ● Access the BIOS and
disks are present. check if the devices are
Press any key to continue, or press C displayed.
to load the configuration utility. ● Ensure that the drives
power supplied to
them.
drives.

22 The following VDs are missing Cause: The controller

complete spans: %s. If you proceed (or cannot find the
load the configuration utility), these configured drives.
VDs will be removed from your Action:
configuration and the remaining drives
marked as foreign. ● Check if the
configured drives are
If you wish to use them at a later present and are
time, restore the missing span(s) and properly connected.
use a foreign import to recover the
VDs. ● Access the BIOS and
If you believe these VDs should be displayed.
present, please power off your system
and check your cables to make sure all ● Ensure that the drives
disks are present. are spun-up and have
power supplied to
Press any key to continue, or press C them.
drives.
23 All of the disks from your previous Cause: The controller

configuration are gone. If this is an cannot find the
unexpected message, power off your configured drives.
system and check your cables to make Action:
sure all disks are present.
● Check if the
Press any key to continue, or press C configured drives are
to load the configuration utility. present and are
properly connected.
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.

24 The cache contains dirty data, but Cause: The controller

some VDs are missing or will go cannot find the
offline, so the cached data can not be configured drives.
written to disk. If this is an unexpected Action:
error, power off your system and check
your cables to make sure all disks ● Check if the
configured drives are
are present. If you continue, the data present and are
in cache will be permanently properly connected.
discarded.
Press X to acknowledge and check if the devices are
permanently destroy the cached data. displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
25 Your VDs that are configured for Cause: Your VDs that are
Write-Back are configured for Write-Back
temporarily running in Write-Through are temporarily running
mode. This is caused by the battery in Write-Through mode.
being charged, missing, or bad. This is caused by the
battery being charged,
Allow the battery to charge for 24 missing, or bad.
hours before evaluating the battery for
replacement. The following VDs are Action:
affected: %s ● Check the battery
Press any key to continue. cable to ensure that it
is connected properly.
draining out.
26 Invalid memory configuration Cause: The memory

detected. configuration is invalid.
Contact your system support. System Action: Replace the RAID
has halted. controller card.

27 Cache data was lost due to an Cause: Cache data was

unexpected power-off or reboot during lost due to an unexpected
a write operation, but the adapter has power-off or reboot
recovered. This could be because of during a write operation,
memory problems, bad battery, or you but the adapter has
might not have a battery installed. recovered. This could be
Press any key to continue or C to load because of memory
the configuration utility. problems, bad battery, or
you might not have a
battery installed.
Action:
● Check the battery
cable to ensure that it
draining out.
28 Entering the configuration utility in Cause: The controller

this state will result in drive cannot find the
configuration changes. configured drives.
Press Y to continue loading the Action:
configuration utility or power off your ● Check if the
system and check your cables to make configured drives are
sure all disks are present and reboot present and are
the system. properly connected.
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
● If the controller is
being used to create
new configurations by
reusing the drives,
clear the existing data
and continue.

29 Multibit ECC errors were detected on Cause: Multibit ECC

the RAID controller. If you continue, errors were detected on
data corruption can occur. the RAID controller. If you
Contact technical support to resolve continue, data corruption
this issue. can occur.
Press X to continue, otherwise power Action:
off the system, replace the controller, 1. Replace a RAID card.
and reboot. 2. If the fault persists,
contact technical
support.
30 Single-bit ECC errors were detected on Cause: Single-bit ECC

the RAID controller. errors were detected on
Contact technical support to resolve the RAID controller.
this issue. Action:
Press X to continue or else power off 1. Replace a RAID card.
the system, replace the controller, and 2. Restart the system.
reboot.
3. If the fault persists,
contact technical
support.
31 Single-bit overflow ECC errors were Cause: Single-bit

detected on the RAID controller. If you overflow ECC errors were
continue, data corruption can occur. detected on the RAID
Contact technical support to resolve controller. If you continue,
this issue. data corruption can occur.
Press X to continue or else power off Action:
the system, replace the controller, and 1. Replace the RAID
reboot. controller card.
2. Restart the system.
3. If the fault persists,
contact technical
support.
32 Multibit ECC errors were detected on Cause: Multibit ECC

the RAID controller. The DIMM on the errors were detected on
controller needs replacement. the RAID controller.
Contact technical support to resolve Action:
this issue. If you continue, data 1. Replace a RAID card.
corruption can occur.
Press X to continue, otherwise power
off the system and replace the DIMM 3. If the fault persists,
module and reboot. If you have contact technical
replaced the DIMM press X to support.
continue.

33 Single-bit ECC errors were detected Cause: Single-bit ECC

during the previous boot of the RAID errors were detected
controller. The DIMM on the controller during the previous boot
needs replacement. of the RAID controller.
Contact technical support to resolve Action:
this issue.
1. Replace a RAID card.
Press X to continue, otherwise power
off the system and replace the DIMM
module and reboot. If you have 3. If the fault persists,
replaced the DIMM press X to contact technical
continue. support.
34 Single-bit overflow ECC errors were Cause: Single-bit

detected during the previous boot of overflow ECC errors were
the RAID controller. The DIMM on the detected during the
controller needs replacement. previous boot of the RAID
Contact technical support to resolve controller.
this issue. If you continue, data Action:
corruption can occur. 1. Replace the RAID
Press X to continue, otherwise power controller card.
off the system and replace the DIMM 2. Restart the system.
module and reboot. If you have
replaced the DIMM press X to 3. If the fault persists,
continue. contact technical
support.
35 The attached enclosure does not Cause: Too many chained

support in controller's Direct mapping enclosures may be
mode. present. This message
Contact your system support. may also be related to a
security feature in the
The system has halted because of an drive.
unsupported configuration.
Action:
● Remove the drives that
are not supported.
● Reduce the number of
drives.
● Replace the enclosure
with another one.
● Ensure that the
firmware version is
updated.
● If the fault persists,
contact technical
support.

36 Expander detected in controller with Cause: An expander is

direct mapping mode. detected on the controller
Reconfiguring automatically to in the direct mapping
persistent mapping mode. Automatic mode.
reboot would happen in 10 seconds. Action: No action is
required. The controller
will configure itself to a
persistent mapping mode
and reboot.
If the fault persists,
contact technical support.
37 Your controller's I/O processor has a Cause: Your controller's

fault I/O processor has a fault
that can potentially cause data that can potentially cause
corruption. Your controller needs data corruption.
replacement. Action: Contact technical
Contact your system support. support to replace the
controller.
To continue, press Y to acknowledge.
38 The number of disks exceeded the Cause: The number of

maximum supported count of %d drives exceeds the upper
disks. limit.
Remove the extra drives and reboot Action:
system to avoid losing data. ● Power off the system
Press Y to continue with extra drives. and remove the
controller.
● Remove the extra
drives to reduce the
size of the topology.
with a controller that
supports a larger
topology.

39 The number of devices exceeded the Cause: The number of

maximum limit of devices per drives exceeds the upper
quad. Remove the extra drives and limit.
reboot the system to avoid losing data. Action:
System has halted due to unsupported ● Power off the system
configuration. and remove the
controller.
● Remove the extra
drives to reduce the
size of the topology.
with a controller that
supports a larger
topology.
40 A discovery error has occurred, power Cause: A discovery error

cycle the system and all the enclosures has occurred, power cycle
attached to this system. the system and all the
enclosures attached to
this system.
Action:
● Shutdown and restart
the system as well as
all the enclosures
attached to the
system.
● Ensure that all cables
are correctly
connected. Reduce the
topology in case of a
bad drive.
collect the logs of the
system, driver, and
firmware and contact
technical support.
41 Drive security is enabled on this Cause: Drive security is

controller and a pass phrase is enabled on this controller
required. Enter the pass phrase. and a password is
required.
Action: Enter the
password.
42 Invalid pass phrase. Enter the pass Cause: The password is

phrase. invalid.
Action: Enter a valid
password.

43 There was a drive security key error. Cause: There was a drive
All secure drives will be marked as security key error. All
foreign. secure drives will be
Press any key to continue, or C to load marked as foreign.
the configuration utility. Action: Check if the
controller supports self-
encrypting drives.
44 Invalid pass phrase. If you continue, a Cause: The password is

drive security key error will occur and invalid.
all secure configurations will be Action: Restart the
marked as foreign. system to retry the
Reboot the machine to retry the pass password or press any key
phrase or press any key to continue. to continue.
45 Unable to communicate to EKMS. If Cause: Failed to

you continue, there will be a drive communicate with the
security key error and all secure EKMS.
configurations will be marked as Action: Check the
foreign. connection of the EKMS
Check the connection with the EKMS, and restart the system to
reboot the machine to retry the EKMS re-establish the
or press any key to continue. connection to the EKMS.
46 Unable to change security to EKMS as Cause: Failed to

not able to communicate to communicate with the
EKMS. If you continue, the drive EKMS and change the
security will remain to existing security security mode to EKMS
mode. Action: Check the
Check the connection with the EKMS, connection of the EKMS
reboot the machine to retry the EKMS and restart the system to
or press any key to continue. re-establish the
connection to the EKMS.
47 DKM existing key request failed; Cause: DKM existing key

existing secure configurations will be request failed. Existing
labeled foreign and will not be secure configurations will
accessible. be labeled foreign and
Reboot the server to retry. will not be accessible.
Action: Check the
connection of the EKMS
and restart the system to
re-establish the

48 DKM new key request failed; controller Cause: DKM new key
security mode transition was not request failed. Controller
successful. security mode transition
Reboot the server to retry request, or was not successful.
press any key to continue. Action: Check the
connection of the EKMS
and restart the system to
re-establish the
49 Firmware did not find valid NVDATA Cause: Firmware did not
image. find valid NVDATA image.
Program a valid NVDATA image and Action:
restart your system. ● Update the correct
Press any key to continue. firmware package that
has a proper NV data
image.
● Check the current
firmware version, and
if needed, update to
the latest firmware
version. Updating to
the latest firmware
version may require
importing foreign
volumes.
50 IR to MR Migration failed. Cause: IR to MR

Press any key to continue with MR migration failed. Press
defined NVDATA values any key to continue with
MR defined NVDATA
values.
Action: None
51 Two BBUs are connected to the Cause: Two BBUs are

adapter. This is not a supported connected to the adapter.
configuration. Battery and caching This is not a supported
operations are disabled. Remove one configuration. Battery
BBU and reboot to restore battery and and caching operations
caching operations. If dirty cache is are disabled.
lost in this boot, that could have been Action: Remove one BBU
because of dual battery presence. and reboot to restore
battery and caching
operations.
If dirty cache is lost in
this boot, that could have
been because of dual
battery presence.

52 Offline or missing virtual drives with Cause: The controller

preserved cache exist. cannot find the
Check the cables and make sure that configured drives.
all drives are present. Action:
Press any key to continue, or C to load ● Check if the
the configuration utility. configured drives are
present and are
properly connected.
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
● Cache offload occurs if
the missing drive is
restored.
53 Offline or missing virtual drives with Cause: The controller

preserved cache exist. cannot find the
Check the cables and make sure that configured drives.
all drives are present. Action:
Press any key to enter the ● Check if the
configuration utility. configured drives are
present and are
properly connected.
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
● Cache offload occurs if
the missing drive is
restored.

54 Invalid SAS Address present in SBR. Cause: An invalid SAS

Contact address is in the SBR.
your system support. Action: Contact technical
Press any key to continue with Default support to restore to
SAS Address. factory default values.
55 Incompatible secondary iButton Cause: Incompatible RAID

present! keys exist.
Insert the correct iButton and restart Action: Insert the correct
the system. RAID keys and restart the
Press any key to continue but OEM system. If the fault
specific features will not be upgraded! persists, contact technical
support engineers to
replace the RAID key.
56 Upgrade Key Missing! An upgrade key Cause: An upgrade key

was present on a previous power cycle, that was present on a
but it is not connected. previous power cycle may
This can result in inaccessible data not be connected.
unless it is addressed. Action: Reattach the
Re-attach the upgrade key and reboot. upgrade key and restart
the system. If the fault
persists, contact technical
upgrade key.
57 The native configuration is not Cause: The native

supported by the controller. configuration is not
Check the controller, iButton or key- supported by the
vault. If you continue the controller.
configuration will be marked foreign. Action: Insert the correct
Press any key to continue. RAID keys and restart the
system. If the fault
support engineers to
replace the RAID key.


disconnected. Verify the connection currently discharged or
and allow 30 minutes for charging. If disconnected.
the battery is properly connected and Action:
it has not returned to operational state
after 30 minutes of charging, contact ● Check the battery
technical support for additional cable to ensure that it
assistance. is connected properly.
Press D to disable this warning (if your ● Ensure that the battery
controller does not have a battery). is charging properly.
draining out.

disconnected. VDs configured in currently discharged or
Write-Back mode will run in Write- disconnected. VDs
Through mode to protect your data configured in Write-Back
and will return to the Write-Back mode will run in Write-
policy when the battery is operational. Through mode to protect
your data and will return
If VDs have not returned to Write-Back to the Write-Back policy
mode after 30 minutes of charging when the battery is
then contact technical support for operational.
additional assistance.
Action:
The following VDs are affected: %s.
● Check the battery
Press any key to continue. cable to ensure that it
draining out.

60 Cache data was lost, but the controller Cause: Cache data was
has recovered. This could be because lost, but the controller
your controller had protected cache has recovered. This could
after an unexpected power loss and be because your
your system was without power longer controller had protected
than the battery backup time. cache after an
Press any key to continue or C to load unexpected power loss
the configuration utility. and your system was
without power longer
than the battery backup
time.
Action:
● Check the memory
and battery.
● Check the voltage
levels and cache
offload timing in case
of power loss.
● If necessary, replace
the memory or battery.
61 A snapshot rollback is in progress on Cause: A snapshot

VDs %s, the controller cannot boot rollback is in progress on
until the rollback operation completes. VDs. The controller
Press any key to enter the cannot boot until the
configuration utility. rollback operation
completes.
Action: Wait for some
time until the rollback is
complete.
62 The following VDs: %s have Rollback Cause: This may be

active and the corresponding related to the snapshot
Repository is missing. If you continue feature, which is not
to boot the system or enter the supported on MegaRAID
configuration utility, these VDs will 12Gb/s SAS RAID
become unusable. controllers.
Press any key to Continue. Action: Wait for some
time until the rollback is
complete.

63 Snapshot Repository VDs %s have Cause: The controller

been removed from your system, or cannot find the
are no longer accessible. configured drives.
Check the cables and make sure all Action:
disks are present. If you continue to ● Check if the
boot the system, the snapshot related configured drives are
data will be lost. present and are
Press any key to continue, or C to load properly connected.
the configuration utility. ● Access the BIOS and
displayed.
power supplied to
them.
drives.
64 The most recent configuration Cause: The most recent

command could not be committed and configuration command
must be retried. could not be committed
Press any key to continue, or C to load and must be retried.
the configuration utility. Action: None
65 Firmware could not synchronize the Cause: Firmware could

configuration or property changes for not synchronize the
some of the VD's/PD's. configuration or property
Press any key to continue, or C to load changes for some of the
the configuration utility. VD's/PD's.
Action: Press any key to
continue or press C to
load the Configuration
Utility. If the fault
support.
66 On-board expander firmware or Cause: The expander has

manufacturing image is corrupted. The a software failure.
flash expander firmware and Action:
manufacturing image use the recovery
tools. Contact technical support.

67 The native configuration is not Cause: The native

supported by the current firmware. configuration is not
Make sure that the correct controller supported by the current
firmware is being used. If you firmware.
continue, the configuration will be Action:
marked as foreign. ● Collect the logs of the
Press any key to continue. system, driver, and
firmware.
● Ensure that the
firmware version is
correct and updated to
the latest version.
contact technical
support.
68 Foreign configuration import did not Cause: The foreign

import any drives. configuration import
Press any key to continue. function did not import
any drives.
Action:
● Check the firmware
version of the
controller.
and try again.
contact technical
support.
69 Valid memory detected. Firmware is Cause: The valid memory

upgraded from iMR to MR. is detected. The firmware
Reboot the system for the MR is upgraded from iMR to
firmware to run. MR.
Action: Reboot the
system for the MR
firmware to run.
70 Advanced software options keys were Cause: Advanced

detected, features activated – %s. software options keys
were detected and the
feature is being activated.
Action: None

71 Advanced software options keys were Cause: Advanced

missing, features deactivated – %s. software options keys
were missing and the
feature is being disabled.
Action:
● Check the cable
connection.
● Check for the
Advanced Software
Options key.
contact technical
support.
72 Cannot communicate with iButton to Cause: Failed to

retrieve premium features. This is communicate with RAID
probably because of extreme keys to retrieve premium
temperatures. features. This is probably
The system has halted! because of extreme
temperatures.
Action:
● Check the cable
connection.
● Ensure that the RAID
keys are present.
● Check the ambient
temperature near the
RAID keys.
contact technical
support.

73 Consecutive power loss detected Cause: Consecutive

during I/O transactions on non- power loss was detected
optimal write-back volumes. This during I/O transactions
might have resulted in data integrity on non-optimal write-
issues. back volumes. This might
Press 'X' to proceed. have resulted in data
integrity issues.
Action:
● Check if the controller
is securely locked in
the PCI slot.
● Check the power
supply, battery, and
supercapacitor.
● If you find any
hardware defect,
contact technical
support.
74 USB cache device is not responding. Cause: The USB cache

Power down the system for 2 minutes device is not responding.
to attempt recovery and avoid cache Action:
data loss, and then power-on. ● The LSI SAS2208
controller supports
USB cache offload.
Ensure that USB cache
is present and secure.
● Reseat and replace the
USB cache.
● Power off the system
for 2 minutes to
attempt recovery and
avoid cache data loss,
then power on the
system.
75 Bad or missing RAID controller Cause: The memory

memory module detected. module of the RAID
Press D to downgrade the RAID controller is damaged or
controller to iMR mode. lost.
Warning! Downgrading to iMR mode, Action: Replace the RAID
might result in incompatible Logical controller card.
drives.
Press any other key to continue,
controller shall boot to safe mode.

Huawei V2&amp;V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Huawei V2&amp;V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Huawei V2&amp;V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

About This Document

● Technical support engineers

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Supplements the important information in the main text.

Issue Date Description

49 2022-01-24 ● Modified section

48 2021-10-21 ● Added the

47 2021-08-28 Modified 4.7.5 RAID

46 2021-08-13 Added precautions for

45 2021-07-27 Optimized the "Common

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Issue Date Description

44 2021-07-01 Optimized the

43 2021-06-21 Modified 4.5.8

42 2021-05-31 Added the description

41 2021-04-06 Modified 8.2.17 Drive

40 2021-02-02 ● Added the description

39 2020-11-27 Added a new structure

38 2020-08-24 Added 7.3.2.1 Setting

37 2020-04-29 ● Modified 8.2.1 RAID

36 2019-10-30 Added 4.6.8 Creating

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Issue Date Description

35 2019-08-17 Modified description

34 2019-08-06 ● Modified 5.10.1

33 2019-05-21 Modified 8.4.1 Logging

32 2019-04-09 Modified 2 Technical

31 2019-03-20 Modified 4.2.1 RAID 0,

30 2019-01-31 Updated the document.

29 2019-01-10 Added 8.5.8 Managing

28 2018-12-30 Modified 4.4.6 Creating

27 2018-12-07 The description of the

26 2018-10-30 Optimized the method

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Issue Date Description

25 2018-08-28 Modified the "Drive

24 2018-08-21 Added the overview and

23 2018-07-20 Added the description of

22 2018-06-26 Added operations for

21 2018-05-23 Deleted the chapter

20 2018-04-20 ● Optimized the

19 2018-01-25 Added the meaning of

18 2018-01-10 Added MegaRAID

17 2017-12-22 Added RAID controller

16 2017-10-16 Optimized the document

15 2017-08-01 This issue is the fifteenth

Issue 49 (2022-01-24) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

Issue Date Description

14 2017-05-20 This issue is the

13 2016-10-27 This issue is the

Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49

Huawei V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card User Guide 49